Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2018-12-05 Final CD SpecDAKOTA PARTNERS Dakota Partners 1264 Main Street Waltham, Massachusetts 02451 PROJECT MANUAL Oxoboxo Lofts 42 Pink Row Uncasville, CT OWNER: Dakota Partners, Inc. 1264 Main Street Waltham, MA 02451 ARCHITECT: Paul B. Bailey Architect, LLC. 110 Audubon Street New Haven, CT 06510 Phone: (203) 776-8888 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Aztech Engineer, Inc. 901 Wethersfield Avenue Hartford, CT 06114 (860) 548-9987 CIVIL ENGINEER: BSC Group 300 Winding Brook Drive Glastonbury, CT 06033 Phone: (860) 652-8227 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Morrissey Engineering, LLC 58 Essex Street Deep River, CT. 06417 Phone: (860) 532-0312 July 13, 2018 Final Construction Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT MANUAL Title Page Project Manual/Specification Table of Contents List of Drawings Invitation to Bid A701 Instructions to Bidders Supplement to 701 Instructions to Bidders Form of Bid Supplemental Bidder Qualification Form for Historic Preservation Work Form of Non-Collusive Affidavit DOH Supplementary Conditions Notification to Bidders CHFA Exploded Trade Breakdown CHFA VLI Requirements Section 3 Clause Project Sign Affirmative Action Compliance A101 Owner Contractor Agreement A201 General Conditions A310 Bid Bond A312 Performance Bond A312 Payment Bond PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01210 Allowances 01230 Alternates TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 2 of 8 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01270 Unit Prices 01290 Payment Procedures 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01322 Photographic Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures 01351 Special Procedures for Historic Treatment 01400 Quality Requirements 01420 References 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01524 Construction Waste Management 01562 Temporary Dust Control 01570 Environmental Protection 01600 Product Requirements 01635 Substitution Procedures 01635A Substitution Form 01700 Execution Requirements 01731 Cutting and Patching 01770 Closeout Procedures 01781 Project Record Documents 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 01820 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION 02071 Geotextiles 02221 Site Demolition 02222 Utility Demolition and Abandonment 02225 Control of Existing Flows 02230 Clearing and Grubbing 02232 Rip Rap 02233 Sheeting and Staybracing 02240 Dewatering 02270 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 3 of 8 02300 Earthwork 02329 Exploratory Excavations 02510 Water Supply System 02530 Sanitary Sewers 02630 Storm Drainage System 02741 Bituminous Concrete Pavement 02742 Bituminous Concrete Sidewalk 02743 Curbing 02751 Site Cast-in-Place Concrete 02765 Pavement Markings 02780 Precast Concrete Unit Pavers 02810 Irrigation 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02823 Site Metal Railings 02826 Ornamental Fence 02827 Bollards 02870 Site Furnishings 02880 Traffic Signage 02881 Athletic Field Equipment 02920 Turf and Grasses 02930 Planting 02950 Preservation and Restoration of Site Features DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete 03541 Gypsum Underlayment DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04811 Unit Masonry Assemblies: CMU 04813 Brick Masonry TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 4 of 8 04920 Masonry Restoration and Cleaning DIVISION 5 METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05300 Metal Decking 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05521 Railings DIVISION 6 WOOD & PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06110 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06250 Special Procedures for Historic Wood Repair 06401 Exterior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07275 Weather Barriers 07311 Asphalt Shingles 07531 EPDM Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07631 Gutters and Downspouts 07841 Firestopping 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08411 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Finish Hardware TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 5 of 8 08800 Glazing 08954 Flood Vents DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09111 Non Load Bearing Steel Framing 09250 Gypsum Board 09265 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09310 Ceramic Tile 09653 Resilient Base and Accessories 09654 Resilient Flooring 09681 Carpet Tile 09911 Paint DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10350 Flag Poles 10431 Signage 10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10523 Fire Extinguishers 10550 Postal Specialties 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10810 Acrylic Tub/Shower Units DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11451 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12356 Residential Casework 12512 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS Not Used TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 6 of 8 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 Electric Traction Elevators DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500 Common Work Results For Fire Suppression 21 0523 General-Duty Valves For Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping 21 0548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Fire Suppression Piping And Equipment 21 0553 Identification For Fire Suppression Piping And Equipment 21 1200 Fire-Suppression Standpipes 21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinklers DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0513 Common Motor Requirements For Plumbing Equipment 22 0516 Expansion Fittings And Loops For Plumbing Piping 22 0519 Meters And Gages For Plumbing Piping 22 0548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 0553 Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 1005 Plumbing Piping 22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 22 3000 Plumbing Equipment 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements For HVAC Equipment 23 0548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For HVAC Piping And Equipment TABLE OF CONTENTS - Page 7 of 8 23 0553 Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 0713 Duct Insulation 23 0719 23 0923 23 0993 HVAC Piping Insulation Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 2113 Hydronic Piping 23 2114 Hydronic Specialties 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping 23 3100 HVAC Ducts And Casings 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories 23 3700 23 5700 Air Outlets And Inlets Heat Exchangers for HVAC 23 5216 Condensing Boilers 23 5700 Heat Exchangers For HVAC 23 6513 Forced-Draft Cooling Towers 23 7223 Packaged Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Units 23 8119 Water Source Heat Pumps 23 8127 Small Split-System Heating And Cooling 23 8216 Air Coils DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0519 26 0526 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0529 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 0534 Conduit PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE – 8 of 8 26 0537 Boxes 26 0553 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 2416 Panelboards 26 2717 Equipment Wiring 26 2726 Wiring Devices 26 5100 Interior Lighting DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 3100 Fire Detection And Alarm PROJECT MANUAL LIST OF DRAWINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE – 1 of 1 REFER TO SHEET LIST 01 AND 02 IN THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS FOR THE LIST OF DRAWINGS. OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 1 INVITATION TO BID For Oxoboxo Lofts Uncasville, CT Month Date, Year Dakota Partners, Inc. shall receive FIXED PRICE PROPOSALS in triplicate on or before Month Date, Year, 2:00 p.m. at the offices of Paul B. Bailey Architect LLC 110 Audubon St. New Haven, CT 06510 ATTN: Paul B. Bailey 1. Dakota Partners, Inc (DP) intends to award the Project to the Firm which has been determined as most advantageous to DP, as selected solely by DP. The “selected” firm shall execute the form of contract AIA A101 & AIA A201 which shall be revised to meet the project’s specific criteria, and acceptable to the Owner and Owner’s lenders criteria. DP reserves the right to reject any/or all of the selected Firms’ Proposals if the amount is not within the project budget. Incomplete proposals will be rejected. Should DP make a selection and the awarded responder fails to execute the Construction Contract within sixty days of the award, DP shall reserve the right to terminate negotiations and immediately move to the next responder, whose response has been determined to be the second most advantageous to DP, and it is in the best interest of DP to commence negotiations with this responder. Responders are reminded that this invitation is to submit a “Fixed Price Proposal” and where the term “Bid” is used in the Bid Documents, it does not imply or otherwise modify the Request for Proposals solicitation issued by DP on Month Date, Year. 2. Bid opening will not be public or open to Bidders. Bidders will be notified once the Proposals have been opened, evaluated and HSHB has determined which proposal is most advantageous to DP. Proposals received after Month Date, Year, 2:00 p.m. shall be rejected. Proposals must be prepared by utilizing the enclosed Bid Form. Within seven calendar days of bid award, the designated bidder must prepare a CHFA Exploded Trade Breakdown form with their accepted bid price. Oxoboxo Lofts Invitation to Bid Month Date, Year Page 2 OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 2 3. Fixed price proposals will be received for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment, permit fees, and all else that is necessary to construct and finish completely “Oxoboxo Lofts” at 42 Pink Row, Uncasville, CT, according to Contract Documents prepared by Paul B. Bailey Architect, LLC dated Month Day, Year. 4. The Contract will include all the site work and all other work necessary for or incidental to completion of the Project. 5. Each bidder shall be required to submit, with the bid, a bid guarantee not less than 5(%) percent of the amount of the bid. The bid guarantee may be a certified bank check payable to Dakota Partners, Inc., U.S. Government Bonds at par value, irrevocable letter of credit, or a Bid Bond secured by a U.S. based Surety Company. If the bid guarantee is not submitted with the bid, the bid will be rejected at the time of the bid opening. 6. Bidders shall have a valid Connecticut General Contractor's License. Bidders shall have been in business a minimum of 5 years under the same name, and shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in this type of work. 7. The successful bidder will be required to furnish 100% Performance and Payment Bond or Bonds, in the forms included in the Specifications, as well as a certified statement of financial condition, as of a date not exceeding ninety (90) days prior to the date thereof. 8. Bidding Documents dated Month Day, Year will be posted to the Architect’s Egnyte site: • Each bidder will be given a User Name and Password for their use only. • The bidder will be fully responsible for the access to that site. 9. Additional sets may be purchased by General Contractors directly from the printer, Cop-eze, 355 Research Parkway, First Floor, Meriden, CT 06450, (203) 630-2671. Contractors shall contact the printer directly to arrange pickup of Plans and Specifications. 10. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. All Bid Documents must be completely filled in when submitted. The Owner reserves the right to award the Contract to the bidder found to be most advantageous to the Owner. The Contract will be awarded at the Owner’s sole discretion, and approved by project lenders in accordance with the RFP issued on Month Date, Year. 11. The required DECD forms and procedures are included in the Bid Documents. Bidders must include a completed “Notification to Bidders” form with their bid. Oxoboxo Lofts Invitation to Bid Month Date, Year Page 3 OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 3 12. Federal Prevailing Wages (Davis Bacon) are NOT part of the Bid Documents. 13. No bid shall be withdrawn for a period of one hundred and twenty (120) days subsequent to the opening of bids or until the next work day immediately following said period, if such period ends on a weekend or a State holiday, without the consent of the Owner, Dakota Partners, Inc. 14. Bidders are responsible for constructing the project precisely as defined in the Contract Documents. Bids shall be submitted per “Plans & Specs” without qualifications or substitutions, whether submitted with bids or at any time prior to or after contract signing. The Construction Contract is included in the Specifications. It will be modified or altered as required by the project lenders and the Owner. 16. Bidders may submit questions (in writing only) by email to the Architect at office@pbbarchitect.com until Month Date, Year. Answers and clarifications will be in the form of Addenda uploaded to the project ftp site for access by all invited General Contractors, no later than Month Date, Year @ 5:00 p.m. An acknowledgement form will be uploaded with the Addenda, which the Bidder is required to submit with their bid. 17. A pre-bid conference will be held at the site on Month Date, Year @ 1:00 pm. Bidders are encouraged to attend to examine existing conditions and will be held responsible for understanding the scope of work and all conditions affecting the work. All visitors to the site must be working with a specific Bidder and have proper identification. 18. The General Contractor who is selected to perform this State funded project must file and receive an approved affirmative action plan by the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities prior to the commencement of construction. This project is therefore subject to the State set-aside goals of 25% SBE and 6.25% MBE on the entire State contract amount. The General Contractor selected to perform this State funded project is therefore encouraged to solicit bids from Subcontractors and/or Vendors who are currently certified Minority owned businesses, Disabled owned businesses, Women owned businesses and small businesses under the Department of Administration Services’ Supplier Diversity Program. 19. Bidders must perform as a “General Contractor” and perform a minimum of 15% of the value of the construction work with its own employees. 20. Bids are to be submitted WITHOUT QUALIFICATIONS OR SUBSTITUTIONS. END OF INVITATION TO BID SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE – 1 of 1 SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Article 3 Substitutions Paragraph 3.3.2: Delete first sentence. Substitute the following: “Product Substitutions will only be considered when submitted by the deadline for questions, unless specified Products become unavailable after the Contract is signed.” Article 4 Bidding Procedures Paragraph 4.1.2: The following is added after the first sentence: “All spaces must be filled in with figures or words or the bid may not be considered.” Paragraph 4.1.8: The following is added after Paragraph 4.1.7: “4.1.8. Bidders shall be required to sign the non-collusive statement.” Paragraph 4.2.4: The following is added after Paragraph 4.2.3: “4.2.4. Bid bonds, if required, must be from companies listed on the most recent IRS Circular 570.” Article 7 Performance and Payment Bond Paragraph 7.1.1. Delete last sentence. Substitute the following sentence: “Bonds must be from Companies listed on the most recent IRS Circular 570.” Paragraph 7.1.3. Delete this paragraph. Paragraph 7.2.1. Delete first sentence. Substitute the following: • “The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner on the date and time of the execution of the execution of the Contract.” Paragraph 7.2.3. Delete the words “or after.” END OF SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS FORM OF BID OXOBOXO LOFTS FORM OF BID PAGE - 1 FORM OF BID BID FOR Oxoboxo Lofts 42 Pink Row, Uncasville, CT To: Dakota Partners, Inc. 1264 Main Street Waltham, MA 02451 1. I, the undersigned, having familiarized myself with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work, and with the specifications (including Invitation for Bid, Instructions to Bidders, this Form of Bid, the Form of Performance and Payment Bond or Bonds, the AIA Construction Contract as modified, the AIA General Conditions as modified, Supplemental General Conditions, the Technical Specifications and Drawings), and Addenda, if any thereto, as prepared by the Paul B. Bailey Architect, LLC and on file in the office of Paul B. Bailey Architect, LLC, 110 Audubon St. New Haven, CT 10510, (203) 776-8888, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, permit fees, and whatever else is necessary to complete the CONSTRUCTION OF OXOBOXO LOFTS for the total sum of: BASE BID: ________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________Dollars. ($_________________________________________________) This Amount shall be identified as the Base Bid. This contract price is divided as follows: $______________________________________________________________________ Labor. $______________________________________________________________________ Materials. FORM OF BID OXOBOXO LOFTS FORM OF BID PAGE - 2 2. ALLOWANCES (Included in Base Bid, Per Section 01210): a. Utility Fee Allowance: Include the sum of $80,000.00 NOTE: This Allowance is the cost of utility service connection and disconnection fees only. All work required and associated with the installation of utilities, including but not limited to trenching, site work, piping, connections, all labor and all materials, is included in the bidders bid but is not included in this allowance. b. Security Cameras & Equipment: Include the sum of $ 75,000.00. c. Removal of hazardous materials: Include the sum of $ 60,000.00. d. Signage: Include the sum of $ 20,000.00. 3. ALTERNATES (Per Section 01230): ADD ALTERNATE #1: In lieu of Landscape Area provide Basketball Court and Retaining Wall. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #1. ADD ALTERNATE #2: In lieu of Sewer Ejector Pit and Force Main provide Gravity Sanitary Sewer Crossing Pink Row to the Town Main. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #2. ADD ALTERNATE #3: In lieu of permit Level Landscape provide Enhanced Landscape. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #3. ADD ALTERNATE #4: Provide Landscape Irrigation system. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #4. ADD ALTERNATE #5: Convert egress doors to card reader package. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #5. ADD ALTERNATE #6: Provide additional security cameras. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #6. ADD ALTERNATE #7: Provide card reader package at apartment unit doors.. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #7. ADD ALTERNATE #8: Provide LVT in Unit Living Rooms, Bedrooms & Kitchens. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #8. FORM OF BID OXOBOXO LOFTS FORM OF BID PAGE - 3 ADD ALTERNATE #9: Provide tile in Unit Bathrooms. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #9. ADD ALTERNATE #10: Provide wood baseboard in Units. $________________________________. This Amount shall be identified as ADD Alternate #10. 4. UNIT PRICES (Per Section 01270): 1. UNIT PRICE #1: Removal of unsuitable soils $_____________________________________ per cubic yard. This Amount shall be identified as Unit Price #1. 2. UNIT PRICE #2: Replace Damaged Stone Sills at Window Openings $_____________________________________ @each. This Amount shall be identified as Unit Price #2. 3. UNIT PRICE #3: Replace Damaged Brick $_____________________________________ /s.f.. This Amount shall be identified as Unit Price #3. 4. UNIT PRICE #4: Replace Damaged Floor Joists $_____________________________________ @each. This Amount shall be identified as Unit Price #4. 5. Bid amount shall be the final sum to the Owner that includes all applicable taxes, permit fees, overhead and profit to the Contractor. 6. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by The Owner to reject any and all bids, and to waive any informalities in the bids. The Owner reserves the right to award the Contract to the lowest bidder or the bidder with the lowest combination of Base Bid and Alternates selected in any order, at the sole discretion of the Owner. The Contract will be awarded at the Owner’s sole discretion. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed or delivered to the undersigned within 120 days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before the bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver a contract in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond within ten (10) days after the contract is presented to them for signature, and within 60 days of being awarded. 7. I confirm that this bid represents the construction of the project precisely as defined in the Contract Documents, per “Plans & Specs” without any qualifications or substitutions, whether submitted with this bid or at any time prior to or after contract signing. FORM OF BID OXOBOXO LOFTS FORM OF BID PAGE - 4 8. I will hold my bid for one hundred and twenty (120) days after bid opening. Bid Guarantee must be provided. 9. Each bid must contain the following items, completed in total. Failure to submit any one of the items will result in rejection of the bid: a. Form of Bid (all pages) signature required. b. Form of Non-Collusive Affidavit c. DECD Notification to Bidders Form. d. Properly Executed Bid Bond or other prescribed Bid Guarantee 10. Addendum Receipt: The receipt of the Addendum (if issued) to drawings and specifications is hereby acknowledged. Addendum No. Dated ________________ Addendum No. Dated ________________ Addendum No. Dated ________________ OFFICIAL BIDDER: DATE: 2016 Print Name Company Name Signature Required Address Title Phone Email Fax Certification of Corporation I, , certify that I am the of the Corporation named as Bidder herein; that said Bid was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers. ______________________________________ __________________________ FORM OF BID OXOBOXO LOFTS FORM OF BID PAGE - 5 Certification Signature Corporate Seal END OF FORM OF BID SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 1 of 6 PROJECT: Oxoboxo Lofts PROJECT LOCATION: Uncasville, CT OWNER: Dakota Partners, Inc. Each Bidder must demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Owner, that the bidders, subcontractors and the personnel to be employed in the execution of the work possess requisite experience in comparable work on other buildings listed on the State Register of Historic Places or on the National Register of Historic Places and executed in accordance with the “Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Rehabilitation of and Guidelines for Rehabilitating Historic Buildings.” The submission of this signed and notarized form is a requirement of the Bid Documents. All items must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. Failure to answer these questions in a complete manner may result in rejection of the bid. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bidder who, in the judgment of the Owner and based on a review of the Qualifications Form, is not qualified to perform the work of the Contract as specified. The Owner’s decisions regarding rejection of the bids based on Bidder’s qualifications shall be final. A. Has your firm or any part of your firm, affiliate, subsidiary, parent, or predecessor, any owner, partial owner or principal of your firm, or any officer of your firm ever been a debtor in any bankruptcy proceedings? Chapter 11 Yes ______ No ______ Chapter 7 Yes ______ No ______ B. Provide the court location, caption and docket number of any such bankruptcy proceedings as well as a statement explaining the circumstances resulting in the filing. Please note that the institution of bankruptcy proceedings, in and of itself, shall not be considered as grounds for rejection of any bid on the basis of non-responsibility. C. A.M. Best’s most current rating of bonding company . D. Has any surety which issued a performance bond, wherein your firm was the named principal, ever completed the work in its own name or financed such completion on your behalf? Yes _____ No _____ Yes _____ No _____ E. Provide a statement detailing any financial interest which any officer, principal, or key employees of your firm have in any other contractor or construction related business. SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 2 of 6 F. Attach a sample copy of your Connecticut Worker’s Compensation Insurance Certificate. Also, state your Worker’s Compensation Loss Ratio . G. List five projects, which give evidence of satisfactory completion of renovation, restoration and/or additions to buildings of a historic nature, listed on the National Register of Historic Places, or as contributing resources in a state or nationally registered historic district in Connecticut. H. Indicate your experience completing projects which were governed by the Secretary of the Interior’s “Standards for Rehabilitation and Guidelines for Rehabilitating Historic Buildings,” and have been funded fully or partially by Federal, State, or Local Grants-in- Aid. I. List projects that you have completed which are owned or administered by the State of Connecticut Historic Preservation Division, or other national or state recognized historical organizations or societies, which require adherence to the standards cited in Paragraph H above. SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 3 of 6 J. List as references staff members of the State Historic Preservation Officer, and officers of other national historical organizations for which you have completed projects of a nature, size, and complexity similar to this project. K. Lack of experience and expertise described above or less than satisfactory recommendations from knowledgeable past clients, for the quality of work required will disqualify general contractors and subcontractors. L. In conjunction with his subcontractors, contractor shall fill out and submit with his bid the following Bidder Qualification forms for Historic Preservation Work for all subcontractors which the Bidder shall employ for this work. In the case where the Contractor will employ his own forces to do this work, the Bidder shall so note and modify the forms accordingly. M. Bidder Qualification Form for [TRADE ] Restoration: 1. Name of subcontracting firm to be employed for this Work: 2. How many years has this organization been in business under its present name? 3. How many years under previous business names (if any)? 4. Has this firm every failed to complete any work awarded? If so, where and why? 5. Give bank references: SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 4 of 6 6. List at least three (3) projects involving comparable historic work of a similar size, scope and nature to Work of this Contract that this firm has executed in the past ten (10) years on buildings listed on the State Register of Historic Places or on the National Register of Historic Places. Provide a brief description of each of the listed projects, clearly depicting the scope of the work of the project. a) Project Name & Address Year Amount of Contract $ General Contractor (Tel.#) Owner (Tel.#) Architect (Tel.#) b) Project Name & Address Year Amount of Contract $ General Contractor (Tel.#) Owner (Tel.#) Architect (Tel.#) c) Project Name & Address Year Amount of Contract $ General Contractor (Tel.#) Owner (Tel.#) Architect (Tel.#) SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 5 of 6 7. Provide the names of proposed supervisors and foremen to be employed on this job. Indicate on which job, of the ones listed above, they have worked. On separate sheet, describe their specific qualifications and past experience in supervising, directing and executing work comparable to that required in this project. Name Number of years Jobs on which they have worked Associated with firm (selected from above) a) b) c) 8. Provide the names of skilled journeymen personnel to be employed on this job for historic window replacement work. Indicate on which job, of the ones listed above, they have worked. On separate sheet qualifications and past experience in performing historic window replacement work comparable to that required in this work. Name Number of years Jobs on which they have worked Associated with firm (selected from above) a) b) c) N. Have you every defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? O. Will you, upon request by the Owner, furnish any information that may be required by the Owner? SUPPLEMENTAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM FOR HISTORIC PRESERVATION WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS PAGE 6 of 6 P. The undersigned hereby authorizes and request any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the Owner, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications. Dated_____________________this_____________________2016 Month Day Name of Organization:_________________________________________ By:________________________________________________________ Signature ___________________________________________________________ Please print Name and Title State of ___________________________ County of__________________________ _____________________________ being duly sworn deposes and says that he is the Name of person signing _____________________________of_____________________________________ Title of person signing Name or Organization And that the answers to the forgoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this_____________________day__________________________2016 Notary Public My commission expires____________________________ FORM OF NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT State of ___________________________________ County of _________________________________ The Bidder,_________________________________________, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He/She is the owner/partner, officer, representative or agent of ________________________________, the party making the foregoing proposal or bid; 2. He/She is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached proposal or bid and all circumstances regarding the same; 3. Said proposal or bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal or bid; 4. Neither the said bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties-in-interest, including this affiant has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham bid or proposal in connection with the Contract for which the attached proposal or bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with said Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached proposal or bid or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price of this or any other bidder or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the Owner, or any person interested in the proposed Contract; 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached proposal or bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of this Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties-in-interest, including this affiant; and 6. All statements in said proposal or bid are true. ____________________________________ (Signature) ____________________________________ (Title) Subscribed and sworn to before me This _______ day of __________, 2016 ____________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires __________________________________ SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01100 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01100 – SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Oxoboxo Lofts 1. Project Location: 42 Pink Row, Uncasville, CT. B. Owner: Dakota Partners, Inc; 1264 Main Street; Waltham, MA 02451 1. Representative: Evan C. Fink AIA; Development Project Manager C. Architect: Paul B. Bailey, Architect, LLC 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work consists of the following: Renovation of 12 existing historic buildings for (73) residential units with office and community spaces, and related site work. The buildings are masonry exterior walls with wood SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01100 PAGE 2 of 3 or steel structure. Existing brick and stone exterior walls will be restored. New asphalt shingle and epdm roofs, clad windows and doors, interior finishes and MEP systems will be constructed throughout. B. TYPE OF CONTRACT 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. C. Contractor shall keep the construction site secure at all times. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated. C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on the Project site is not permitted. E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on the Project site. Require personnel to utilize identification tags at all times. F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements regarding drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on the Project site. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01100 PAGE 3 of 3 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products. 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes 3. Referencing. Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 1.8 PROJECT SIGN A. Provide and install Project Sign per Architect’s sample. END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES SECTION 01210 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Type of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when fees described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit receipts from utility companies to show actual cost for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost of fees as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES SECTION 01210 PAGE 2 of 3 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. 1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific allowance. B. The Contractor shall not add overhead, profit and related costs for products, equipment and services to be provided within an Allowance. C. Use the allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance. 1. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 2.2 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Utility Fee Allowance: Include the sum of $80,000.00 for direct charges by utility companies related to utility connections. Utility Fee includes the cost of utility service connection and disconnection for Water, Electric, Tele/Communications and Sewer. All work required and associated with the installation of utilities, including but not limited to trenching, site work, piping, connections and all labor and all materials is to be included in the Bidder’s base bid and is not included in this Allowance. SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES SECTION 01210 PAGE 3 of 3 B. Security Cameras & Equipment: Include the sum of $ 75,000.00 for the cost of materials and installation for security cameras and related equipment (hardware & software) from a vendor to be selected by the Owner. All work related to these security cameras and related equipment which is shown on the Contract Documents is included in the Bidder’s base bid and is not included in this Allowance. C. Removal of hazardous materials: Include the sum of $ 60,000.00 for the cost of properly removing and disposing of any hazardous materials discovered during the demolition of the existing buildings. All demolition of the existing buildings assumed to be non-hazardous (until found otherwise) and is to be included in the Bidder’s base bid and is not included in this Allowance. D. Signage: Include the sum of $ 20,000.00 for the cost of project signage. END OF SECTION 01210 SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES SECTION 01230 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. Contract Award to be made based on inclusion or exclusion of any alternate(s) or any combination of alternates at the Owner’s sole discretion. SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES SECTION 01230 PAGE 2 of 3 PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. ADD ALTERNATE #1: 1. In lieu of Landscape Area provide Basketball Court and Retaining Wall. (Identified as Alt. #1 on Landscape/Civil Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. B. ADD ALTERNATE #2: 1. In lieu of Sewer Ejector Pit and Force Main provide Gravity Sanitary Sewer Crossing Pink Row to the Town Main. (Identified as Alt. #2 on Landscape/Civil Drawings.) Provide cost (Add) to Base Bid. C. ADD ALTERNATE #3: 1. In lieu of permit Level Landscape provide Enhanced Landscape. (Identified as Alt. #3 on Landscape/Civil Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. D. ADD ALTERNATE #4: 1. Provide Landscape Irrigation system. (Identified as Alt. #4 on Landscape/Civil Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. E. ADD ALTERNATE #5: 1. Convert egress doors to card reader package. (Identified as Alt. #1 on Security Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. F. ADD ALTERNATE #6: 1. Provide additional security cameras. (Identified as Alt. #2 on Security Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. G. ADD ALTERNATE #7: 1. Provide card reader package at apartment unit doors. (Identified as Alt. #3 on Security Drawings.) Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES SECTION 01230 PAGE 3 of 3 H. ADD ALTERNATE #8: 1. Provide LVT in Unit Living Rooms, Bedrooms and Kitchens. Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. J. ADD ALTERNATE #9: 1. Provide tile in Unit Bathrooms. Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. K. ADD ALTERNATE #10: 1. Provide wood baseboard in Units. Provide cost (ADD) to Base Bid. END OF SECTION 01230 SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01250 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect, with prior approval of the Owner, will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions.” 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data and other receipts to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01250 PAGE 2 of 3 c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Extension of contract time will only be granted in accordance with the Construction Contract. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Extensions in Contract Time shall be granted in strict accordance with the Construction Contract. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests & CHFA Request for Construction Change form #2437. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 and CHFA Form #2437. B. Charges for additional bond amounts are not allowed within individual Change Orders. If the Bonding Company requires additional payment for the bond, the Bonding Company will present an invoice at the end of the Project and a change order for that amount will be processed. CHFA requires the Performance and Payment Bond to pre-fund the Construction Contingency amount at the time the initial Bond is posted in addition to the base contract amount. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: When Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal, the Architect may, with prior approval of the Owner, prepare and issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01250 PAGE 3 of 3 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time where allowed by the Construction Contract. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost adjustments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES 1. Unit Price No. 1 – Replace Damaged ¾” Roof Sheathing: a. Description: Replace damaged ¾” roof sheathing according to Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." b. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot. 2. Unit Price No. 2 – Replace Damaged Stone Sills at Window Openings: a. Description: Replace damaged stone sills at window openings according to Division 04 Section "Cast Stone." b. Unit of Measurement: linear foot. 3. Unit Price No. 3 – Replace Damaged Brick: a. Description: Replace damaged brick according to Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." b. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot, Single Wythe. END OF SECTION 01270 SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01290 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. CHFA form 2448-MR 10 & AIA Document 702 & 703. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. This Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Architect or Owner shall be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor’s Requests for Payment. 2. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01290 PAGE 2 of 5 3. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect and Owner, for review and approval, immediately after notification of intent to award the Contract and before the actual Contract signing. 4. Sub-schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Break out major items within each of the major divisions. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports and to satisfy the Architect and Owner. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Applications for Payment will only include materials or equipment properly installed per Contract Documents and Manufacturer’s standards, not in question as to quantity or quality at the time, and meeting approved submittal. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item, per CHFA Design and Construction Standards. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place to be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values. SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01290 PAGE 3 of 5 8. Schedule Updating: The signed Schedule of Values does not change. When submitting an Application for Payment, include the Schedule of Values showing what has been paid, what is being invoiced. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be for Work properly installed per Contract Documents and Manufacturer’s standards, not in question as to quantity or quality at the time, meeting approved submittal, and shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Progress payment requests shall be submitted to Architect by the 25th day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. The first submission is a “pencil copy” for the Architect and Owner’s review. Upon approval and acceptance by the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall then submit a final Application for Payment for signatures. C. The Owner shall make each progress payment following CHFA rules and time schedules, usually within 30 days after receipt of the Request for Payment from the Contractor but contingent upon payment via CHFA, which is complete and meets the Owner’s requirements and which has been certified for payment by the Architect. D. Payment Application Forms: Use CHFA Form 2448 MR10 and AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the approved Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Construction contract end date can not change in the updated schedule unless previously approved by written and signed Change Order and/or as otherwise provided in the Construction Contract a. Include approved Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule with each application for payment. 2. Include amounts of approved Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Unless otherwise determined at the initial job meeting, submit minimum 5 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments from subcontractors and suppliers. SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01290 PAGE 4 of 5 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work, including but not limited to, subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Owner approved original or Owner approved revised version. 4. Submittals Schedule. 5. Copies of building permits. 6. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 7. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 8. Performance and payment bonds. 9. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01290 PAGE 5 of 5 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that any claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. K. The Owner shall make final payment following CHFA rules and time schedule, usually within 30 days after receipt of the final Request for Payment from the Contractor, which is complete and meets the Owner’s requirements and which has been certified for payment by the Architect. END OF SECTION 01290 SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 2.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 2 of 7 2.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. General: Owner’s Representative is to be copied on all GC Submittals, RFI’s, ASI’s, SK’s when same is sent to Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 2.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, for missing, ambiguous or contradictory information only, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 3 of 7 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. No additional Contract Time is allowed. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Contractor shall prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at each job meeting. Hard copy or software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 4 of 7 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Sub-contractors are not to attend project meetings unless pre- approved by Owner and Architect. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 5 of 7 k. Use of the premises. l. Work restrictions. m. Working hours. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Procedures for moisture and mold control. q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. r. Construction waste management and recycling. s. Parking availability. t. Office, work, and storage areas. u. Equipment deliveries and priorities. v. First aid. w. Security. x. Progress cleaning. y. Emergency Contacts. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 6 of 7 w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Attendees: Representatives of the Contractor, Owner and Architect, shall be represented at these meetings. If the Contractor determines that a sub-contractor should be in attendance at these meetings, the Contractor shall request that attendance from the Architect 2 days prior to the meeting. Architect shall decide if the requested attendance is needed. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01310 PAGE 7 of 7 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Construction schedule is to be revised to show progress based solely upon the Owner approved contract. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01320 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Special reports. 7. As Built Drawings B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01320 PAGE 2 of 5 B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Owner and Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. I. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. All submittals are to be received by the Architect within 90 days of the “Notice to Proceed” date. B. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for submittals. 2. End date of last submittal; No later than 90 days after “Notice to Proceed”. 3. Specification Section number and title. 4. Submittal category (action or informational). 5. Name of subcontractor. 6. Description of the Work covered. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies within 10 days of contract award. 1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01320 PAGE 3 of 5 D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. Reissue schedule at each application for payment highlighting alterations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in scheduling and reporting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, completed within 90 days of “Notice to Proceed”, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the “Notice to Proceed” to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01320 PAGE 4 of 5 or integrated with other construction activities, and for Owner to relocate facilities that are remaining operational within the building during construction, if any, to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation and testing. d. Completion of electrical installation and testing. e. Substantial Completion. 3. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, End of Phases, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 4. Activities: The submitted Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall itemize all of the individual activities required to complete the total Project. There shall be a minimum of 200 activities listed, and as many as required for a complete Project. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site. Daily Reports may be reviewed at job meetings and available upon request by Architect or Owner: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction/Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01320 PAGE 5 of 5 C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update and distribute schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule with the monthly payment requisition. B. Record field changes as the work progresses. Do not wait until the end of the Project. Provide two sets of clean and readable hard copy as-built drawings as part of the close out package. END OF SECTION 01320 SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01322 PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. B. Construction Photographs: Submit one print of each photographic view with each request for payment. 1. Format: Up to 6 images per 8.5”x11” sheet of paper. 2. Identification: For each image, provide the following information: a. Name of Photographer. SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01322 PAGE 2 of 2 b. Date photograph was taken. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag excavation areas and construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take minimum of 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum of 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take minimum of 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. F. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. END OF SECTION 01322 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section ‘Substitution Requirements” for submitting substitution requests including substitution form. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 2.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 2.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: At pre-construction meeting, submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 2 of 10 additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 2.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Retain subparagraph below if one submittal has an impact on another submittal. Submittals that require concurrent review should be so indicated in those Sections. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 3 of 10 i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. E. Optional Electronic Submittals are only acceptable, when process is reviewed, agreed to and accepted by Architect and Owner. Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 4 of 10 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-06100.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations: Identify all deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Indicate affect of deviations on the project, including other work, details, time and cost. Architect is not responsible for any deviations for the Contract Documents not identified on the submittals. SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 5 of 10 Architect’s approval of submittals without deviations identified does not constitute approval of deviations. H. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 6 of 10 c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 7 of 10 d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 8 of 10 I. Substitutions: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures.” J. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." K. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." L. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. V. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 9 of 10 W. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Y. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Z. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Note any changes from Construction Documents. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01330 PAGE 10 of 10 D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 01351 - SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and treatment procedures for entire Project and the following specific work: 1. Historic removal and dismantling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place. B. Dismantle: To disassemble and detach items by hand from existing construction to the limits indicated, using small hand tools and small one-hand power tools, so as to protect nearby historic surfaces; and legally dispose of dismantled items off-site, unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. C. Existing to Remain: Existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled. D. Historic: Spaces, areas, rooms, surfaces, materials, finishes, and overall appearance which are important to the successful preservation, restoration and reconstruction as determined by Architect. E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect. F. Reconstruct: To remove existing item, replicate damaged or missing components, and reinstall in original position. G. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated. H. Reinstall: To protect removed or dismantled item, repair and clean it as indicated for reuse, and reinstall it in original position, or where indicated. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 2 of 9 I. Remove: Specifically for historic spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces, the term means to detach an item from existing construction to the limits indicated, using hand tools and hand-operated power equipment, and legally dispose of it off-site, unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. J. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes while employing as little new material as possible. Includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. K. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated. L. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated. M. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and in either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated. N. Restore: To consolidate, replicate, reproduce, repair, and refinish as required to achieve the indicated results. O. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled. P. Reversible: New construction work, treatments, or processes that can be removed or undone in the future without damaging historic materials unless otherwise indicated. Q. Salvage: To protect removed or dismantled items and deliver them to Owner[ ready for reuse]. R. Stabilize: To provide structural reinforcement of unsafe or deteriorated items while maintaining the essential form as it exists at present; also, to reestablish a weather-resistant enclosure. S. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Construction Schedule for Historic Treatments: Indicate for entire Project the following for each activity to be performed in historic spaces, areas, and rooms, and on historic surfaces: 1. Detailed sequence of historic treatment work, with starting and ending dates, coordinated with Owner's continuing operations and other known work in progress. 2. Utility Services: Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Use of elevator and stairs. B. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by Contractor's historic treatment operations. C. Historic Treatment Program: Submit before work begins. D. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit before work begins. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 3 of 9 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: An experienced firm regularly engaged in historic treatments similar in nature, materials, design, and extent to this work as specified in each section, and that has completed a minimum of 5 recent projects with a record of successful in- service performance that demonstrate the firm's qualifications to perform this work. 1. Field Supervisor Qualifications: Full-time supervisors experienced in historic treatment work similar in nature, material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supervisors shall be on Project site during times that historic treatment work is in progress. 2. Worker Qualification: Persons who are experienced in historic treatment work of types they will be performing. B. Industrial Hygienist Qualifications: Certified as Industrial Hygienist by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene; having Bachelor's degree in industrial hygiene, public health, biological science, occupational health, or environmental and safety discipline; and experienced in work of types specified. C. Historic Treatment Program: Prepare a written plan for historic treatment for whole Project, including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment to be used for each phase of work. Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other Sections. 1. Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and noise-control partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated with continuing on-site operations and other known work in progress. 2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning radii, and locations and details of temporary protective barriers. D. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-prevention devices during each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and requirements. Include each fire watch's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire safety. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with notification regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before beginning removal and dismantling work. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6. G. Historic Treatment Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS A. Salvaged Historic Materials: 1. Clean only loose debris from salvaged historic items unless more extensive cleaning is indicated. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 4 of 9 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. B. Historic Materials for Reinstallation: 1. Repair and clean historic items as indicated and to functional condition for reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make item functional for use indicated. C. Existing Historic Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after historic treatment and construction work in the vicinity is complete. D. Storage and Protection: When taken from their existing locations, catalog and store historic items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow, condensation, or ground water, and from freezing temperatures. 1. Identify each item with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate original locations on plans elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the identifying marks. 2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to removal and dismantling area. Conduct removal and dismantling work so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. C. Storage or sale of removed or dismantled items on-site is not permitted unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 5 of 9 PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Preparation for Removal and Dismantling: Examine construction to be removed or dismantled to determine best methods to safely and effectively perform removal and dismantling work. Examine adjacent work to determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make explorations, probes, and inquiries as necessary to determine condition of construction to be removed or dismantled and location of utilities and services to remain that may be hidden by construction that is to be removed or dismantled. 1. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped. 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and dismantled for reinstallation or salvage. 3. Before removal or dismantling of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. B. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from historic treatment procedures. 2.2 PROTECTION, GENERAL A. Comply with temporary barrier requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when historic treatment work begins and during its progress. C. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from historic treatment procedures. 1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being protected. 2. Provide barricades, barriers, and temporary directional signage to exclude public from areas where historic treatment work is being performed. 3. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of historic treatment work. 4. Contain dust and debris generated by removal and dismantling work and prevent it from reaching the public or adjacent surfaces. 5. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements. 6. Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining. 7. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate removal and dismantling work from other areas of the building. D. Temporary Protection of Historic Materials: SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 6 of 9 1. Protect existing historic materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not deface or remove existing materials. 2. Do not attach temporary protection to historic surfaces except as indicated as part of the historic treatment program and approved by Architect. E. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation. F. Utility and Communications Services: 1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by the historic treatment work before commencing operations. 2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as required for the historic treatment work. 3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities. G. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is in working order. 1. Prevent solids such as stone or mortar residue from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from historic treatment work. 2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass. H. Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of work in an area, install roofing protection as indicated. 2.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from applications of chemical cleaners and paint removers. B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in historic treatment program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof, UV resistant, and will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials staining. C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces. D. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 7 of 9 E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior. 2.4 PROTECTION FROM FIRE A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following. 1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles including, rubbish, paper, waste, and chemicals, except to the degree necessary for the immediate work. a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such materials. 3. Prohibit smoking by all persons within Project work, project site and staging areas. B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or highly combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements utilizing high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated: 1. As far as practical, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the building. 2. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe. 3. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material. 4. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings. 5. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or highly combustible materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed. Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows. a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms. b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from fire-watch duties. c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are not present. d. Have fire watch perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning no sooner than 30 minmutes after conclusion of work at each area of Project site to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire-prevention is maintained. C. Fire Extinguishers, Fire Blankets, and Rag Buckets: Maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire watch are trained in fire-extinguisher and blanket operation. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 8 of 9 D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield them temporarily with guards. 1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused, and when nearby work is completed. 2.5 GENERAL HISTORIC TREATMENT A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when historic treatment work begins and during its progress. B. Halt the process of deterioration and stabilize conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Perform work as indicated on Drawings. Follow the procedures in subparagraphs below and procedures approved in historic treatment program: 1. Retain as much existing material as possible; repair and consolidate rather than replace. 2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and support existing material or structure. 3. Use reversible processes wherever possible. 4. Use historically accurate repair and replacement materials and techniques unless otherwise indicated. 5. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction) and progress during the work with digital preconstruction documentation. Comply with requirements in Division 1 "Photographic Documentation." C. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether due to environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing; or due to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion. 1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect. D. Where Work requires existing features to be removed or dismantled and reinstalled, perform these operations without damage to the material itself, to adjacent materials, or to the substrate. E. Identify new and replacement materials and features with permanent marks hidden in the completed work to distinguish them from original materials. Record a legend of identification marks and the locations of the items on record Drawings. 2.6 HISTORIC REMOVAL AND DISMANTLING A. Perform work according to the historic treatment program. B. Water-Mist Sprinkling: Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate, approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard or adversely affect other building areas or materials. C. Anchorages: 1. Remove anchorages associated with removed items. SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT SECTION 01351 PAGE 9 of 9 2. Dismantle anchorages associated with dismantled items. 3. In non-historic surfaces, patch holes created by anchorage removal or dismantling according to the requirements for new work. 4. In historic surfaces, patch or repair holes created by anchorage removal or dismantling according to Section specific to the historic surface being patched. END OF SECTION 01351 SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 2.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 2 of 8 C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 3 of 8 To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force- resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 2.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 4 of 8 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 2.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 5 of 8 I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 2.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 6 of 8 B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify Owner and testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Owner. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 7 of 8 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 2.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. Email log to Owner on a weekly basis, one day prior to job meetings. SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01400 PAGE 8 of 8 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 1 of 15 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 2 of 15 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355 Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-5434 www.access-board.gov SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 3 of 15 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 www.hardboard.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 4 of 15 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (856) 848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 5 of 15 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 www.umr.edu/~ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (514) 866-6121 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 6 of 15 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819) 956-0425 www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 7 of 15 ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 www.fscoax.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215) 895-2343 www.drexel.edu/gri GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 8 of 15 (See CSA) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150 www.issfa.net ITS Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 www.lma.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 9 of 15 MH Material Handling Industry of America (See MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 10 of 15 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA NFPA International (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association International) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (703) 779-1022 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (See RTI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 11 of 15 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 www.pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute Contact by mail only www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 RTI Roof Tile Institute (541) 689-0366 (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) www.ntrma.org SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabfurn.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 12 of 15 SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 13 of 15 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261 Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 www.bocai.org CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909) 595-8449 Officials (The) www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icbo.org/ICBO_ES/ ICC International Code Council, Inc. (703) 931-4533 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 14 of 15 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.intlcode.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 www.sbcci.org C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-5605 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01420 PAGE 15 of 15 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CAPUC (See CPUC) CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (800) 952-5210 Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (916) 574-2041 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (936) 639-8180 Forest Products Laboratory www.txforestservice.tamu.edu END OF SECTION 01420 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 2.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. D. Safety: Show compliance with OSHA safety standards. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 2 of 8 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 2.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing (N0n-portable type): Minimum 2-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. Fencing set 2’-0” min. deep into ground. 3.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 3.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 3 of 8 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 4.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 4 of 8 completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: a. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 128 Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet. 6. Productivity Software: a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher. 7. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 5 of 8 8. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 9. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 4.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and non-tracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Paved Areas: Locate temporary paved areas in same location as permanent paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Provide detailed dewatering plan with bid submittal. 2. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 6 of 8 G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs, including but not limited to, Contractor or Sub-Contractor signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. J. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted. K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 4.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 7 of 8 F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 4.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. Any mold growth due to trapped water is the Contractor’s responsibility to remove. No cost can be passed to Owner. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01500 PAGE 8 of 8 C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 4.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01524 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction, and location of waste containers at Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01524 PAGE 2 of 5 1.4 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. Salvage/Recycle Goals: Salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous demolition and construction waste as possible including the following materials: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Brick. b. Wood studs and joists. c. Plywood and oriented strand board. d. Wood trim. e. Metal studs. f. Gypsum board. g. Acoustical tile and panels. h. Piping and conduit. i. Supports and hangers. j. Mechanical equipment. 2. Construction Waste: a. Lumber. b. Wood sheet materials. c. Wood trim. d. Metals. e. Roofing. f. Insulation. g. Carpet and pad. h. Gypsum board. i. Piping. j. Electrical conduit. k. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper, Cardboard, and Boxes. 2) Plastic sheet and film, and Polystyrene packaging. 3) Wood crates. 4) Plastic pails. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 10 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01524 PAGE 3 of 5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale or Donation: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Provide to Owner for review. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Total cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from sale or donation of materials. 5. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01524 PAGE 4 of 5 7. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 8. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect and Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Designate a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 2.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work or Sale/donation: 1. Clean salvaged items as appropriate; pack, crate, or store in a secure area until disposition. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01524 PAGE 5 of 5 2.3 RECYCLING WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. D. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 2.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. END OF SECTION 01524 SECTION 01562 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01562 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01562 - TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and spreading water, calcium chloride, and/or mulch on the subgrade, or in other areas of a Project Site or associated off-site areas, for the purpose of controlling dust emissions. B. The requirements set forth in this section of the specifications apply to all phases and areas of construction. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies (RCSA) 1.RCSA Section 22a-174-1 through 43, Abatement of Air Pollution. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM D98, Standard Specification for Calcium Chloride. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Only water, calcium chloride, and mulch are approved for dust control. No asphalt or petroleum-based products may be utilized for dust control. B. Water used shall be clean, non-polluted water obtained from sources approved by Engineer. C. Calcium chloride, ASTM D98. Calcium chloride in pellet form and flake form shall be acceptable. 1.Calcium chloride shall be packaged in moisture proof bags or in airtight drums with the manufacturer, name of product, net weight, and percentage of calcium chloride guaranteed by the manufacturer legibly marked on each container. 2.Engineer may reject calcium chloride failing to meet the requirements of the aforementioned specifications or which has become caked or sticky in shipment. SECTION 01562 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01562 PAGE 2 of 3 D. Mulch 1.Straw mulch: Threshold straw of oats, wheat, barely, or rye that is free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable material. Straw mulch shall contain at least 50 percent by weight of material to be 10-in or longer. 2.Wood chips: Processed tree trimmings free of trash or other physical contaminants such as metal and plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Dust control shall be the responsibility of Contractor and dust control operations shall meet the requirements of the State of Connecticut Department of Environmental Protection. B. Construction sequencing shall be organized and conducted in a manner to leave existing pavement or ground coverings in place until just prior to earth excavation for the purpose of minimizing the migration of dust beyond the Project Limits into the surrounding area. C. Engineer reserves the right to conduct active dust monitoring using visual methods and may utilize particulate measurement equipment during the course of the work. If the amount of fugitive dust and/or particulate generated during the work is deemed unacceptable in the Engineer’s judgment or exceeds baseline Project Site conditions at Engineer’s monitoring locations, Engineer may require Contractor to stop work and implement corrective measures. No claim for delay will be considered for work stoppage based upon the results of Engineer’s active dust monitoring results. D. Stockpiled materials from which particle have the potential of becoming airborne shall be securely covered with a temporary waterproof covering made of polyethylene, polypropylene, hypalon, or approved equal. The covers must be in place at all times when work with the stockpiles is not occurring. E. Subcontractor shall sweep all adjacent roads and neighboring parking lots and driveways that are impacted by the work. Whenever dirt is tracked from the site it shall be cleaned as necessary to prevent it from becoming a nuisance or hazard. At a minimum, adjacent street shall be swept once per week. 3.2 WATER A. The application of water shall be under the control of Engineer at all times. It shall be applied only at the locations, and at such times, and in the amount as may be directed by Engineer. Quantities of water wasted or applied without authorization will not be paid for. B. Use of water will not be permitted when it will result in, or create, hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding or pollution. SECTION 01562 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01562 PAGE 3 of 3 C. Contractor shall have available and maintain in an operable condition at all times, sufficient equipment for the purpose of applying water for dust control. D. Watering equipment shall consist of pipelines, tanks, tank trucks, distributors, pumps, meters, hose or other devices, approved by Engineer, which are capable of applying a uniform spread of water over the surface. A suitable device for a positive shut-off and for regulating the flow of water shall be located so as to permit positive operator control. E. Applications of water for dust suppression include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.Demolition activities, material handling, material processing, and loading. 2.Earthwork. 3.Open excavation faces and dust-prone areas of the work. 4.Temporary access roads and roadway surfaces within and around the Project Site. 3.3 CALCIUM CHLORIDE A. Calcium chloride shall be applied only at the locations, at such times and in the amount as may be directed by the Engineer and only in areas that will not be adversely affected by the application. Refer to Section 01 3543 – Environmental Protection. B. Calcium chloride shall be uniformly applied at the rate of one and one-half (1 ½) pounds per square yard (lb/yd2) or at any other rate as directed by Engineer. Application shall be by means of a mechanical spreader, or other approved methods. The number and frequency of applications shall be to Engineer’s satisfaction. 3.4 MULCH FOR DUST CONTROL A. Coordinate the use of mulch for dust control with erosion and sedimentation control measures. B. Straw mulch shall be applied at a rate of 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet (100 lb/1,000 ft2). C. Wood chips or wood mulch shall be applied at such a rate as to form a layer one (1) inch thick. 3.5 OTHER DUST CONTROL MEASURES A. A temporary seed mixture may be spread in lieu of, or in addition to mulch over areas where the suspension of grading work in disturbed areas is expected to be more than 30 calendar days and as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 01570 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.General environmental protection. 2.Prevention of environmental pollution and damage resulting from construction operations. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations, laws, and guidelines regarding environmental protection during the duration of the construction contract, whether or not the regulation, law or guideline is provided herein. Contractor shall provide environmental protective measures and procedures to prevent and control pollution, limit habitat disruption, and correct environmental damage that occurs during construction. B. The requirements set forth in this section of the specifications apply to all phases and areas of construction. 1.3 PERMIT CONDITIONS A. Contractor and Subcontractors are bound to comply with any project-related permits obtained by Owner or Engineer for the work of the project. Such permits will affect performance of the work, and Contractor and Subcontractors are bound to comply with requirements of such permit and representations contained in permit application as though Contractor and Subcontrator were the Permittee/permit-holder. Requirements and conditions set forth in Owner or Engineer- obtained project-related permits and permit applications shall be binding on Contractor just as any Specification would be. 1.Permit to Conduct Regulated Activities in Inland Wetlands and Watercourses Adjacent Upland Review Areas, Permit # 216IWC10, Issued September 15, 2016, Expires September 14, 2021. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.40 CFR, Protection of Environment. C. Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies (RCSA) SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 2 of 9 1.RCSA Section 22a-30-1 through 22a-30-17, Tidal Wetlands 2.RCSA Section 22a-39-1 through 22a-39-15, Inland Wetlands and Watercourses 3.RCSA Section 22a-69-1 to 22a-69-7.4, Noise Control 4.RCSA Section 22a-65-1, Discarding of Pesticides 5.RCSA Section 22a-49-1, Use of Pesticides (Use of Forms) 6.RCSA Section 22a-50-1 through 9, Pesticide Registration and Classification 7.RCSA Section 22a-66a-1 through 2, Posting and Notification of Outdoor Pesticide Application 8.RCSA Section 22a-66-1 through 7, Use of Pesticides 9.RCSA Section 22a-133k-1 through 3, Remediation Standard 10.RCSA Section 22a-174-1 through 43, Abatement of Air Pollution 11.RCSA Section 22a-174-100, Indirect Sources of Air Pollution 12.RCSA Section 22a-209-1 through 16, Solid Waste 13.22a-315-10 through 19, Soil and Water Conservation 14.RCSA Section 22a-354i-1 through 10, Aquifer Protection Area Land Use Regulations 15.RCSA Section 22a-372-1, 22a-377(b)-1, 22a-377(c)-1, 22a-377(c)-2, Water Diversion 16.RCSA Section 22a-430-3 through 4, General Conditions Applicable to Water Discharge Permits and Procedures and Criteria for Issuing Water Discharge Permits 17.RCSA Section 22a-430-8, Underground Injection Control 18.RCSA Section 22a-449(c)-100 through 119, Hazardous Waste 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Environmental Pollution and Damage: The presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents that adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of plant or animal communities; or degrade the environment from an aesthetic, cultural or historic perspective. Environmental protection is the prevention/ control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of air, water, land, biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive materials; and other pollutants. B. Contaminated Material: A material or waste, including liquids, solids, debris, equipment, machinery, miscellaneous waste, or combination thereof affected by the presence of any organic or inorganic chemical substance which, because of its quantity, concentration, or physical, chemical or infectious characteristics may cause, or significantly contribute to an increase in serious irreversible, or incapacitating reversible illness or pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human health, safety, or welfare or to the environment when improperly handled, SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 3 of 9 treated, stored, transported, used or disposed of, or otherwise managed, or by regulation is controlled in its handled, treatment, storage, transportation, use, or disposal. Contaminated Materials shall be synonymous with Hazardous Material, and may also include those materials defined as Contaminated Soils, Polluted Soils, Regulated Waste, Special Waste, or Hazardous Waste. C. Hazardous Waste: Any waste material which may pose a present or potential hazard to human health or the environment when improperly disposed of, treated, stored, transported, or otherwise managed, including (A) hazardous waste identified in accordance with 40 CFR 261.3 (B) hazardous waste identified by regulation by the Department of Environmental Protection, and (C) polychlorinated biphenyls in concentrations greater than fifty parts per million, but does not mean by-product material, source material or special nuclear material, as defined in section 22a-151, or scrap tires. D. Discharge or Contaminated Material Discharge: The accidental or intentional spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying or dumping of Contaminated Material into or on any land, surface water, ground water, or into the atmosphere. 1.6 INSPECTIONS A. Engineer may routinely inspect the Project Site and will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with contract requirements. B. Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately upon request from regulatory agencies to enter, inspect, sample, monitor, or otherwise access the project site or the Contractor's records pertaining to environmental protection work. Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any violations or non-compliance issues identified by regulatory agencies. C. Contractor shall, after notification of violations or non-compliance from either the Engineer or regulatory agencies, inform the Engineer of proposed corrective action and take such action to correct the noncompliance. If Contractor fails to act promptly, Engineer may order stoppage of all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. 1.No claim for an extension of time or for excess costs or damage incurred by Contractor as a result of time lost due to any stop work orders shall be made unless it was later determined that Contractor was in compliance. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations, laws, and guidelines regarding environmental protection during the duration of the construction contract, whether or not the regulation, law or guideline is provided herein. Contractor shall provide environmental protective measures and procedures to prevent and control pollution, limit habitat disruption, and correct environmental damage that occurs during construction. B. The requirements set forth in this section of the specifications apply to all phases and areas of construction. 1.8 PROTECTION OF FEATURES A. Contractor shall conduct operations in such a manner as to protect those environmental features including but not limited to wetlands, watercourses, trees, other vegetation, habitats or sensitive environmental receptors requiring protection, whether such features are specifically identified SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 4 of 9 on the drawings or not. Contractor shall protect those environmental features, indicated specifically on the drawings as requiring protection, in spite of interference, which their preservation may cause to Contractor's work. B. Contractor shall confine construction activities to those work areas defined by the Drawings. All land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits or permanent work performed under this contract shall be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction at least equal to that, which existed prior to work under this contract. 1.9 STORAGE AREAS A. The location of Contractor’s storage areas for equipment and/or materials shall be clear of existing vegetation or shall be on areas that are to be cleared of vegetation as part of this project. Contractor’s storage and staging area locations shall require written approval of Engineer or Owner prior to use. Plans showing storage facilities for equipment and materials shall be submitted for approval. B. No excavated materials or materials used in backfill operations shall be deposited within a minimum distance of fifty (50) feet of any wetland resource area or any drainage facility. Adequate measures for erosion and sediment control such as the placement of hay bales and silt fence around the perimeter of stockpiles shall be employed to protect any downstream areas from siltation. C. Provisions must be made in and around storage areas to contain any spills or rupture of storage supplies. Engineer or Owner may designate a particular area or areas where Contractor may store materials used in his operations. D. Storage areas in cross-country locations shall be restored to pre-construction conditions with the planting of native species of trees and shrubs. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS A. The Contract Documents have been prepared to comply with the special conditions, approvals, permits and mitigation measures of an environmental nature which were established during the planning and development of this project. Contractor is advised that deviations from the scope of work could result in the requirement for Engineer to re-analyze the work from an environmental standpoint. Deviations from restrictions, limitations, or defined construction methods and procedures indicated by the Contract Documents which may have an environmental impact will require review, processing, and approval by Engineer or regulatory agencies. Engineer reserves the right to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if in the Engineer’s opinion the proposed alternate method will have an adverse environmental impact or require regulatory interactions which will cause a delay in the progress of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES A. Comply with applicable regulations and these specifications. Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed in their SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 5 of 9 existing condition or restore to an equivalent or improved condition as approved by engineer or Owner. B. Confine work activities to work area limits indicated on the Drawings or to work area limits established in the field. Remove debris, rubbish, and other waste materials resulting from construction operations from the Project Site. Transport materials with appropriate vehicles and dispose of them off-site to areas that are approved for disposal by governing authorities having jurisdiction. Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on or adjacent to public streets or highways. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project site, streets, or highways. 3.2 PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPE A. Contractor shall not deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs nor remove or cut them without written authority from Engineer or Owner. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any existing nearby trees for anchorages unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. Excavating machinery and cranes shall be of suitable type and be operated with care to prevent injury to trees that are not to be removed, particularly overhanging branches and limbs. Contractor shall, in any event, be responsible for any damage resulting from such use. B. Branches, limbs, and roots shall not be cut except by permission of Engineer. All cutting shall be smoothly and neatly done without splitting or crushing. When there is unavoidable injury to branches, limbs and trunks of trees, the injured portions shall be neatly trimmed and covered with an application of grafting wax or tree healing paint as directed. C. Where, in the opinion of Engineer, trees may possibly be defaced, bruised, injured, or otherwise damaged by Contractor’s equipment or by his blasting or other operations, the Engineer may direct Contractor to adequately protect such trees by placing boards, planks, poles or fencing around them. Any trees or landscape feature scarred or damaged by Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the expense of Contractor. Engineer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of. D. Cultivated hedges, shrubs, and other plants that could be injured by Contractor’s operations shall be protected by suitable means or shall be dug up, balled and temporarily replanted and maintained. After construction operations have been substantially completed, they shall be replanted in their original positions and cared for until growth is re-established. If cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants are injured to such a degree as to affect their growth or diminish their beauty or usefulness, they shall be replaced by items of a kind and quality at least equal to that existing at the start of the work. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES A. Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to avoid pollution of surface water, wetlands and ground water. All earthwork, grading, moving of equipment, water control in foundation areas, and other operations likely to create silting, shall be planned and conducted so as to avoid and/or minimize pollution in adjacent waterways. Water that has been used for any purpose that has been contaminated with oil, bitumen, salt or other pollutants, shall be treated prior to discharge in accordance with applicable regulations so as to avoid affecting nearby waterways. Under no circumstance shall pollutants or polluted water be discharged into the environment. At all times comply with the requirements of the SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 6 of 9 Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection (DEEP), and all local, State and Federal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water. Store and service construction equipment at areas designated for collection of oil wastes. Prevent ponding of stagnant water conducive to mosquito breeding habitat. Prevent run-off from site during demolition and construction operations. C. Equipment will not be permitted to ford live streams or creeks. Utilize temporary bridges for such purpose. Remove temporary bridges upon completion of work and repair the area to its original condition, unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with the following as applicable to the Project: 1.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Stormwater and Dewatering Wastewaters Associated with Construction Activities, (DEP-PED-GP-015) modified April 8, 2004 or the latest revision thereof. Conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. 2.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater to a Sanitary Sewer (DEP-PERD-GP- 007) issued August 13, 1996 or the latest revision thereof. The conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any supplemental plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. 3.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater Directly to Surface Water (DEP- PED-GP-020) issued February 9, 2005 or the latest revision thereof. The conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any supplemental plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION IN WETLAND RESOURCE AREAS A. Disturbance to wetland resource areas is not allowed, unless otherwise called-for on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If work within a wetland resource area has been authorized, comply with the regulations, permits, and conditions of approval of all authorities having jurisdiction, whether local, State and Federal while carrying out the work. B. Contractor shall comply with the following: 1.Comply with applicable provisions of local, State or Federal approvals, conditions of approval, authorizations, or permits. 2.Contractor shall make every effort to minimize disturbance to the resource area(s). 3.Contractor shall perform his work in such a way that these areas are left in the condition existing prior to construction, including ground elevations. If such disturbance does occur, Contractor shall take all measures necessary to return these areas to the condition (including elevation) that existed prior to construction. 4.For work in wetland resources areas, Contractor shall carefully remove and stockpile the topsoil. This wetland resource topsoil material shall be reused in the same location from SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 7 of 9 which it came upon completion of the work if restoration activities are conducted. If restoration activities are called-for, the elevation of the work area shall be restored to the pre-construction elevation wherever disturbed by Contractor’s operation. 5.Excavated materials shall not be permanently placed or temporarily stored in wetland resource areas. Temporary storage areas for excavated material shall be as approved by Engineer. 6.The use of a temporary gravel roadway in wetland areas is not acceptable. Contractor will be required to utilize timber or rubber matting to support equipment in these areas. The timber or rubber matting shall be constructed of materials and placed in such a way that when removed the material below the matting will not be unduly disturbed, mixed or compacted so as to adversely affect recovery of the existing plant life. 7.Measures shall be taken to dam pipe trenches that are located within wetland resource areas to prevent drainage of the wetlands via the pipe trench. 3.5 FUELS, LUBRICANTS AND OTHER FLUIDS A. Fuels, lubricants or other petroleum or chemical based fluids shall be stored in the appropriate containers at the Project Site in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. Fuels, lubricants or other petroleum or chemical based fluids shall be stores at designated locations only. Coordinate with the engineer and Owner. B. Fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles shall be conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spills and evaporation. C. Lubricants, waste oil, or other equipment fluids to be discarded shall be stored in marked corrosion-resistant containers in a designated area and recycled or disposed in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTE A. Solid Wastes is rubbish, debris, waste materials, garbage, and other discarded solid materials (excluding clearing debris and Contaminated Materials or Hazardous Waste as defined in these Specifications). Solid waste shall be placed in appropriate containers and disposed on a regular schedule. All handling and disposal shall be conducted in such a way as to prevent spillage and contamination. Contractor shall transport all solid waste off of the Project Site and dispose in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements. B. The burning of trees, brush and other combustible materials will not be permitted. Provide satisfactory methods of disposal without additional compensation. C. Handling and Disposal of Contractor Generated Contaminated Materials, Regulated Waste, or Hazardous Waste. 1.Contaminated Materials, Regulated Waste, or Hazardous Waste shall be as defined by the Contract Documents and applicable State and local regulations. Contractor shall segregate these wastes from other materials and wastes, and shall protect such waste from the weather by placing it in a safe covered location; precautionary measures against accidental spillage such as berming, secondary containment, or other appropriate measures shall be taken in accordance with applicable regulations and best management practices. These waste generated by construction activities shall be removed from the work area and be disposed SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570PAGE 8 of 9 in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements. At no time shall these wastes be dumped onto or into the ground, into storm sewers or open water courses, into the sanitary sewer system, or released into the air. 3.7 HANDLING OF CONTAMINATED MATERIALS A. All Contaminated Materials encountered during the course of the work of this project will require management procedures beyond those required for normal construction operations in accordance with the requirements set forth in these Specifications. Contractor is required to implement Special Handling in accordance with the Specifications, and all applicable permits, approvals, authorizations, laws, and regulations when managing such materials. B. Activities involving Contaminated Materials performed by Contractor or Subcontractors at the project shall be performed in a manner which considers the health and safety of site personnel and the surrounding environment. Activities involving Contaminated Materials shall be conducted in conformance with the applicable Specification Sections and all applicable permits, approvals, authorizations, laws, and regulations. 3.8 PROTECTION OF AIR RESOURCES A. Special management techniques as set out below shall be implemented to control air pollution by Contractor’s activities. These techniques supplement the requirements of Federal, State, and local laws and regulations; and the safety requirements under this Contract. If any of the following subarticles conflict with the requirements of Federal, State, or local laws or regulations, or safety requirements under this contract, then those requirements shall govern. B. Contractor is responsible for all dust suppression measures and monitoring of airborne particulate matter throughout execution of the work. Airborne particulates, including dust particles, from general site activities, demolition, excavation and handling of soils, Contaminated Materials, and processing or preparation of demolition materials shall be controlled at all times during the work, as well as hours when work is not in progress, including weekends and holidays. Contractor shall maintain all work areas, including but not necessarily limited to demolition areas, processing areas, staging areas, excavations, stockpiles, and permanent or temporary access roads, free from airborne dust which would cause a hazard or nuisance. Refer to Section 01 5714 - Temporary Dust Control. C. Burning is prohibited unless specifically-approved in writing by Owner. 3.9 NOISE CONTROL A. Contractor shall endeavor at all times to maintain as low a level of construction noise as practicable in order not to create a disturbance in the neighborhood or Owner’s premises. B. If construction noise becomes problematic, at the sole discretion of owner, a noise plan will be prepared. 1.Contractor will prepare a noise monitoring plan acceptable to the Town. The plan shall consist of locations where noise monitoring will be performed, type of measurement device, data reporting methods, response and resolution procedures, and method for periodic inspections of equipment mufflers. SECTION 01570 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01570 PAGE 9 of 9 2.Contractor shall submit noise measurement reports weekly during construction. Weekly reports shall include noise level measurements taken during the previous week including construction, complaint response, and equipment certification measurements. 3.Any complaints duly registered by Owner of unacceptable noise levels shall be cause for the use of special precautions and methods of operation by Contractor to reduce noise to acceptable levels, at no additional cost to Owner. 4.Owner shall be the sole judge of the tolerability of noise levels as defined herein. Measurement of noise levels will be at the centerline of the roadway surrounding the Site. 5.Any high noise level operations intended to occur during early morning and evening hours or weekends shall be subject to review and approval by the Owner prior to proceeding. C. In additional to any local requirements, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the following criteria are complied with: 1.Truck and equipment mufflers shall be periodically inspected for proper operation. 2.Low-pitch backup alarms shall be used. 3.Sound barriers shall be erected if noise limits exceeding those allowed are anticipated. 4.Daytime, evening and night time construction noise levels at noise-sensitive locations shall not exceed 85dBa. 5.The operation of equipment at full-load capacity shall not exceed the maximum noise limits specified. 6.The use of equipment with potentially higher noise levels shall be prohibited within 200 feet of a noise-sensitive location during night-time hours. 7.To the extent practical, staging of compressors, pumps and similar pieces of equipment that remain stationary throughout the construction period shall be located away from sensitive receptors whenever possible. 3.10 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES A. Contractor shall maintain all constructed pollution control facilities and portable pollution control devices for the duration of the Contract or for the length of time construction activities create the particular pollutant. END OF SECTION SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01600 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant and required qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01600 PAGE 2 of 5 characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 2.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 2.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01600 PAGE 3 of 5 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 2.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01600 PAGE 4 of 5 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered only when the Contractor provides a fully executed Substitution Request Form. Architect will reject any other substitution request. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Provide a fully executed Substitution Request Form. Architect will reject any other request. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. Contractor to provide a fully executed Substitution Request Form. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01600 PAGE 5 of 5 3.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. END OF SECTION 01600 SECTION 01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01635 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 01635 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 2. Attached Substitution Request Form. 2.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 2.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration, including a fully executed Substitution Request Form. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. B. Prior to the last day of bidder questions, as stated in the Invitation to Bid, or as agreed to by the Architect, submit Substitution Requests as follows: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use attached Substitution Request Form. Also include Documentation to show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: SECTION 01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01635 PAGE 2 of 3 a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. SECTION 01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01635 PAGE 3 of 3 PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided if required. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. 3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. END OF SECTION 01635 (See attached Substitution Request Form) SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PAUL B. BAILEY ARCHITECT, LLC Page 1 of 2 pages Date of Request: ________________________________ Attn: (Project Architect) ___________________________________ Project Name: ________________________________ Architect’s Project No.: ___________________________________ Note: Substitution Requests will only be considered until the last day for bidder questions. Specified Item: ____________________________________________________________________________ Spec Section: _____________________________ Page: ____________________ Paragraph: _________________________________________________________________ Drawing & Detail No(s):_________________________________________________________ Proposed Substitution:__________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer: ______________________________Local Representative__________________ Phone:_(______)_______________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________________________________ Trade Name: __________________________________________ Model No:_____________________________________________ Product is: □ New Product □ 2-5 years old □ older than 5 years Reason for Substitution: ____________________________________________________________________________ Credit to Owner for Substitution: $_________________________________________________ Will Substitution effect project schedule for completion?_______________________________* Will Substitution effect dimensions on drawings? ____________________________________* Will Substitution effect other trades? ______________________________________________* Will Substitution effect Electrical/Mechanical/Structure/Architecture, etc.?__________________* *If yes, provide a separate attached sheet with complete explanation. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PAUL B. BAILEY ARCHITECT, LLC Page 2 of 2 pages ______________________________________________________________________________ Provide a separate attached sheet with point-by-point, side by side comparison between the specified item and requested substitution. Indicate all product characteristics required for adequate evaluation of request, including but not limited to product description, size, colors, performance data, test data, UL Assembly if applicable, etc. Highlight differences between products. Also attach data description changes to Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Submitted by: ____________________________________________________________ Signed by: ____________________________________________________________ Firm: ___________________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________ City/State/ Zip: ____________________________________________________________ Telephone: (_______)____________________________________________________ Email: ____________________________________________________________ ARCHITECT’S REVIEW & ACTION Date Received by Architect:____________________ □ Substitution Request Approved As Noted; Make submittals per Spec Section 01330. □ Substitution Request Approved-Make submittals per Spec Section 01330. □ Substitution Request Rejected – Use specified materials. □ Substitution Request Rejected -Submittal incomplete. Provide complete information for evaluation (If within the allowed time frame) or specified material. □ Substitution Request received too late – Use specified materials. Signed by: ___________________________________________Date: _____________________ Paul B. Bailey Architect LLC SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor and professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 2 of 8 C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by licensed land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey (As-Built): Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 3 of 8 PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 4 of 8 of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 4.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the A2 survey standards. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Owner. 4.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 5 of 8 C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey (As Built): Engage a licensed land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by licensed land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. Indicate parking areas, landscaping, lighting, utility line locations, etc. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 2. Provide Final Property Survey to Owner for review. 4.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 6 of 8 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 4.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. See Section 01731 “Cutting and Patching.” 4.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 7 of 8 G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 4.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. No HVAC system is to be started until unit is fully cleaned of all dirt and dust. B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 4.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 4.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01700 PAGE 8 of 8 C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01731 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Consult with Architect and Engineer before cutting into a structural element. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include and are not limited to the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01731 PAGE 2 of 4 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain wall construction 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, consult with Architect, and use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in- place materials. Fabricate to match if no pre made items are available. 2. If Architect deems fabrication is not feasible, propose materials for Architect’s review that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01731 PAGE 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer’s written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01731 PAGE 4 of 4 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Prior to HVAC start-up, clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. 6. Cost Certification per CHFA Procedures B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 6. CHFA: Refer to CHFA requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 2 of 8 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner/Owner’s Representative. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following list items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 3 of 8 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 4 of 8 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit certified copy of Owner's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner’s Representative. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 5. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 6. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re--inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Contractors Punchlist to be completed (ALL ITEMS COMPLETED, FIXED AND FINISHED) prior to Architect’s and Owner’s Punchlists. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 5 of 8 a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 5. Punch lists to be done in following order. Each punch list must be completely remediated prior to next punch list. a. Contractor b. Owner’s Representative (optional) c. Architect d. CHFA Observer 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Prior to HVAC start-up, provide final cleaning. Clean free of all dust and dirt. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep and vacuum concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum and wash tiled floors. j. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. k. Wash all metal bathroom partitions and bath accessories. l. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. m. Remove labels that are not permanent. n. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 7 of 8 o. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. p. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. q. Wash and clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. r. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. s. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. t. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. u. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. E. Submit two complete close out manuals and two hardcopy sets of as-built drawings that are clean and readable. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01770 PAGE 8 of 8 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 5. Rebalance HVAC systems as required. END OF SECTION 01770 SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01781 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Survey B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit three sets of opaque marked-up Record Prints. Two copies are for the Owner and shall be included in the close out package. One copy is for the Architect’s records. B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit two copies of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual in addition to submittal as Record Product Data. SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01781 PAGE 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Provide updated record drawings on a monthly basis to Owner for review prior to approval of payment application. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings, and include them as part of the As-built package. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01781 PAGE 3 of 4 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Keep fully labeled record samples with the Product Data. 2.4 RECORD SURVEY A. Provide a record Survey, indicating building locations, actual finish setbacks, utility locations, parking spaces and all other pertinent information. 1. Note any differences between the completed as-built locations and proposed locations on the construction drawings. 2. Fully indicate utility locations. 3. Indicate parking space sizes and locations. 4. Indicate location of site lighting. SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01781 PAGE 4 of 4 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Owner’s and Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. 5. Tool Kit B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 2 of 9 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return one copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment, including serial and model numbers. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 3 of 9 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 4 of 9 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 5 of 9 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 6 of 9 C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 7 of 9 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.7 TOOL KIT A. Provide the following tools as a start-up tool kit for the Owner: 1. (1) 17’ Werner telescoping ladder 2. (1) Mop bucket-wringer 3. (1) Mop handle 4. (3) Mop heads 5. (1) Spin mop/bucket (lightweight) 6. (2) Spin mop replacement heads 7. (2) 72x36x18 plastic shelving units 8. (2) Non-marring knee pads 9. (2) 25’ tape measures 10. (1) Claw hammer 11. (1) 6in1 screwdriver 12. (1) Caulk gun 13. (1) 32 gal Rubbermaid trash can 14. (1) 25’ extension cord 15. (2) Utility knives 16. (1) Utility blades 17. (1) Round shovel 18. (1) Square shovel 19. (2) Snow shovel 20. (1) Drill/driver bit set 21. (1) 9” level SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 8 of 9 22. (1) Adjustable extension pole, painting 23. (1) Dremel tool kit 24. (1) Stanley wrench/socket set 25. (1) Manhole cover tool 26. (2) Paint brush, Purdy 2 ½” 27. (2) Push brooms 28. (1) Lobby broom & dust pan 29. (1) Toilet auger 30. (2) Finish stain marker for cabinets 31. (2) Clear safety glasses 3M 32. (1) Tool bag 15” Husky 33. (1) Flashlight 2pack 34. (1) 100’ extension cord 35. (1) Set of (2) sawhorses 36. (1) Electric leaf blower 37. (1) Circular saw Ryobi 38. (1) Jig saw PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01782 PAGE 9 of 9 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. H. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. END OF SECTION 01782 SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01820 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. 2.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01820 PAGE 2 of 5 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. 2.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01820 PAGE 3 of 5 a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01820 PAGE 4 of 5 e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data." 4.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 01820 PAGE 5 of 5 4.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect. C. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION 01820 SECTION 02071 GEOTEXTILES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02071 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 02071 - GEOTEXTILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Furnishing and installation geotextile materials for the separation of earth materials. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM D3786 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics- Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method. 2.ASTM D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. 3.ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. 4.ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. 5.ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. 6.ASTM D4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products. 7.ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - OSHA Excavation Regulations 1926.560 through 1926.562 including Appendices A through F. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. SECTION 02071 GEOTEXTILES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02071 PAGE 2 of 5 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to Engineer for approval material specifications, manufacturer’s product data, and shop drawings for all materials furnished under this Section. B. Connection details for geotextile. C. Proposed mechanical connection devices. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow geotextile manufacturer’s recommendations for packaging, transportation, and delivery to ensure materials are not damaged. Furnish the geotextile fabric in a wrapping that protects the fabric from ultraviolet radiation and from abrasion due to shipping and hauling. B. Geotextile shall be stored on a prepared surface (not wooden pallets) and should not be stacked more than two rolls high. Storage shall be such that the geotextile is protected from puncture, dirt, grease, water, moisture, mud, mechanical abrasions, excessive heat or cold, or other damaging circumstances. Temporary storage at the Project Site shall be away from standing water such that crushing or flattening of roll goods does not occur. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTRATION GEOTEXTILE A. Filtration Geotextile shall be utilized for subsurface drainage. 1.Composition: Nonwoven, polypropylene staple fibers. 2.Physical properties: Mechanical and Physical Properties of Filtration Geotextile Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Grab Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 4632 Pounds 110 Grab Tensile Strength, Elongation at Utlimate ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 50 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 Pounds 50 Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 psi 225 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 Pounds 60 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 70 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec-1 1.7 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 135 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 SECTION 02071 GEOTEXTILES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02071 PAGE 3 of 5 Physical Properties Test Method Unit Average Roll Value Weight ASTM D 3776 oz/yd2 4.0 Thickness ASTM D 5199 Mils (mm) 44 (1.12) 2.2 SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE A. Separation Geotextile shall be utilized to separate layers of earth materials. 1.Composition: Woven geotextile made of 100% polypropylene slit film yarns. 2.Physical properties: Mechanical and Physical Properties of Separation Geotextile Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Grab Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 4632 Pounds 250 Grab Tensile Strength, Elongation at Utlimate ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 15 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 Pounds 90 Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 psi 450 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 Pounds 100 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 40 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec-1 0.05 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 4 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 2.3 LIGHT-DUTY STABILIZATION GEOTEXTILE A. Light-Duty Stabilization Geotextile shall be utilized under temporary sidewalks and unit pavers when called-for. 1.Composition: Woven geotextile made of 100% polypropylene slit film yarns. 2.Physical properties: Mechanical and Physical Properties of Light-Duty Stabilization Geotextile Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Grab Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 4632 Pounds 200 SECTION 02071 GEOTEXTILES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02071 PAGE 4 of 5 Grab Tensile Strength, Elongation at Utlimate ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 15 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 Pounds 75 Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 psi 400 CBR Puncture Strength ASTM D 6241 Pounds 90 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 50 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec-1 0.05 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 5 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 2.4 STABILIZATION GEOTEXTILE A. Stabilization Geotextile shall be utilized for stabilization of subgrades where unsuitable subsurface soil conditions are present. Stabilization geotextile shall only be utilized with the approval of Engineer. 1.Composition: Woven geotextile made of 100% polypropylene slit film yarns. 2.Physical properties: Mechanical and Physical Properties of Stabilization Geotextile Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Grab Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 4632 Pounds 315 Grab Tensile Strength, Elongation at Utlimate ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) MD/TD 12/12 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 Pounds 120 CBR Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 Pounds 900 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 40 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec-1 0.05 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 4 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 MD - Machine Direction TD - Transverse (Crosswise) Direction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL SECTION 02071 GEOTEXTILES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02071 PAGE 5 of 5 A. Placement of a geotextile fabric is required to separate crushed stone from the surrounding soils or layers of varying earthen materials in backfill locations. B. Install geotextile as shown on the Drawings or as called-for in the Specifications. C. Ensure that geotextile is protected during installation from clogging, tears, and other damage. 3.2 PIPE OR DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Provide smooth side and bottom trench surfaces so the fabric does not bridge depressions in the soil and is not damaged by rock projections. B. Use fabric of a width to permit a minimum trench-width overlap across the backfill at the trench top. C. Lay the fabric flat in the prepared trench without stretching. Lay the top of the fabric back on the sides to allow for the placement of the aggregate backfill and pipe. D. Overlap ends of rolls an amount equal to the trench width prior to fabric placement. Where pockets or cavities occur in the trench bottom or sides, fill them with acceptable granular material to prevent distortion or damage to the fabric. E. Backfill aggregate and install pipe in a manner to prevent damage to the fabric. Compact aggregate backfill and overlap the fabric across the trench top. Do not allow the fabric to be exposed for more than 2 weeks without covering with backfill. 3.3 LAYER SEPARATION AND STABILIZATION A. Place fabric on a normally prepared subgrade area attending the full width of the sub-base layer being protected. B. Place fabric in a loose and unstretched condition to minimize shifting, puncture, and/or tearing. Overlap fabric roll-ends and edges a minimum of 12 inches with adjacent material. C. Place subbase material within 2 weeks after placement of fabric to minimize exposure. Place sub-base material in a manner to minimize slippage of the fabric. If excessive slippage occurs, use steel securing pins per manufacturer’s guidelines. END OF SECTION SECTION 02221 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02221 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 02221 - SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.General Site Demolition. 2.Demolition of structures, retaining walls, signage, light standards, foundations and appurtenances, pavement, curbing, and similar site improvements. 3.Filling of voids and excavations resulting from demolition. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. State of Connecticut. 1.State of Connecticut Solid Waste Management Regulations, Sections 22a-209 including any amendments thereto. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Demolition: Any operation including the dismantling or wrecking of a structure, assembly, appurtenance, or any portion thereof, including major and minor components, parts, and systems. Demolition shall be inclusive of the removal, handing, processing, segregation, loading, and proper off-site disposition of materials. Demolition shall be interpreted as complete and total removal unless otherwise indicated. The term Remove shall be synonymous with Demolition. B. Bulky Waste: Land clearing debris and non-contaminated or hazardous waste material resulting directly from demolition activities other than Clean Fill, including such materials as tree stumps, tree tops, concrete, wood, brick, plaster, roofing materials, wallboard, metals, carpeting, SECTION 02221 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02221 PAGE 2 of 5 insulation, furniture, and furnishings. Bulky Waste shall include Construction and Demolition Debris and Construction and Demolition Waste. SAFETY C. Conduct the work of this Section in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. D. Provide and maintain barricades, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. E. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and open excavations. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. F. Contractor shall properly design and furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools necessary to construct permanent or temporary excavation support systems, including, but not necessarily limited to, sheet piling, trench shields, trench boxes, timber trench shoring, pneumatic/hydraulic shoring, steel sheeting or sheeting using other materials, sloping, and benching. G. Any time an excavation is to remain open, at a minimum, provide full enclosure with safety barriers and fencing, warning signs, and additional safety control measures as appropriate for the condition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Utility Mark-out 1.Prior to commencing work, comply with utility mark-out requirements of the Call-Before- You-Dig System (1-800-922-4455). 2.Verify the location of all subsurface utilities marked through the Call-Before-You-Dig System. 3.Not all subsurface facilities or structures will be identified through the Call-Before-You- Dig System. Confirm the location of other subsurface utilities and other subsurface facilities or structures prior to commencing work. Field-mark utilities as required. SECTION 02221 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02221 PAGE 3 of 5 C. Utility Coordination 1.Inform all utility owners of the necessity of test pit work. Prove reasonable advance notice to allow for coordination. 2.Coordinate the excavation of all test pits with the respective utility owners having facilities in the vicinity of the test pit location. 3.If so desired by the respective utility owners, all or part of the work under this Section may be accomplished by their crews and/or supervised by them. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all applicable federal, state, and local safety and health requirements regarding all aspects of the work. Do not proceed until all permits or other approvals are secured. B. Contractor is bound to comply with any project-related permits or approval obtained by Owner, including all requirements of such permit and representations contained in permit application as though Contractor were the permittee. Requirements and conditions set forth in Owner- obtained project-related permits and permit applications shall be binding on Contractor just as any Specification would be. C. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, hydrants, or other infrastructure without permits or authorization from local municipal authorities or other authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. Prior to commencing construction activities, Contractor shall identify and delineate those areas or specific improvements that are not to be disturbed. Areas or specific improvements within the Limits of Work/Contract Limits and general work areas which are not to be disturbed shall be clearly marked or fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction operations commence. Contractor’s personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting designated areas, specific improvements, monuments, and markers at the Project Site. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. General 1.All areas or specific improvements, including but not limited to vegetation, utilities, poles, wires, fences, curbings, property-line markers, and other structures, which must be preserved in place without being temporarily or permanently relocated shall be carefully supported and otherwise protected from damage by Contractor. SECTION 02221 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02221 PAGE 4 of 5 2.As excavation/demolition work approaches underground structures, digging by machinery shall be discontinued and the excavation shall be done by means of hand tools. B. Pavements 1.On paved surfaces to remain, Contractor shall not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other power operated equipment, or store tools, equipment or materials which may cut or otherwise damage such surfaces. 2.All surfaces, which have been damaged by Contractor's operations, shall be restored to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found immediately prior to the beginning of construction operations. Such restoration shall meet the approval of Engineer. C. Utilities 1.See Specification 02 4113 – Utility Demolition and Abandonment. D. Retaining Structures: Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utility systems, paving, or other improvements. Contractor assumes responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto. 3.3 SITE DEMOLITION A. Conduct site demolition as shown on the Drawings. B. Conduct site demolition operations in a manner that will prevent damage to adjacent structures, utilities, pavements and other facilities to remain. C. Remove from the site and properly dispose of all materials resulting from site demolition operations. 3.4 DUST CONTROL A. Implement fugitive dust suppression to prevent unacceptable levels of dust resulting from site demolition operations or other activities required by the Contract Documents. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to supervise fugitive dust control measures and to monitor airborne particulate matter. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01 5714 – Temporary Dust Control. 3.5 REPLACEMENT A. In case of damage, Contractor shall notify the appropriate party so that proper steps may be taken to repair any and all damage done. When the Owner does not wish to make the repairs themselves, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, or, if not promptly done by him, Engineer may have the repairs made at the expense of Contractor. SECTION 02221 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02221 PAGE 2 of 5 B. Contractor shall patch, repair and/or replace all adjacent materials and surfaces damaged through the prosecution of work at no expense to Owner. All repair and replacement work shall match the existing in-kind. Final acceptance of said work shall be at the sole judgment of Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 1 of 12 SECTION 02222 - UTILITY DEMOLITION AND ABANDONMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Termination of utility services. 2.Demolition or abandonment of drainage, sewer, and water pipe 3.Demolition or abandonment of miscellaneous below-grade utilities and related facilities including but not necessarily limited to electric and communications ducts, steam lines, and gas lines. 4.Demolition or abandonment of manholes, catch basins, vaults, and similar utility structures. 5.Demolition or abandonment of above-grade utilities and related facilities including but not necessarily limited to electric, telephone, cable systems, and data communications. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. State of Connecticut. 1.State of Connecticut Solid Waste Management Regulations, Sections 22a-209 including any amendments thereto. 2.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. D. ASTM International SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 2 of 12 1.ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2.ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick. 3.ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 4.ASTM C94 / C94M - 07 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 5.ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6.ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7.ASTM C230 / C230M - Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement. 8.ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 9.ASTM C387 / C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 10.ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 11.ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 1.3 SAFETY A. Conduct the work of this Section in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. B. Provide and maintain barricades, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. C. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and open excavations. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. D. Contractor shall properly design and furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools necessary to construct permanent or temporary excavation support systems, including, but not necessarily limited to, sheet piling, trench shields, trench boxes, timber trench shoring, pneumatic/hydraulic shoring, steel sheeting or sheeting using other materials, sloping, and benching. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 3 of 12 E. Any time an excavation is to remain open, at a minimum, provide full enclosure with safety barriers and fencing, warning signs, and additional safety control measures as appropriate for the condition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Abandonment procedures required by the owner of each utility prior to performing the work of utility termination/cutting/capping/plugging. B. Material specifications and shop drawings for all materials and equipment furnished under this section, prior to performing the work of utility abandonment. C. Schedule indicating the timing of termination for each utility. D. Copies of permits, licenses, approvals, insurance, or bonds associated with termination of utility service. E. Copies of utility termination letters confirming termination of service from each utility owner/operator. F. Quality Control Submittals (prior to commencement of work) 1.Schedule of demolition activities. 2.Methods of demolition, including sequence and equipment proposed for same. G. Contract Closeout Submittals (prior to authorization of final payment): 1.As-built drawings showing locations of all terminated/cut/capped/plugged utilities and service disconnections at or before project close-out. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Utility Mark-out 1.Prior to commencing work, comply with utility mark-out requirements of the Call-Before- You-Dig System (1-800-922-4455). 2.Verify the location of all subsurface utilities marked through the Call-Before-You-Dig System. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 4 of 12 3.Not all subsurface facilities or structures will be identified through the Call-Before-You- Dig System. Confirm the location of other subsurface utilities and other subsurface facilities or structures prior to commencing work. Field-mark utilities as required. C. Utility Coordination 1.Inform all utility owners of the necessity of test pit work. Prove reasonable advance notice to allow for coordination. 2.Coordinate the excavation of all test pits with the respective utility owners having facilities in the vicinity of the test pit location. 3.If so desired by the respective utility owners, all or part of the work under this Section may be accomplished by their crews and/or supervised by them. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the material specifications required by the owner of each utility. Where such material specifications may conflict with this Specification, utility owner’s requirements shall prevail. B. Gravel Borrow: Conform to applicable Specifications. C. Sand: ASTM C33. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. F. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type, clean, dry, free of deleterious materials. G. Concrete: Design of mix in accordance with ASTM C-94; ASTM C-150, Type II Portland Cement, washed and graded sand, and aggregate with maximum size of 1-inch; or pre-packaged concrete mix with maximum aggregate size of 1-inch, ASTM C 387. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. H. Masonry Mix: Washed and graded mason sand, lime, and Portland Cement, ASTM C 270; or pre-packaged, dry, sand/lime/cement mortar mixture, ASTM C 387. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 1,800 psi (Type S). I. Grout: Bagged, pre-mixed formulations of non-shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B or site mixed, ASTM C 476. 1.Unconfined compressive strength: 7,500 psi at 28 days. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 5 of 12 2.Grout shall be non-metallic, non-gaseous, and non-shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM-C1107 Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Thirty- minute-old grout shall flow through the flow cone after slight agitation, in temperatures of 40 degrees F to 90 degrees F. 3.Mix Design: Obtain prior written approval of Engineer for any proposed mix design. Mix design shall include the proportions of hydraulic cement, potable water, fine aggregates, expansive agent, and any other necessary additive or admixture. 4.Grout shall be mixed to a flowable consistency as determined by ASTM C 230. All bagged material shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, date of production, batch number, and written instructions for proper mixing, placement and curing of the product. 5.Contractor may formulate and design a grout mix for use on the project in lieu of using a pre-bagged product. J. Water: Potable. K. Solid Concrete Masonry Unit: ASTM C55, sized per pipe diameter to minimize requirements for cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify site conditions before proceeding with demolition work. Field check the accuracy of the Drawings and inspect structures, utilities, and other site features prior to start of work and notify Engineer in writing, of any hazardous conditions and/or discrepancies. B. Existing utilities at the Project Site have not been clearly defined as to location, size, and as- built condition, and all utility information shown on the Drawings or described herein must be considered approximate. C. Primary structures and other site features are shown on the Drawings; other smaller structures and features not shown on the Drawings may exist and shall be demolished as part of the work of this Section at no additional cost. D. Contractor shall have sole responsibility for verification of actual field conditions. Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining information regarding the location, layout, and as- built configuration of existing site improvements, including aspects of such improvements which are not readily visible, including but not necessarily limited to above-ground and underground utilities, utility structures, their connections, and other above- and below-grade construction that my affect, or be affected by, the work of this Section. E. Utility services to buildings outside the limits of work shall be maintained and all resulting costs or charges shall be the responsibility of Contractor. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 6 of 12 F. Although surficial features such as manholes, catch basins, valves and junction boxes may be visible and/or shown on the Drawings, Contractor is required to perform exploratory excavations as he deems appropriate to ascertain the location and nature of all subsurface utilities components which are to be terminated, abandoned, or demolished, or otherwise affected by the work. G. Provide all required coordination with owners of the various utilities serving, or present at, the Project Site as required to complete termination, demolition and abandonment work. H. Prior to physically cutting, disconnecting, demolishing or abandoning any facility, verify that service has been terminated and no active connections remain. I. Coordinate as required for permanent termination of service, temporary termination of service, relocation of facilities, abandonment of facilities, demolition of facilities, cutting, capping, plugging, and bracing. J. Comply at all times with the procedures for terminations of utility services as required by the owner of each utility. K. When utilities are encountered that are not indicated on the Drawings, notify Engineer before proceeding with the work. 3.2 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES A. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage. Provide protection as required such as marking, blocking, bracing, stabilizing, supporting, and retaining. B. Before excavating near any utility, notify the utility owner, coordinate protective work, and comply with the utility owners' requirements. C. When uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities are encountered during excavation, stop work and notify Engineer immediately. Cooperate with the utility owners in maintaining their utilities in operation prior to resuming work. D. Utilities to remain which are damaged by Contractor shall be repaired/replaced to the satisfaction of the utility owner at Contractor’s expense. E. Retaining Structures 1.Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utilities, paving, light standards, piping or conduit. Assume responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 7 of 12 3.3 UTILITY TERMINATION A. Termination: Where “Terminate” is indicated, permanently terminate utility service as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with each utility owner’s specific requirements, or coordinate with the utility owner in those cases where the utility owner will perform termination. B. Coordinate and secure required permits, licenses, approvals, insurance, or bonds associated with termination of service. C. Coordinate inspections by utility company personnel, or if privately-owned, coordinate inspections by qualified, authorized personnel on behalf of the utility owner. D. Provide completed and executed utility termination forms as required by each utility owner’s requirements. E. Secure any required utility termination letters from each utility which confirm that service has been terminated and no active connections remain. F. Termination Procedure 1.Water a.Do not impact any water pipe that may be constructed of asbestos-containing materials unless asbestos abatement specifications are part of the contract documents and the work is completed by qualified personnel in accordance with the requirements contained therein. b.Cut and cap water pipe as indicated on the Drawings or in accordance with the water utilities’ requirements. Do not leave “dead-end” pipe runs. c.Provide restraining blocks at all capped ends. 2.Electrical and Communications a.Remove conductors to nearest structure unless otherwise indicated. Plug openings in structures per the details or in accordance with the utilities’ requirements. b.Cut and cap conduits at each end. Caps shall match conduit type. c.Direct-Bury Cable: Comply with the cable owner’s requirements. d.Secure termination documentation. 3.Gas a.Comply with gas company requirements. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 8 of 12 3.4 UTILITY ABANDONMENT A. Abandonment: Where “Abandon” or “Abandon in-place” is indicated, terminate utility service, cut, cap and otherwise separate the facility from portions to remain and implement abandonment procedure as defined herein. B. Sewer and Drainage Systems 1.Less than 6 inches in diameter: Provide 6-inch concrete plug at open ends on either side of the length to be abandoned as indicated on the Drawings. 2.Greater than 6 inches in diameter: Fill abandoned section with grout/flow-fill and provide 6-inch concrete plugs on either side of the length to be abandoned as indicated on the Drawings. a.Where the filling of pipe is called-for, submit plan of proposed procedure to the owner of such utility and Engineer for approval. b.Filling of pipe shall be with pressure (pumping) methods. 3.Where the filling of pipe or conduit is called-for, Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed procedure to the owner of such utility and Engineer for approval. 4.All structures which are to be abandoned in-place shall have their tops or roof slabs removed and floor slabs broken so as to permit the free passage of water. 5.Unless otherwise indicated, structures which are to be abandoned in-place may be demolished such that only that portion of the structure from finished grade to a point five feet below finished grade are removed. C. Water Pipe 1.Do not impact any water pipe that may be constructed of asbestos-containing materials unless asbestos abatement specifications are part of the contract documents and the work is completed by qualified personnel in accordance with the requirements contained therein. 2.Cut and cap water pipe on either side of the length to be abandoned as indicated on the Drawings. 3.Provide restraining blocks at all capped ends of water pipe to remain in service. D. Electrical and Communications 1.Remove conductors to nearest structure unless otherwise indicated. 2.Cut and cap conduits on either side of the length to be abandoned as indicated on the Drawings. Caps shall match conduit type. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 9 of 12 E. Gas 1.Comply with gas company requirements. F. Utility Structures 1.Comply with utility owner’s requirements. 2.All structures which are to be abandoned in-place shall have their tops or roof slabs removed and floor slabs broken so as to permit the free passage of water. 3.Unless otherwise indicated, structures which are to be abandoned in-place may be demolished such that only that portion of the structure from finished grade to a point five feet below finished grade are removed. 4.Backfill to match adjacent grade and restore surface area to match adjacent grade unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 UTILITY DEMOLITION A. Where "Remove”, “Demolish”, or “R&D” is indicated on the Drawings, such facility or structure shall be completely removed and disposed-of, after termination. B. Subsurface Utilities: Demolition shall include complete removal of the utility system and any associated concrete encasement, catch basins and related structures; sanitary sewerage manholes, pumps, and related facilities; valves, backflow devices, vents, reducers, couplings, meters, hydrants, fittings, thrust blocks, anchors; vaults, pull boxes, splice boxes, and handholes; or other ancillary components of the utility located within the limits to be demolished. The plugging or capping of utilities at the limit of demolition shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Where no plugging or capping is shown, comply with the requirements for utility termination at the limit of demolition. C. Above-grade Utilities: Demolition shall include complete removal of the utility system and any associated utility poles, guys, wires, transformers, light standards, utility and light pole foundations, supports and ancillary equipment. D. Do not demolish any utility until termination and plugging/capping has been completed and verified. E. Prior to the demolition of any lighting system, verify that power supplies which may be shared with other lighting systems outside the Project Limits have been segregated. F. Asbestos-Containing Materials SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 10 of 12 1.Do not impact any asbestos-insulated utility where "Remove” or “Demolish” is indicated on the Drawings until all asbestos-containing materials have been properly abated and verification of same has been either a.Completed and verified by qualified personnel; or b.If asbestos abatement specifications are part of the contract documents the work has been completed by Contractor’s qualified personnel or subcontractor in accordance with the requirements contained therein. 2.Do not impact any asbestos-containing pipe where "Remove” or “Demolish” is indicated on the Drawings unless asbestos abatement specifications are part of the contract documents and the work is completed by qualified personnel in accordance with the requirements contained therein. If asbestos abatement specifications are not part of the contract documents coordinate with Owner’s abatement contractor for completion of the work. 3.6 MATERIAL DISPOSITION A. Salvage of Utility Materials 1.If requested by the utility owner, frames and covers of manholes and catch basins to be demolished or abandoned shall remain the property of the utility owner. They shall be removed and transported to a designated storage area by Contractor. 2.Notify the utility owner at least 24 hours before salvaged materials are transport so that the exact place and time for delivery can be arranged. 3.Other utility materials which are to be salvaged or reused are indicated on the Drawings. B. Disposal of Utility Materials 1.The loading of utility demolition materials for disposal shall be performed in a manner that prevents materials and activities from generating excessive dust and ensure minimum interference with roads, sidewalks and streets both onsite and offsite. 2.Transport of all materials off-site shall be in accordance with applicable Department of Transportation Regulations. All utility demolition materials leaving the site shall become the property of Contractor. 3.Disposal of utility demolition materials shall be conducted in accordance with all applicable regulations and occur only at facilities approved/licensed or permitted by the Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 11 of 12 4.Disposal of Demolition Materials: All materials resulting from utility demolition shall be removed from the Project Site by Contractor for disposal, reuse, salvage or recycling. Disposal shall be conducted in accordance with all applicable regulations. 3.7 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations from utility work in accordance with Specification Section 31 2310 – Earthwork. B. Backfill excavations from utility work in accordance with applicable Specification Sections. 3.8 DOCUMENTATION A. Field Identification 1.Physically mark the location of each subsurface utility termination with a surveyor’s stake, with such stake identifying the utility type and depth below grade. Where the use of stakes at a utility termination location may be inappropriate, Contractor shall provide staking at an adjacent location(s) and include appropriate offset dimensions or other suitable demarcation. B. As-Built Drawings 1.Provide as-built documentation for each utility termination, including location, depth, and method and material of construction for termination. Such as-built documentation shall be noted on the appropriate Drawings. 2.Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the requirements of local permitting authorities for preparation and submittal of as-built drawings. The requirements for the preparation of as-built drawings as defined herein shall be considered the minimum requirements of Engineer, but shall in no way relive Contractor from satisfying the requirements of local permitting authorities. 3.As work progresses, record the following on two (2) sets of Drawings: 4.All changes and deviations from the design in location, grade, size, material, or other feature as appropriate. 5.Any uncharted locations of utilities or other subsurface feature encountered during installation, including the characteristics of such uncharted utility or subsurface feature such as utility type, size, depth, material of construction, etc. 6.Recording of changes shall be clearly and neatly marked in red pen or pencil. All changes shall be noted on the appropriate Drawing sheets. SECTION 02222 SITE DEMOLITION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02222 PAGE 12 of 12 7.Make measurements from fixed, permanent points on the Project Site to accurately locate the work completed. Such measurements shall consist of at least three (3) ties showing the distance of each item relative to each of the fixed, permanent points. 8.As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate the true measurement and location, horizontal and vertical, of all new construction. As-Built drawings shall also contain any additional information required by Engineer. 3.9 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall remove all debris, residuals, and materials at the conclusion of utility termination, demolition, and abandonment activities. END OF SECTION SECTION 02225 CONTROL OF EXISTING FLOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02225 PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 02225 - CONTROL OF EXISTING FLOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Maintenance of pipe flows through existing sanitary sewers. 2.Maintenance of flows through existing storm sewers. 3.Maintenance and management of surface drainage flows across the Project Site. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. During the performance of all proposed work, the Contractor shall take every precaution while performing the necessary work to maintain the pipe flows through the existing sanitary sewer/storm system and the surface drainage flows across the project site. B. Contractor shall furnish all the necessary equipment, shall take all necessary precautions, and shall assume the entire cost of handling any sewage, seepage, storm pipe, groundwater, surface and flood flows which may be encountered at any time during the performance of the Work. C. The manner of providing for maintenance and management of flows shall meet the approval of Engineer and the entire cost of said work should be included in the unit or lump sum prices bid for the various items of the Work to be done under this Contract. D. Contractor shall be responsible for any flooding or sanitary backup on his work and to the property owners affected by such flooding or backup. E. Contractor shall make such provisions as may be required by the Local, State or Federal Health Officers, or any other public bodies, with jurisdiction over the flow of storm drainage, sanitary sewage and natural flows. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) SECTION 02225 CONTROL OF EXISTING FLOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02225 PAGE 2 of 2 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 02230 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02230 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 02230 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1.Cutting of trees and other vegetation. 2.Clearing of miscellaneous vegetation. 3.Removal of roots and related growth. 4.Disposal of all waste materials. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clearing: Clearing shall consist in the felling, cutting up, and satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation designated for removal in accordance with these specifications. B. Drainage Course: Layer supporting basement grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. C. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal of roots 1 ½ inch and larger, organic matter and debris, and stumps having a diameter of three inches or larger, to a depth of at least 18 inches below the surface and or subgrade; whichever is lower, and the disposal thereof. SECTION 02230 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02230 PAGE 2 of 4 1.4 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall conduct all clearing and grubbing activities in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to barriers, warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. C. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained, experienced, and as required licensed, in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Secure the work area and take precautions for preventing injuries to persons or damage to property in or about the work. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities or sensitive areas from damage by clearing and grubbing operations. B. Establish all required erosion and sedimentation controls prior to initiating work. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clear, grub, remove, and dispose of all vegetation and debris within the limits of construction, as designated on the plans or as required by Engineer. Contractor shall remove only those trees and shrubs absolutely necessary to allow for the construction. The work shall also include the preservation and protection of all vegetation designated to remain. B. A preconstruction meeting shall be held with Engineer, Owner, local authorities, property owner(s) and other appropriate personnel, if required, prior to any clearing. SECTION 02230 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02230 PAGE 3 of 4 C. The area within the limits of construction or as designated shall be cleared and grubbed of all trees, stumps, roots, brush, undergrowth, hedges, heavy growth of grasses or weeds, debris and rubbish of any nature which, in the opinion of Engineer, is unsuitable for foundation material. Nonperishable items that will be a minimum of five (5) feet below the finish elevation of the earthwork or slope of the embankment may be left in place. D. Contractor shall provide barricades, fences, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements, not indicated to be removed, and improvements on adjoining property. All improvements damaged by this work shall be restored to their original condition or to a condition acceptable to the owner or other parties or authorities having jurisdiction. E. Protection of Trees and Vegetation: Contractor shall protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated on the Drawings to remain in place against cutting, breaking, or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary fences or barricades as required to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing at no additional cost. F. Trees and shrubs that are to remain within the construction limits will be indicated on the Drawings or conspicuously marked on the Project Site. Unless otherwise noted, trees within the construction limits shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. G. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to remain where the roots and branches obstruct construction of utilities or other subsurface improvements. Contractor shall provide protection for roots and branches over 1 ½ inches diameter that are cut during construction operations. Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Provide earth cover as soon as possible. H. Damaged trees and vegetation designated to remain shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor’s expense in a manner acceptable to Engineer if they are damaged by construction operations. Repair tree damage as directed by a qualified tree surgeon. I. Trees and vegetation designated to remain shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor’s expense in a manner acceptable to Engineer if they are damaged by construction operations. Repair tree damage as directed by a qualified arborist. J. All brush, tree tops, stumps, and debris shall be hauled away and disposed of in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Contactor shall clean up debris resulting from clearing operations continuously with the progress of the work and remove promptly all salvageable material that becomes his property and is not to be reused in construction. Sale of material on the site is prohibited. Debris from the site shall be removed in such a manner as to prevent spillage. Keep pavement and area adjacent to site clean and free from mud, dirt, dust, and debris at all times. SECTION 02230 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02230 PAGE 4 of 4 K. The method of stripping, clearing and grubbing the site shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. However, all stumps, roots and other debris protruding through the ground surface or in excavated areas shall be completely removed to a minimum depth of 18 inches below surface and/or subgrade whichever is lower and disposed of off the site by the Contractor, at his expense. L. Marginal Areas: In marginal areas, with Engineer’s permission, remove trees where the following conditions exist. 1.Root Cutting: When clearing up to the "clearing limits,” the Contractor shall also remove any tree which is deemed marginal such that when the roots are cut and the tree could be rendered unstable by the affects of high winds and in danger of toppling into either the right-of-way or onto private property. 2.Slender Bending Trees: Where young, tall, thin trees are left unsupported by the clearing operation, and are likely to bend over into the right-of-way, Contractor, during the clearing operation, shall selectively remove those trees which are located outside and adjacent to the clearing limits and any right-of-way or easement as well. During the course of construction and during the one-year warranty period, the Contractor shall remove such young trees that overhang into the right-of-way or cleared area. M. Stripping of Topsoil: Remove the existing topsoil to a depth of 6 inches or to the depth encountered from all areas in which excavation will occur. The topsoil shall be stored in stockpiles, separate from the excavated material, if the topsoil is to be respread. Otherwise material shall be disposed of off-site at Contractor’s expense. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Contactor shall consolidate and clean-up debris resulting from clearing and grubbing operations continuously with the progress of the work. B. All brush, treetops, stumps, and debris resulting from clearing and grubbing operations shall be hauled away and disposed of in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Any materials salvaged by Contractor from clearing and grubbing operations shall be promptly removed from the Project Site. C. Contractor will be responsible for obtaining all applicable permits and paying all fees for the disposal of excess material. D. Sale of material on the Project Site is prohibited. E. Burning of material is prohibited. END OF SECTION SECTION 02232 RIP RAP OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02232 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 02232 - RIP RAP PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section defines requirements for the procurement and placement of rip rap. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Rip rap shall be used to protect foundations of piers, abutments, walls, slopes of embankments and waterways from water damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RIP RAP A. Rip Rap material shall consist of sound, tough, durable and angular rock, free from decomposed stones or other defects impairing its durability. The size of a stone as hereinafter specified shall be its least dimension. Broken concrete or rounded stones are not acceptable. The type of material to be used shall be as noted on the plans, in the special provisions or as may be ordered by the Engineer. 1.Standard Rip Rap: Material shall conform to the following requirements. a.Not more than 15% of the rip rap shall be scattered spalls and stones less than 6 inches in size b.No stone shall be larger than 30 inches in size, and at least 75% of the weight (mass) shall be stones at least 15 inches in size. 2.Intermediate Rip Rap: This material shall conform to the following gradation: Gradation of Intermediate Rip Rap Stone Size % of the weight (mass) 18 inches 0 10 inches to 18 inches 30-50 6 inches to 10 inches 30-50 SECTION 02232 RIP RAP OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02232 PAGE 2 of 3 4 inches to 6 inches 20-30 2 inches to 4 inches 10-20 Less than 2 inches 0-10 3.Modified Rip Rap: This material shall conform to the following gradation: Gradation of Modified Rip Rap Stone Size % of the weight (mass) 10 inches 0 6 inches to 10 inches 20-50 4 inches to 6 inches 30-60 2 inches to 4 inches 30-40 1 inches to 2 inches 10-20 Less than 1 inches 0-10 4.Special Rip Rap: This material shall conform to the following gradation: Gradation of Special Rip rap (ConnDOT Gradation No. 3) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 2 1/2” 100 2” 90-100 1 1/2” 35-70 1” 0-15 1/2” 0-5 B. Bedding: The bedding material for rip rap shall conform to the specifications of the material indicated on the Drawings. SECTION 02232 RIP RAP OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02232 PAGE 3 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The area to be protected by rip rap shall be accurately shaped prior to placing of any bedding material or rip rap. Where bedding material is called for, it shall be placed on the prepared area and compacted to the depth, lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. B. Rip rap shall be placed to its full course thickness in one operation in such a manner as to produce a reasonably well-graded mass of rock without causing displacement of the underlying material. C. The finished surface shall be free from pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones. Placing this material by methods likely to cause segregation of the various sizes of stone will not be permitted. D. Rearranging of individual stones by mechanical or hand methods will be required to the extent necessary to obtain a reasonably well-graded distribution of the specified stone sizes. E. The completed course shall be of the specified thickness and to the lines and grades as shown on the plans or as ordered by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 02233 SHEETING AND STAYBRACING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02233 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 02233 - SHEETING AND STAYBRACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1.Shoring and bracing necessary to protect existing buildings, existing culvert, streets, walkways, utilities, and other improvements and excavation against loss or ground caving embankments. 2.Maintenance of shoring and bracing. 3.Removal of shoring and racing, as required. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Contractor shall install sheeting or staybracing as necessary in order to comply with the Applicable Safety Code; to accommodate traffic; to permit access to existing utilities; to provide an opening of proper depth and width in which to install the proposed pipes and other underground structures; and to protect his workmen, employees of the Owner and (Insert Name), State and the public, from death or injury from bank failure, earth collapse or earth movement of any nature whatsoever. In general, all trenches and excavations over 5 feet in depth, any other unstable excavations or excavations in unstable material, shall be protected against the hazard of collapse. 1.4 SHEETING/STAYBRACING DESIGN A. Contractor shall be entirely and solely responsible for the adequacy and sufficiency of all supports and for all sheeting, bracing, shoring, underpinning, cofferdamming, etc. The Contractor shall assume the entire and sole responsibility for damages on account of injury to persons or damage to adjacent pavements and public and private property (including but not limited to, the Work under construction, existing buildings, facilities, etc.) which injury or damage results directly from said Contractor's failure to install, or to leave in place, adequate and sufficient supports, sheeting, bracing, underpinning, cofferdamming, etc. B. Contractor shall submit, in triplicate, a detailed written description of the equipment and sheeting methods he proposes to use to Engineer prior to the installation of any sheeting SECTION 02233 SHEETING AND STAYBRACING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02233 PAGE 2 of 5 and/or shoring. These plans should include, but not be limited to, the type of sheeting or shoring, sizes and dimensions, bracing, spacing, methods of installation and removal, etc. C. All sheeting shall be designed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State where the Work is being performed. He shall be known as the Contractor's Engineer. Sheeting computations and sketches shall be submitted for Engineer's review. 1.5 SHEETING LEFT-IN-PLACE A. Sheeting, shoring or other timbering may be left-in-place at the option of the Contractor when needed to protect other existing facilities or the Work built or to be built under this Contract. However, steel sheeting left-in-place will be paid for only where specifically shown as "Steel Sheeting Left-in-Place" on the Contract Drawings or where ordered by Engineer. B. It is expressly understood and agreed that removing or leaving-in-place any sheeting or shoring, etc., as noted above, shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for any loss damage whatever due to omission of, or failure of, the sheeting, etc., failure to leave it in place, or the settling of the backfill, or any movement of the ground or any structure or object adjacent to any trench or excavation made by Contractor. Engineer will not order sheeting left-in-place at the expense of the Owner in order to accommodate the convenience of the Contractor or to save him the cost of its removal. 1.6 OPTIONAL METHOD OF TRENCHING A. Contractor may, with the approval of Engineer, lay back slopes in accordance with the provisions of the Applicable Safety Code in order to avoid the necessity of sheeting or limiting the quantity thereof. However, in the case of trenches, the toe of this slope will not be lower than one foot above the top of the pipe to be installed. A level bench of at least two (2) feet in width shall be maintained between the toe of the sloped section and vertical trench excavation for pipes with an outside diameter of six (6) feet or less; for pipes with an outside diameter over six (6) feet, a minimum four (4) foot bench shall be provided. Where sloping is used as a substitute for sheeting or staybracing, or used in combination therewith, it shall be sloped a minimum of one horizontal to one vertical except where instability of the material requires a slope flatter than one to one. If the Contractor elects and is allowed to lay back the slopes, there will be no additional payment made for the extra excavation outside of the normal trench or structure excavation payment limits. 1.7 RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER A. There shall be no obligation on the part of Engineer to issue orders for sheeting, staybracing or sheeting left-in-place and/or to pass upon sufficiency and adequacy of sheeting; nor shall the failure on the part of Engineer to give such orders relieve the Contractor from liability for damages occasioned by negligence, or otherwise growing out of the Contractor's failure to either install sufficient and adequate sheeting and/or staybracing or to leave in place in the excavation sufficient and adequate support to prevent the caving in or moving of the ground adjacent to the sides of the excavation during and after the backfilling operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD STAYBRACING A. Wood Staybracing SECTION 02233 SHEETING AND STAYBRACING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02233 PAGE 3 of 5 2.2 STEEL SHEETING A. Steel sheeting: continuous and interlocking sheets, ASTM A-328. SECTION 02233 SHEETING AND STAYBRACING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02233 PAGE 4 of 5 2.3 TRENCH BOXES A. Trench boxes shall not be used unless requested by the Contractor and authorized by Engineer. If authorized, they shall be used only when the protection of workmen is involved, not for support of existing adjacent utilities, structures, embankments, etc. A trench protected by the use of a trench box shall not be considered a sheeted trench. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless expressly authorized by Engineer, sheeting shall be driven ahead of the excavation to avoid loss of material from behind the sheeting. If it is necessary to excavate below the sheeting to facilitate driving, care shall be taken to avoid trimming behind the face along which the sheeting will be driven. Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting. B. All sheeting and staybracing shall be securely installed and properly braced in accordance with the Applicable Safety Code. Engineer may direct the Contractor at any time in writing to have sheeting, bracing, etc. in place to be embedded in backfill or concrete for the purpose of preventing subsequent injury to structures and property. C. The depth of pilot cuts for trenches/structures shall not exceed five (5) feet in depth at any time. Engineer may reduce the depth of the pilot cut should the soil and subsurface conditions warrant such action. Sheeting must be driven by drop hammer or other methods approved in writing by Engineer below the area of the pilot cut. Driving of sheeting above the pilot cut is subject to the directions of Engineer. Engineer may direct the Contractor to use other types of equipment, and to revise the procedure during the excavation of the pilot cut and the driving of the sheeting should it be found necessary to do so. D. Vibratory driving hammers shall not be used unless specifically authorized by Engineer. E. Where sheeting is specified to be left-in-place, it shall be wood sheeting unless otherwise specifically noted on the Contract Drawings. Where wooden sheeting cannot be driven due to the nature of the material, then steel sheeting may be driven and removed in lieu of the wooden sheeting providing the following procedures are followed: 1.Simultaneously with the withdrawal of sheeting and as each layer is compacted in accordance with Section 312310 - Earthwork; or 2.The trench/area will be backfilled to the surface. If the sheeting is to be withdrawn, backfilling will proceed up to each set of rangers and braces; the rangers and braces will be removed; the backfilling will proceed up to the next set of rangers and braces, etc. up to the top of the excavation. The backfill material shall be compacted to 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 99, Method C. Alternate sections of sheeting from the left side and right side of the trench/area shall be removed and the cavity remaining there from shall be jetted thoroughly by high- pressure water, starting at the toe of the sheeting and being drawn to the surface. Sand shall be inserted with the jetting process. 3.Where the bottom of the excavation is not free draining material (some areas of organic material or miscellaneous fill) or where granular backfill is not available or ordered by Engineer, the jetting shall be very carefully done with a minimum amount SECTION 02233 SHEETING AND STAYBRACING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02233 PAGE 5 of 5 of water being expended. In such locations, the Contractor may request the approval of Engineer for other compaction methods in the sheeting cavity. 4.Contractor shall remove the sheeting and/or staybracing from the excavation, except where it is specifically indicated on the Contract Drawings "To be Left- in-Place", or the Contractor may elect to leave in place the sheeting and/or staybracing for his own convenience, or to serve his own interest to protect existing facilities, the Work built or to be built under this Contract, or for the safety of the public, etc., at no cost to the Owner. No sheeting or bracing which is within three feet of the existing or proposed finished grade may be left-in-place without the prior permission of Engineer. This may require the Contractor cut off sheeting at this elevation and at no additional cost to the Owner. 5.Where sheeting, regardless of the type of sheeting used, is left in place, as specified or ordered or at the Contractor's convenience/option, unless otherwise specifically permitted in writing by Engineer, all elements such as rangers, braces, wales, etc. shall be left in place except as specified hereinbefore; and, except such temporary braces required to be removed to make way for the structure/utility. Where it is necessary to remove such temporary braces, the sheeting shall be rebraced, but in no case shall the sheeting be braced against the sides of the structure/utility to be constructed unless approved in writing by the owner of the structure/utility. Where lagging and "soldier" beams are used, the "soldier" beams and all the braces shall also be left in place. 6.Where wood sheeting has been driven below the excavation bottom to provide for a "toe-in", no wood sheeting below the top of pipe or structure shall be removed, but it shall be cut off at this elevation and the remaining sheeting above this line removed as described herein. There will be no payment made for this work, nor for the wood sheeting left-in-place. 7.Sheeting shall be cut away and removed from in front of capped outlets or other braces or inlets set in the pipe for future connections. 8.All sheeting, shoring and bracing removed shall be carefully removed from the excavation in such a manner as not to endanger the completed work or any adjacent pavements, buildings, structures, utilities, property, etc. The sheeting shall be withdrawn to such an extent that it is just above the backfill material being compacted and all voids left or caused by the withdrawal of such sheeting, shall be immediately refilled with approved material and compacted at no additional cost to the Owner. 9.Where the excavation is to be left open during non-working hours, the sheeting shall extend 42 inches above existing grade to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic from the open excavation. END OF SECTION SECTION 02240 DEWATERING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02240 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 02240 – DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Removal of surface water and ground water as necessary to perform the construction required by the contract. 2.Constructing, installing, building, and maintaining all necessary temporary water extraction and management facilities. 3.Furnishing, installing, and operating all necessary pumps, piping, and other equipment. 4.Complying with all applicable approvals, authorizations or permits associated with the management of dewatering wastewaters. 5.Removing all such temporary works and equipment after their intended function is no longer required. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection (DEEP) 1.Connecticut Guidelines for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control, DEP Bulletin 34, State of Connecticut Council on Soil and Water Conservation, 2002. 2.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Stormwater and Dewatering Wastewaters Associated with Construction Activities, (DEEP-WPED-GP-015), latest issue. SECTION 02240 DEWATERING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02240 PAGE 2 of 5 3.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater to a Sanitary Sewer (DEP- WD-GP-007), latest issue. 4.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater Directly to Surface Water (DEP-PED-GP-020), latest issue. 5.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater Directly to Surface Water (DEP-PED-GP-020), latest issue. D. Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies (RCSA) 1.RCSA Section 22a-372-1, 22a-377(b)-1, 22a-377(c)-1, 22a-377(c)-2, Water Diversion. 2.RCSA Section 22a-430-3 through 4, General Conditions Applicable to Water Discharge Permits and Procedures and Criteria for Issuing Water Discharge Permits. 3.RCSA Section 22a-430-8, Underground Injection Control. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations or earthwork areas which would cause flooding of the Project Ste and surrounding area, or softening or loosening of the soil at excavation or earthwork subgrade. B. Provide adequate and satisfactory dewatering and drainage of excavations and furnish all materials and equipment and do all incidental work required in conjunction with the furnishing, installing, and maintaining of same to permit proper and timely completion of all work required. C. Contractor may choose any satisfactory dewatering method he wishes subject to the approval of Engineer, provided such method performs the dewatering required and complies with applicable approvals, authorizations and permits. D. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equipment employed. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent loosening or softening of the subgrade. In this regard, Contractor shall at all times be prepared to alter his construction method or sequence. E. The work shall be maintained dry until the structures (building slabs and footings, paved area, pipe, drainage structure, embankments, etc.) are completed. SECTION 02240 DEWATERING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02240 PAGE 3 of 5 F. All dewatering required by pumping and drainage shall be performed without damage to the excavation, pipe trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, other utilities and any other work or property. Existing or new sanitary sewers shall not be used to dispose of drainage. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering Plan: Prior to installation of the dewatering system, submit design data showing the following, for review by Engineer: 1.Locations and associated construction where dewatering is required. 2.Specific methods and devices proposed for dewatering. 3.Details on protection at the inlet and outlet of pumps, method for floating the pump intake, or other methods to minimize and retain the sediment. 4.Proposed location of dewatering discharge and details of infiltration basins or other discharge location. Per the General Permit, where feasible and appropriate, dewatering wastewaters will be infiltrated into the ground. 5.Details on any containment berm construction when dewatering earth materials. 6.Identification of a contingency plan for emergency operations should the dewatering operation prove inadequate to meet the dewatering need or is found to be causing unacceptable turbidity problems (e.g., alternative discharge locations or use of a portable sediment tank). If turbidity or siltation problems are not adequately controlled by the contingency plan, then the operation will be ceased and a revised dewatering plan submitted for approval prior to further implementation. 1.5 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE A. Comply at all times with the following as applicable to the Project: 1.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Stormwater and Dewatering Wastewaters Associated with Construction Activities, (DEP-PED-GP-015), latest revision. Conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. 2.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater to a Sanitary Sewer (DEP- PERD-GP-007), latest revision. The conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any supplemental plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. SECTION 02240 DEWATERING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02240 PAGE 4 of 5 3.Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection General Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater Remediation Wastewater Directly to Surface Water (DEP-PED-GP-020), latest revision. The conditions of such permit, other conditions of approval or authorizations, and any supplemental plans shall become part of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 JOB CONDITIONS A. Surface Drainage: Intercept and divert precipitation, and surface water, away from excavations through the use of temporary diversion swales, temporary sediment traps, pipes, sumps or other approved means. B. Drainage of Excavated Areas: Provide and maintain ditches of adequate size to collect surface and seepage water, which may enter the excavations. Divert the water into sumps and storm drains or pump into drainage channels or storm drains. When water is to be diverted into a storm drain, provide dewatering settling basins, or other accepted apparatus, such as fractionation tanks, as required to reduce the amount of fine particles, which may be carried into the drain. If a storm drain becomes blocked due to dewatering operation, it shall be cleaned by the Contractor at his own expense. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Where feasible and appropriate, dewatering wastewaters will be infiltrated into the ground. Dewatering wastewaters discharged to surface waters will be discharged in a manner that minimizes the discoloration of the receiving waters. The following measures will be employed to ensure that dewatering wastewaters will not cause scouring or erosion or contain suspended solids in amounts that could reasonably be expected to cause pollution: B. Divert surface waters away from areas needing dewatering. C. Consider if well points and sumps can be used to lower the groundwater table reducing the need for settling facilities. D. For sites that don’t require continuous pumping, pump work areas before construction activities begin each work day. E. Provide filtration near the suction intake. F. Locate pumps, intake sumps, and other intake structures in areas which will not require constant moving, when possible. SECTION 02240 DEWATERING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02240 PAGE 5 of 5 G. Locate pump discharge facilities (portable, permanent, or bio-filtering structures) such that a minimum disturbance of existing wetlands and watercourses is incurred. H. Provide protection at outlets from pumping operations to dissipate pumping surges and prevent erosion at the point of discharge. I. Maintain the water level at such lowered elevations that no danger to structures can occur because of the buildup of excessive hydrostatic pressure on the subgrade, or bottom of trench, unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. J. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. At all times during construction, provide ample means and devices with which to remove promptly and dispose properly of all water entering roadway, trench, and structure excavations and keep them dry until the structures to be built thereon are completed. K. No pipe/culvert/structure shall be laid in water. No masonry shall be laid in water, and no water shall be allowed to rise over masonry (either concrete or brick) in 24 hours after being placed. Nor shall moving water be allowed to rise over masonry for four days. In no event shall water be allowed to rise so as to set up unequal pressures in the structures until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall constantly guard against the possibility of flotation of pipe or structures after installation. He shall place adequate backfill promptly in accordance with Section 31 2310 - Earthwork to prevent this occurrence, and his method of handling drainage and carrying on these operations shall always be adequate to prevent flotation. END OF SECTION SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 1 of 11 SECTION 02270 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Installation of temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 2.Maintenance of temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 3.Monitoring of site condition and installation of supplemental temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 4.Sediment removal and disposal. 5.Temporary seeding or other surface stabilization measures. 6.Removal of temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 7.Monitoring, documentation, and recordkeeping. 8.Installation of permanent erosion control materials. 9.Final cleanup. B. Erosion and sediment control techniques include, but are in no way limited to, silt fence, hay bales, drainage structure inserts/filters, mulching with hay/straw, netting/matting, grassing, stone dikes/berms/check-dams, compost blankets and berms, barriers, diversions, traps, and appurtenances which will ensure that erosion and sediment pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits. C. The measures specified herein are the minimum requirements which Contractor shall comply to control erosion and siltation throughout execution of the work. Contractor shall provide additional work if necessary to control erosion and siltation throughout the duration of the construction as conditions dictate, or as directed by Engineer. D. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. E. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material specifications and shop drawings for all materials furnished under this Section. B. Prior to the start of the construction, submit schedule for the construction of required stormwater detention basins, temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures, clearing and grubbing, grading, structures at watercourses, construction, and paving. C. During construction, submit to Engineer schedule changes that affect timing of construction. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 2 of 11 D. Submit copies of all inspection and maintenance report forms. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies (RCSA) 1.22a-315-10 through 19, Soil and Water Conservation C. Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection (DEEP) 1.Connecticut Guidelines for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control, DEEP Bulletin 34, State of Connecticut Council on Soil and Water Conservation, 2002. D. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. 1.4 PERMIT CONDITIONS A. Contractor and Subcontractors are bound to comply with any project-related permits obtained by Owner or Engineer for the work of the project. Such permits will affect performance of the work, and Contractor and Subcontractors are bound to comply with requirements of such permit and representations contained in permit application as though Contractor and Subcontrator were the Permittee/permit-holder. Requirements and conditions set forth in Owner or Engineer- obtained project-related permits and permit applications shall be binding on Contractor just as any Specification would be. 1.Permit to Conduct Regulated Activities in Inland Wetlands and Watercourses Adjacent Upland Review Areas, Permit # 216IWC10, Issued September 15, 2016, Expires September 14, 2021. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall be responsible for the timely installation and maintenance of all sedimentation control devices necessary to prevent the erosion of soil or movement of sediment from construction activities to off-site areas via surface runoff or underground drainage systems. Measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings necessary to prevent the movement of sediment off site shall be installed, maintained, removed, and cleaned up at the expense of Contractor. B. Where additional erosion and sedimentation control measures are required beyond what is indicated on the Drawings or herein, comply with applicable sections of the Connecticut Guidelines for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control, DEEP Bulletin 34, State of Connecticut Council on Soil and Water Conservation, 2002. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 3 of 11 C. Engineer has the authority to order immediate, additional, temporary control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams or other watercourses, or other areas of water impoundment and damage by erosion. D. If Engineer observes construction procedures and operations that jeopardize erosion control provisions, Engineer will notify Contractor. If such construction procedures and operations are not corrected promptly, Engineer may suspend the performance of any or all construction until corrections have been made, and such suspension shall not be the basis of any claim by Contractor for additional compensation, nor for an extension of time to complete the Work. E. Should construction materials be washed away or otherwise rendered ineffective in the opinion of Engineer during the progression of the Work, Contractor shall replace the installations at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL PROVISIONS A. Coordinate temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures with permanent erosion control features to the extent practical to ensure economical, effective and continuous erosion control throughout construction and post-construction periods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HAY BALES A. Hay bales shall be made of cut hay with forty (40) pounds minimum weight and 120 pounds maximum weight. Bales shall be free of rotten or degraded hay, significant splits or voids. Hay bales shall be held together with a minimum of two bands made of either wire or heavy twine. B. Stakes to anchor the bales shall be a minimum of 36 inches long and made of hardwood with a minimum dimension of 1½-inch by 1½-inch normal size. Metal stakes may be used instead of wooden stakes. Metal stakes shall be round, “U”, “T”, “L”, or “C” shaped with a minimum weight of 0.5 pounds per foot. C. Replace individual hay bales upon loss of 30% of original mass or volume, whichever is less. 2.2 SILT FENCE A. Woven Polypropylene geotextile having a minimum weight of 3.1 ounces per square yard conforming to the following: 1.Mechanical and Physical Properties of Silt Fence Geotextile Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Weight ASTM D 3776 oz/yd2 5.6 Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 Pounds 60 Grab Elongation (Max percent) ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 15-30 Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D 4533 Pounds 30 Puncture ASTM D 4833 Pounds 30 Mullen Burst ASTM D 3786 psi 150-200 SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 4 of 11 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 Sec-1 0.15 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 15-20 Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 30-35 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 B. Silt fence shall be constructed of a minimum thirty-six (36) inch wide continuous woven geotextile. The material shall have a high sediment filtration capacity, high slurry flow and minimum clogging characteristics. Edges of the fabric shall be finished to prevent the outer fibers from pulling away from the geotextile. Geotextile shall be free of defects or flaws that significantly affect its physical and/or filtering properties. C. Fabric shall be securely fastened to stakes a minimum of 42 inches long and made of hardwood with a minimum dimension of 1½ inch by 1½ inch normal size such that a 6 to 8 inch length of fabric is unattached at the bottom for anchorage in soil. Metal stakes may be used instead of wooden stakes. Metal stakes shall be round, “U”, “T”, “L”, or “C” shaped with a minimum weight of 0.5 pounds per foot. Stakes shall be spaced not greater than ten feet apart. When required, wire or another type of support shall be constructed between the geotextile fabric and the posts to improve the load carrying capacity of the silt fence. 2.3 CATCH BASIN INSERT A. Manufactured “bag type” catch basin insert of woven polypropylene geotextile with integral lifting loops or straps conforming to the following: 1.Mechanical and Physical Properties of Catch Basin Insert Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 Pounds 350 Grab Elongation (Max percent) ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 30 Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D 4533 Pounds 120 Puncture ASTM D 4833 Pounds 140 Mullen Burst ASTM D 3786 psi 600 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 gal/min/sq ft 0.3 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 150 Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 (U.S. Sieve) 40 UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 90 Note: Catch basin inserts for catch basins with curb openings shall be equipped with integral curb deflector. 2.4 STRAW MULCH A. Straw mulch shall be comprised of threshold straw of oats, wheat, barely, or rye that is free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable material. Straw mulch shall contain at least 50 percent by weight of material to be 10-in or longer. Straw shall be in an air-dry condition and SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 5 of 11 suitable for placement with blower equipment. Straw mulch shall be utilized on all newly graded areas with slopes exceeding 5% to protect areas against washouts and erosion unless other erosion control measures are provided. 2.5 FILTER BERM COMPOST A. Where establishing vegetation is not planned, compost shall be a decomposed, weed free organic matter source derived from agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids (treated sewage sludge); yard trimmings; or source-separated or mixed solid waste. Compost shall possess a moisture content of 30 to 60% and a organic matter content of 25 to 100%. The maximum particle length shall be 6”, and 100% passing a 3”, 90 to 100% passing a 1”, 70% to 100% passing a 3/4”, and 30% to 75% passing a 1/4” screen. However, no more than 50% passing a 1/4” screen in high rainfall/flow rate situations. B. Where establishing vegetation is planned, compost shall be use a well decomposed, stable, weed free organic matter source derived from agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids (treated sewage sludge); yard trimmings; or source-separated or mixed solid waste. Compost shall possess a moisture content of 30 to 60%, a pH of 6.0 to 8.5 and an organic matter content of 25 to 65%. The maximum particle length shall be 6’, and 100% passing a 3”, 90 to 100% passing a 1”, 70% to 100% passing a 3/4”, and 30% to 75% passing a 1/4” screen. However, no more than 60% passing a 1/4” in high rainfall/flow rate situations. It shall contain no substances toxic to plants, shall possess no objectionable odors, and shall not resemble the raw material from which it was derived. 2.6 COMPOST SOIL BLANKET A. Compost soil blankets may be utilized on slopes of up to 2:1. B. Slightly scarify slopes and remove large clods, rocks, stumps, roots larger than 2 inches in diameter and debris on slopes, where vegetation is to be established. This soil preparation step may be eliminated where approved by the Landscape Architect/Designer, or where seeding or planting isn't planned. Track (compact) slope using a bulldozer before applying compost. C. Apply compost at the following rates: Compost Application Rates Annual Rainfall/Flow Rate Total Precipitation & Rainfall Erosivity Index Application Rate for Slopes to be Vegetated (Note 1) Application Rate for Slopes not being Unvegetated Low 1-25” & 20 - 90 ½ - ¾ ” 1” - 1 ½” Average 26-50” & 91 - 200 ¾ - 1” 1 ½” - 2” High 51” and above, & 201 and above 1-2” 2-4” D. Lower application rates indicated for slopes to be vegetated should only be used in conjunction with seeding, and for compost blankets applied during the prescribed planting season for the particular region. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 6 of 11 E. Compost shall be uniformly applied using an approved spreader unit, including bulldozers, side discharge manure spreaders, etc. Track (compact) the compost layer using a bulldozer or other appropriate equipment. (This step may be eliminated where impractical or where deemed unnecessary by the Landscape Architect/Designer.) Alternatively, apply compost using a pneumatic (blower) unit, or other unit that propels the product directly at the soil surface, thereby preventing water from moving between the soil-compost interface. Thorough watering may be used to improve settling of the compost. Apply compost layer approximately 3 feet (90 cm) over the top of the slope, or overlap it into existing vegetation. F. On highly unstable soils, use compost in conjunction with appropriate structural measures. G. Dry or hydraulic seeding may be completed following compost application, as required, or during the compost application itself, where a pneumatic unit is used to apply the compost. 2.7 STONE CHECK DAM A. Stone shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Stone for Check Dam (ConnDOT M.01.01 Grading No. 3) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 2 1/2” 100 2” 90-100 1 1/2” 35-70 1 0-15 1/2” 0-5 Stone shall be sound, tough, durable, angular, not subject to disintegration, on exposure to water, or weathering, be chemically stable and shall be suitable in all other respects for the purpose intended. B. Geotextile may be used under the stone to provide a stable foundation and to facilitate removal of the stone. 2.8 EROSION CONTROL SEED MIXTURE Erosion Control Seed Species (Note 1) Application Rate, Pounds Per Acre Application rate, Pounds Per 1,000 sf Optimum Seed Depth, inches (Note 2) Optimum Seeding Dates (Note 3) Annual ryegrass Lolium multiflorum 40 1.00 0.5 3/1 - 6/15 and 8/1 - 10/15 Perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 40 1.00 0.5 3/15 - 7/1 and 8/1 - 10/15 Winter Rye Secale cereale 120 3.00 1.00 4/5 - 7/1 and 8/15 - 10/15 Oats Avena sativa 86 2 1 3/1 - 6/15 and 8/1 - 9/15 Winter Wheat Triticum aestivum 120 3 1 4/15 - 7/1 and 8/15 - 10/15 SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 7 of 11 Millet Echinochloa crusgalli 20 .5 1 5/15 - 7/15 Sudangrass Sorghum sudanese 30 .7 1 5/15 - 8/1 Buckwheat Fagopyrum esculentum 15 .4 1 4/1 - 9/15 Weeping lovegrass Eragostis curbula 5 .2 .25 6/1 - 7/1 ConnDOT All Purpose Mix 150 3.4 .5 3/1 - 6/15 and 8/1 - 10/15 Notes: 1 - Listed species may be used in combinations to obtain a broader time spectrum. If used in combinations, reduce each species planting rate by 20% of that listed 2 - Seed at twice the indicated depth for sandy soils. 3 - May be planted throughout summer if soil moisture is adequate or can be irrigated. Fall seeding may be extended 15 days in the coastal towns 2.9 EROSION CONTROL MATTING A. Temporary Erosion Control Blanket shall be 1) Curlex® Excelsior Blanket, as manufactured by American Excelsior Company, 2) ERO-MAT® V75S(FD), as manufactured by Verdyol Plant Research, Ltd., or 3) Landlok® S2 RD, as manufactured by SI® Geosolutions, or 4) approved equal. B. Degradable Erosion Control Fabric Netting shall be Landlok® 407 GR, as manufactured by 1) SI® Geosolutions, or 2) GeoJute® as manufactured by Belton Industries, Inc., or 3) BioNet® S150BN™ Double Net Straw Blanket, as manufactured by North American Green, or 4) approved equal. C. Long-Term and Non-degradable Turf Reinforcement Mats shall be 1) Pyramat®, as manufactured by SI® Geosolutions, or 2) Recyclex® Turf Reinforcement Matting, as manufactured by American Excelsior Company, or 3) Vmax3 C350™, as manufactured by North American Green, or 4) approved equal. D. Erosion control matting shall be secured with staples or an alternative attachment device such as geotextile pins or plastic pegs as recommended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the alternative attachment device for the Engineer's approval prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install erosion and sedimentation control measures as shown on the Drawings prior to any site disturbance. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 8 of 11 B. No work shall be started until erosion control schedules and installation have been accepted by Engineer. C. Engineer has the authority to control the surface area of each material exposed by construction operations and to direct Contractor to immediately provide permanent or temporary pollution control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent watercourses or other areas of water impoundment. Every effort shall be made by Contractor to prevent erosion on the site and abutting properties or areas. D. Contractor shall construct all permanent erosion and sediment control features at the earliest practical time as outlined in the accepted schedule. Temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be used to correct conditions that develop during construction, which were unforeseen, but are needed prior to installation of permanent control features, or that are needed temporarily to control erosion or sedimentation which develops during construction operations. E. Contractor shall limit as necessary the surface area of the earth material exposed to sufficiently maintain and protect the slopes to prevent pollution. Where erosion is likely to be a problem, clearing and grubbing operations shall be scheduled and performed so that grading operations and permanent erosion and sediment control features can follow immediately thereafter, if conditions permit; otherwise, temporary control measures will be required between successive construction stages. F. Erosion control measures shall be maintained by Contractor, and he shall remove such installations only upon completion of the work and the site is stabilized or when authorized to do so by Engineer. G. Contractor shall operate all equipment and perform all construction operations so as to minimize pollution. Contractor shall cease any of his operations, which will increase pollution during rainstorms. H. Failure by Contractor to control erosion, pollution, and siltation shall be cause for the Engineer to employ outside assistance to provide the necessary corrective measures. The cost of such assistance, including engineering costs, will be charged to Contractor and appropriate deductions made to Contractor's payment. 3.2 HAY BALES A. Hay bales shall be positioned as indicated on the Drawings and/or as necessary to prevent off site movement of sediment produced by, or as a result of, construction activities, or as direct by the Engineer. B. Hay bales shall be utilized on all catch basins and drainage facilities on the Project Site to prevent the entry of sediments or other debris. Maintain such protection throughout execution of the work until such drainage facilities have been abandoned/removed. C. Bales shall be placed lengthwise with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another to form a continuous barrier. Bales shall be entrenched to a depth of 4 inches and backfilled, with the backfill placed toward the potential source of runoff and sediment. All bales shall be installed so that bindings are oriented around the sides rather than along the tops and bottoms. Each bale shall be anchored with a minimum of two stakes, driving the first stake in each bale towards the previously laid bale to drive the bales together. Stakes must be driven a minimum of 18 inches SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 9 of 11 into the ground. Loose hay shall be inserted between bales as required to prevent water from escaping between the bales. 3.3 GEOTEXTILE SILT FENCE A. Install a filter fabric silt fence prior to construction and remove after full surface restoration has been achieved. Install silt fence as indicated on the Drawings and/or as necessary to prevent off site movement of sediment produced by, or as a result of, construction activities. B. Install as follows: 1.Hand shovel excavate a small trench a minimum of six inches wide by six inches deep on the upslope side of the desired fence line location. 2.Unroll the siltation fence system, position the post in the back of the trench (downhill side), and hammer the post at least 12 inches into the original ground. 3.Fabric rolls shall be spliced at posts. The fabric shall be overlapped six inches, folded over and securely fastened to posts. 4.Lay the bottom 6 inches of the fabric into the trench to prevent undermining by storm water run-off. 5.Backfill the trench and compact. Compaction is necessary to prevent the run-off from eroding the backfill. 6.For slope and swale installations, extend the ends of the trench sufficiently up slope such that the bottom end of the fence will be higher than the top of the lowest portion of the fence. 3.4 CATCH BASIN INLET SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Install catch basin inlet sediment control devices in each exiting catch basin as long as it remains in use in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines at the locations shown on the Drawings. B. A catch basin sediment filter shall be installed and changed/cleaned per the manufacturer’s recommendations, or as directed by the (Insert Name), during construction. C. New catch basins shall have a filter installed immediately upon completion of construction. In addition, a hay bale, or similar, barrier shall be installed around the new basin and maintained in place until binder is placed or disturbed areas draining to it are stabilized. D. Catch basins with curb openings shall have filter fabric covering the opening and the edges of the fabric shall be secured. A filter boom shall also be placed over the opening. 3.5 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Temporary sediment traps shall be employed as required during construction. Sedimentation shall be periodically removed from the basins and from behind erosion and sedimentation control devices. The Contractor shall direct all possible site runoff to the temporary sedimentation basins. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 10 of 11 B. The temporary sedimentation basins shall be maintained from the start of construction until construction of the permanent detention basins is completed and perimeter areas are stabilized. 3.6 TEMPORARY MULCHING A. Apply temporary mulch to areas where rough grading has been completed but final grading is not anticipated to begin within 30 calendar days of the completion of rough grading or where final grading has been completed but seeding is not anticipated for 20 days. 1.Straw/Hay Mulch Exposure Period: 6 months Application Method: By hand or machine Application Rate: 110 lbs/1,000 square feet. 2.Bark Chips/Shredded Bark Exposure Period: Less than one year Application Method: By hand or machine Application Rate: 6 cubic yards /1,000 square feet. 3.7 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MATS A. Erosion control mats shall be furnished, installed, maintained, and later removed in ditches or swales, on embankment slopes, and excavation slopes at the locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. All areas shall be smooth graded and compacted. Remove all rocks, dirt clods, vegetation and other obstructions that may cause damage to the mats. C. Unroll mats parallel to the direction of water flow and lay flat against the ground. Overlap roll ends 1-2 feet with upslope mat on the top to prevent uplift of mat end by water flow. Overlay adjacent edges of mat by six inches. Extend mat 2-3 feet above the crest of steep slopes and anchor by excavating a 6-inch deep trench, and secure end of mat in trench, backfill and compact. Secure mat to the ground using staples or pins furnished by manufacturer of mat. D. When no longer required, as determined by the Engineer, temporary erosion control mats shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed and properly disposed. E. Ground disturbances, including holes and depressions caused by the installation and removal of the temporary erosion control blanket shall be backfilled and repaired. 3.8 INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE A. Contractor is responsible to maintain the sediment and erosion control features at all times throughout the project duration and until the completion certification and approval has been issued. SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02270 PAGE 11 of 11 B. Regular erosion and sediment control system inspections shall be conducted by Contractor throughout the project duration. At a minimum, Contractor shall conduct daily inspections and maintain erosion control systems in good operating condition. Report the results of the inspection and the recommended maintenance and/or repair requirements to Engineer. C. In the event that the sedimentation and erosion control measures employed by Contractor prove to be inadequate as determined by the Engineer, Contractor shall adjust operations to the extent necessary to prevent erosion and sediment transport. D. Surface water shall be pumped to maintain excavations free of water. Comply with applicable requirements of the Connecticut Department of Environmental Protection, specifically those requirements related to the management of stormwater and dewatering wastewaters associated with construction activities. E. Hay bales and/or silt fences. 1.Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of the bale or fabric. 2.Replace damaged or degraded bales as necessary or when directed by the Engineer. 3.Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-ft minimum overlap. Overlaps may only be made at fence posts. 4.Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the bales/fence is filtering all runoff. F. Erosion Control Mats shall be inspected at least once a week. Areas where the mat has become dislodged from the soil surface or become torn shall be re-graded and re-seeded as necessary and the mat re-installed. When repetitive failures occur at the same location review conditions and modify erosion control measures to reduce failure rate. Temporary erosion control blanket damaged during the progress of work or resulting from the Contractor's vehicles, equipment, or operations shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor. G. Clean catch basin inlet sediment control devices in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. H. Any catch basins that collect sediment as a result of Contractor’s work shall be thoroughly cleaned out by Contractor. END OF SECTION SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 1 of 24 SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Preparation and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2.Excavating and backfilling for structures. 3.Excavation and backfilling for underground utilities and associated appurtenances. 4.Excavation, backfill and compaction for the demolition/removal of subsurface utilities and improvements. 5.Earth retention systems. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 GENERAL A. Contractor is advised that lines and grades, as shown on the Drawings, are subject to change. Although it is intended to adhere to what is shown on Drawings, Engineer reserves the right to make changes in lines and grades of utilities or other subsurface construction when such changes may be necessary or advantageous. B. In open trenching on public roadways, Contractor shall be governed by the conditions, restrictions and regulations made by the local or state authority as applicable. All such regulations shall be in addition to those set down in the Specifications. 1.3 EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATIONS A. Excavation - Excavation shall be unclassified and no consideration will be given to the nature of the materials. Excavation shall comprise and include the satisfactory removal and disposal of all materials encountered regardless of the nature of the materials and shall be understood to include but not limited to earth, fill, boulders, foundations, pavements, curbs, piping, cobbles, stones, footings, bricks, concrete, previously abandoned drainage structures and utility structures abandoned and not removed by the utility and debris. B. Common Excavation - Excavation of all materials that can be excavated, moved, loaded, transported, and unloaded using heavy equipment or that can be excavated and dumped into SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 2 of 24 place or loaded onto hauling equipment by excavation equipment (shovel, bucket, backhoe, dragline, or clam shell) or moved with dozer-type equipment, appropriate to the material type, character, and nature of the materials. The presence of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than 1 cubic yard is not in itself sufficient cause to change the classification of the surrounding material. All Common Excavation shall be included in the Base Bid. C. Rock Excavation - Rock Excavation as defined herein. The excavation and removal of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than 1 cubic yard encountered in materials otherwise conforming to the definition of Common Excavation shall be classified as rock excavation. The presence of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than 1 cubic yard is not in itself sufficient cause to change the classification of the surrounding material. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction D. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1.ACI 229R-99 - Controlled Low-Strength Materials (CLSM). E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.AASHTO Method T 90 - Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. 2.AASHTO T104 - Standard Method of Test for Soundess of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 3.AASHTO Method T146 - Standard Method of Test for Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for Test. F. ASTM International (ASTM). 1.ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. 2.ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 3 of 24 3.ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m3)). 4.ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 5.ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 6.ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 7.ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or flowable concrete used to fill an excavation. B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated sub-grade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Benching: A method of limiting cave-in potential by excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or near-vertical surfaces between levels. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Clearing: Clearing shall consist in the felling, cutting up, and satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation designated for removal in accordance with these specifications. F. Drainage Course: Layer supporting basement grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. G. Earth Retention Systems: Any structural system, such as sheeting and bracing or cofferdams, designed to retain in-situ soils in place and prevent the collapse of the sides of an excavation in order to protect employees and adjacent structures. H. Excavation: Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by earth removal. 1.Additional Excavation: Excavation beyond required dimensions or below subgrade elevations that is requested and/or directed by Engineer. Additional Excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 4 of 24 2.Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. 3.Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below the elevations specified on the plans, beyond the limits indicated on the plans, or where no dimensions are indicated, beyond depths, elevations, and dimensions reasonably necessary for construction of the work without the request and/or direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as any remedial work directed by Engineer, or if applicable Geotechnical Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. I. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. J. Finished Grade: The proposed final elevations shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications. K. Geotechnical Engineer: A qualified and licensed entity designated for the project as the authority on the assessment, design, and oversight of soil and/or rock conditions and construction affected by such conditions. L. Geotechnical Testing Agency: An independent testing agency employed by Owner, or by Contractor is called-for, and qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. M. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal of roots 1 ½ inch and larger, organic matter and debris, and stumps having a diameter of three inches or larger, to a depth of at least 18 inches below the surface and or subgrade; whichever is lower, and the disposal thereof. N. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include earth retention systems, sloping and benching systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide the necessary protection. O. Regular Excavation: Removal and disposal of any and all material above subgrade elevation, except solid rock and undercut excavation, located within the limits of construction. P. Rock: Solid ledges, bedded deposits, unstratified masses and conglomerations of material so firmly cemented as to possess the characteristics of solid rock which cannot be removed without systematic drilling or hoe ramming. All boulders containing a volume of more than one (1) cubic yard shall be considered rock. Q. Rock Excavation: Removal and satisfactory disposal of Rock, which, in the opinion of Engineer, cannot be excavated except by drilling, wedging, jack hammering or hoe ramming or the excavation of boulders or rock fragments containing a volume of more than one (1) cubic yard. The presence of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than 1 cubic yard is not in itself sufficient cause to change the classification of the surrounding material. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 5 of 24 R. Licensed Professional Engineer: A person who is licensed as a professional engineer in the state where the work is to be performed. However, a professional engineer, registered in any state is deemed to be a "registered professional engineer" within the meaning of this standard when approving designs for "manufactured protective systems" or "tabulated data" to be used in interstate commerce. S. Satisfactory Materials: Earth material that meets the classification, use, and/or gradation requirements herein that does not contain limestone, shale, clay, ash, slag, friable material, organic or vegetative materials, topsoil, wood, trash, broken concrete, masonry rubble, trash, refuse, or frozen materials. T. Shield System: A structure that is designed to withstand the forces imposed on it by a cave-in and thereby protects employees within the structure. Shields can be permanent structures or can be designed to be portable and moved along as work progresses. Additionally, shields can be either pre-manufactured or job-built in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.652(c)(3) or (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usually referred to as "trench boxes" or "trench shields." U. Sloping: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating to form sides of an excavation that are inclined away from the excavation so as to prevent cave-ins. The angle of incline required to prevent a cave-in varies with differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and application of surcharge loads. V. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. W. Sub-grade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below drainage fill. X. Surplus Material: Excavated acceptable material that cannot be utilized elsewhere on the site as backfill or embankment fill, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Y. Temporary Dewatering System: A system to lower and control water to maintain stable, undisturbed subgrades at the lowest excavation levels. Dewatering shall be provided for all pipelines, structures and for all other miscellaneous excavations. Z. Testing Laboratory: A qualified entity engaged to perform specific laboratory tests. AA. Testing Agency: A qualified entity engaged to collect samples, perform specific in-field tests, and/or inspections. The Testing Laboratory may provide the services of the Testing Agency. BB. Trench: A narrow excavation (in relation to its length) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 6 of 24 CC. Unacceptable Material: Soil material that contains organic silt, peat, vegetation, wood or roots, stones or rock fragments over six (6) inches in diameter or exceeding 40 percent by weight of the backfill material, porous biodegradable matter, loose or soft fill, construction debris, or refuse, or material which cannot be compacted to the specified or indicated density. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Site Characterization of Off-Site Borrow Sources: The following information shall be submitted to Engineer for review at least two weeks prior to use of an off-site borrow source: 1.Location and name of the borrow source site. 2.Owner and contact information for the borrow source site. 3.Present and past usage of the source site and materials. 4.Any previously existing report(s) associated with an assessment of the source site as relates to the presence of oils, hazardous materials, or other organic and non-organic constituents which may be considered contaminants. 5.Location within the site from which the material will be obtained. 6.Chemical Testing Data a.For each type/classification of earth material proposed and each source of earth material proposed: Submit a letter signed by an authorized representative of material supplier stating that such proposed material is free of oils, hazardous materials, or other organic and non-organic constituents which may be considered contaminants. B. Samples 1.30-pound sample of each type of off-site bedding, fill, aggregates, and backfill that are proposed for use at the Project Site in an air-tight container for the testing laboratory, a minimum of two weeks prior to delivery of such material to the site. Use of these proposed materials by Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection shall be at Contractor's risk. C. Material Testing Data 1.Gradation analysis all proposed bedding, fill, aggregates, and backfill. 2.Soil classification and Moisture-Dry Density Curve for all proposed bedding, fill, and backfill. D. Field Testing Results 1.Compaction test results keyed to date and specific location of testing. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 7 of 24 E. Product Data 1.Plastic warning tape. 2.Separation fabric, filter fabric, geogrids, or similar geotextiles. 1.7 SAFETY A. Contractor shall conduct all excavation activities in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. C. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and open excavations. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. D. Contractor shall properly design and furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools necessary to construct permanent or temporary excavation support systems, including, but not necessarily limited to, sheet piling, trench shields, trench boxes, timber trench shoring, pneumatic/hydraulic shoring, steel sheeting or sheeting using other materials, sloping, and benching. E. Any time an excavation is to remain open, at a minimum, provide full enclosure with safety barriers and fencing, warning signs, and additional safety control measures as appropriate for the condition. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Utility Mark-out 1.Prior to commencing work, comply with utility mark-out requirements of the Call-Before- You-Dig System (1-800-922-4455). 2.Verify the location of all subsurface utilities marked through the Call-Before-You-Dig System. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 8 of 24 3.Not all subsurface facilities or structures will be identified through the Call-Before-You- Dig System. Confirm the location of other subsurface utilities and other subsurface facilities or structures prior to commencing work. Field-mark utilities as required. C. Codes and Standards: Perform the work of this Section in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Engineer reserves the right to perform all in-field testing specified in this Section and reserves the right to determine the suitability of all materials to be used for fills and reject any fill not meeting the specifications. E. Field Density testing and subgrade observation shall be performed by the designated entity F. Weather Limitations: 1.Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees Fahrenheit (32 F) shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. 2.Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 1.9 TESTING A. The Owner will retain a testing entity to perform observation and testing of the work under this Section. The testing entity’s presence does not constitute supervision or direction of Contractor’s work. Neither the presence of the testing entity nor any observations and testing performed by him, nor any notice or failure to give notice shall excuse Contractor from conformance with these Specifications or from defects discovered in his work. B. Borrow and Fill: Contractor shall provide testing as defined below. 1.Gradation analysis for each type of borrow and on-site fill materials by ASTM D422. 2.Soil classification (ASTM D2487) and Moisture-Dry Density Curve (Proctor Test- Modified) by ASTM D1557 for all proposed fill and backfill materials at the frequency specified below: a.For suitable soil materials removed during Trench Excavation, perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of similar soil type. Similarity of soil types will be as determined by the Engineer. b.For borrow materials, perform tests from each proposed source, at a rate of one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of soil type. Similarity of soil types will be as determined by the Engineer. C. Compaction Testing: Owner will conduct compaction testing. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 9 of 24 1.If testing indicates that compacted subgrade, backfill, or fill are below specified density, additional compaction and/or replacement of material shall be provided at no expense to Owner. D. Chemical Testing: Prior to delivery of any earth material to the Project Site, Contractor shall conduct chemical testing to demonstrate that such material is free of oils, hazardous materials, or other organic and non-organic constituents which may be considered contaminants. 1.10 EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Placement 1.Excavated material shall be so placed as not to interfere with travel or movement on existing streets, driveways, sidewalks or other areas designated to remain undisturbed. Excavated material shall not be deposited on private property without the written consent of the property owner(s) and approval of Engineer. 2.No excavated material shall be stored on top of installed pipe or other construction. Contractor shall consider surcharge loads when stockpiling excavated material adjacent to trenches, and take any measure required to prevent cave-in, including but not limited to, trench support systems and/or stockpiling excavated material remote from trench. B. Suitable excavated material may be used for Common Fill or Backfill on other parts of the Work, if specifically approved by Engineer. C. Material excavated from private property shall belong to the property Owner, or his representative, and shall be disposed of by the Contractor, as required by said Owner or his representative. If the Contractor fails to promptly remove such surplus material, Engineer may have the same done and charge the cost thereof as money paid to the Contractor. D. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of all unsuitable excavated materials. Engineer shall determine what is suitable or unsuitable material where questions arise. Generally, unsuitable material shall include, but not be limited to, pavement (bituminous and concrete), large boulders, pipe, conduit and metal. E. Contractor shall submit to Engineer, for approval, the location(s) to be utilized during the Contract period for waste material disposal. This approval must occur before any export of waste material from the project site. Any change in the disposal site during construction shall be submitted for approval. 1.11 SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide earth retention systems as required by federal, state and local regulations. Shoring and bracing of trenches and other excavations shall be in accordance with the latest OSHA Standards and Interpretations, and to all other applicable codes, rules and regulations of federal, state and local authorities. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 10 of 24 1.12 DRAINAGE A. At all times during construction, Contractor shall temporarily provide, place and maintain ample means and devices with which to remove promptly, and dispose of properly, all water entering trenches and other excavations, or water that may flow along or across the site of the Work, and keep said excavations dry until the structures, pipes, and appurtenances to be built therein have been completed to such extent that they will not be damaged. At the conclusion of the work, Contractor shall remove such temporary means and devices. B. All groundwater which may be found in the trenches and foundation excavations, and any water which may get into them from any cause whatsoever, shall be pumped or bailed out, so that the trench shall be dry during pipe laying and backfilling and during the placement of concrete. C. All water pumped or drained from the Work shall be managed in accordance with applicable discharge permits, without undue interference with other work or damage to pavements, other surfaces, or property. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Prior to commencing earthwork operations, meet with representatives of governing authorities, Engineer, testing entity, and other pertinent entities. 1.Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including Contractor's schedule of operations, scheduling observation and testing procedures and requirements. 2.Notify participants at least three (3) working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copies to each participant. 3.Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to insure the least possible inconvenience to the general public and the residents in the vicinity of the work. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to firefighting equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by Contractor to ensure the proper functioning of all gutters, sewer inlets, drainage ditches, and irrigation ditches, which shall not be obstructed except as approved by Engineer. B. Benchmark/Monument Protection: Protect and maintain benchmarks, monuments or other established reference points and property corners. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at no cost to Owner. C. Provide five (5) days advance notice to Engineer and testing entity for any proposed earthwork operation requiring observation and/or testing. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 11 of 24 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. All materials used in the work of this Section shall be Satisfactory Material, and any material that does not meet this classification shall be considered an Unsatisfactory Material and shall not be used. B. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil materials not meeting the requirements for Satisfactory Soils. 1.Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within two (2) percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. 2.2 COMMON FILL/ORDINARY BORROW A. Earth materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GP-GC, SW, SP, and SM that are free of clay. B. Common Fill material is subject to the approval of Engineer and may be either material removed from excavations or borrow from off site. It shall have physical properties such that it can be readily spread and after it has been placed and properly compacted, it will form a dense, stable fill. C. Common Fill shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Common Fill Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 6” 100 3.5 ” 50-100 3/4” 50-90 No. 4 25-55 No. 200 0-20 1.Less than twenty (20) percent of material by weight passing the No. 4 sieve shall pass the No. 200 sieve. 2.Common Fill shall not be used at locations where use of select fill is indicated. 2.3 COMMON FILL/ORDINARY BORROW A. Satisfactory Material that is well-graded meeting ASTM D 2487 classification group GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM. No particle shall exceed 6-inches in size and no greater than 10% by weight of the material shall pass the No. 100 sieve and no greater than 5% by weight of the material shall pass the No. 200 sieve. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 12 of 24 B. Common Fill is subject to the approval of Engineer and may be either material removed from on-site excavations or borrow pits or imported from off-site, approved sources. It shall have physical properties such that it can be readily spread and after it has been placed and properly compacted, it will form a dense, stable fill. 2.4 GRANULAR FILL A. Broken or crushed stone, gravel, or a mixture thereof. B. Broken or crushed stone 1.The product resulting from the artificial crushing of rocks, boulders or large cobblestones, substantially all faces of which have resulted from the crushing operation. Broken or crushed stone shall consist of sound, tough, durable stone, reasonably free from soft, thin, elongated, laminated, friable, micaceous or disintegrated pieces. C. Bank or crushed gravel 1.Sound, tough, durable particles of crushed or uncrushed gravel, free from soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces and vegetable or other deleterious substances. Crushed gravel shall be the manufactured product resulting from the deliberate mechanical crushing of gravel with at least 50% of the gravel retained on the No. 4 sieve having at least one fractured face. D. Granular Fill shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Granular Fill (ConnDOT Grading “A”) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 1 ½” 100 ¾” 45-80 1/4” 25-60 No. 10 15-45 No. 40 5-25 No. 100 0-10 No. 200 0-5 E. Reclaimed material shall not be considered acceptable for use as granular fill. 2.5 SUB BASE A. Granular material, well graded from fine to coarse, obtained from approved natural deposits and unprocessed, except for the removal of unacceptable material and stones larger than the maximum size permitted. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 13 of 24 B. Sub base shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Sub Base (ConnDOT Grading “C”) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 1 ½” 100 ¾” 45-80 ¼ 25-60 No. 10 15-45 No. 40 5-25 No. 100 0-10 No. 200 0-5 2.6 AGGREGATE STABILIZED COURSE A. Coarse aggregates and fine aggregates shall be combined and mixed by approved methods so that the resulting material shall conform to the following gradation: Gradation of Processed Aggregate Base Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 2 1/2” 100 2” 95-100 3/4” 50-75 1/4” 25-45 No. 40 5-20 No. 100 2-12 B. Coarse Aggregate: Either gravel, broken stone or a combination thereof. When tested by means of the Los Angeles Machine, using AASHTO Method T 96, the coarse aggregate shall not have a loss of more than 50%. 1.If gravel is used for the coarse aggregate, it shall consist of sound, tough, durable particles of crushed or uncrushed gravel or a mixture thereof, free from soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces, lumps of clay, loam and vegetable or other deleterious substances. 2.If broken stone is used for the coarse aggregate, it shall consist of sound, tough, durable fragments of rock of uniform quality throughout. It shall be free from soft disintegrated pieces, mud, dirt, organic or other injurious material. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 14 of 24 3.Soundness for Gravel and Broken Stone: When tested by magnesium sulfate solution for soundness using AASHTO Method T 104, the coarse aggregate shall show a loss of not more than 15% at the end of 5 cycles. C. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand, stone sand, screenings or any combination thereof. The fine aggregate shall be limited to material 95% of which passes a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve having square openings and not more than 8% of which passes a No. 200 (75-μm) sieve. The material shall be free from clay, loam and deleterious materials. 1.Plasticity: When natural sand is used, the fine aggregate shall conform to the following: a.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is 4% or less by weight (mass), no plastic limit test will be made. b.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is greater than 4% and not greater than 8% by weight (mass), that fraction shall not have sufficient plasticity to permit the performing of the plastic limit test using AASHTO Method T 90. c.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is greater than 8% by weight (mass), the sample will be washed; and the additional material passing the No. 100 mesh sieve shall be determined by AASHTO Method T 146, except that the No. 100 mesh sieve will be substituted for the No. 40 mesh sieve where the latter is specified in AASHTO Method T 146. The combined materials that passed the No. 100 mesh sieve shall not have sufficient plasticity to permit the performing of the plastic limit test using AASHTO Method T 90. 2.Plasticity: When screenings or any combination of screenings and natural sand or any combination of stone sand and natural sand are used, the following requirements shall apply: a.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is 6% or less by weight (mass), no plastic limit test will be made. b.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is greater than 6% and not greater than 10% by mass, that fraction shall not have sufficient plasticity to permit the performing of the plastic limit test, using AASHTO Method T 90. c.When the fraction of the dry sample passing the No. 100 mesh sieve is greater than 10% by weight (mass), the sample shall be washed; and additional material passing the No. 100 mesh sieve shall be determined by AASHTO Method T 146, except that the No. 100 mesh sieve shall be substituted for the No. 40 mesh sieve where the latter is specified in AASHTO Method T 146. The combined materials that have passed the No. 100 mesh sieve shall not have sufficient plasticity to permit the performing of the plastic limit test using AASHTO Method T 90. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 15 of 24 2.7 SCREENED GRAVEL AND CRUSHED STONE A. Screened gravel, well graded in size from 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch. The gravel shall consist of clean, hard, and durable particles or fragments. Crushed rock of suitable size and grading may be used instead of screened gravel. B. Screened Gravel shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Screened Gravel (ConnDOT Gradation No. 6) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 1” 100 3/4” 90-100 1/2” 20-55 3/8” 0-15 No. 4 0-5 2.8 BEDDING A. Slabs on grade 1.Granular Fill unless otherwise indicated. B. Utilities 1.Unless otherwise indicated, bedding shall consist of screened gravel, maximum size 3/4 inches and minimum size 3/8 inches. 2.9 SAND A. Sand shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles of quartz or other rock. It shall not contain more than 3% of material finer than a #200 sieve. B. Organic Impurities: Fine aggregate subjected to the colorimetric test shall not produce a color darker than Gardner Color Standard No. 11, using AASHTO T 21. If the fine aggregate fails to meet this requirement, the provisions of AASHTO M 6, Section 5.2, will govern. C. Sand shall be uniformly graded as follows: Gradation of Sand Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 3/8” 100 No. 4 95-100 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 16 of 24 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 D. The above gradation represents the extreme limits which shall determine suitability for use from all sources of supply. The gradation from any one source shall be reasonably uniform and not subject to the extreme percentages of gradation specified above. For the purpose of determining the degree of uniformity, a fineness modulus determination will be made upon representative samples from any source. Fine aggregate from any one source having a variation in fineness modulus greater than 0.20 either way from the fineness modulus of the representative sample will be rejected. 2.10 STONE DUST A. Clean, non-plastic, natural or manufactured from crushed rock, ASTM C33. Material shall be free of deleterious or foreign matter. Do not use limestone screening. Stone Dust shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Stone Dust Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 mm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 10 2.11 FLOWABLE CONCRETE FILL/BACKFILL (FLOWFILL) A. Cementitious material, ACI 229R, comprised of cement, aggregates, fly ash, water, and admixtures, capable of being poured or pumped, self-leveling, self-curing to specified strengths. B. Excavatable flowfill: Concrete strength shall be liquid enough to flow, be self-leveling and excavatable by hand methods. Unless otherwise specified, excavatable flowfill shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 30 psi, and shall not exceed 100 psi. C. Non-excavatable flowable: Concrete strength shall be liquid enough to flow and be self-leveling and excavatable by machine equipment. Unless otherwise specified, non-excavatable flowfill shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 125 psi, and shall not exceed 200 psi. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 17 of 24 2.12 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE A. Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1.Red: Electric power lines, electric power conduits and other electric power facilities. 2.Yellow: Gas, oil petroleum products, steam, compressed air, compressed gas and all other hazardous materials. 3.Blue: Water. 4.Orange: Communication lines or cables, including but not limited to telephone, fire signals, cable television, and electronic controls. 5.Green: Storm drainage and sanitary sewer systems, including force mains and other non- hazardous materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Notify “Call-Before-You-Dig” to request a utility mark-out for the Project Site prior to any earth disturbance. Provide written confirmation to Engineer that such mark-out has been completed. B. Verify site conditions before proceeding with demolition work. Field check the accuracy of the Drawings and inspect structures, utilities, and other site features prior to start of work and notify Engineer in writing, of any discrepancies or hazardous conditions. C. Take precautions for preventing injuries to persons or damage to property in or about the work. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. D. Protect sub-grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. E. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. F. When excavations are to be made in paved surfaces, the pavement shall be removed so as to provide a clean uniform edge with a minimum disturbance of remaining pavement. Saw cutting the pavement to provide a clean, uniform edge shall unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 18 of 24 G. If pavement is removed in large pieces, it shall not be mixed with other excavated material, but shall be disposed of away from the site of the Work before the remainder of the excavation is made. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clear, grub, remove, and dispose of all vegetation and debris within the limits of construction, as designated on the plans or as required by Engineer. Contractor shall remove only those trees and shrubs absolutely necessary to allow for the construction. The work shall also include the preservation from injury of defacement of all vegetation or object designated to remain. B. Refer to Section 31 1100 – Clearing and Grubbing. 3.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. General 1.Protect all existing improvements from damage unless those improvements are specifically designated for permeant removal, relocation, or temporary removal and replacement. 2.As excavation approaches underground structures, digging by machinery shall be discontinued and the excavation shall be done by means of hand tools. 3.Pavements: On paved surfaces to remain, do not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other power operated equipment, the treads or wheels of which are so shaped as to cut or otherwise damage such surfaces. All surfaces, which have been damaged by Contractor's operations, shall be restored to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found immediately prior to the beginning of operations. Suitable materials and methods shall be used for such restoration. B. Utilities 1.Existing utilities remaining in service, including those remaining in service until after relocation, and relocated utilities shall be protected from damage. Before excavating near any existing utilities, notify the utility owner, coordinate protective work and comply with the utility owners' requirements. Coordinate with respective utility owners/operators as required. 2.Safeguard and protect from damage or movement any existing services, utilities, and utility structures uncovered or encountered which are to remain in service. 3.All utility services shall be supported by suitable means so that the services shall not fail when tamping and settling occurs. 4.Where known utilities are encountered, notify Engineer and document location and type of utility before proceeding with work in such area. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 19 of 24 5.When uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or utilities are encountered during excavation, stop work and notify Engineer immediately. Cooperate with the utility owners in maintaining their utilities in operation prior to resuming work. C. Retaining Structures: Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utility systems, paving, or other improvements. Assume responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto. Retain the services of a licensed engineer as required to design bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures. D. Replacement and Relocation 1.In case of damage, Contractor shall notify the appropriate party so that proper steps may be taken to repair any and all damage done. When the Owner does not wish to make the repairs themselves, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, or, if not promptly done by him, Engineer may have the repairs made at the expense of Contractor. 2.If certain existing structures are encountered that in the opinion of Engineer require temporary or permanent relocation or removal, Engineer may order in writing that Contractor undertake all or part of such work or to assist the Owner in performing such work. For such occurrences, Contractor shall be compensated as applicable, as extra work. 3.In removing existing structures, Contractor shall use care to avoid damage to the material, and Engineer shall include for payment only those new materials, which, in his judgment, are necessary to replace those unavoidably damaged. 4.The structures to which the provisions of the preceding two paragraphs shall apply include structures which (1) are not indicated on the Drawings or otherwise provided for, (2) encroach upon or are encountered near and substantially parallel to the edge of the excavation, and (3) in the opinion of Engineer will impede progress to such an extent that satisfactory construction cannot proceed until they have been changed in location, removed (to be later restored), or replaced. (See Item 3.19, "Sub Surface Obstructions" also). 3.4 DEWATERING A. Comply with all applicable permit requirements. B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrade and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. C. Protect sub-grades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or water accumulation. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 20 of 24 1.Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2.Install de-watering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. 3.5 EXCAVATION A. Dust Control: During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall conduct his operations and maintain the area of his activities in order to minimize the creation and dispersion of dust. Refer to Section 01 5714 - Temporary Dust Control. B. Excavate to the exact elevations shown on the plans, or as directed by Engineer. Where no dimensions are indicated, make excavations in such manner, and to such depths, elevations, and dimensions, that will give suitable room for construction of the work indicated on the Drawings. As applicable for utility installations, comply with trench limits shown on the Drawings. C. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing, and supports, and render the bottom of the excavation firm and dry, and in all respects, acceptable for construction of the work. D. If Contractor excavates below the elevations specified on the plans, beyond the limits indicated on the plans, or where no dimensions are indicated, beyond depths, elevations, and dimensions reasonably necessary for construction of the work, Contractor shall bring the excavation back to the proper elevation and/or dimension by backfilling with Suitable Material that is approved by Engineer in accordance with the backfilling provisions specified herein. Engineer, or if applicable Geotechnical Engineer, shall have sole authority in determining the specific composition of such Suitable Material. 1.Any increase in cost resulting from Unauthorized Excavation, including but not necessarily limited to backfilling, haul-off, increasing the size of footings or foundations, testing, schedule impact, or administrative impact shall be at Contractor’s sole expense. E. If utilities are to be laid in new embankments, or other new fill areas which are more than 12 inches deep below the invert of the pipe, the fill material shall be placed and properly compacted to final grade or to a height of at least 3 feet above the top elevation of the pipe, whichever is the lesser, before laying pipe. Particular care shall be taken to ensure maximum consolidation of material under the pipe location. The pipe trench shall then be excavated as though in undisturbed material. 3.6 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. In general, trenches shall be excavated to such depth as will provide a cover depth as indicated on the Drawings from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. Deeper trenches shall be provided where necessary on account of the conformation of the ground and to permit the alignment of the pipe without undue deflection of joints. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 21 of 24 B. Trenches shall be excavated by hand or machinery to the width and depth indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Depth shall account for thickness of the pipe and thickness of bedding. All loose materials shall be removed from the bottom of the trench so that the bottom of the trench will be in an undisturbed condition. C. If in the opinion of Engineer, the material at or below the depth to which excavation for structures and pipes would normally be carried is unsuitable for foundation, it shall be removed to such widths and depths as directed and replaced with suitable material. D. Trench widths shall be 3 feet greater than the nominal inside diameter of pipe for such diameters of 36 inches or less. For diameters greater than 36 inches, the width shall be 4 feet greater than nominal inside diameter. Trench excavation for manholes, catch basins, drop inlets, etc. shall be two (2) feet outside the neat lines of the foundations. These limits may be adjusted for field conditions at the direction of Engineer. E. Bedding for pipe and utility structures will be as detailed on the Drawings. 3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Engineer, and Geotechnical Engineer if applicable, when excavations have reached required subgrade elevation. B. If Engineer and, if applicable, Geotechnical Engineer determines that Unacceptable Material is present, continue excavation of such Unacceptable Material and replace with approved Satisfactory Materials as directed. The replacement of Unacceptable Material with Satisfactory Materials will be paid for as a change in the work according to applicable provisions of the contract. C. Protect subgrade from disturbance at all times. Reconstruct sub-grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water or construction activities, as directed by Engineer. Excavation and replacement with structural fill of any disturbed or softened materials resulting from inadequate preparation, inadequate dewatering, or inadequate protection, shall be at Contractor’s sole expense. 3.8 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Fill: Contractor shall remove loam and topsoil, loose vegetable matter, stumps, large roots, etc., from areas upon which embankments will be built or material will be placed for final grading. The subgrade shall be shaped as indicated on the Drawings and shall be so prepared by forking, furrowing, or plowing such that the first layer of the new material placed thereon, will be well bonded to it. B. Backfill: Common Fill material may be used as backfill when indicated on the Drawings or when authorized by Engineer (or as applicable Geotechnical Engineer) if Contractor can achieve required minimum dry density after compaction. Backfilling shall be done as promptly as is SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 22 of 24 consistent with non-injury to the pipe or structures, but no backfilling shall be done before Engineer (or as applicable Geotechnical Engineer) gives permission. Where the trench is in a paved area, or an area to be paved, backfill shall be bank-run gravel as shown on the Drawings. C. Frozen material shall not be placed in fill, nor shall fill be placed upon frozen material. Previously frozen material shall be removed, or shall be otherwise treated as required, before new fill is placed. D. After the subgrade has been prepared, fill material shall be placed thereon and built up in successive layers not exceeding twelve (12) inches until it has reached the required elevation. 1.When gravel fill or other material is used for foundation of structures, it shall be spread in layers of uniform thickness not exceeding six (6) inches before compaction. Each spread layer shall be thoroughly compacted by means of suitable power-driven tampers or other power-driven equipment. E. Each layer of material shall be compacted by the use of approved rollers, or other approved means, so as to secure a dense, stable, and thoroughly compacted mass. At such points as cannot be reached by mobile mechanical equipment, or where such equipment is not permitted, the materials shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of suitable power- driven tampers. F. Previously placed or new materials shall be moistened by sprinkling, if required, to ensure proper bond and compaction. No compacting shall be done when the material is too wet, from either rain or application of water, to compact it properly. At such times the work shall be suspended until the previously placed and new materials have dried out sufficiently to permit proper compaction, or such other precautions shall be taken as may be necessary to obtain proper compaction. G. Compaction Density: Compaction density shall be expressed as a percentage of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content according to ASTM D 1557 Method C. Density indicated is minimum required. 1.Under structures, building slabs, and steps: 95 % 2.At building foundations: 95 % 3.Utilities, below pipe centerline: 95% 4.Utilities below unpaved surface, above pipe centerline: 92% 5.Utilities below paved surface, above pipe centerline: 95% 6. Embankments: 92% 7.Landscaped areas: 90 %. SECTION 302300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 23 of 24 H. Upon completion of filling and backfilling, all surplus material shall be removed and surfaces to remain which are affected in any way by the work restored to the condition in which they were before ground was broken. All surplus materials shall become the property of the Contractor. If Contractor fails to promptly remove such surplus materials, Engineer may have the same done, and charge all associated costs to the Contractor, including deduction from payments due. 3.9 BACKFILLING UTILITIES AROUND STRUCTURES A. No backfill shall be deposited against concrete until the concrete has obtained sufficient strength to withstand the earth pressure placed upon it and in no case less than seven days, nor before carrying out and satisfactorily completing the tests for watertight structures specified elsewhere. Compaction of backfill against concrete structures shall not be carried out by motorized equipment closer to the structure than the depth of the structure below grade. 3.10 BACKFILLING UTILITIES A. As soon as practical after utility has been placed into bedding and joints properly made, backfilling shall begin, and shall continue without delay. B. Placement of bedding over pipe prior to placement of backfill shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Hand-place bedding at the sides of the pipe and to the limits indicated on the Drawings over the pipe. Bedding placed over pipe shall be in 6-inch layers, leveled along the length and width of the trench and thoroughly compacted with approved tampers. C. Install warning tape twelve (12) inches to twenty-four (24) inches above the utility unless otherwise specified by the utility owner/operator. 3.11 BACKFILL AT BUILDINGS A. Prior to placing compacted granular fill, subgrade shall be compacted with at least four passes of a minimum 10-ton dynamic force vibratory roller. Soft or loose material evident during compaction shall be removed and replaced with granular fill. B. Backfill as soon as permanent work has been completed and footings, piers, foundation walls, etc., have attained sufficient set and strength. 1.Remove shoring and bracing prior to backfilling. 2.Place backfill in maximum uniform layers of 9”; in confined areas use 6” lifts. Do not allow levels of fill against concrete walls to differ by more than two feet on either side of walls unless walls are adequately braced or all floor framing is in place, up to and including grade level slabs. C. Bring backfill to sub-grade elevations. Slope backfill at exterior of building to drain water away from building. SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02300 PAGE 24 of 24 3.12 SUBSURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS A. As a general rule, sub-surface obstructions encountered along the route of the pipeline shall be considered as follows: 1.Crossing Obstruction: All pipes, conduits, wires, etc. of whatever nature whose centerline lies at an angle of 20 degrees or greater to the centerline of the pipe being installed shall be considered as crossing obstructions and shall be protected, or repaired or replaced if damaged, or relocated, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.Interfering Obstructions: All pipes, conduits, wires, etc. of whatever nature whose centerline lies at an angle of less than 20 degrees, but more than 5 degrees to the centerline of the pipe being installed, shall be considered as interfering obstructions. Costs for supporting such obstructions in place during installation of the new pipe shall be paid for by the Owner. Costs for supporting interfering obstructions shall not be construed to include any costs for excavation. Repairing or replacing damaged interfering obstructions, or relocation shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.Parallel Obstructions: All pipes, conduits, wires, etc. of whatever nature whose centerline lies at an angle of 5 degrees or less, or is truly parallel and less than 0.5 feet offset from outside the normal trench limits, as specified in Subarticle 3.5 B. of this Section, of the pipe being installed, shall be considered parallel obstructions. Costs for supporting such obstructions in place during installation of the new pipe, including excavation, may be paid for by the Owner, or Owner may elect to pay for the cost of replacing such obstructions. Should Owner first elect to pay the cost of supporting the obstruction and then elect to pay the cost of replacing the obstruction, approved costs for supporting the obstruction, including excavation, incurred prior to electing replacement costs shall also be paid. After Owner elects to pay replacement costs, only replacement costs will be paid for all additional work in the vicinity of the parallel obstruction. 4.Angle measurement between centerline of obstructing pipe, conduit, wire, etc. and centerline of the pipe being installed shall be taken from between the horizontal projection of the centerlines at ground surface. Parallel offset distance between centerline of obstructing pipe, conduit, wire, etc. and the outside of normal trench limits of the pipe being installed shall be taken from between the horizontal projection of the centerlines and outside trench limit at ground surface. END OF SECTION SECTION 02329 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02329 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 02329 - EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Excavation of test pits where it may be necessary to locate or examine soils, groundwater, drains, pipes, rock, utilities, subsurface structures, or any other obstacles or subsurface conditions. 2.Stockpiling, management, and disposal of surplus or unsuitable material. 3.Backfilling and compacting of test pits with suitable material. B. Exploratory excavations shall be conducted where shown on the Drawings, where directed or approved by Engineer, and as Contractor may deem necessary to locate or examine subsurface conditions as part of his work. C. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. D. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 PAYMENT A. Exploratory excavation work conducted by Contractor for his use or as specifically called-for on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall be considered incidental work and shall be included in Contractor's base price for the project. Contractor shall be responsible for any required backfilling with suitable materials, disposal of unsuitable excavated materials, and restoration of the excavation area. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 1.4 SAFETY A. Contractor shall conduct all excavation activities in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint SECTION 02329 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02329 PAGE 2 of 4 as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. C. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and open excavations. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. D. Contractor shall properly design and furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools necessary to construct permanent or temporary excavation support systems, including, but not necessarily limited to, sheet piling, trench shields, trench boxes, timber trench shoring, pneumatic/hydraulic shoring, steel sheeting or sheeting using other materials, sloping, and benching. E. Any time an excavation is to remain open, at a minimum, provide full enclosure with safety barriers and fencing, warning signs, and additional safety control measures as appropriate for the condition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit record data of observations noted in test pits, including photographs, diagrams, and descriptive notes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Utility Mark-out 1.Prior to commencing work, comply with utility mark-out requirements of the Call-Before- You-Dig System (1-800-922-4455). 2.Verify the location of all subsurface utilities marked through the Call-Before-You-Dig System. 3.Not all subsurface facilities or structures will be identified through the Call-Before-You- Dig System. Confirm the location of other subsurface utilities and other subsurface facilities or structures prior to commencing work. Field-mark utilities as required. SECTION 02329 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02329 PAGE 3 of 4 C. Utility Coordination 1.Inform all utility owners of the necessity of test pit work. Prove reasonable advance notice to allow for coordination. 2.Coordinate the excavation of all test pits with the respective utility owners having facilities in the vicinity of the test pit location. 3.If so desired by the respective utility owners, all or part of the work under this Section may be accomplished by their crews and/or supervised by them. D. Utility Protection 1.Safeguard and protect from damage any utility to remain in service. Before excavating near any utility, notify the utility owner, coordinate protective work, and comply with the utility owners' requirements. 2.Where utilities are encountered, notify Engineer and document location and type of utility before proceeding with work in such area. 3.When uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or utilities are encountered during excavation, stop work and notify Engineer immediately. Cooperate with the utility owners in maintaining their utilities in operation prior to resuming work. E. Retaining Structures 1.Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utilities, paving, light standards, piping or conduit. Assume responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum two (2) day notice prior to test pit excavation. Notify Engineer prior to backfill. B. If test pits are required during the work to evaluate unforeseen conditions, notify Engineer as soon as the need for such work is known. C. Notify Engineer and/or utility companies of any conflicts or other conditions observed which may require design revisions, relocations, and/or adjustment. No work shall be started within areas where conflicts or other conditions are observed which require design revisions, relocations, and/or adjustment until authorized by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 2.1 SOILS A. Refer to Section 31 2310 – Earthwork. SECTION 02329 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02329 PAGE 4 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Test pit excavation and backfill shall comply with applicable provisions of earthwork and excavation as indicated in other applicable Specification Sections. B. Excavation of test pits shall be accomplished by such means as are required to ensure that underground utilities or structures which may be encountered are not damaged. C. Contractor shall measure and record the size, configuration, exact horizontal and vertical location of all utilities, pipes or other conditions/obstacles encountered. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any damages incurred during excavation operations. Any such damages shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor to the satisfaction of the facility owner/operator, responsible/administering agency, and/or Engineer. Whether repair and/or replacement is Conducted by Contractor or must be conducted by owner/operator or responsible/administering agency, any and all costs thereof, including those costs associated with planning, coordination and owner/operator or responsible/administering agency personnel, shall be borne by Contractor. E. Where an existing pavement has been removed for test pit excavation, the surface shall be restored in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. In all other areas, the surface of test pit areas shall be backfilled and the surface restored to a condition equal to original, unless otherwise indicated by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 02510 - WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Water distribution and fire protection piping. 2.Pipe fittings, valves, and valve boxes. 3.Hydrants. 4.Anchors and thrust blocks. 5.Miscellaneous water system appurtenances. 6.Connections to existing water systems. 7.Disinfection and testing of new systems and appurtenances. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 COORDINATION WITH MONTVILLE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL AUTHORITY A. Contractor shall notify and coordinate the work of this Section with the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority. B. Obtaining permits or approvals which may be required to perform the work of this section, including all costs, fees and taxes required or levied. C. Contractor shall obtain all required approvals for connection to, or extension of, any portion of the domestic or fire protection water systems. D. The closing of valves necessary for making connections with the existing water systems will be done by Contractor with the assistance of Engineer. Sufficient notice shall be given the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority for a planned connection. No allowance will be made for any delay in the closing of valves. A 48-hour notice shall be given to adjacent buildings/residences affected by the shutdown, and shall be done by Contractor to the satisfaction of the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority and Engineer. The Montville Water Pollution Control Authority or Engineer may require the work be completed outside of normal working hours during low use time periods. SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 2 of 6 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Town of Montville Water Pollution Control Authority 1.Specifications for the Installation of Watermains and Appurtenances, latest version. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. D. State of Connecticut. 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016 and any supplements. E. ASTM International (ASTM) 1.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2.ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 3.ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 4.ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 5.ASTM D1557 - Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI A21.50 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe 2.ANSI A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water 3.ANSI A21.4 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 4.ANSI A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in through 48 in (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids 5.ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects G. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.AWWA C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 3 of 6 3.AWWA C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4.AWWA C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 5.AWWA C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 6.AWWA C207 - Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service- Sizes 4 In. through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). 7.AWWA C502 - Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants. 8.AWWA C504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 9.AWWA C509 - Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 10.AWWA C550 - Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 11.AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 12.AWWA C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.-12 In. (100 mm-300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution. 13.AWWA C800 - Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. H. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. I. Montville Water Pollution Control Authority 1.Comply with standards of the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority. Should this Specification differ from those standards, the standards of the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority will govern. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. C. Maintain all temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout the progress of the work. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH THE MONTVILLE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL AUTHORITY SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 4 of 6 A. Contractor shall notify and coordinate the work of this Section with the local authority having jurisdiction over water supply, whether public or private system owner/operator. B. Contractor shall obtain all required approvals for connection to, or extension of, any portion of the domestic or fire protection water systems. C. Service Interruption: Provide the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority five (5) days advanced notice for any planned interruption associated with the work. Comply with customer notification requirements of the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority. D. The Montville Water Pollution Control Authority may require the work be completed outside of normal working hours during low use time periods. 1.6 SAFETY A. Contractor shall conduct all excavation activities in conformance with applicable regulations, including those relating to warning signs, excavation safety, sheeting, shoring, and stabilization. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades, signs, lights, etc., required for the protection of personnel, materials and property. Temporary barricades, etc. shall conform all applicable codes and regulations, and shall be lighted at night with lanterns, flares and reflectorized paint as required for safety. Adapt barricades, signs, lights, etc. to evolving site conditions throughout the progress of the work. C. Provide other safety devices as required, including adaptation of such safety devices to changing site conditions, to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and open excavations. Provide warning signs and other temporary construction safety devices necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with applicable safety regulations. D. Contractor shall properly design and furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools necessary to completely construct the excavation support system, permanent or temporary, including sheet piling, trench shields, trench boxes, timber trench shoring, pneumatic/hydraulic shoring, steel sheeting or sheeting using other materials, sloping and benching. All of the proper materials and all equipment necessary to protect employees in excavations against cave-ins shall be furnished and installed. E. Any time an excavation is to remain open, at a minimum, provide full enclosure with safety barriers and fencing, warning signs, and additional safety control measures as appropriate. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all permits and/or approvals from the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority. B. Shop Drawings: 1.Submit shop drawings, descriptive literature, or both, showing pipe materials and appurtenances to be furnished. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to ordering materials. SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 5 of 6 2.Shop drawings showing the configuration, dimensions, layout, and spacing of major and minor components such as pipe, joints, restraints, valves, and other proposed details of assembly. Show in large-scale details any unique assembly, and/or installation requirements. C. Copies of manufacturer-provided installation instructions, operation instructions, and maintenance material for all equipment furnished under this Section. D. Manufacturer’s warranties and associated warranty registration data in Owner’s name. Submit two (2) copies of each warranty to Engineer in the manufacture’s/supplier's standard form or if there is no standard form available, in a form specified by Engineer. E. As-Built Drawings. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage of pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water line appurtenances on the site shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the approval of Engineer. B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other water line appurtenances. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to pipe and fitting coatings shall be repaired as directed by Engineer. C. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water system appurtenances which are defective from any cause, including damage caused by handling, and determined by Engineer as non- repairable, shall be unacceptable for installation and shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. D. Pipe, and all water system appurtenances that are damaged or disturbed through any cause prior to acceptance of the work shall be repaired, realigned or replaced as required by Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The drawings are diagrammatic only and are intended to indicate the extent, but not all details, of the system, which shall be constructed. All materials and fittings are not shown; but Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and fittings required for the complete system. B. All products and material shall conform to the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority specficiations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL SECTION 02510 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02510 PAGE 6 of 6 A. Verify site conditions before proceeding with demolition work. Field check the accuracy of the Drawings and inspect structures, utilities, and other site features prior to start of work and notify Engineer in writing, of any hazardous conditions and/or discrepancies. B. All water pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and other appurtenances shall be installed at the locations as shown on the Drawings and/or directed by Engineer. C. The proposed location and vertical alignment may be altered to avoid conflicts with existing and proposed utilities, as approved by Engineer. D. Construction of all work related to domestic and fire protection shall be done in accordance with the Montville Water Pollution Control Authority specifications. 3.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the requirements of local permitting authorities for preparation and submittal of as-built drawings. The requirements for the preparation of as-built drawings as defined herein shall be considered the minimum requirements of Engineer, but shall in no way relive Contractor from satisfying the requirements of local permitting authorities. B. As work progresses, record the following on two (2) sets of Drawings: C. All changes and deviations from the design in location, grade, size, material, or other feature as appropriate. D. Any uncharted locations of utilities or other subsurface feature encountered during installation, including the characteristics of such uncharted utility or subsurface feature such as utility type, size, depth, material of construction, etc. E. Recording of changes shall be clearly and neatly marked in red pen or pencil. All changes shall be noted on the appropriate Drawing sheets. F. Make measurements from fixed, permanent points on the Project Site to accurately locate the work completed. Such measurements shall consist of at least three (3) ties showing the distance of each item relative to each of the fixed, permanent points. G. As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate the true measurement and location, horizontal and vertical, of all new construction. As-Built drawings shall also contain any additional information required by Engineer. 3.3 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall remove all debris, residuals, and materials at the conclusion of the work. END OF SECTION SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERS GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Installation of sanitary sewage pipe and fittings. 2.Installation of sanitary specials, connection chimneys, laterals, outlets, and joint materials. 3.Installation of sanitary sewer manholes. 4.Installation of sewer ejector pit and pumps. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. D. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining permits or approvals which may be required to perform the work of this section, including all costs, fees and taxes required or levied. Notify and obtain such permits or approvals from all agencies having jurisdiction prior to starting work. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Town of Montville, CT 1.Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. D. ASTM International (ASTM). 1.ASTM A47/A 47M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process. 2.ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3.ASTM A123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 2 of 8 4.ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6.ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 7.ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 8.ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 9.ASTM A746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe. 10. ASTM C12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. 11. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. 12. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick. 13. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. 14. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 15. ASTM C139 - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes. 16. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 17. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 18. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 19. ASTM C387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 20. ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. 21. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. 22. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. 23. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 24. ASTM C507 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 3 of 8 25. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 26. ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. 27. ASTM C1628 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. 28. ASTM C828 - Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. 29. ASTM C877 - Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections. 30. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 31. ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals. 32. ASTM C924 - Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method. 33. ASTM C969 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines. 34. ASTM C972 - Compression-Recovery of Tape Sealant. 35. ASTM C990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. 36. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension. 37. ASTM D624 - Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. 38. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 39. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 40. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 41. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 42. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 4 of 8 43. ASTM D2412 - Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 44. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 45. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 46. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 47. ASTM D2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. 48. AASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 49. ASTM D2996 - Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting- Resin) Pipe. 50. ASTM D2997 - Centrifugally Cast "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting- Resin) Pipe. 51. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 52. ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 53. ASTM D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 54. ASTM D3262 - "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe. 55. ASTM D3350 - Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials. 56. ASTM D3753 - Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells. 57. ASTM D3840 - "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Fittings for Nonpressure Applications. 58. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 59. ASTM D4161 - "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 5 of 8 60. ASTM D4396 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Nonpressure Applications. 61. ASTM F402 - Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings. 62. ASTM F405 - Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings. 63. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 64. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 65. ASTM F714 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. 66. ASTM F758 - Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Underdrain Systems for Highway, Airport, and Similar Drainage. 67. ASTM F794 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 68. ASTM F894 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe. 69. ASTM F949 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings. 70. ASTM F1336 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gasketed Sewer Fittings. 71. ASTM F1803 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Closed Profile Gravity Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. E. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 1.“PVC Pipe - Design and Installation”, M23 (latest edition. and applicable supplements thereto). 2.“Concrete Pressure Pipe”, M9 (latest edition and applicable supplements thereto). 3.ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 4.ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 5.ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 6 of 8 6.ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 7.ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 8.ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids. 9.ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 10. ANSI/AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. F. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA). 1.ACPA 01-103 - Concrete Pipe and Box Culvert Installation (latest revision and applicable supplements thereto). G. UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA). 1.UBPPA UNI-B-6 (1998) Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe. H. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.Standard Specifications for HS-20, Highway Loading (AASHTO H-20). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to Engineer for his approval manufacturer's name with details of the pipe, fittings, and joint offered before ordering. Engineer reserves the right to have the manufacturer submit to them a printed certified set of material specifications certifying to the manufacturer's conformity with this Section. B. Product data for all materials provided under this Section. C. Prior to ordering material, submit shop drawings and descriptive literature showing dimensions, joint and other details of all materials to be furnished under this Section. Such shop drawings shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, joint and other details for precast manholes, manhole frames and covers, and flexible joint sealant for manholes. D. Samples of each size and type of pipe to be utilized. No pipe shall be ordered or delivered until Engineer has approved the pipe material. E. As-Built Drawings 1.Submit two (2) copies of As-Built Drawings upon completion and acceptance of work. 2.As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate the true measurement and location, horizontal and vertical, of all new construction. As-Built drawings shall include a minimum of three (3) ties showing the distance to each catch basin and manhole, and SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 7 of 8 the location of service connections measured from fixed permanent objects. As-Built drawings shall also contain any additional information required by Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Sample pipe for testing, when requested by Engineer, shall be furnished by Contractor in sufficient numbers. The Contractor and/or the pipe manufacturer shall make the facilities and services for making the load tests available. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1.Manufacturer shall package the pipe in a manner designed to deliver the pipe to the Project Site neatly, intact, and without physical damage. Transportation carrier shall use an appropriate method to ensure the pipe is properly supported, stacked, and restrained during transport. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. 2.Unloading of the pipe should be controlled so as not to collide with the other pipe sections or fittings, and care should be taken to avoid chipping or spalling, especially to the spigots and bells. For manhole sections, cone sections, bases, fittings and other precast appurtenances, utilize lifting holes or lifting eyes provided. 3.In cold weather conditions, use caution to prevent impact damage. Handling methods considered acceptable for warm weather may be unacceptable during cold weather. 4.Storage: a.Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. b.Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging. c.Store solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials under cover out of direct sunlight. Provide additional storage measures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Discard materials if storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded. SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02530 PAGE 8 of 8 d.Metal Items: Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials. e.Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement: As specified in Section 033200 – Site Cast-in-Place Concrete. f.Store manhole units in an upright position. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 1.All products and materials shall conform to the Town of Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards. EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Construction of all sanitary sewer work shall be done in accordance with the Town of Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards. END OF SECTION September 1, 2009 TOWN OF MONTVILLE, CT SANITARY SEWER MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 i TOWN OF MONTVILLE, CONNECTICUT SANITARY SEWER MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Index SECTION 1 PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................... 3 SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 3 SECTION 3 CONNECTIONS TO AND WORK ON SEWERS ............................................................... 5 3.01 General ........................................................................................................................................... 5 3.02 Sewer Pipe Material, Size, Fittings, Joints, Properties and Workmanship ..................................... 7 3.02.01 Gravity Pipe ......................................................................................................................... 7 3.02.02 Low Pressure Force Main ................................................................................................. 10 3.03 Sewer Pipe Trench ....................................................................................................................... 13 3.04 Sewer Pipe Testing....................................................................................................................... 16 3.04.01 Gravity Pipe ....................................................................................................................... 16 3.04.02 Low Pressure Pipe ............................................................................................................ 18 3.05 Building Connector Lateral Markers ............................................................................................. 18 3.06 Manholes and Manhole Frames and Covers ............................................................................... 21 3.07 Grease, Oil and Gross Particle Separators .................................................................................. 35 3.08 Grinder Pumps .............................................................................................................................. 41 3.08.01 General ............................................................................................................................. 41 3.08.02 Product .............................................................................................................................. 42 A. Semi-positive Displacement Grinder Pumps ......................................................................... 42 B. Submersible Centrifugal Grinder Pump ................................................................................ 49 3.08.03 Execution .......................................................................................................................... 54 3.08.04 Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................................. 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 3 of 55 Adopted by the MONTVILLE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL AUTHORITY (WPCA) pursuant to Section 7-247 of the General Statutes of the State of Connecticut 1958, as amended. SECTION 1 PURPOSE In order to ensure proper construction of the SEWAGE WORKS within the Town of Montville, and to ensure the proper OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE of public SEWERs within said TOWN, the WPCA from time to time establish standard requirements or specifications to regulate the sizes, materials, methods and workmanship to be used in the construction of SEWERs, BUILDING CONNECTORs, oil/water and grease separators, grinder pumps and other similar work and appurtenances thereto connected or intended to be connected or to discharge, directly or indirectly, into any public SEWER of the Town of Montville. Such standard requirements SHALL provide minimum requirements as to size, depth, slope or rate of grade for such pipes, and SHALL regulate the kinds of pipe, fittings, methods of laying, jointing, materials used, manner of connecting to pre-existing SEWER and BUILDING DRAINS, and general considerations as to location and other pertinent features. Any such requirements or specifications as the same MAY from time to time be amended, are hereby made a part of these Material and Construction Standards as provided in Chapter 103 of the General Statutes of the State of Connecticut, as amended, are hereby enacted. SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS Except as otherwise indicated in these Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards, defined terms SHALL have the meanings indicated in the Sewer Use Rules and Regulations. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 4 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 5 of 55 SECTION 3 CONNECTIONS TO AND WORK ON SEWERS 3.01 General A. The BUILDING DRAIN pipe extending outside the inner walls of any building or similar structure SHALL be 4" minimum diameter pipe a minimum of five (5) feet in length and exit the building a minimum of three (3) feet below grade or below the frost line whichever is greater or as approved by the WPCA to permit connection to the public SEWER by gravity using good engineering practice. The material SHALL be cement lined ductile iron, cast iron pipe or approved equal. The connections SHALL be made by use of bell-and-spigot joints with a lock-in rubber sealing ring when possible. When use of bell-and-spigot jointing is impracticable, the connection shall be made with a flexible coupling similarly used to connect dissimilar materials. The couplings SHALL utilize stainless steel hardware and be manufactured by Fernco Inc., Pipe Conx by Uniseal, or equal. See “Concrete Encasement Detail at Joint Repair”. Building Drain Dimensional Tolerance Nominal Size Outside Diameter Average Minimum Tolerance Wall Thickness Ductile Iron Pipe (Class 50) 4 4.800 ±0.130 0.250 Cast Iron Pipe 4 4.800 ±0.050 0.350 All dimensions in inches B. BUILDING CONNECTORS, with the exception of the length of pipe extending through the building wall, that is intended to be connected to a TOWN Lateral, Interceptor or Manhole SHALL be a minimum 6" diameter, SDR35 PVC plastic pipe or extra heavy iron pipe, or approved substitute. C. Any BUILDING CONNECTOR, which is within 75 feet of any well or 25 feet of a cellar, ground or surface drain SHALL be constructed of material approved by the Health Director as defined in the Sewer Use Rules and Regulations. No portion of the BUILDING CONNECTOR SHALL be conducted within twenty-five (25) feet of a well. Long BUILDING CONNECTORS SHALL be avoided to reduce the danger of ground water INFILTRATION, and SEWER blockages. See Section 3.02 D. Schedule 40 P.V.C. SEWER pipe MAY be used where specifically allowed on contract drawings and SHALL conform to the following specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 6 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 7 of 55 3.02 Sewer Pipe Material, Size, Fittings, Joints, Properties and Workmanship 3.02.01 Gravity Pipe A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe - The requirements of this specification are to provide pipe and fittings suitable, from the point of building exit, for non- pressure drainage of SEWAGE, and certain other liquid wastes, where toughness, resistance to deterioration from the action of water and chemicals, dimensional stability, resistance to aging and tight joints are required. B. Materials - The pipe and fittings SHALL be made from virgin type 1 Grade 1 Polyvinyl Chloride compounds as defined and described in ASTM Specification D3034 - SDR35 for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic gravity SEWER pipe. Clean rework material, generated from the manufacturer's own pipe or fitting production MAY be used by the same manufacturer provided the pipe and fittings so produced meet the requirements of this specification. C. Physical and Chemical Properties - The physical and chemical properties SHALL conform to those minimums specified for Type 1, Grade 1 Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds designated in ASTM Specification D3034 - SDR35 noted above. D. Dimensions - The standard length of pipe for all BUILDING CONNECTORs provided under this specification SHALL be a minimum of 12.5 feet. The pipe SHALL be manufactured to the following minimum dimensions: PVC Pipe Dimensional Tolerance Nominal Size Outside Diameter Average Minimum Tolerance Wall Thickness Weight/lbs 20’ Length 6 6.275 ±0.011 0.180 43.6 8 8.400 ±0.012 1.240 82.5 10 10.500 ±0.015 1.300 123.4 All dimensions in inches Fittings SHALL be made in sizes and to the dimensions of standard pipe as shown above. If dimension, structural design or materials from which they are manufactured vary from other provisions of this specification, it SHALL be done so with the approval of this WPCA. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 8 of 55 E. Joints - Joints SHALL be the bell and spigot type with a "Locked-in" rubber sealing ring as manufactured by the J-M Manufacturing Company as subject to the approval of the WPCA. Joints SHALL be sealed with an elastomeric "O" ring gasket that meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM specification F-477, latest revision, approved by the WPCA, and SHALL be of a composition and texture which is resistant to common ingredients of SEWAGE, INDUSTRIAL WASTES including oils and ground water, and which will endure permanently under the conditions likely to be imposed by this use. The PVC pipe and fitting joints SHALL meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM specification D3212. In addition, the elastomeric gaskets SHALL meet or exceed the following requirements when tested in accordance ASTM specification D1869, latest revision: Elastomeric Gasket Properties after Oil Aging Tensile strength, average decrease max, percent 35 Elongation, average decrease, max, percent 40 Hardness, average change, points -10 to +2 Volume change, average, percent -1 to +15 The joint, when assembled, must be able to withstand a hydraulic pressure internally of at least 10 psi. F. Fittings - Wyes, Tees, Bends, and adapters, and any other fittings required by the WPCA SHALL be provided. Plans for such fittings showing cross-sectional views with dimensions SHALL be provided, and such plans and fittings SHALL be approved by the WPCA prior to their use. The materials used in the manufacture of fittings SHALL conform with the requirements for the pipe with which they SHALL be used and any variation of such SHALL be subject to the approval of the WPCA. G. Marking - Pipe SHALL be marked along the outside of the barrel in bold style type and SHALL indicate the Manufacturer's name, pipe size, PVC compound used. i.e., PVC Type 1, Grade 1 and the ASTM material spec. for the PVC compound used i.e., ASTM D3034 - SDR35. H. Workmanship - The pipe and fittings SHALL be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. The pipe SHALL be as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density and other physical properties. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 9 of 55 I. Waterstops - The manufacturer SHALL provide waterstops, acceptable to the WPCA, which SHALL be applied to the outside of the plastic pipe when pipe is to be enclosed in any structure where concrete or mortar is used which will prevent leakage along the outer wall of the barrel of the pipe. J. Allowable Pipe Deflection - Plastic pipe provided under this specification SHALL be so installed in the ground that a deflection of no more than five (5) percent and be anticipated. Such deflection SHALL be computed by dividing the amount of deflection (nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured) by the nominal diameter of the pipe. However, between any two adjacent manholes, the average deflection SHALL not exceed six (6) percent and no deflection at any point in the pipe SHALL exceed seven (7) percent, computed in the manner described herein. After an initial inspection by the WPCA and if in the opinion of the WPCA the deflection MAY be excessive they MAY order the contractor to arrange for and take accurate measurements of the pipe at whatever intervals and at whatever locations between adjacent manholes the WPCA deems advisable. All costs involved in taking measurements ordered by the WPCA following the initial inspection by the WPCA SHALL be borne by the DRAIN LAYER if the deflection in the pipe exceeds either of the maximum limits specified herein. Such measurements MAY be taken or ordered taken by the WPCA at any time during the maintenance period and such measurements SHALL be performed in a manner and by methods approved by the WPCA. K. Pipe Straightness - No single piece of pipe SHALL be laid on any project covered by these special provisions unless it is found to be generally straight. Such pipe SHALL have a maximum ordinate as measured from the concave side of the pipe not to exceed 1/16 inches per foot of length. If the deviation from straightness exceeds this requirement, then the particular piece of pipe SHALL be rejected for use until it can comply with this provision. L. Connection to Mainline - Where a BUILDING CONNECTOR LATERAL has not been provided for at the property line and a tap in the mainline is necessary then the preferred method would be to remove a section of Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 10 of 55 pipe and install a section of pipe with a preformed wye to make the connection. A tapping saddle MAY be used but will require the approval by the WPCA as to type and manufacturer and SHALL assure a watertight connection. Approved tapping saddles shall be the EZ Tap sewer saddle as manufactured by Fernco Inc., or approved equal. In certain cases, where the depth of the mainline is significantly deeper than the lateral depth at the property line, it may be the preferred method to install a vertical chimney from the mainline to the tie-in point of the lateral. See “Chimney Detail” and “Pre-cast Chimney Detail” for more information. M. Jointing Dissimilar Materials - Where required, a flexible coupling SHALL be used to connect dissimilar material types and sizes of pipe. Couplings SHALL utilize stainless steel hardware and be as manufactured by Fernco Inc., or equal. N. Pipe Slope and cleanouts - The grade of the BUILDING CONNECTOR SHALL be at least one-quarter (1/4) of an inch per foot for six (6) inch sewers and SHALL not be less than one-eighth inch per foot for larger sizes. Access manholes or surface cleanouts SHALL be provided at changes in direction exceeding 45º. Access manholes or surface cleanouts SHALL be provided for each 100 feet of length of BUILDING CONNECTOR from the foundation wall to the BUILDING CONNECTOR LATERAL. 3.02.02 Low Pressure Force Main A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe - The requirements of this specification are to provide pipe and fittings suitable, for the BUILDING CONNECTOR and BUILDING LATERAL, for low-pressure drainage of SEWAGE, and certain other liquid wastes, where toughness, resistance to deterioration from the action of water and chemicals, dimensional stability, resistance to aging and tight joints are required. B. Materials - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Low Pressure pipe and fittings shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 3350, latest revision. All Low Pressure Sewer piping shall be rated for a minimum "WORKING PRESSURE" of one hundred fifty (150#) pounds at 73˚F with water and a minimum factor of safety of two point five (2.5). C. Physical and Chemical Properties - Pipe shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe, Driscopipe* 1000 as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas, HDPE Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 11 of 55 PE3408 EHMW as manufactured by Rinker Polypipe or equal. D. Dimensions - The pipe supplied shall meet the requirements of SDR 11 pipe (standard Dimension Ratio). All couplings, adapters, transitions, socket flanges, etc. shall be compatible with pipe and fittings to which they are joined and suitable for the use intended. E. Joints 1. Heat fusion joining systems: Pipe and fittings shall be joined by butt fusion, saddle fusion, socket fusion or electrofusion according to the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. The personnel operating heat fusion joining equipment and the on-site joint inspector shall be trained by the manufacturer or authorized manufacturer’s representative. 2. Mechanical joining systems: All components shall incorporate pack joint type compression fittings with insert stiffeners for easy, reliable installation of piping. Mechanical couplings shall be installed in accordance with the mechanical coupling manufacturer’s recommended procedures. F. Fittings – All fittings shall be pressure rated to match the system piping to which they are joined. At the point of fusion, the outside diameter and wall thickness of the fitting shall meet the outside diameter and wall thickness specifications of the system piping. All fittings shall be properly rated according to the manufacturer’s written specifications, and clearly labeled on the fittings. G. Markings - The pipe and fittings shall have product traceability. The manufacturer shall include a print line on the pipe which shall identify the manufacturer, date of manufacturer, lot and supplier of raw material, plant location, and the production shift on which the product was produced. H. Workmanship - The manufacturer shall certify that samples of the manufacturer’s production have been tested in-house in accordance with ASTM D 2837, and validated in accordance with the latest revision of PPI TR-3. I. Connection to Mainline 1. Connecting to Low Pressure mainline SEWERs - The service connections MAY be connected to the mainline by way of an in-line tee of similar material or use of an electrofusion saddle as Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 12 of 55 manufactured by Central Plastics or approved equal, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s procedures. 2. Connecting to Gravity mainline SEWERs – see Section 3.02.01L J. Joining Dissimilar Materials – Connections to pipe of other materials, connections to equipment and at such other locations as indicated, directed or required shall be made with 150 pound flanges and 1/8-inch thick gaskets of material compatible with the material to be pumped. Bolts, washers and nuts shall be type 316 stainless steel. Flanges shall be faced and drilled to American 125 Standard and as required to match the facing and drilling of the flanges to which they are to be connected. K. Check Valves – Check valves shall be injection molded from non- corroding, glass fiber reinforced PVC for durability. The check valve flapper shall include a non-fouling, integral hinge made from fabric reinforced synthetic elastomer to assure corrosion resistance, dimensional stability, fatigue strength and trouble free operation. The check valve will provide a full-ported passageway and shall introduce a friction loss of less than 6 inches of water at maximum rated flow. A non- metallic hinge shall be an integral part of the flapper assembly providing a maximum degree of freedom to assure seating at low back pressure. L. Curb Stops – Curb stops shall be solid brass constructed of a single solid piece conforming to ASTM specification B 62, and shall be manufactured and tested to AWWA C800. Curb stop shall be individually tested with an internal air pressure of 150 psi minimum. Valves shall be pressure tight in both directions with integral stops at the fully-open and fully-closed positions. Stem seals and rubber seats shall be Buna-N providing watertight seals in either direction as well as maximum flow capacity and ease of operation. M. Curb Boxes - Curb boxes shall be constructed of iron filled polypropylene, or steel and cast iron as manufactured by Mueller, or equal, to provide durability and magnetic detect ability. All components shall be inherently corrosion resistant to assure durability in the ground. Curb boxes shall provide adjustment downward (shorter) from their nominal height. Curb box covers shall have the word “SEWER” cast on the top. N. Miscellaneous 1. The grinder pump unit inlet and outlet are at 180 to each other. Contractor shall provide and install all fittings and adapters required to accommodate this orientation so as to provide a complete, approved operating system. All piping connections to the grinder pump unit shall be in strict conformance Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 13 of 55 with the printed instructions of the grinder pump manufacturer. 2. Sleeves for service laterals adjacent to wells SHALL be required and SHALL be 4” HDPE. 3. The grinder pump unit inlet and outlet are at 180 to each other. Contractor shall provide and install all fittings and adapters required to accommodate this orientation so as to provide a complete, approved operating system. All piping connections to the grinder pump unit shall be in strict conformance with the printed instructions of the grinder pump manufacturer. 3.03 Sewer Pipe Trench Typical Trench Cross-Section showing crushed stone foundation and haunching, and backfill for plastic pipe is shown in the following detail. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 14 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 15 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 16 of 55 3.04 Sewer Pipe Testing To meet or exceed the minimum requirements for INFILTRATION, the following test SHALL be conducted by the OWNER at his/her expense: 3.04.01 Gravity Pipe A. The end of the BUILDING CONNECTOR nearest the public SEWER SHALL be dug up, the end exposed for the installation of a plug to seal off that end of the BUILDING CONNECTOR. Another plug is installed inside the house to seal that end. All vents etc.. must also be plugged so as not to allow any air to escape. The test section of the BUILDING CONNECTOR SHALL be plugged at each end. One of the plugs used in the test SHALL be tapped and equipped for the air inlet connection for filling the line from an air compressor. The plugs shall hold against the 10 psig pressure without bracing and without movement of the plugs. B. All BUILDING CONNECTORS, stubs and fittings into the SEWER test section SHALL be properly capped or plugged, and carefully braced against the internal pressure to prevent air leakage by slippage and blowouts. C. Now connect the air hose to the tapped plug selected for the air inlet. Then connect the other end of the hose to the portable air control equipment which consists of valves and pressure gages used to control: 1. The air entry rate to the SEWER test section, and 2. To monitor the air pressure in the pipe line More Specifically, the air control equipment includes a shut-off valve, pressure regulating valve, pressure seduction valve and monitoring pressure gate having a pressure range from 0 to 5 psi. The gage SHALL have minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and an accuracy of ± 0.04 psi. D. Connect another air hose between the air compressor and the air control equipment. This completes the test equipment set-up. Testing operations MAY now commence. E. Supply air to the test section slowly, filling the pipe line until a constant pressure of 3.5 psig minimum greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater that may be over the pipe is maintained. Groundwater back pressure shall be determined by measuring the average height of the groundwater table in feet above the invert of the section of pipe being tested. The height in feet shall be divided by 2.3 to determine the pounds of pressure that shall be added to all test pressures. For Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 17 of 55 example, if the average height of groundwater over the pipe invert is 11.5 feet; the pressure to be added would be 5 psig (11.5/2.3 = 5.0). The prescribed pressure drop shall not exceed 1.0 psig from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig in excess of the groundwater pressure above the top of the sewer. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize. Any necessary adjustments in air pressure shall be made to the internal pressure and an additional two-minute stabilization period shall be allowed.. The air pressure SHALL be regulated to prevent the pressure inside the pipe from exceeding 5.0 psig. F. During this stabilization period, it is advisable to check all capped and unplugged fitting with soap solution to detect any leakage at these connections. If leakage is detected at any cap or plug, release the pressure in the line and tighten all leaky caps and plugs. Then restart the test operation again by supplying air. When it is necessary to bleed off the air to tighten or repair a faulty plug, a new 5-minute interval must be allowed after the pipe line has been refilled. G. After the stabilization period the air hose from the control panel to the air supply shall be disconnected. The portion of line being tested shall be termed "Acceptable" if the time required, in minutes, for a 1.0 psi pressure drop for the section of line being tested is not greater than the time shown for the given diameters in the following table: Minimum Duration for Air Testing Pressure Drop Pipe Diameter (in inches) Time (min/100 ft) 4 0.3 6 0.7 8 1.2 10 1.5 (For times other than those shown, use) T = K x (D²L)/Q D = pipe diameter (inches) K = 0.000371 (inch-pound units) L = length of line each pipe size Q = air loss (ft³/min) T = time (in minutes) to drop 1.0 psi Should the low pressure air tests on any section of the sewers show a rate of leakage exceeding the maximum allowable rate as shown below, the Contractor shall locate, repair or replace defective joints and retest until the rate of air pressure drop for each section of the sewers being tested does not exceed the rate specified herein. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 18 of 55 Allowable Air Loss for Various Pipe Sizes Pipe Diameter (in inches) Q (ft³/min) 4 2.0 6 2.0 8 2.0 10 2.5 1. Along with the air testing of BUILDING CONNECTORS, they MAY also be televised, which will indicate their structural condition, root intrusion, broken or misalignment of some segments of the lateral system and the type of material in place. 3.04.02 Low Pressure Pipe A. Service connections will be required to be tested but will be subjected to visual examination and acceptance. 3.05 Building Connector Lateral Markers A BUILDING CONNECTOR marker SHALL be provided at the property line approximately three (3) inches below grade and SHALL be fabricated of steel conforming to ASTM specification 36 Latest revision. A typical BUILDING CONNECTOR marker detail is provided as well as a typical building service detail. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 19 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 20 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 21 of 55 3.06 Manholes and Manhole Frames and Covers A. Manholes - Where required, manhole bases, risers, tops and grade rings SHALL be precast reinforced concrete or as directed; manhole bases, risers, transition sections and tops SHALL conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C478, latest revision. Manholes SHALL be four (4) foot in diameter except where drops are approved, then five (5) foot diameter SHALL be required. See Manhole details. 1. Leakage tests SHALL be made by the DRAIN LAYER at his expense and observed by the WPCA on each manhole. The test SHALL be by vacuum in accordance with ASTM Specification C-828-80. Notarized records of the test results SHALL be submitted by the DRAIN LAYER to the WPCA for approval. 2. Manhole steps SHALL be arranged in the manhole bases, transition sections, risers and cones so as to provide a manhole step ladder approximately twelve (12) inches on centers for the full height of installation. The manhole steps SHALL be aligned such that a person entering the manhole structure descends on the invert table and not above the invert channel. Manhole steps SHALL be copolymer polypropylene plastic coated 1/2" grade 60 steel reinforced step Model No. PS2-PFSL in conformance with ASTM C-478 paragraph 11 as revised, as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Peachtree City, GA. See Manhole Step Detail. 3. Wall thickness of manhole risers SHALL be not less than five (5) inches; wall thickness of manhole transition sections and cone type tops SHALL not be less than five (5) inches at the base and SHALL taper to a thickness of not less than eight (8) inches at the top. 4. The exterior surfaces of all manholes SHALL be shop coated with two coats of Tneme-Tar 46-413 as manufactured by Tnemec, Koppers bitumastic super service black, or approved equal. 5. The joints SHALL be the type using a Type A, rubber gasket for sealing the joints; all joints SHALL be provided so as to be watertight under all conditions of service. The rubber gaskets SHALL have a texture to assure a watertight and permanent seal and SHALL meet or exceed all of the requirements of AASHTO Specification M198, latest revision. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 22 of 55 6. When the corbel section needs to be raised in order to bring the frame and cover to grade, the following materials shall be used: a. In excess of three (3) inches, whenever possible, a precast concrete grade ring will be used to bring the frame to the desired height. b. In cases less than three (3) inches, when a grade ring cannot be used, a fast curing, high strength, low permeability, structural concrete shall be used to bring the frame and cover to grade. Acceptable products shall be as manufactured by EMACO (T415), Five Star (structural concrete) or approved equal. c. A minimum 2 hour compressive strength of 1,200 psi shall be attained. 7. Brick for manholes SHALL conform in all respects to ASTM Designation C 32, Grade SM, latest revision, size 2-1/2 inches by 3-3/4 inches by 8 inches. 8. All openings in new manhole bases and risers shall be provided with a prefabricated mechanical type joint seal between manhole walls and entering pipes. The joint seal shall be of a type to insure watertight jointing between manhole and pipes under all conditions of installation; the type of joint seals to be used shall be subject to approval. 9. Cut-ins for openings for new pipe entrances into the existing manholes SHALL be cut through the wall of the manholes at the required elevation, location and size for providing space for new pipelines to enter into the manholes. The openings SHALL be of sufficient size and at the proper elevation and location, providing for a uniform annular space between the outside of the pipe wall and the sides of the manhole wall opening to permit proper installation and use of a prefabricated mechanical type joint seal between manhole walls and entering pipes for existing pre-cast concrete manholes, or of approximately 3/4 inch to permit sealing of the opening with non-shrink mortar for brick or concrete block manholes. The openings in the manhole walls SHALL be core-drilled for pre-cast concrete manholes, or carefully cut for brick or concrete block manholes, by qualified workmen so as to obtain an opening conforming to the requirements specified and so as not to damage existing work to remain nor to spall masonry adjacent to the opening. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 23 of 55 10. Drop Manholes may be required where the velocity of the expected sewage flow exceeds ten (10) feet per second. Direction of the type of drop (inside or outside) SHALL be at the discretion of the WPCA. No drop will be allowed where the vertical drop is less than 3’-6”. Pre-cast outside drops MAY be used if approved by the WPCA. See Drop Manholes details. 11. Dog House Manhole Bases MAY be approved by the WPCA in instances where flow diversion is deemed cost-prohibitive in cases where a tie-in the an existing sewer is required or where replacement of an existing manhole is required. See “Pre-cast Dog House Manhole Base” detail. 12. The invert tables in the existing manholes shall be altered and rebuilt to provide proper flow channels for the flow of sewage through the manholes as required by the new arrangement of piping entering and leaving the manhole as indicated and/or as directed. The new flow channels shall be cut out of the existing invert tables to smooth, uniform cross section and after cutting all surfaces shall be lined with a heavy coating of cement-mortar steel-troweled and rubbed smooth. The complete inverts and flow channels shall present smooth flow conditions, transitions in size and changes in direction. 13. All concrete, brickwork or masonry in manholes designated for abandonment shall be removed to such depth that it will not encroach upon the base or subbase course of any pavement or of any of the new sewers or appurtenances. If any of the existing structure still remains, the influent and effluent pipes in said manholes shall be plugged as described herein and the remaining structure shall be filled with an approved backfill material, thoroughly compacted to the top of the existing masonry. All concrete, (including bases) brickwork and masonry of manholes to be removed shall be completely removed and shall be disposed of. No materials removed from manholes shall be used as backfill. 14. The existing pipe entrances at existing manholes which are indicated to be abandoned shall be filled-in solid with brick, concrete and mortar for the full area of the pipe diameter. Prior to filling the pipe entrances, the existing pipes shall be removed from within the manhole walls. The plugging and sealing of the pipe openings in the manhole walls shall be made watertight. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 24 of 55 B. Manhole Frames and Covers - Gray iron castings SHALL conform to the requirements of AASTHO Designation: M 105-49, Class 30, latest revision. Iron castings SHALL be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blowholes and other defects in positions effecting the strength and value for the service intended. The sets of frames and covers SHALL be the weight ±3% as specified on the drawings and certification as to proof of weight shall be submitted. All covers in ROW’s SHALL be fitted with a bolt type cover. When the cover is subjected to ponding the frame and cover SHALL be of the watertight type as shown on the detail. The frames and covers SHALL be as manufactured by LeBaron Foundry, Campbell Foundry or approved equal as designated on the detail. The rubber used in the self sealing cover SHALL be a style #10 commercial neoprene compound, adaptable to extreme weather conditions, resist rotting, checking, and cracking due to ozone exposure. It SHALL meet ASTM D-2000 material: EPDM, color: black, 60 durometer. Material SHALL be able to withstand exposure to petroleum products. Dimensions are shown on the detail sheets. An adhesive SHALL be used to fasten the rubber gasket to the cover. The adhesive SHALL be an industrial type, Scotch-Grip (TM) 4799 as manufactured by 3M or approved equal. C. Manhole Frame Seal - Manhole frame sealing includes the sealing of the frame joint area and the chimney above the cone of the manhole with an applied flexible seal. The seal SHALL be designed to prevent leakage of water into the manhole through these areas throughout a 20-year design life. The seal SHALL remain flexible, allowing repeated vertical movement and/or repeated horizontal movement of the frame due to thermal movement of the pavement or other causes of up to 1/2-inch. The seal may not be applied to corbel that has been altered until two (2) hours minimum has elapsed to allow for the mortar to setup. An applied seal is one that is achieved by applying a product, approved by the Engineer between the chimney and under the frame to provide a seal that meets the performance criteria contained in this section. All of the surfaces that are to be sealed SHALL be clean, dry, and free of dust, rust, oil, loose material and other contaminants. If the sealing product is the type of material that is applied to the complete surface of the frame where the product is applied by trowel, roller, or by spraying, the thickness SHALL not be less than 250 mils (1/4 inch). The sealing material SHALL extend far over the entire surface area of the frame to insure bonding and cover enough of the chimney to insure sealing. Sealant Materials SHALL be as manufactured by Parsons Environmental (Parson Poxy FG), or approved equal. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 25 of 55 If the applied seal utilizes the elastomeric polyurethane resin-soaked oakum method, each joint SHALL consist of two concentric rings of one (1) inch oakum. The outer ring SHALL be saturated with the urethane base foam chemical sealing material. The inner ring, saturated with water, SHALL be placed to prevent urethane foam from entering the manhole. The oakum saturated with urethane SHALL be sprayed with water. When foaming begins, the frame SHALL be set in place. Sealant materials for the elastomeric polyurethane resin- soaked oakum method SHALL be as manufactured by Avanti International (AV- 219) Fibrotite and Polyurethane Hydrophylic Resin (AV-220), 3M-5600, or approved equal. Application procedures SHALL be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 26 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 27 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 28 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 29 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 30 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 31 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 32 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 33 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 34 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 35 of 55 3.07 Grease, Oil and Gross Particle Separators The following technical standards SHALL apply when in the opinion of the WPCA that excessive grease, oil or gross particles exist for a particular connection as directed by the Sewer Use Rules and Regulations. Grease Trap A. The dimensions and configuration of the tank, baffles, inlet, outlet and access openings SHALL be in accordance with the attached drawing which is incorporated as part of this specification. B. The size of the tank SHALL have a static liquid volume equal to approximately one-third (1/3) of the maximum daily flow through the tank, but in no case, SHALL the capacity be less than 1,000 gallons. In all cases the depth of the static liquid volume SHALL be a minimum of 48 inches as measured from the floor of the tank to the invert of the outlet pipe. The tank SHALL have sufficient capacity to provide at least 24-hours detention period for the kitchen flow. C. The air space provided between the liquid height and the underside of the tank top SHALL be a minimum of eight (8) inches). D. The tank SHALL be constructed of steel reinforced (ASTM A-615, GR. 60), precast concrete capable of withstanding an H-20 structural loading. The concrete mix SHALL have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. The tank interior SHALL be coated with an epoxy based, petroleum resistant sealant. The exterior of the tank, including the top and bottom surfaces, SHALL be coated with an asphalt based damp proofing sealant. E. The horizontal structural seam of the tank SHALL be located above the static liquid level and SHALL be sealed with a butyl rubber gasket. All interior joints or seams SHALL be filled in with a non-shrink grout and then coated with an epoxy-based, petroleum resistant sealant, to form a water-tight joint. After installation of the top, the remainder of the exterior joint space as well as any other exterior joint spaces SHALL be filled in with a non-shrink cement or water-plug grout and then coated with an asphalt based water proof sealant. F. The internal baffles SHALL be tight fitting reinforced concrete panel sections with a minimum thickness of three (3) inches, set in tracks or grooves cast integrally into the walls of the tank. The position of the two baffles SHALL be spaced to create three approximately equal compartments within the tank when used for oil separation and two equal compartments when used for grease separation. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 36 of 55 G. Openings for the inlet and outlet piping SHALL be cast or neatly cored in the precast concrete wall. The precast knockout or cored hole SHALL be formed with a flexible rubber compression boot or sleeve so the inlet and outlet piping can form a watertight seal. H. The tank SHALL be set plumb and level on a six (6) inch depth bedding of 3/4- inch crushed stone extending one (1) foot beyond the sides of the tank. The 3/4- inch stone SHALL be placed on thoroughly compacted undisturbed soil. I. The inlet piping SHALL be a minimum of four (4) inches and the outlet piping a minimum of six (6) inches but in no case smaller than the inlet piping. All interior piping, including the piping passing through the tank walls, SHALL be PVC Schedule 40, Type I, ASTM D-2665, NSF-DWV, solvent weld pipe and fittings or approved equal. Flexible couplings as manufactured by Fernco, or approved equal, SHALL be provided on the inlet and outlet piping at the point of transition to the exterior building SEWER at approximately one (1) foot from the exterior wall of the tank. J. The inlet and outlet piping in the interior of the tank SHALL be fitted with "tees" that SHALL be aligned with the manhole openings but still allow access to the tank. The "tees" SHALL be equipped with standpipe risers extending to the outside edge of the tank and SHALL be securely strapped to the masonry wall of the manhole extension. The bottom of the outlet "tee" pipe SHALL be extended to a point twelve (12) inches above the floor and the inlet "tee" pipe extended twelve (12) inches down from the invert. K. Vent piping SHALL be a minimum of one-half the diameter of the outlet pipe. Pipe and fittings SHALL be PVC Schedule 40, Type I, ASTM D-2665, NSF-DWV, solvent weld or approved equal. It SHALL be sloped to drain into the separator. The vent stack SHALL extend eight (8) feet above the finish grade and terminate with a 180 degree elbow vent cap. The vent stack SHALL be screened and attached to the outside wall of the building. L. Openings in the top slab for three (3) 26" diameter access holes SHALL be cast approximately centered over the center compartment and approximately twelve (12) inches from the inside edge of the two outer compartments. If the tank is to be used as a grease trap only, then a 26" diameter access hole SHALL be provided for every fifty (50) square feet of cover surface. The same spacing dimensions for the outer covers SHALL apply. Frames and covers SHALL be the TOWN standard or approved equal. Manhole extensions MAY be constructed of concrete grade rings with mortar joints and SHALL not exceed twenty-four (24) inches. The interior of all manhole extensions SHALL be coated with an epoxy, Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 37 of 55 petroleum resistant sealant. The exterior of the extension SHALL be coated with an asphalt based waterproof sealant. M. The frame to corbel seal SHALL as designated in Section 3.06 C. N. Oil/Water Separators and Grease Traps SHALL be inspected by the WPCA prior to installation of the tank and after installation prior to placement of backfill material and hookup of inlet building lateral. Backfill material SHALL be free from refuse, organic material, boulders, rocks and stones or other material that, in the opinion of the inspector, is unsuitable. O. The interior epoxy coating MAY be omitted if the tank is to be utilized as a restaurant-kitchen waste grease trap tank only. P. The inlet piping SHALL not include any sources of domestic SEWAGE. The outlet piping SHALL be connected to the SANITARY SEWER. Q. Each Separator shall be so installed that it readily accessible for servicing and maintenance. Need for use of ladders or moving bulky objects in order to service separators SHALL constitute a violation of accessibility. Grease Interceptor/AGRU (Automatic Grease Recovery Unit) A. Each interceptor SHALL be so installed that it is readily accessible for servicing and maintenance. Need for use of ladders or moving bulky objects in order to service interceptors SHALL constitute a violation of accessibility. B. Installed grease interceptors SHALL have a grease retention capacity of not less than 2 lbs for each gallon per minute of flow. C. Grease interceptors SHALL be equipped with devices to control the rate of flow through the interceptors so that it does not exceed the rated flow of the interceptors. D. All grease interceptors SHALL be of the type and capacity approved by the Plumbing and Drainage Institute and the WPCA. E. Sizing of a pot sink grease interceptor SHALL be performed using the following method: Example: A sink 48 inches long by 24 inches wide by 12 inches deep. 1. Cubic content 48" x 24" x 12" = 13,824 cu. in. 2. 1 gallon = 231 cu. In./gal Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 38 of 55 Content in gallons 13,824 cu. in. = 59.8 gal. 231 cu. In./gal 3. The pot sink is usually filled to about 75 percent of capacity while the items washed displaces about 25% of the sinks capacity. Actual drainage load 0.75 x 59.8 gal. = 44.9 gal. 4. Determine the drainage period which is the time it takes to empty the pot sink. If the time to empty the sink is less than one minute then the time SHALL be one minute. If the time to empty is greater than two minutes then the time SHALL be two minutes. All times between one and two SHALL be the actual time it takes to empty the sink. Flow rate 44.9 gal. = 29.9 gpm 1.5 minutes 5. The grease interceptor size SHALL be equal to or greater than the calculated flow rate. Maintenance A. In-line grease traps and interceptors SHALL be maintained in efficient operating condition by periodic removal of accumulated grease, scum, oil, or other floating substances, and solids deposited on the bottom. B. Manual type grease interceptors SHALL be cleaned when cold, before normal operations have started. Usually the grease is congealed and easier to remove under these conditions. The grease MAY be removed by ladling the grease in either it’s solid or liquid form which will be floating on the surface. It is also necessary to scrape any food particles from the bottom of the interceptor in order for it to function properly. C. A grease interceptor is considered full when the depth of grease and/or oil exceeds one-fourth of the normal liquid depth of the interceptor. The maximum time interval allowed between cleaning is three (3) months. It is recommended that passive interceptors and solids strainers of automatic interceptors be cleaned at least once a day. Failure to clean traps and interceptors at the specified intervals SHALL result in monetary penalties. D. Grease traps SHALL be inspected monthly and SHALL be cleaned by a licensed septage hauler whenever the level of grease is 25% of the effective depth of the trap, or at least every three (3) months whichever is sooner. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 39 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 40 of 55 Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 41 of 55 3.08 Grinder Pumps The following technical standards SHALL apply when in the opinion of the WPCA that gravity flow to the SEWER is not permissible. 3.08.01 General A. Description The intent of this specification is to define the type and quality of Individual Household Grinder Pumping Units for use in a low pressure sewer system. The equipment shall be the product of a company experienced in the design and manufacture of grinder pumps for specific use in low pressure sewer systems. The Manufacturer shall have an established service support program and a continuing inventory of pump unit replacement parts. The grinder pumps shall be complete factory-built and tested household pump units, each consisting of grinder pump(s) suitably mounted in an HDPE basin, pump removal system, shut-off valve, anti-siphon valve, and check valve assembled within the basin, external remote control and electrical alarm/disconnect panel, equipped with generator transfer switch and receptacle and all necessary internal wiring and controls. The pump SHALL be either semi-positive displacement type or a submersible end suction centrifugal type grinder unit. For ease of serviceability, when grinder pumps are used for complete subdivisions, all pump motor/grinder units shall be of like type and horsepower throughout the system. Design calculations SHALL be provided to show that the total head will be met and the pump will run within specification limits. B. Shop Drawings The DRAIN LAYER SHALL furnish two (2) sets of drawings detailing the equipment to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The WPCA SHALL promptly review this data, and return one (1) copy to the Contractor as accepted, or with requested modifications. The DRAIN LAYER SHALL indicate required preventative maintenance. Preventative maintenance not so listed SHALL be considered as inclusive of the manufacturer's warranty and SHALL not be considered as justification of refusal of warranty claims. The DRAIN LAYER SHALL submit detailed installation and user instructions (operation manuals) for each pump unit supplied; and submit complete parts and service manuals for each unit. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 42 of 55 C. Design The grinder pump manufacturer SHALL establish individual requirements for pumps reflecting random simultaneous operation of each pump in the system. This system must function without backups from individual basins during circumstances in which liquid levels at all grinder pump basins are signaling operation. The manufacturer SHALL provide detailed calculations demonstrating individual pumping capabilities in the system with regard to simultaneous discharge. D. Operating Conditions The pumps SHALL be capable of delivering a minimum 15 gpm against a rated total dynamic head of 0 feet (0 PSIG), 11 gpm against a rated total dynamic head of 92 feet (40 PSIG) and 7.8 gpm against a rated total dynamic head of 185 feet (80 PSIG). The design requirement shall use a C value of 130 and the pumps SHALL be capable of operating at negative total dynamic head without overloading the motor(s). Under no circumstances SHALL in-line piping or valving be used to create a false apparent head. E. Warranty The DRAIN LAYER SHALL provide a parts and labor warranty on the complete stations and accessories including, but not limited to, the control panel and redundant check valve, for a period of twenty-four (24) months after notice of Owner's acceptance, but no greater than twenty-seven (27) months after receipt of shipment. 3.08.02 Product A. Semi-positive Displacement Grinder Pumps 1. Pump The pump SHALL be a custom designed, integral, vertical rotor, motor driven, solids handling pump of progressing cavity type with a single mechanical seal. Double radial O-ring seals are required at all casting joints to minimize corrosion and create a protective barrier. All pump castings SHALL be cast iron, fully epoxy coated to 8-10 mil nominal dry thickness. The rotor SHALL be through-hardened, highly polished, precipitation hardened stainless steel. The stator SHALL be of a specifically compounded ethylene propylene synthetic elastomer. The material SHALL be suitable for domestic wastewater service. Its physical properties SHALL include high tear and abrasion resistance, grease resistance, water and detergent resistance, temperature stability, excellent aging properties, and outstanding wear resistance. The pump SHALL be U.L. listed to Standard 778 and CSA listed to Standard 108, as well as to NSF/ANSI 46. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 43 of 55 2. Grinder The grinder SHALL be positioned immediately below the pumping elements and SHALL be direct-driven by a single, one-piece motor shaft. The grinder impeller assembly SHALL be securely fastened to the pump motor shaft. The grinder impeller assembly SHALL be securely fastened to the pump motor shaft by means of a threaded connection attaching the grinder impeller to the motor shaft. The grinder SHALL be a one- piece forged 4140 cutter wheel of the rotating type with inductive hardened cutter teeth (Rockwell 55-58c) for abrasion resistance. A stationary quench hardened and ground shredding ring SHALL be provided with a staggered tooth pattern with only one edge engaged at a time, maximizing the cutting torque. This assembly SHALL be dynamically balanced and operate without objectionable noise or vibration over the entire range of recommended operating pressures. The grinder SHALL be constructed so as to eliminate clogging and jamming under all normal operating conditions including starting. Sufficient vortex action SHALL be created to scour the tank free of deposits or sludge banks which would impair the operation of the pump. These requirements SHALL be accomplished by the following items in conjunction with the grinder pump tank: a. The grinder SHALL be positioned in such a way that solids are fed in an upward flow direction. b. The inlet shroud opening SHALL have a diameter no less than 5 inches. c. Maximum flow rate through the cutting mechanism must not exceed 4 feet per second. d. The impeller mechanism SHALL rotate at a nominal speed of no greater than 1,800 RPM. The grinder SHALL be capable of reducing all components in normal domestic sewage, including a reasonable amount of "foreign objects", such as paper, wood, plastic, glass, rubber and other foreign materials as defined by NSF/ANSI 46, to finely-divided particles which will pass freely through the passages of the pump and the 1¼" diameter discharge pipe. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 44 of 55 3. Electric Motor The motor SHALL be a 1 HP, 1,725 RPM, 240V, 60 Hz, single phase, capacitor start, ball bearing, air-cooled induction type with Class F installation, low starting current not to exceed 30 amperes and high starting torque of 8.4 foot pounds. Inherent protection against running overloads or locked rotor conditions for the pump motor SHALL be provided by the use of an automatic-reset, integral thermal overload protector incorporated into the motor. This motor protector combination SHALL have been specifically investigated and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for the application. The wet portion of the motor armature SHALL be 300 Series stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal The pump core SHALL be provided with a mechanical shaft seal to prevent leakage between the motor and pump. The seal SHALL have a stationary ceramic seat and carbon rotating surface with faces precision lapped and held in position by a stainless steel spring. 5. Tank & Integral Accessway The tank SHALL be a wetwell/drywell design made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) of a grade selected for environmental stress cracking for simplex stations and HDPE or Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Resin for duplex stations. Corrugated sections are to be made of a double wall construction with the internal wall being generally smooth to promote scouring. Corrugations of outside wall are to be a minimum amplitude of 1½" to provide necessary transverse stiffness. Any incidental sections of a single wall construction are to be a minimum ¼" thick. All seams created during tank construction are to be thermally welded and factory tested for leak tightness. The basin must be designed to withstand wall collapse or buckling based on a hydrostatic pressure of 62.4 pounds per square foot, a saturated soil weight of 135 pounds per cubic foot, a soil modulus of 700 pounds per square foot and constructed to withstand or exceed 200% of the assumed loading at any depth. The tank SHALL be furnished with one EDPM grommet fitting to accept a 4½"OD (4” DWV (Drain, Waste, Vent) or SCH 40) inlet pipe. The drywell access way SHALL be an integral extension of the wetwell Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 45 of 55 assembly and include a lockable cover assembly providing low profile mounting and watertight capability. Access way design and construction SHALL facilitate field adjustment of station height in increments of 4" or less without the use of any adhesives or sealants requiring cure time before installation can be completed. The station SHALL have all necessary penetrations molded in and factory sealed. No field penetrations SHALL be acceptable. All discharge piping SHALL be constructed of 304 Series Stainless Steel and terminate outside the access way bulkhead with a flexible stainless steel, 1¼" female NPT fitting. The discharge piping SHALL include a stainless steel ball valve rated for 235 psi. The bulkhead penetration SHALL be factory installed and warranted by the manufacturer to be watertight. The access way SHALL include a single NEMA 6P electrical quick disconnect (EQD) for all power and control functions, factory installed with access way penetrations warranted by the manufacturer to be watertight. An electrical junction box SHALL not be permitted in the tank. The access way SHALL also include a 2-inch PVC vent to prevent sewage gases from accumulating in the tank. The EQD SHALL be supplied with Thirty-two (32) feet of useable Electrical Supply Cable (ESC) outside the station, meeting UL requirements, to connect to the alarm panel. The ESC SHALL be installed in the basin by the manufacturer. The EQD SHALL be so designed to be conducive to field wiring as required. 6. Check Valve The pump SHALL be equipped with a factory-installed, gravity-operated, flapper-type integral check valve built into the stainless steel discharge pipe. The check valve SHALL provide a full-ported passageway when open, and SHALL introduce a friction loss of less than 6 inches of water at a maximum rated flow. A non-metallic hinge SHALL be an integral part of the flapper assembly providing a maximum degree of freedom to ensure seating even at very low back pressure. The valve body SHALL be an injection molded part of the engineered thermoplastic resin. The working pressure of the valve SHALL be at least 235 psi. Each grinder station SHALL also include a separate check valve for installation in the 1¼" service lateral between the grinder pump station and the sewer main, preferably next to the curb stop. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 46 of 55 Moving parts SHALL be made of 300 series stainless steel and fabric reinforced synthetic elastomer to ensure corrosion resistance, dimensional stability and fatigue strength. 7. Core Unit The grinder pump SHALL have cartridge type, easily removable core assemblies containing pump, motor, grinder, motor and level controls, check valve, anti-siphon valve, electrical quick disconnect and wiring. The core unit SHALL seal to the tank deck with a stainless steel latch assembly and must be actuated utilizing a single quick release mechanism requiring no more than a half turn of a wrench. The watertight integrity of the core unit, including wiring and access cover, SHALL be established by 100% factory test at a minimum of 5 PSIG. 8. Controls Controls, to make the system fully operational, SHALL be located in the top housing of the core unit. The cover SHALL be attached with 304 stainless steel fasteners. The wastewater level controls SHALL be housed in a separate enclosure from the motor starting controls, sealed via a radial type seal and integrally attached to the pump assembly so that it can be removed from the station with the pump. The level sensing housing SHALL be a high-impact thermoplastic copolymer over-molded with a thermo plastic elastomer. Non-fouling wastewater level detection for controlling pump operation SHALL be accomplished by monitoring the pressure changes in an integral air column connected to a pressure switch. The air column SHALL be integrally molded from thermoplastic elastomer suitable for use in wastewater and with excellent impact resistance. The air column SHALL have only a single connection between the water level being monitored and the pressure switch with any connections sealed radials with redundant O-rings. The level detection device SHALL have no moving parts in direct contact with the wastewater. Depressing the run button SHALL operate the pump even with the level sensor housing removed from the pump. 9. Anti-Siphon Valve The pump SHALL be equipped with a factory installed, gravity operated flapper-type integral anti-siphon valve built into the stainless steel discharging piping. Moving parts SHALL be made of 300 Series stainless steel and fabric-reinforced synthetic elastomer to ensure Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 47 of 55 corrosion resistance, dimensional stability, and fatigue strength. A non- metallic hinge SHALL be an integral part of the flapper assembly providing a maximum degree of freedom to ensure seating even at very low back pressure. The valve body SHALL be an injection molded part of the engineered thermoplastic resin. The anti-siphon port diameter SHALL be no less than 60% of the inside diameter of the pump discharge piping 10. Control Panel Each grinder pump station SHALL include a NEMA 4X, UL-listed Alarm/Disconnect Panel suitable for wall or pole mounting. The NEMA 4X enclosure SHALL be manufactured of thermoplastic polyester to ensure corrosion resistance. The enclosure SHALL include a hinged, padlockable cover, secured dead front and component knockouts. The enclosure dimensions shall be large enough to include all components as specified. The enclosure shall not exceed approximately 12.5"W x 16"H x 7.5"D. For each core unit, the panel SHALL contain one (1) 15 amp, double pole circuit breaker for the power circuit and one (1) 15 amp single pole circuit breaker for the alarm circuit. The panel SHALL contain terminal blocks, integral power bus, push to run feature, a complete alarm circuit and a generator transfer switch and one (1) 20 amp 250 VAC generator receptacle with spring loaded, gasketed cover suitably mounted to provide access for connection of an external generator while maintaining a 4X rating. The Control Panel SHALL include the following features: audio and visual alarm, push to run switch, push to silence switch, high level and (redundant) pump starting control and generator outlet. The alarm sequence is to be as follows: a. When liquid level in the sewage wet well rises above the alarm level, visual and audio alarms will be activated. The contacts on the alarm pressure switch will close. The redundant pump starting system will be energized. b. The audio alarm MAY be silenced by means of the externally mounted, push-to-silence button. c. Visual alarm remains illuminated until the sewage level in the wet well drops below the "off" setting of the alarm pressure switch. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 48 of 55 The visual alarm lamp SHALL be inside a red oblong lens at least 3.75” L x 2.38” W x 1.5” H. Visual alarm SHALL be mounted to the top of the enclosure in such a manner as to maintain NEMA 4X rating. For duplex units, in addition to the above, two high level indicator lights SHALL be mounted behind the access cover. During a high level alarm condition, the appropriate light will illuminate to indicate which pump core requires servicing. The audio alarm SHALL be a printed circuit board in conjunction with an 93 dB @ 2 feet buzzer with quick mounting terminal strip mounted in the interior of the enclosure. The audio alarm SHALL be capable of being de-activated by depressing a push-type switch which is encapsulated in a weatherproof silicone boot and mounted on the bottom of the enclosure. The entire Control Panel, as manufactured, SHALL be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 11. Serviceability The grinder pump core units SHALL have two lifting eyes complete with nylon lift out harness connected to its top housing to facilitate easy removal of the core unit from the tank when necessary. All mechanical and electrical connections must provide easy disconnect accessibility for core unit removal and installation. A push-to-run feature SHALL be provided for field troubleshooting. All motor control components SHALL be mounted on a readily replaceable bracket for ease of field service. 12. Corrosion Protection All materials exposed to wastewater or within the wet well SHALL have inherent corrosion protection; i.e., epoxy powder coated cast iron, fiberglass, stainless steel, PVC. 13. Safety The grinder pump SHALL be free from electrical and fire hazards as required in a residential environment. As evidence of compliance with this requirement, the completely assembled and wired grinder pump station in its tank SHALL be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. to be safe and appropriate for the intended use. UL listing of components of the station, or third-party testing to UL standard are not acceptable. The grinder pump SHALL meet accepted standards for plumbing equipment for use in or near residences, SHALL be free from noise, odor or health hazards, and SHALL have been tested by an independent Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 49 of 55 laboratory to certify its capability to perform as specified in either individual or low pressure sewer system applications. As evidence of compliance with this requirement, the grinder pump SHALL bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal. B. Submersible Centrifugal Grinder Pump 1. Pump The pump SHALL be a custom designed, vertical suction, motor driven, solids handling pump with mechanical seal. The impeller SHALL be of the recessed, vortex design of 85-5-5-5 bronze construction. Shaft seals SHALL be ceramic and silicon carbon, stainless steel, mechanical type. All exposed hardware SHALL be 300 series stainless steel. Discharge connection SHALL be a horizontally oriented discharge flange with integral sealing diaphragm. The material SHALL be suitable for domestic wastewater service. Its physical properties SHALL include high tear and abrasion resistance, grease resistance, water and detergent resistance, temperature stability of 104° F, good aging properties, outstanding wear resistance and capable of running dry for extended periods of time as well as operating at zero or negative heads without damage to the pump. The pump SHALL be U.L. listed to Standard 778 and CSA listed to Standard 108, as well as to NSF/ANSI 46. 2. Grinder The grinder mechanism SHALL be specifically designed for use in a grinder pump; garbage-disposal-style cutting mechanisms are not acceptable. The grinder SHALL consist of a radial cutter threaded and locked to the motor shaft, and a matching shredded ring. Grinding SHALL be accomplished by a slicing rather than chopping action. The shredding ring SHALL be reversible to provide twice the cutting life. The grinder components SHALL be constructed of 440C stainless steel hardened to a minimum Rockwell C55 and SHALL be finish ground for a fine cutting edge. The grinder SHALL be positioned immediately below the pumping elements and SHALL be direct-driven by a single, one-piece motor shaft. The grinding mechanism SHALL operate without objectionable noise or vibration over the entire range of recommended operating pressures. The grinder SHALL be constructed so as to eliminate clogging and jamming under all normal operating conditions including starting. The grinder must be capable of handling a wide variety of solids, including cloth, paper, grit, sanitary products, and other foreign materials as defined by NSF/ANSI 46. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 50 of 55 3. Electric Motor As a minimum the motor SHALL be a 2 HP, 3,450 RPM, 240V, 60 Hz, single phase, submersible, capacitor start, ball bearing, squirrel cage, Induction type with NEMA L characteristics and SHALL be non- overloading throughout the entire pump curve. The motor SHALL operate submerged and SHALL be housed in a sealed housing filled with non-toxic dielectric oil. The motor SHALL have permanently lubricated, anti-friction bearings and stainless steel shaft, and continuously run submerged and not submerged without exceeding temperature limits. Thermal overload protection must be provided. Inherent protection against running overloads or locked rotor conditions for the pump motor SHALL be provided by the use of an automatic reset, integral thermal overload protector incorporated into the motor. This motor protector combination SHALL have been specifically investigated and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for the application. Grinder pumps and motors SHALL be listed by UL for such locations. Guaranteed submergence SHALL not be considered equal to the UL listing for the application. 4. Mechanical Seal Submersible motors SHALL be equipped with floating style single mechanical seal to prevent leakage between the motor and pump. Seal faces SHALL be silicon carbide for both the rotary and stationary seats, lapped and polished to a tolerance on one (1) light band. Seal SHALL be provided with 300 series stainless steel hardware and Buna elastomers. 5. Tank & Integral Accessway The tank SHALL be a wetwell/drywell design made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) of a grade selected for environmental stress cracking for simplex stations with a corrugated high-density polyethylene riser sealed to the basin and cover adapter and HDPE or Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Resin for duplex stations The basin SHALL be provided with three (3) blanked off inlet positions, 90 degrees apart, for field selection to simplify installation. The basin must be designed to withstand wall collapse or buckling based on a hydrostatic pressure of 62.4 pounds per square foot, a saturated soil weight of 135 pounds per cubic foot, a soil modulus of 700 pounds per square foot and constructed to withstand or exceed 200% of the assumed loading at any depth. The access way SHALL include a single NEMA 6P electrical quick Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 51 of 55 disconnect (EQD) for all power and control functions, factory installed with access way penetrations warranted by the manufacturer to be watertight. An electrical junction box SHALL not be permitted in the tank. The access way SHALL also include a 2-inch PVC vent to prevent sewage gases from accumulating in the tank. The EQD SHALL be supplied with Fifty (50) feet of useable Electrical Supply Cable (ESC) outside the station, meeting UL requirements, to connect to the alarm panel. The ESC SHALL be installed in the basin by the manufacturer. The EQD SHALL be so designed to be conducive to field wiring as required. The drywell access way SHALL be an integral extension of the wetwell assembly and include a lockable cover assembly providing low profile mounting and watertight capability. Access way design and construction SHALL facilitate field adjustment of station height in increments of 4" or less without the use of any adhesives or sealants requiring cure time before installation can be completed. The station SHALL have all necessary penetrations molded in and factory sealed. No field penetrations SHALL be acceptable. 6. Removal System Each basin SHALL be equipped with an injection molded engineered polypropylene thermoplastic POD to locate and position the grinder pump and level control device. Pump and controls SHALL be removable without requiring the loosening of fasteners. The POD is to provide automatic alignment and connection of pump to discharge piping and level control with no additional adjustment required. A ½” diameter knotted polypropylene rope harness with a minimum breaking strength of 3,750 pounds SHALL be attached to the pump at two locations for removal and installation purposes for Simplex units. Larger units MAY be equipped with stainless steel guide rails to facilitate removal of the pump(s) from the top. Guide rail systems must be UL approved, non- sparking type. 7. Shutoff Valve The pump discharge SHALL be equipped with a factory-installed manual ball valve. The ball valves SHALL be fully ported, constructed of bronze with stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem and hardware, and Teflon seats with a minimum rated pressure of 150 PSI. All valves SHALL be operable from ground level with a color-coded actuation cord tagged green to open, red to close. Shut-off valve must be replaceable from above without confined space entry. Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 52 of 55 8. Check Valve The pump discharge SHALL be equipped with a factory-installed, gravity- operated, flapper-type integral check valve. The check valve SHALL provide a full-ported passageway when open, and SHALL introduce a friction loss of less than six (6) inches of water at a maximum rated flow. Working parts SHALL be 300 series stainless steel and fabric reinforced synthetic elastomer to ensure corrosion resistance, dimensional stability, and fatigue strength. A non-metallic hinge SHALL be an integral part of the flapper assembly providing a maximum degree of freedom to ensure seating even at very low back pressure. The valve body SHALL be an injection molded part made of PVC type I-II. Working pressure of the valve SHALL be at least 150 psi. Each grinder station SHALL also include a separate check valve for installation in the 1¼" service lateral between the grinder pump station and the sewer main, preferably at the curb stop and require only ½ pound of backpressure for complete closure. 9. Anti-Siphon Valve The pump SHALL be constructed with a positively-primed, flooded suction configuration. As added assurance that the pump cannot lose prime even under negative pressure conditions in the discharge piping system, the pump SHALL be equipped with an integral anti-siphoning, air relief valve in the discharge piping just below the main check valve. The valve will automatically close when the pump is running and open when the pump is off. 10. Pump Discharge Piping All internal discharge piping SHALL be constructed of 304 stainless steel or bronze and terminate outside the access way bulkhead with a stainless steel flexible fitting with a 1-1/4 inch female NPT fitting. The manufacturer SHALL guarantee all bulkhead penetrations be watertight. The discharge connection shall be constructed so as to prevent against shearing from the forces generated from backfilling and tank settlement. 11. Level Sensors Level detection for controlling pump and alarm operation SHALL be accomplished by use of a detection device specifically designed for use in a sewage grinder station. Non-fouling sewage level detection for controlling pump operation shall be accomplished by solid state, continuous pressure sensing level measurement. Level control sensor Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 53 of 55 shall meet NEMA 6P/IP68 for electrical enclosures and connectors for operation inside wet well. Switches used in the system SHALL be hermetically sealed in a submersible, watertight protective housing, with an integral pressure-compensating diaphragm. Level detection SHALL not require any regular preventive maintenance. The level detection device SHALL include an automatically resetting, heat sensing thermal switch that interrupts current flow if excessive liquid temperature is detected. The level control SHALL be serviceable without confined space entry as defined by OSHA. The level sensing assembly SHALL meet UL approval. 12. Control Panel Each grinder pump station SHALL include a NEMA 4X & 6, UL listed electrical control panel. The enclosure shall be manufactured of thermoplastic to ensure corrosion resistance. The enclosure SHALL not exceed approximately 13"W x 15"H x 7"D. It shall include a hinged, lockable cover with a secured dead front. The external control and alarm panel shall contain the motor contactor, terminal blocks and complete multi-alarm circuitry. The panel shall also have the following features: Audible and visual alarm with test and push-to-silence button, pump push-to-run switch with pump run LED, Emergency pump manual override switch, disconnect switch for generator power, 250V/20 AMP Male generator receptacle, one (1) 20 amp, thermal circuit breaker with accidental actuation protection, one (1) low voltage (24VDC) control and alarm circuit catastrophic over-voltage and over-current protection. The enclosure dimensions shall be large enough to include all components as specified The visual alarm lamp SHALL be inside a red fluted lens at least 2-5/8" diameter and 1-11/16" in height. Visual alarm SHALL be mounted to the top of the enclosure in such a manner as to maintain NEMA 4X rating. For duplex units, in addition to the above, two high level indicator lights SHALL be mounted behind the access cover. During a high level alarm condition, the appropriate light will illuminate to indicate which pump requires servicing. The audio alarm SHALL be a printed circuit board in conjunction with an 86 db buzzer with quick mounting terminal strip mounted in the interior of the enclosure. The audio alarm SHALL be capable of being de-activated by depressing a push-type switch which is encapsulated in a weatherproof silicone boot and mounted on the bottom of the enclosure. The entire Control Panel as manufactured SHALL be listed by Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 54 of 55 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 13. Corrosion Protection All materials exposed to wastewater or within the wet well SHALL have inherent corrosion protection; i.e., epoxy powder coated cast iron, fiberglass, polyethylene, engineered polypropylene copolymer, stainless steel, PVC or CPVC. 14. Safety The grinder pump SHALL be free from electrical and fire hazards as required in a residential environment. As evidence of compliance with this requirement, the completely assembled, factory wired and tested grinder pump station in its tank SHALL be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. to be safe and appropriate for the intended use. UL listing of components of the station, or third-party testing to UL standard are not acceptable. The grinder pump SHALL meet accepted standards for plumbing equipment for use in or near residences, SHALL be free from noise, odor or health hazards, and SHALL have been tested by an independent laboratory to certify its capability to perform as specified in either individual or low pressure sewer system applications. As evidence of compliance with this requirement, the grinder pump SHALL bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal. 3.08.03 Execution A. Factory Tests Each grinder pump or a representative centrifugal pump curve SHALL be submerged and operated for 5 minutes (minimum). Included in this procedure SHALL be the testing of all ancillary components such as the anti-siphon valve, check valve, discharge line, level sensors, each unit's dedicated controls, respective alarm/disconnect or control panel, etc. All factory tests SHALL incorporate each of the above listed items. Actual appurtenances and controls which SHALL be installed in the field SHALL be particular to the tested pump only. A common set of appurtenances and controls for all pumps will not be acceptable. Certified test results SHALL be supplied showing the operation of each grinder pump at three (3) different points on its performance curve, with the maximum pressure no less than 60 psi. Grinder pump core unit SHALL be tested for watertightness up to 5 PSIG. All tests SHALL be made in accordance with the applicable requirements of the test codes of the Hydraulic Institute and the American Institute of Electrical Montville Sanitary Sewer Material and Construction Standards September 1, 2009 55 of 55 Engineers. B. Delivery Grinder pump units SHALL be delivered to the job site, 100% completely assembled, including testing, ready for installation. In some cases where centrifugal pumps are used, the pumps and level sensors are shipped separately and require field assembly. Each grinder pump unit will have a minimum of three (3) lifting eyes to facilitate unloading and be individually mounted on wooden pallets. 3.08.04 Operation and Maintenance A. Manuals In addition to the requirements for operational manual submittals previously detailed, the manufacturer SHALL supply one (1) copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Owner, and one (1) copy to the WPCA. B. OSHA Confined Space All maintenance tasks for the grinder pump station must be possible without entry of the grinder pump station (as per OSHA 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces). "Entry means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required confined space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space." SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 1 of 19 SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Installation of new storm drain pipe, manholes and catch basins. 2.Relocation and/or replacement of existing storm drain pipe and catch basins. 3.Connection of exterior building roof drains and perimeter drains. 4.Installation of under-drains. 5.Installation of stormwater treatment units. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. D. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining permits or approvals which may be required to perform the work of this section, including all costs, fees and taxes required or levied. Notify and obtain such permits or approvals from all agencies having jurisdiction prior to starting work. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. ASTN International (ASTM) 1.ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3.ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 2 of 19 4.ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6.ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7.ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. 8.ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick. 9.ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. 10.ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 11.ASTM C139 - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes. 12.ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 13.ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 14.ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 15.ASTM C387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 16.ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. 17.ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. 18.ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. 19.ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 20.ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 21.ASTM C507 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 3 of 19 22.ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 23.ASTM F656 - Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 24.ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. 25.ASTM C877 - Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections. 26.ASTM C890 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures. 27.ASTM C913 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures. 28.ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals. 29.ASTM C990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. 30.ASTM C 1628 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. 31.ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 32.ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 33.ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 34.ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 35.ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. 36.ASTM D2412 - Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 4 of 19 37.ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 38.ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 39.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 40.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 41.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 42.ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 43.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 44.ASTM D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 45.ASTM D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials. 46.ASTM D4396 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Nonpressure Applications. 47.ASTM F402 - Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings. 48.ASTM F405 - Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings. 49.ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 50.ASTM F656 - Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 51.ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 52.ASTM F714 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 5 of 19 53.ASTM F758 - Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Underdrain Systems for Highway, Airport, and Similar Drainage. 54.ASTM F894 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe. 55.ASTM F1803 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Closed Profile Gravity Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 56.ASTM F2306 - Standard Specification for 12 to 60 inch [300 to 1500 mm] Annular Corrugated Profile-Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm Sewer and Subsurface Drainage Applications. 57.ASTM F2648 - Standard Specification for 2 to 60 inch [50 to 1500 mm] Annular Corrugated Profile Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Land Drainage Applications. D. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA). 1.ACPA 01-103 - Concrete Pipe and Box Culvert Installation (latest revision and applicable supplements thereto). E. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.AASHTO H20 - Standard Specifications for HS-20, Highway Loading. 2.AASHTO M105 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3.AASHTO M198 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets. 4.AASHTO M252 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe. 5.AASHTO M294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500- mm Diameter. F. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (CPPA), division of the Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI). 1.Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings (latest revision and applicable supplements thereto). G. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 6 of 19 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1.Submit shop drawings, descriptive literature, or both, showing pipe materials and appurtenances to be furnished. Shop drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to ordering materials. 2.Shop drawings showing the configuration, dimensions, layout, and spacing of major and minor components such as pipe, joints, couplings, restraints, and other proposed details of assembly. Show in large-scale details any unique assembly, pipe/pipe transitions, pipe/structure transitions, and/or installation requirements. B. Copies of manufacturer-provided installation instructions, operation instructions, and maintenance material for all equipment furnished under this Section. C. Manufacturer’s warranties and associated warranty registration data in Owner’s name. Submit two (2) copies of each warranty to Engineer in the manufacture/supplier standard form or if there is no standard form available, in a form specified by Engineer. D. As-Built Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Sample pipe for testing, when requested by Engineer, shall be furnished by Contractor in sufficient numbers. The Contractor and/or the pipe manufacturer shall make the facilities and services for making the load tests available. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1.Manufacturer shall package the pipe and other drainage materials in a manner designed to deliver the pipe to the Project Site neatly, intact, and without physical damage. Transportation carrier shall use an appropriate method to ensure the pipe is properly supported, stacked, and restrained during transport. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 7 of 19 2.Unloading of the pipe and other drainage materials should be controlled so as not to collide with the other pipe sections or fittings, and care should be taken to avoid chipping or spalling, especially to the spigots and bells. For manhole sections, cone sections, bases, fittings and other precast appurtenances, utilize lifting holes or lifting eyes provided. 3.In cold weather conditions, use caution to prevent impact damage. Handling methods considered acceptable for warm weather may be unacceptable during cold weather. 4.Storage: a.Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. b.Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging. c.Store solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials under cover out of direct sunlight. Provide additional storage measures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Discard materials if storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded. d.Metal Items: Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials. e.Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement: As specified in Section 033200 – Site Cast- in-Place Concrete. f.Store manhole units in an upright position. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products furnished under this Section which are damaged or found defective in any way prior to being set in place and final acceptance, may be rejected. Engineer may reject an entire lot of pipe should the sample pipe from such lot fail to meet requirements. 2.2 CONCRETE GRAVITY PIPE A. Reinforced concrete pipe: 1.Pipe less than 12 inches in diameter: ASTM C 14, Class 3. 2.Pipe greater than 12 inches in diameter: ASTM C 76, Class 3. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 8 of 19 3.Class 4 pipe shall be required when cover is less than 12 inches. B. Fittings and specials: conform to the applicable requirements specified for the pipe. C. Gaskets and pipe ends for rubber gasket joint: ASTM C 443. 2.3 CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE PIPE A. Pipe: High density polyethylene, corrugated, smooth interior, ASTM D3350, Cell Classification 424420C. 1.Four (4) inch through 10 inch diameter pipe: AASHTO M252, Type S. 2.12 inch through 60 inch diameter pipe: AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306. B. Joints: Bell-and-spigot joint, AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell shall be an integral part of the pipe and provide a minimum pull-apart strength of 400 pounds. Bell- and-spigot joint shall incorporate a gasket making it silt-tight. Gaskets shall be installed in the bell, or on the pipe by the pipe manufacturer. 1.Four-inch (4”) through 60-inch (60”) diameter pipe joint, watertight, ASTM D3212. Gaskets: polyisoprene, ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. 2.12-inch (12”) through 60-inch (60”) diameter pipe shall have a reinforced bell with a bell tolerance device. The bell tolerance device shall be installed by the manufacturer. 3.Coupling bands shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications. Couplers shall cover not less than one corrugation on each section of pipe. C. Fittings: AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a spun-on or welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. D. Saddle Tee 1.Saddle tees shall be manufactured saddle tees designed to connect to the corrugated polyethylene pipe. 2.Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M 294. Fabricated fittings shall be welded on the interior and exterior of all junctions. 3.A soil-tight seal shall be obtained with the coupling at the saddle tee stub to the storm service pipe. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 9 of 19 2.4 UNDERDRAIN A. Pipe: Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe as indicated on the Drawings. 1.Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe: AASHTO M252 Type SP (Double Wall). a.Perforations: Class 2 slotted perforations per AASHTO M252. Perforations shall be uniformly spaced along the length and circumference of the pipe. b.Joints: Joint: Silt-tight, ASTM D3212. 2.5 JOINT LUBRICANT A. As specified by pipe manufacturer, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.6 CATCH BASINS A. Reinforced precast concrete base, sump, transition, riser, corbel, and top: ASTM C913 for precast rectangular catch basins, ASTM C478 for precast circular catch basins. Type, construction, and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. 1.Concrete: 4,000 psi minimum, 4% - 7% entrained air. 2.Reinforcement: ASTM C890. Steel bars, ASTM A615. Welded-wire fabric, ASTM A185. Additional reinforcing at openings. 3.Precast sections shall consist of smooth sections in standard nominal inside diameters. All precast concrete sections shall be free from cracks, damaged joints, exposed reinforcing, aggregate pockets, spalls, and dimensional distortions or other irregularities. Lifting holes shall be filled with mortar, or other approved material. 4.Openings or "knockouts" in precast units shall be located as shown on the Drawings and to accommodate the inflow and outflow pipe orientation required. Openings shall sized sufficiently to permit passage of the largest outside dimension of pipe or fittings. Prior to ordering precast manhole bases, all angles between incoming pipes are to be field checked to incorporate possible line changes required in the field layout. B. Gaskets for joints between sections: Butyl rubber, ASTM C 443. C. Grade Rings: ASTM C 478, precast reinforced concrete, 1 inch to 4 inch thickness, dimensions to match basin and top section. D. Frame and Grate. 1.Cast iron: AASHTO M 105, Class 25 for frames and Class 30 for grates. 2.Cast steel: ASTM A 27, Grade optional, thoroughly annealed. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 10 of 19 3.Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, or A 283, Grade B or better, as to quality and details of fabrication, except that in the chemical composition of the steel, the 2/10 of 1% of copper may be omitted. 4.Grate type: ConnDOT “Type A" unless otherwise specified. 5.Covers and gratings shall bear uniformly on their supports. 6.Frame and grate shall be galvanized, ConnDOT Form 816 M.06.03. 2.7 YARD DRAIN/AREA DRAIN A. Configured as indicated on the Drawings. Precast concrete as shown on the drawings. B. Frame and Grate: Ductile iron as an integral part of the surface drainage inlet and furnished by the same manufacturer of the drain, frame and grate set manufactured for use on PVC pipe, or insert-type grate manufactured for use on PVC pipe. 1.Grates for drain basins shall be capable of supporting H-20 wheel loading for traffic areas or H-10 loading for pedestrian areas. 2.12” and 15” square grates will be hinged to the frame using pins. Metal used in the manufacture of the castings shall conform to ASTM A536 grade 70-50-05 for ductile iron. 3.Grates shall be painted black. 2.8 CONCRETE MANHOLE A. Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops: ASTM C 478. Precast manhole sections shall consist of smooth circular sections in standard nominal inside diameters. All precast concrete manhole sections shall be free from cracks, damaged joints, exposed reinforcing, aggregate pockets, spalls, and dimensional distortions or other irregularities. Lifting holes, when provided, shall be filled with mortar, or other approved material. 1.Concrete: 4,000 psi minimum, 4% - 7% entrained air. 2.Diameter: 48-inches unless otherwise indicated. 3.Base and first riser: Monolithic and built to the dimensions and requirements indicated on the Drawings. a.Bottoms shall be integrally cast unless specialty bases at points of connection to existing piping (“Dog-House”) is indicated on the Drawings or otherwise proposed for use. Unless indicated on the Drawings, any special bases or riser used must be detailed in shop drawings and submitted for approval. 4.Riser sections: As required to provide depths indicated. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 11 of 19 5.Top Section: Concentric-cone type, unless eccentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Cones shall have the same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser sections. If required or called-for, flat slab shall be a minimum of 8-inches thick designed to carry AASHTO H-20 loading with one foot cover and conform to ASTM C478. 6.External damp-proofing: Asphalt, ASTM D449, Type A. 7.Openings or "knockouts" in precast units shall be located as shown on the Drawings and to accommodate the inflow and outflow pipe orientation required. Openings shall sized sufficiently to permit passage of the largest outside dimension of pipe or fittings. Prior to ordering precast manhole bases, all angles between incoming pipes are to be field checked to incorporate possible line changes required in the field layout. B. Gaskets for joints between manhole sections: Butyl rubber, ASTM C 443. C. Grade Rings: ASTM C 478, precast reinforced concrete, 1 inch to 4 inch thickness, diameter to match manhole and frame. D. Mortar: Packaged, ASTM C 387 or as Specified in Section 033200 – Site Cast-in-Place Concrete. E. Frame and Cover: Ductile Cast Iron, ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18. F. Frame and Cover: Grey Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 25B (Frame) and Class 30B (Covers), uncoated. 1.Cover: 26 inch diameter, non-vented with non-penetrating pickholes. Unless otherwise detailed or indicated, covers shall be cast with 1-1/2 inch wide, raised letters, indicating “STORM SEWER” unless other lettering is called-for. 2.Frame and cover shall be supplied as a pair from the same manufacturer. Castings shall be of tough, even-grained iron, free from scale, lumps, blisters, sand-holes and other injurious defects, and of the size and type shown on the Drawings. Frames and covers shall have machined bearing surfaces to seat firmly and prevent rocking and rattling under traffic loads. Before leaving the foundry, castings shall be thoroughly cleaned, subjected to hammer tests for soundness and given two coats of coal tar pitch varnish. G. Resilient connectors for joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole: Continuous boot of 3/8 inch minimum thickness neoprene, ASTM C 923 or ASTM C 990. Boots shall be either cast into the manhole wall or installed into a cored opening using internal compression rings. Installed boot shall result in a water-tight connection meeting the performance requirements of ASTM C 443. H. Manhole Steps: ASTM C 478 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.27, drop front or equivalent. Steps shall be nine inches in depth and at least twelve inches in width with an abrasive step surface. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 12 of 19 1.Cast Aluminum Alloy: Aluminum alloy, 6061-T6, tensile 38,000 psi, yield 35,000 psi. Drop front design with upturned embedded ends. All parts of aluminum steps to be embedded in concrete or masonry shall be coated with bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. 2.Composite Plastic-Steel: One-half (1/2) inch deformed steel reinforcing rod, ASTM A615, Grade 60, encapsulated in a co-polymer polypropylene plastic, ASTM D2146, Type II, Grade 16906. 3.Steps shall be placed in vertical alignment as indicated on the Drawings. Steps shall be uniformly spaced not more than sixteen inches (16”) on center, including the spacing between the top step and the manhole cover. Steps shall be embedded in the wall a minimum distance of 4 inches in either cast or drilled holes. Steps shall not be driven or vibrated into fresh concrete and shall withstand a pullout resistance of 2000 lbs when tested in accordance with ASTM C 497. Each step shall project a minimum of 5 inches from the wall measured from the point of embedment. 2.9 DROP MANHOLE A. Drop inlet shall be constructed with ductile iron gravity pipe laid in undisturbed soil in conformance with ASTM A746-82. Adapt to PVC with Fernco coupling or approved equivalent. B. Vertical drop pipe shall be 8”, 10”, or 12” maximum SDR 35 PVC with 90 degree short bend radius shall conform to ASTM D3034. C. Vertical drop pipe shall be anchored a minimum of every 4 feet with 1/8” x 1-1/2” type 304 stainless steel pipe straps set as ordered with lag bolts and shields. 2.10 MASONRY UNITS A. Brick: ASTM C32 Grade MS or ASTM C62 Grade SW. B. Concrete block: Solid block, ASTM C139. 2.11 MORTAR A. Mortar: ASTM C 387. 1.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2.Sand: ASTM C 144. 3.Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207. 4.Water: Potable. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 13 of 19 5.Mix proportions for manhole rims and covers: 1 part portland cement, 2 parts sand, and 1/4 part hydrated lime by dry volume. Hydrated lime shall not exceed 10 percent by weight of the total dry mix. Quantity of water in mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff, workable mortar, but in no case shall exceed 5-1/2 gallons of water per sack of cement. 6.Mix Proportions for invert construction: 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand by volume. Quantity of water in mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff, workable mortar, but in no case shall exceed 5-1/2 gallons of water per sack of cement. 2.12 STORMWATER TREATMENT UNIT A. Stormwater Treatment Units shall be hydrodynamic separators made of precast concrete sections and shall have the capacity and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Treatment units shall be cds2015-4-c, as manufactured by CONTECH Stormwater Solutions, Scarborough, Maine (877-907-8676) or approved equivalent. B. Units shown on the Drawings have been sized to meet specific criteria as indicated. Contractor shall submit only those units that are sized and manufactured to meet such criteria as shown with the details and/or listed below: 1.Unit 1 a.Peak Flow = 10.0 cfs (total flow to the treatment system) b.Treated flow = 1.4 cfs (total flow actually subjected to treatment) c.Screen Aperture = 4,700 d.Evidence of Independent Third Party field testing e.Evidence of full scale laboratory testing f.Minimum removal of 80% Total Suspended Solids (TSS) for 1-inch of rainfall on the impervious surfaces within its drainage area. C. Precast Sections: portland cement shall be Type II, ASTM C150, 4,000 psi minimum. D. Loading requirements: 1.H-20 loading, manhole riser with frame and cones, plus the weight of soil above. 2.Weight of precast concrete structure. 3.Initial handling and erection loadings. E. Construction joints shall be sealed with a butyl rubber based sealant. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 14 of 19 F. Manhole riser sections, manhole steps, frames and covers shall be as detailed on the Drawings. 2.13 BEDDING A. Bedding for pipes: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, bedding shall consist of screened gravel, maximum size 3/4 inches and minimum size 3/8 inches. B. Bedding for Catch Basins: Granular Fill. No limestone shall be permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION A. As soon as the excavation is completed to the normal grade of the bottom of the trench, the Contractor shall immediately place the bedding material in the trench. Then the pipe shall be firmly bedded in the compacted bedding material to conform accurately to the lines and grade indicated on the Drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Notch under pipe bells and joints, where applicable to provide for uniform bearing under entire length of pipe. D. Excavation, backfilling and compaction shall be as specified in Section 312310 - Earthwork of these Specifications. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.2 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS A. Manholes and Catch Basins shall be constructed at the locations and to the lines, grades and dimensions noted on the Drawings, or as required. B. Precast concrete construction shall be done in a manner to insure watertight construction and all leaks in precast concrete shall be sealed. If required, precast concrete shall be repaired or replaced to obtain watertight construction. C. Concrete barrels and cones shall be precast concrete sections. 1.Bases shall be either precast with a barrel integrally cast with the base, or poured concrete suitably shaped by means of accurate bell-rung forms to receive the barrel sections. Manhole invert channels in manholes shall be formed in concrete. 2.Precast manholes shall have an adjustment ring at the top of the cone to permit the frame and cover to meet the finished surface. This shall consist of courses of brick or reinforced grading rings not to exceed 11 inches. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 15 of 19 D. Stubs shall be short pieces cut from the bell ends of the appropriate size and class of pipe. Concrete stubs shall be plugged with brick masonry unless otherwise directed. E. Manhole inverts - shall conform accurately to the size of the adjoining pipes. 1.Manhole inverts shall be constructed of concrete developing 3,500 psi with the concrete being placed to the spring line of the pipe form. 2.Smooth plastic pipe, matching the dimension of the outlet pipe, shall be used to form the invert. 3.Side inverts and main inverts, where the direction changes, shall be laid out in smooth curves of the longest possible radius, which is tangent, within the manhole, to the centerline of adjoining pipelines. 4.Invert shelves shall be graded to provide a 1-inch per 1-foot wash from the manhole walls. F. Manhole sections shall contain manhole steps accurately positioned and embedded in the concrete when the section is cast. Precast-reinforced concrete manhole sections shall be set so as to be vertical and with sections and steps in true alignment. G. All holes in sections used for their handling shall be thoroughly plugged with rubber plugs, made specifically for this purpose, or with mortar. The mortar shall be one part cement to 1- 1/2 parts sand, mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of “balling”), hammered into the holes until it is dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface, and then finished smooth and flush with the adjoining surfaces. H. The Contractor may, as an alternate to suitable nonshrink mortar joints, use premolded elastomeric-sealed joints for pipe into precast manhole bases. 1.All materials, accessories and construction methods used in making the joints shall be supplied or approved by the manufacturer of the premolded elastomeric-sealed joint. I. Openings for pipe and materials to be embedded in the walls of the base for these joints shall be cast in the base at the required locations during the manufacturer of the base. Incorrectly cast and patched pipe openings will be rejected. J. Manhole risers and tops shall be installed using approved “o-ring” type, neoprene gaskets for sealing joints. Units shall be installed level and plumb. Water shall not be permitted to rise over newly made joints nor until after inspection as to their acceptability. All jointing shall be done in a manner to insure water tightness. K. Openings shall be provided in the risers to receive entering pipes. These openings may be made at the place of manufacture. The openings shall be sized to provide a uniform 1 inch maximum annular space between the outside of the pipe wall and the opening in the riser. After the pipe is in position, the annular space shall be solidly filled with nonshrink mortar. Care shall be SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 16 of 19 taken to assure that the openings are located to permit setting of the entering pipe at its correct elevation as indicated. L. Openings, which are cut in the risers in the field, shall be carefully made by coring so as not to damage the riser. Damaged risers will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. M. Where required by the Drawings, a slot and opening shall be cast in the catch basin wall suitable for mounting the cast iron hood and discharge pipe. The hood hinge may be furnished to the precast supplier by the Contractor for incorporation into the casting during manufacture. 3.3 BRICK MASONRY A. Brick Masonry Construction shall be done in a manner to insure watertight construction and all leaks in brick masonry shall be sealed. All workmanship shall conform to the best standard practice and all brick masonry shall be laid by skilled workmen. B. All beds on which masonry is to be laid shall be cleaned and wetted properly. Brick shall be wetted as required and shall be damp but free of any surface water when placed in the Work. Bed joints shall be formed of a thick layer of mortar, which shall be smoothed or furrowed slightly. Head joints shall be formed by applying to the brick to be laid a full coast of mortar on the entire end, or on the entire side as the case requires, and then shoving the mortar covered end or side of the brick tightly against the bricks laid previously. The practice of buttering at the corners of the brick and then throwing the mortar or crappings in the empty joints will not be permitted. Dry or butt joints will not be permitted. Joints shall be uniform in thickness and shall be approximately 1-1/4 inch thick. C. Brickwork shall be constructed accurately to dimensions and brickwork at top of manholes shall be to the dimensions of the flanges of the cast-iron frames. D. Joints on the inside face of walls shall be tooled slightly concave with an approved jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard. The mortar shall be compressed with complete contact along the edges to seal the surface of the joints. E. All castings to be embedded in the brickwork shall be accurately set and built-in as the Work progresses. Cast-iron frames and manhole covers shall be well bedded in mortar and accurately set to finished graded indicated or as directed. F. Water shall not be allowed to flow against brickwork or to rise on the masonry for 60 hours after it has been laid, and any brick masonry damaged in this manner shall be replaced as directed at no additional expense to the Owner. Adequate precautions shall be taken in freezing weather to protect the masonry from damage by frost. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 17 of 19 3.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry unit construction shall be soaked in water before laying. As circular concrete block walls are laid-up, the horizontal joints and keyways shall be flushed full with mortar. As rectangular blocks are laid-up, all horizontal and vertical joints shall be flushed full with mortar. Plastering of the outside of block structures will not be required. The joints in precast units shall be wetted and completely mortared immediately prior to setting a section. No structure shall be backfilled until all mortar has completely set. 3.5 MANHOLE STEPS A. Placement of steps into the precast walls shall be by a proven method as recommended by the supplier of the precast manhole sections. Details of the steps and method of placement shall be submitted for approval. B. Plastic steps shall be placed into the wet concrete wall during manufacture or if designed for press fit installation shall be driven into a wall opening according to the manufacturer’s specifications. Steps shall not be mortared into place after the concrete has set. C. All manholes, catch basins, lawn inlets, etc., which are in excess of five feet in depth, shall be constructed with standard aluminum steps, spaced at 12-inch on center. 3.6 DROP INLETS A. Drop inlets shall be constructed to the lines, grades, dimensions and design at the locations indicated on the Drawings or as required. B. Construction shall conform to requirements outlined in Section 033013 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Engineer may permit brick or concrete masonry construction. If this alternate is being employed, construction shall be done in accordance with paragraphs 3.04 or 3.05 in this Section. 3.7 CASTINGS A. Cast-iron frames for grates and covers shall be well bedded in cement mortar and accurately set to the grades indicated or as directed. The frames shall be encased with a thick cement-mortar collar around the entire perimeter of the frames. B. All voids between the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar, at least one-inch thick and pitched to shed water away from the frame shall be placed over and around the outside of the bottom flange. The mortar shall extend to the outer edge of the masonry all around its circumference and shall be finished smooth. No visible leakage will be permitted. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 18 of 19 C. Structures within the limits of bituminous concrete pavement shall be temporarily set at the elevation of the bottom of the binder course or as ordered. After the binder course has been compacted, these structures shall be set at their final grade. Backfill necessary around such structures after the binder course has been completed shall be made with Class A concrete unless otherwise ordered. 3.8 STORMWATER TREATMENT UNIT A. Stormwater Treatment Units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Vaults shall be placed on a minimum foundation of 12-inches of gravel material. If groundwater is encountered, the foundation base shall be a minimum of 12-inches of crushed stone. C. If precast sections are to be field assembled, adequate waterproofing shall be used at the joints. D. Stormwater Treatment Units installed on interior floor drain discharges from parking garages shall have gasoline trapping capabilities in accordance with local and state regulations. 3.9 CLEANING A. At the completion of the Work, clean all piping, structures and open drainage courses, through and to which water from this construction is directed, to the satisfaction of Engineer. 3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the requirements of local permitting authorities for preparation and submittal of as-built drawings. The requirements for the preparation of as-built drawings as defined herein shall be considered the minimum requirements of Engineer, but shall in no way relive Contractor from satisfying the requirements of local permitting authorities. B. As work progresses, record the following on two (2) sets of Drawings: 1.All changes and deviations from the design in location, grade, size, material, or other feature as appropriate. 2.Any uncharted locations of utilities or other subsurface feature encountered during installation, including the characteristics of such uncharted utility or subsurface feature such as utility type, size, depth, material of construction, etc. C. Recording of changes shall be clearly and neatly marked in red pen or pencil. All changes shall be noted on the appropriate Drawing sheets. SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02630 PAGE 19 of 19 D. Make measurements from fixed, permanent points on the Project Site to accurately locate the work completed. Such measurements shall consist of at least three (3) ties showing the distance of each item relative to each of the fixed, permanent points. E. As-Built drawings shall be complete and shall indicate the true measurement and location, horizontal and vertical, of all new construction. As-Built drawings shall also contain any additional information required by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 02741 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02741 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 02741 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Bituminous concrete paving for streets, driveways, and parking areas. 2.Installation of bituminous concrete overlays over existing pavement, including surface preparation, truing and leveling pavement, tack coating and all other associated items and operations necessary and required to complete the installation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT). 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016 and any supplements. 2.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016, Supplemental Section 4.06 – Bituminous Concrete (Revised 3/17/14). 3.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016, Supplemental Section M.04 – Bituminous Concrete (Revised 1/28/15). D. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.AASHTO M-17 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 2.AASHTO M 82, Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type). 3.AASHTO M-208 - Standard Method of Test for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil-ASTM Designation D 2166. 4.AASHTO M-320 - Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder. SECTION 02741 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02741 PAGE 2 of 3 5.AASHTO R-26 - Standard Recommended Practice for Certifying Suppliers of Performance-Graded Asphalt Binders. 6.AASHTO R-29 - Standard Practice for Grading or Verifying the Performance Grade of an Asphalt Binder. 7.AASHTO T-27 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. 8.AASHTO T-84 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregates. 9.AASHTO T-85 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregates. 10.AASHTO T-96 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 11.AASHTO T 104 Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 12.AASHTO T-209 - Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 13.AASHTO T-245 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples. 2.ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non- Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS A. All work performed under this Section shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004, Supplemental Section 4.06 – Bituminous Concrete (Revised 3/17/14). This Specification is hereby incorporated into this Section by reference. 1.4 TESTING A. Owner will retain a testing entity to perform observation and testing of the work under this Section. The testing entity’s presence does not constitute supervision or direction of Contractor’s work. Neither the presence of the testing entity nor any observations and testing performed by him, nor any notice or failure to give notice shall excuse Contractor from conformance with these Specifications or from defects discovered in his work. SECTION 02741 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02741 PAGE 3 of 3 B. Each week, Contractor shall advise the University Representative of anticipated testing requirements during the following week, based on anticipated construction activities. The Contractor shall also notify the University Representative and testing laboratory 24 hours before the expected time of testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All work performed under this Section shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016, Supplemental Section M.04 – Bituminous Concrete Materials. This Specification is hereby incorporated into this Section by reference. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall install all pavements as specified in the location and to the grades as shown on the Drawings and/or approved by Engineer. Materials, methods of construction, and type and thickness of pavement courses shall be as shown on the Details of the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Owner and its representatives shall have access to all parts of the Work under construction at all times. 3.2 SPECIFICATIONS A. Execute the work of this Section in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016, Supplemental Section 4.06 – Bituminous Concrete. This Specification is hereby incorporated into this Section by reference. END OF SECTION SECTION 02742 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SIDEWALK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02742 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 02742 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SIDEWALK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Bituminous concrete surfaced sidewalk or driveway constructed on a gravel or reclaimed miscellaneous aggregate base course in the locations and to the dimensions and details shown on the plans or as directed by Engineer and in accordance with these specifications. B. Work shall also include all associated items and operations necessary and required to complete the installations, including, but not limited to, surface preparation, finishing and cleanup. C. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s literature, material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE COURSE A. Broken or crushed stone, gravel, or a mixture thereof. B. Broken or crushed stone SECTION 02742 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SIDEWALK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02742 PAGE 2 of 3 1.The product resulting from the artificial crushing of rocks, boulders or large cobblestones, substantially all faces of which have resulted from the crushing operation. Broken or crushed stone shall consist of sound, tough, durable stone, reasonably free from soft, thin, elongated, laminated, friable, micaceous or disintegrated pieces. C. Bank or crushed gravel 1.Sound, tough, durable particles of crushed or uncrushed gravel, free from soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces and vegetable or other deleterious substances. Crushed gravel shall be the manufactured product resulting from the deliberate mechanical crushing of gravel with at least 50% of the gravel retained on the No. 4 sieve having at least one fractured face. D. Base Course shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Base Course (ConnDOT Grading “A”) Sieve Percent Passing by Weight 3 ½” 100 1 ½” 55-100 1/4” 25-60 No. 10 15-45 No. 40 5-25 No. 100 0-10 No. 200 0-5 2.2 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE A. ConnDOT “Class 2” in accordance with Section 32 1216 – Bituminous Concrete Pavement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation, including removal of any existing sidewalk, or driveway, shall be made to the required depth below the finished grade, as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All soft and yielding material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. 3.2 FORMS A. When the bituminous concrete is spread by hand, forms shall be used. B. Forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, free from warp and of sufficient strength to resist springing from the impact of the roller. If made of wood, they shall be of 2- inch surfaced plank SECTION 02742 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SIDEWALK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02742 PAGE 3 of 3 except that at sharp curves thinner material may be used; if made of metal, they shall be of an approved section. C. All forms shall be of a depth equal to the depth of the sidewalk and shall be securely staked, braced, and held firmly to the required line and grade. D. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time they are used. 3.3 BASE COURSE A. Gravel for the base course shall be uniformly spread to the required depth and thoroughly compacted with a roller with a mass of not less than 500 pounds. 3.4 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE A. Surface shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 32 12 16 – Bituminous Concrete Pavement, except that the material may be spread by hand and thoroughly compacted by multiple passes of a roller weighing (with a mass) of not less than 500 pounds. B. In sections inaccessible to the roller, the base course, surface course and backfill shall be hand- tamped with tampers weighing not less than 12 pounds, the face of which shall not exceed 50 square inches in area. 3.5 BACKFILLING AND REMOVAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL A. The sides of the sidewalk shall be backfilled with suitable material thoroughly compacted and finished flush with the top of the sidewalk or driveway. B. All surplus material shall be removed and the Project Site left in a neat and presentable condition to the satisfaction of Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 02743 CURBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section includes: Precast concrete curb. Cast-in-place concrete curb. Work shall also include all associated items and operations necessary and required to complete the installations, including, but not limited to, surface preparation, finishing and cleanup. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. 1.2 REFERENCES Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. ASTM D235 - Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits). ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 2 of 8 ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curbing Concrete. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO M 6 - Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete. AASHTO M 85 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement (Chemical and Physical). AASHTO M 133 - Standard Specification for Preservatives and Pressure Treatment Processes for Timber. AASHTO M 213 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). AASHTO M 233 - Standard Specification for Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture for Treatment of Portland Cement Concrete. AASHTO M 240 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement. AASHTO T11 - Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. AASHTO T21 - Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s literature, material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 3 of 8 Precast Curbing: Submit for approval, data indicating size, shape and dimensions, finish and setting method. Stone Curbing: Submit for approval, the name of the quarry and the type of curb which the Contractor proposes to use. Samples of curbing shall be submitted for approval only when requested by the Engineer. Such submission shall be made sufficiently in advance of ordering so that the Engineer may have an opportunity to judge the granite, both as to quality and appearance. Precast Curbing: Submit representative test specimens of the cured concrete used in precast units showing a compressive strength of 4,000 pounds prior to shipping any units. Submit testing data for concrete as required by Section 03 3200 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Granite and precast concrete curb units shall be delivered to the job adequately protected from damage during transit. Curbing shall be protected against staining, chipping, and other damage. Cracked, badly chipped, or stained units will be rejected and shall not be employed in the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB Concrete for precast concrete curbing shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days, and shall contain 5 to 7 percent entrained air. Precast concrete curb shall be treated with a protective coating of Linseed Anti-Spalling Compound. Boiled linseed oil mixture shall conform to AASHTO M 233 and shall be composed of 50 percent (50 %) double boiled linseed oil and 50 percent (50%) petroleum spirits, ASTM D235, by volume. Finish and Color: Precast curb units shall be rub-finished in the following manner: After the concrete has properly hardened, the exposed surfaces shall be rubbed with a No. 16 carborundum stone or an abrasive of approved equal in a manner to fully remove cement enamel finish and expose a durable sand grain finish satisfactory to Engineer. No cement shall be used in the rubbing process. The finish of these units shall be uniform and shall conform to those of adjacent work in their final position. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 4 of 8 Precast concrete curb sections shall be furnished with sockets in each end to receive dowels to maintain the horizontal and vertical alignment of the curb. The dowel socket shall be 11/16 inch by 2-1/2 inches. Dowels: Steel, 5/8 inch by 4 inch with minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. Dowels shall be supplied by the curb manufacturer. 2.2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURB Concrete and reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete curbs shall be as specified in Section 03 3200 - Site-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.3 CEMENT MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement, ASTM C150, and two parts, by volume, of surface dry fine aggregate. Hydrated lime, ASTM C207, in an amount not to exceed 4 pounds of lime to each bag of Portland Cement, may be added at the option of Engineer. Cement and hydrated lime shall conform to the following requirements: Portland cement: Types I, II or IS. a.Cement having a temperature exceeding 160°F (71°C) at the time of delivery to the mixer shall not be used in the concrete. b.Types I, II, and III portland cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 85. c.Type IS, Portland blast-furnace slag cement and Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 240. The use of other approved cementitious material as a partial replacement for Type IS or Type IP cement will not be permitted. d.Type I and Type III portland cement shall be used only when required or expressly permitted by Contract or Engineer. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 6. Fine aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be sand consisting of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles of quartz or other rock, free from lumps of clay, soft or flaky material, loam, organic or other injurious material. In no case shall sand containing lumps of frozen material be used. a.Fine aggregate shall contain not more than 3% of material finer than a No. 200 (75 μm) sieve, using AASHTO T 11. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 5 of 8 b.Organic Impurities: Fine aggregate subjected to the colorimetric test shall not produce a color darker than Gardner Color Standard No. 11, using AASHTO T 21. If the fine aggregate fails to meet this requirement, the provisions of AASHTO M 6, Section 5.2, will govern. c.Gradation: For laying stone or precast units, fine aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Aggregate Gradation (Cement Mortar for Laying Stone or Precast Units) Sieve Percent Passing 3/8” 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 d.Gradation: For pointing stone or precast units, fine aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Aggregate Gradation (Cement Mortar for Pointing Stone or Precast Units) Sieve Percent Passing No. 8 100 No. 50 10-40 No. 100 0-10 Water: Potable quality. 2.4 JOINT FILLER Preformed expansion joint filler or wood joint filler as indicated on the plans. Preformed expansion joint filler shall be the bituminous cellular type and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M213. Boards for wood joint filler shall be planed on two sides and shall be either redwood, cypress or white pine. Redwood and cypress boards shall be of sound heartwood. White pine boards shall be of sound sapwood. Occasional small, sound knots and medium surface checks will be permitted provided the board is free of any defects that will impair its usefulness for the purpose intended. The SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 6 of 8 joint filler may be composed of more than one length of board in the length of the joint, but no board of a length less than 6 feet may be used; and the separate boards shall be held securely to form a straight joint. Boards composed of pieces that are jointed and glued shall be considered as one board. Dimensions shall be as specified or shown on the plans; and tolerances of plus 1/16-inch thickness, plus 1/8-inch depth and plus 1/4-inch length will be permitted. All wood joint filler boards shall be given a preservative treatment by brushing with a creosote oil conforming to AASHTO M133. After treatment, the boards shall be stacked in piles, each layer separated from the next by spacers at least 1/4 inch thick; and the boards shall not be used until 24 hours after treatment. 2.5 TRANSITION SECTIONS Horizontal transition sections shall be provided at all locations where curb sections change (i.e., vertical to sloped). Vertical transition sections shall also be provided for precast curb sections at handicapped ramps to create a smooth transition with a doweled joint. Vertical transition sections for stone curb shall be made as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Trenching, excavation, backfilling, and compaction shall be completed in accordance with Section 31 2310 - Earthwork, except as modified within this Section. Cement Mortar Bedding, if required, shall be placed as indicated in details in accordance with Section 03 3200 - Site Cast-In Place Concrete. 3.2 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB Precast units delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded and placed along excavated trench or other designated location with the minimum amount of handling. Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to insure delivery to trench in a sound and undamaged condition. All individual pieces of curbed curbing shall be marked to correspond to the radius and location where curbing is to be set. Excavation shall be made in accordance with details on the plans and shall extend 6 inches below and behind finished curb sections. Screened gravel base shall be compacted to a firm, even surface. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 7 of 8 Installation of precast concrete curb shall be completed within the prepared trench such that each section is doweled to the next continuously and conforming to the line, grade, and cross- section shown on the plans, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. Installation shall be completed in such a manner as to prevent damage to the precast units. After the curb is set, trench shall be backfilled immediately with approved material. The first layer to be 4 inches in depth, thoroughly rammed, the other layers to be not more than 6 inches in depth and thoroughly rammed until the trench is filled. Care is to be taken not to affect the line or grade of the curb during this procedure. All curb joints shall be filled with caulking compound (color-cement mortar grey). One joint every 50-feet shall be left clean of caulk to allow for expansion. 3.3 CONCRETE CURB (CAST-IN-PLACE) General Requirements: Concrete curb shall be constructed of concrete and shall be cast-in-place on the prepared subbase in accordance with the dimensions and details line and grade shown on the Drawings. Curbing shall be constructed using conventional forms and in segments separated by construction joints and expansion joints as specified herein. This item shall consist of concrete curbing constructed or as ordered and in conformity with these specifications. Forms: Forms shall be metal or acceptable planed and matched lumber, straight and free from warp or other irregularities that will adversely affect the installation. Forms shall conform to the curb cross-section shown on the Drawings and shall be carefully set to line and grade and thoroughly braced and secured in place so that there will be no displacement during placement of the concrete. All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to reuse. Placing of Concrete: Prior to placement of the concrete, the subgrade shall be moistened and the contact surfaces of the forms shall be given a light coating of oil that will not discolor the concrete. Concrete shall then be placed in the form as near to its final position as practicable, struck off with a template, spaded to prevent “rock-pockets” or “honey combing” adjacent to the forms and finished to a smooth even surface. The concrete may be compacted by mechanical vibrators if approved by Engineer. Placing by slip form methods shall be approved by Engineer. Expansion Joints: Vertical expansion joints shall be located approximately every seventy-five (75) feet and shall be so arranged that they shall match expansion joints in any adjacent concrete pavements and sidewalks. Unless directed otherwise, expansion joints shall also be installed at the PC and PT of all radius curb. Expansion joints shall be constructed vertical, plumb, and at right angles to the face of the curb. Prior to concreting, all exposed surfaces of the wood filler shall be given a light brush coating of form oil. They shall be one-half (½) inch in width and formed with premolded bituminous joint filler cut to conform to the cross-section of the curb/curb gutter. SECTION 02743 CURBING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02743 PAGE 8 of 8 Construction Joints: Vertical construction joints shall be located approximately every fifteen (15) feet being equally spaced between expansion joints. The length of these curb/curb gutter segments may be varied slightly for closures but in no case shall they be less than eight (8) feet. Construction joints shall be vertical, plumb and at right angles to the face of the curb and shall be formed by approved method that will provide complete separation of the curb segments during the placing of the concrete. If curb is formed by slip form methods, the joints shall be sawed as soon as practicable after the concrete has set to preclude raveling during the sawing and before any shrinkage cracking occurs in the concrete. Finishing: Forms shall be left in place for twenty-four (24) hours or until the concrete has sufficiently hardened as determined by Engineer so that they can be removed without injury to the curb. Upon removal of the forms, the exposed faces of the curb/curb gutter shall be immediately rubbed to a uniform surface. Rubbing shall be performed by experienced and competent concrete finishers. No plastering will be permitted. END OF SECTION 02743 SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 1 of 22 SECTION 02751 - SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1.Site cast-in-place concrete, including but not necessarily limited to, sidewalks, ramps, , curbing, pads, bases, and thrust blocks. 2.All facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, transportation, supervision, and related work necessary to complete the Work shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. ASTM International (ASTM) 1.ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 2.ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 3.ASTM A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 4.ASTM A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 5.ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars or Concrete Reinforcement. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 2 of 22 6.ASTM A1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 7.ASTM C29 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate 8.ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 9.ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 10.ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 11.ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 12.ASTM C70 - Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate. 13.ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 14.ASTM C117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 15.ASTM C127 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. 16.ASTM C128 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. 17.ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 18.ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density ("Unit Weight"), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 19.ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 20.ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 21.ASTM C156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. 22.ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 23.ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 24.ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 3 of 22 25.ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 26.ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 27.ASTM C233 - Standard Test Method for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 28.ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 29.ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 30.ASTM C311 - Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Fly Ash and Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 31.ASTM C387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 32.ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 33.ASTM C566 - Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying. 34.ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 35.ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 36.ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 37.ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 38.ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 39.ASTM C803 - Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete. 40.ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 41.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 42.ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 4 of 22 43.ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 44.ASTM C989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete Mortars. 45.ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 46.ASTM A1078 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Dowels for Concrete Pavement. 47.ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 48.ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 49.ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements. 50.ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 51.ASTM D5249 - Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold- and Hot- Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints. 52.ASTM D5893 - Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. 53.ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). 1.CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, latest edition. E. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. F. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1.ACI 224R - Control of Cracking on Concrete Structures. 2.ACI 224.3R - Joints in Concrete Construction. 3.ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 5 of 22 4.ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor or Slab Construction. 5.ACI 304R-00 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 6.ACI 305R-10 - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting. 7.ACI 306R-10 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. G. American Welding Society (AWS). 1.AWS A5.1/A5.1M (2004; Errata 2004) Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. 2.AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2005; Errata 2005) Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. For each type of specially furnished concrete provide a description of methods and the sequence of placement. B. Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items shall include printed instructions for admixtures, bonding agents, epoxy-resin adhesive binders, waterstops, and liquid chemical hardeners: 1.Concrete Aggregates. 2.Portland Cement. 3.Ready-Mix Concrete. 4.Form Facing Materials. 5.Reinforcement Materials. 6.Joint Materials. 7.Water-Vapor Barrier Subgrade Cover. 8.Bonding Materials. 9.Finish Materials. 10.Concrete Curing Materials. 11.Form release agent. 12.Concrete coloring additive. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 6 of 22 13.Elastomeric joint sealant. 14.Preformed joint filler C. Submit samples of the following: 1.Preformed joint filler. 2.Manufacturer’s color charts showing full range of colors available. 3.Cured samples of elastomeric join sealants in the color(s) selected. D. Design Data 1.Mix Design data for each class of Ready-Mix Concrete shall be submitted at least 15 calendar days prior to start of specified work. E. Test Reports 1.Submit test reports for all testing conducted under this Section. F. Certificates 1.Submit certificates for the following: a.Concrete Design Mixes. b.Concrete Aggregates. c.Welding Procedures. Welding Procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Certificates for Welder Qualifications shall be in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this section. d.Mill certificates for Steel Bar. 2.Certificates for concrete shall contain project name, title/number, date, name of Contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer, brand name of manufactured materials, material name, values as specified for each material, and test results. G. Manufacturer's Instructions 1.Installation instructions shall indicate the manufacturer's recommended method and sequence of installation for the following items: a.Admixtures b.Bonding Materials SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 7 of 22 c.Waterstops d.Liquid Chemical Hardener H. Joint Plan 1.Prior to initiation of concrete flatwork, submit proposed Construction Joint plan to Engineer for review and approval. Coordinate such plan with the joint patterns depicted on the Drawings. I. Delivery Tickets: Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer shall provide delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered to the Project Site. Delivery tickets shall provide the following information: 1.Project name printed on ticket. 2.Name of producer, identification of plant. 3.Date and time of day. 4.Type of material. 5.Cubic yards of material loaded into truck. 6.Project number, purchase order number, name of Contractor (if Contractor other than producer). 7.Truck number for specific identification of truck. 8.Individual aggregate, cement, water weights (masses) and any admixtures shall be printed on plant tickets. 9.Water/cement ratio. 10.Additional water allowance in gallons based on water/cement ratio for mix. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dimensions, locations, and details of equipment pads, anchors, supports, and similar features indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Manufacturer’s approved shop drawings of equipment to be supported, anchored, or contained thereby shall be consulted for exact location, size and details. B. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 8 of 22 C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. D. Welder qualifications: Welder qualifications shall be verified in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M or under an equivalent qualification test approved in advance. Welders shall be permitted to do only the type of welding for which each is specifically qualified. 1.5 MOCKUPS A. Where mockups are called-for, comply with the following: 1.At location on the Project Site selected by Engineer, place and finish 100 square foot mockup section for examination. Mockup to be constructed by the installer who will actually perform the work for the Project. 2.For accurate color, the quantity of concrete mixed to produce the sample should not be less than 3 cubic yards (or not less than 1/3 the capacity of the mixing drum on the ready-mix truck) and should always be in full cubic yard increments. Excess material shall be discarded according to local regulations. 3.For colored concrete, record the amount of integral colorant, dray colorant, or chemical stain needed per square foot of application to establish coverage rates for the work. 4.Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. 5.Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates and color additives used in mockup for comparison with materials used in remaining work. 6.Accepted mockup provides visual standard for all work. 7.Mockup shall remain through completion of work for use as a quality standard for finished work. 8.Provide suitable protections to preclude damage to mockup. 9.Remove mockup when directed. 1.6 TESTING A. Owner will retain a testing entity to perform observation and testing of the work under this Section. The testing entity’s presence does not constitute supervision or direction of Contractor’s work. Neither the presence of the testing entity nor any observations and testing SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 9 of 22 performed by him, nor any notice or failure to give notice shall excuse Contractor from conformance with these Specifications or from defects discovered in his work. B. Testing shall include sampling and testing concrete materials proposed for use in the work and testing the design mix for each class of concrete. C. Tests will be required to determine whether the concrete being produced complies with the standard of quality and strength as specified. D. Concrete Replacement: Failure of any test or to follow proper installation procedures will require that the concrete be removed and properly replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturers’ written recommendations. B. Packaged materials shall be delivered to the project site in their original, unopened package or container bearing label clearly identifying manufacturer's name, brand name, material, weight or volume, and other pertinent information. Packaged materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken package or container in a weather-tight and dry place until ready for use in the work. C. Unpackaged aggregates shall be stored to avoid excessive segregation, contamination with other materials or other size aggregates, or freezing. D. Reinforcement and other metal items shall be protected from corrosion and shall be kept free from ice, grease, and other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond. E. Colored Admixture: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Deliver colored admixtures in original, unopened packaging. Store in dry condition. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Pre-Job Conference 1.One week prior to placement of concrete, Contractor shall coordinate and host a coordination meeting to discuss concrete application schedule, materials, and methods. B. Environmental Requirements 1.Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within 24-hours. 2.Protect fresh concrete from rain, moisture, and freezing. 3.Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 10 of 22 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Cement: ASTM C 150. One brand and type of cement shall be used for formed concrete having exposed-to-view finished surfaces. B. Unless otherwise specified, cement shall be Type IA. 2.2 READY-MIX CONCRETE A. Ready Mix Concrete: Portland Cement Concrete, air-entrained, ASTM C94. 1.Compressive Strength: a.Unless otherwise indicated, minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4,000 psi minimum. b.Sidewalks, stairs and landings, pedestrian and vehicle ramps, and curbing: Minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4,500 psi minimum. 2.Water/cement ratio: Maximum 0.45. 3.Air content by volume: 6 percent ± 1 percent, ASTM C231 (primary method) or ASTM C173 (secondary method). 4.Slump: no less than 2 inches, not greater than 4 inches, ASTM C143. 5.Standard Color: Natural grey. B. Aggregate 1.Coarse aggregate: ASTM C33. Broken stone or gravel consisting of clean durable fragments of uniform quality throughout. It shall be free from soft, disintegrated pieces, mud, dirt, organic or other injurious material. Coarse aggregate of a size retained on a 1- inch square opening sieve shall not contain more than 8% of flat or elongated pieces, whose longest dimension exceeds five times their maximum thickness. 2.Fine aggregate: ASTM C33. Sand consisting of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles of quartz or other rock, free from lumps of clay, soft or flaky material, loam, organic or other injurious material. Fine aggregate shall contain not more than 3% of material finer than a #200 sieve, ASTM C117. C. Water: Potable quality. D. Admixtures SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 11 of 22 1.Concrete shall contain a water reducing agent, ASTM C494, to minimize cement and water content of the concrete mix at the specified slump. 2.Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 3.Pozzolan: Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F with 4 percent maximum loss on ignition. Pozzolan may be used to replace a maximum of 15 percent (15 %) of cement by weight. 4.No calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be added to the concrete. No admixtures other than those specified shall be used in the concrete without the specific written permission of Engineer in each case. 2.3 FORMS A. Forms shall be substantially built and adequately braced so as to withstand the liquid weight of concrete without deforming. All linings, studding, walling and bracing shall be such as to prevent bulging, spreading, or loss of true alignment while pouring and displacement of concrete while setting. B. All edge forms for sidewalk pavements, curbs and gutters shall be of sufficient rigidity and adequately braced to accurately maintain line and grade. Form work shall be designed so that sections may be fastened together to prevent vertical or horizontal movement of ends. C. Forms for curved sections shall be so constructed and placed that the finish surface of walls and edge of sidewalks, curbs and gutters will not deviate appreciably from the arc of the curve. D. Exposed vertical and horizontal edges of the concrete in structures shall be chamfered as indicated on the Drawings by the placing of moldings in the forms. E. Forms for Exposed Finish: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel materials. Form work materials shall produce a smooth, continuous, straight, and level surface. 1.Plywood shall be APA A-A, A-B or A-C, Class 1, Exterior Grade. Thickness shall be as required to prevent movement or deformation but shall not be less than 5/8" thick. F. Forms for Non-Exposed Finish: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel materials. Form work materials shall produce a generally smooth, continuous, straight, and level surface. Grain patterns or similar imperfections are acceptable. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side. 1.Plywood shall be at least B-B, Class 1, Exterior Grade. Thickness shall be as required to prevent movement or deformation but shall not be less than 5/8" thick. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 12 of 22 G. Cylindrical Forms: Sonotube Fibre Forms, wax-impregnated strippable forms or ABS or PVC plastic reusable forms. H. Form Ties: Provide prefabricated, adjustable length galvanized steel snap-off ties, with brackets, cones, corner locks and other accessories as necessary. I. Form Release Agent: Commercial formulation compounds that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class II with galvanizing before fabrication. C. Weldable Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. Maximum carbon content shall be 0.55 percent. D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gauge or heavier black annealed wire. 1.Ties for epoxy-coated bars shall be vinyl-coated or epoxy-coated. 2.Ties for zinc-coated bars shall be zinc-coated. F. Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) 1.Sidewalks: Plain wire, ASTM A1064 as indicated on the Drawings. 2.Concrete Pavement: Plain wire, ASTM A1064 as indicated on the Drawings. G. Supports for Reinforcement 1.Supports shall include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and wire reinforcement in-place. Conform with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for corrosion-resistant, plastic-protected wire, epoxy-coated, or stainless-steel supports. 2.For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces and where support legs are in contact with forms, provide supports with plastic protection (CRSI, Class1) or stainless steel protection (CRSI, Class 2). H. Dowel Bars: Plain (smooth) high-chrome steel bar, ASTM A615 Grade 60 with full-length plastic sleeve as a combined unit, dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. 1.Where epoxy-coated dowels are called for: ASTM A1078. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 13 of 22 I. Bar/Dowel Adhesive: Two component (1:1 ratio), 100% solids, high modulus, moisture- insensitive structural epoxy gel designed specifically for bonding bars, dowels, and bolts in concrete. 2.5 JOINT MATERIALS A. Preformed Joint Filler Strips 1.Where no joint sealant is called-for: Nonextruding and resilient bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1751, 1/2-inch-thick, one piece for the full depth and width of the joint. 2.Where joint sealant is called-for: Nonextruding and resilient nonbituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1752, Type I (sponge rubber) or Type II (cork), 1/2-inch-thick, allowance for sealant at top and extending for the full depth and width of the joint. B. Joint Sealant Compound, ASTM C920 1.Self-Leveling (Type SL; Grade “P”) a.Cold-applied and self-leveling, Type S or Type M elastomeric polymer sealant. 2.Gun-Grade (Non-Sage; Grade “NS”) a.One-component (Type S) high-performance moisture-curing polyurethane sealant specifically formulated for bonding to masonry and concrete. 3.Traffic Bound areas: T sealant. 4.Non-Traffic Bound areas: NT sealant. 5.Color: As approved by Engineer. 6.Backer material: ASTM D5249, closed cell. 2.6 DETECTABLE WARNING STRIP A. Surface-mount, UV-stabilized, polymer composite panel as indicated on the Drawings. Fasteners, adhesives, and sealants per manufacturer’s requirements. Panel shall comply with Connecticut Building Code/ADA Guidelines. 1.Color: As approved by Engineer. B. Duralast Detectable Warning Plate with Black Asphaltic Coating, Product Number 00700570 as manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, 301 Spring Street, East Jordan, MI or approved equal. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 14 of 22 2.7 CONCRETE BONDING MATERIALS A. Aqueous-phase, film-forming, nonoxidizing, freeze and thaw-resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application conforming to ASTM C 932. B. Epoxy-Resin Adhesive Binder: Two-component, penetrating high solids, epoxy-based primer/bond coat, 100% solids, moisture-tolerant, ASTM C-881, Types I, II, and V, Grade-2, Class C and AASHTO M-235. 2.8 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Curing shall be by moist curing (preferred) or by use of curing compound. Sodium Silicate curing compounds shall be used where required by the weather, approved construction schedules and construction that is not adaptable to damp curing. B. Curing compound shall be a resin-base, white pigmented compound, ASTM C309, Type 2. C. Curing compounds shall contain a fugitive dye or when hot weather conditions dictate, a fugitive heat reflecting pigment. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: 1.Waterproof paper, ASTM C 171, regular or white. 2.Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM C 171. 3.Polyethylene-coated burlap consisting of a laminate of burlap and a white opaque polyethylene film permanently bonded to the burlap. Burlap: ASTM C 171, Class 3. Polyethylene film: ASTM C 171. 4.When tested for water retention in accordance with ASTM C 156, weight of water lost 72 hours after application of moisture retaining covering material shall not exceed 0.039 gram per square centimeter of the mortar specimen surface. E. Water: Potable Quality. F. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound 1.Liquid type, ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear, Type 2, white, pigmented. 2.9 BOND BREAKER A. Asphalt felt conforming to ASTM D2626, Type I or 6-mil polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397. 2.10 SEALER SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 15 of 22 A. Consolideck® Saltguard® silane/siloxane water repellent and chloride screen as manufactured by Prosoco, Inc., 3741 Greenway Circle, Lawrence, KS 66046, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify site conditions before proceeding with the work. Field check the accuracy of the Drawings and inspect structures, utilities, and other site features prior to start of work and notify Engineer in writing, of any hazardous conditions and/or discrepancies. B. Provide construction techniques in accordance with applicable provisions of ACI 224R-01, ACI 224.3R-95, and ACI 302.1R-04. C. Engineer shall be notified of concrete placement sufficiently in advance of start of operation to allow their representative to complete preliminary inspection of the Work, including subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used. D. Adjacent work, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions at the contractor’s expense. No concrete walks shall be poured after 12 noon unless a guard is visibly stationed nearby to prevent graffiti. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any graffiti if he fails to provide adequate protection. E. Concrete surface shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened sufficiently. If necessary, 1/2-inch thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect exposed surfaces. F. Retempering of concrete is not permitted. G. Contractor is responsible for the protection and resetting of all existing utility covers/castings to finish grade; as well as, setting all new utility covers/castings to finish grade prior to placement of concrete. The repair of any settlement, or protrusion above finish grade, shall be the responsibility of Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Compact and bring area to required subgrade elevation in accordance with Section 31 2310 – Earthwork. Provide for final fine grading, and compaction of areas as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines. B. Existing subgrade material, which will not readily compact as required, shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials in accordance with Section 31 2310 – Earthwork. C. Subgrade of areas to receive concrete shall be recompacted as required to bring the top 8 inches of material, immediately below the base course, to a compaction at optimum moisture content SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 16 of 22 of at least 95 percent (95%) of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D1557. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 foot beyond pavement edge. D. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. E. Disposal of debris and other material excavated under this section, and material unsuitable for, or in excess of requirements for, completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. F. Prepared subgrade shall be inspected and approved by Engineer Representative before installation of the gravel base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this Section of the Specification. 3.3 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Prepare aggregate base course for concrete in accordance with Section 31 2310 - Earthwork. B. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of concrete surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling. The width of base course shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond the edge of the course above, if it is not so supported. C. Aggregate shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 inches thick, compacted measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. 1.Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. 2.The base shall be wetted and rolled or tamped after the spreading of each lift. 3.Rolling shall begin at the sides and progress to the center of crowned areas, and shall begin on the low side and progress toward the high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 4.Surface irregularities, which exceed 1/2-inch, as measured by means of a 10-foot long straightedge, shall be replaced and properly re-compacted. D. Density: Base course shall be compacted at optimum moisture content to not less than 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and the area repaired. F. Portions of subgrade, or of construction above, which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by the passing of traffic, or otherwise injured, shall be cleaned, replaced, or otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with the next operation. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 17 of 22 3.4 FORMS A. Forms shall be securely staked, braced and held firmly to the required line and grade and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled or wetted before concrete is placed against them. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Complete and approve formwork. Remove debris and foreign material from interior of forms before start of concrete placing. D. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must be strong enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such equipment. Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds. E. The maximum cross slope for sidewalks shall be 2.0 percent, sloped towards the gutter. Verify formwork prior to concrete placement. Make corrections as required and bring discrepancies to attention of Engineer. 3.5 JOINTS A. Locate joints as located on the Drawings, as shown on Engineer-approved joint plan. Conform with applicable sections of ACI 224.3R-95. B. Construction Joints: Effected at the end of a pour, lift, or at the end of a day’s concrete placement. This type of joint is a plane surface between two distinct sections of concrete. 1.Construction Joints shall be ½ inch wide. 2.Joint filler: Unless otherwise specified, Construction Joints shall be constructed with joint filler. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab and shall extend the full length of the joint. Use of multiple pieces of joint material of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of joint will not be permitted. 3.Where joints are to receive filler, recess joint filler 1/4-inch below finish surface or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 4.Where called-for on the Drawings, install pins at Construction Joints. C. Isolation Joints: Installed at intersections of structures on any type including but not limited to buildings, walks with steps, pre-cast concrete curb, light foundations, walls, pads, slabs at footings, or other structures. Isolation Joints shall not be required where concrete flatwork abuts granite curbing. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 18 of 22 1.Isolation Joints shall be ½ inch wide. 2.Joint Filler: All Isolation Joints shall be constructed with joint filler. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab and shall extend the full length of the joint. Use of multiple pieces of joint material of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of joint will not be permitted. 3.Where joints are to receive filler, recess joint filler 1/4-inch below finish surface or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Control/Contraction Joints: Installed to form a weakened plane in a concrete member to provide a reduction in member thickness for the purpose of controlling shrinkage stresses to that specific area. Control/Contraction Joints shall be synonymous with “Dummy Joints”. 1.Control/Contraction Joints shall be tooled or saw-cut. a.Tooled joints: Tool-form joint into the concrete 1 inch in depth, but in no case less than 25 percent of slab depth. Joint width shall be 1/4-inch. Each side of tooled joint shall be dressed to match final overall slab finish. Joint shall be made after concrete is finished and when the surface is stiff enough to support the weight of workmen without damage to the slab, but before the slab has achieved its final set. 1)Where tooled joints are to receive joint sealant, provide 1/2-inch wide tooled joint and install backer rod material to create 1/4-inch recess below finished surface. b.Saw-cut joints: Saw-cut joint into concrete 1 inch in depth, but in no case less than 25 percent of slab depth. Joint width shall be 1/8-inch. Cut joint using rotary saw within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete has been finished. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Install steel reinforcement as shown on the Drawings. 1.Welded wire reinforcement: Where WWR is called-for, install material in the upper 30 to 40 percent (30%-40%) of the overall slab thickness, or at the nearest depth below top of slab as required to achieve a minimum of 2-inches of cover. B. Before being placed in position, reinforcing for reinforced concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material, which may reduce the bond between the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is a delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be re-inspected and cleaned when necessary. C. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 19 of 22 D. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, except where concrete is cast against and permanently exposed to earth minimum cover shall be 3 inches. E. For slab-type construction, welded wire reinforcement and reinforcing bars shall be elevated off the base material by use of supports as specified herein. Adjacent sheets of welded wire reinforcing shall lap 6 inches. F. Joints 1.Construction Joints: Reinforcement shall not continue through construction joints. Allow for 2-inches of cover at end of slab. Where called-for on the Drawings, install pins at Construction Joints. 2.Isolation Joints/Expansion Joints: Allow for 2-inches of cover at end of slab. 3.Control/Contraction Joints: Cut at least one-half of reinforcement at joints. G. Reinforcing shall be securely wired in the position called for, and shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. 3.7 PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, forms and the space to be occupied by the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, and reinforcing steel and embedded metal shall be free from dirt, oil, mill scale, loose rust, paint, and other material which might tend to reduce bond. B. Existing concrete, earth, forms, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is to be placed and shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on the surface. C. Concrete shall arrive at the job site in a timely manner so that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When conditions develop that require the addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission of the Engineer must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material. D. Concrete, which has set, or partially set, before placement shall not be employed. E. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on surface. F. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of forms. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 20 of 22 G. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, the latter shall be cleaned of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 inch thick shall be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set. 3.8 FINISHING A. Concrete flatwork surfaces shall be screened off and finished true to line and grade, and free of hollows and bumps. Surface shall be dense, smooth, and at exact level and slope required. 1.Finished concrete surface for concrete subbase shall be woodfloated to a slightly rough surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/4- inch in 10 feet. 2.Finished concrete surface for concrete pavement, walks, and pads shall be wood-floated and steel troweled to a smooth surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet. B. Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal surfaces of concrete surfaces, which will be exposed, shall be given a light broomed finish, with direction of grooves in concrete surface perpendicular to length of concrete band, slab or pad. After concrete has set sufficiently to prevent coarse aggregate from being torn from the surface, but before it has completely set, brooms shall be drawn across it to produce a pattern of small parallel grooves. Broomed surface shall be uniform, with no smooth, unduly rough or porous spots, or other irregularities. Coarse aggregate shall not be dislodged by the brooming operation. C. Immediately following finishing operations, arises at edges and both sides of expansion joints shall be rounded to a ¼ inch radius. Control joints to be tooled shall be scored into slab surface with scoring tool. Adjacent edges of control joint shall be same time be finished to a ¼ inch radius. D. Where finishing is performed before the end of the curing period, concrete shall not be permitted to dry out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until end of curing period, or until curing membrane is applied. 3.9 CURING A. Concrete shall be kept continuously damp from time of placement until the end of the specified curing period. B. Water shall not be applied to curing concrete within 24 hours after initial placement. Any water shall be applied only to maintain damp conditions. Do not add water during floating and troweling operations. SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 21 of 22 C. Between finishing operations, the surface shall be protected from rapid drying by covering with a material specified herein. Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of fine- spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent drying after the initial 24-hour cure period. D. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering them with curing paper or an application of a curing compound. 1.Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete. 2.If concrete is cured with a curing compound, the compound shall be applied at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other. 3.Curing period shall be seven days minimum. Full-strength shall be considered after 28 days. E. Only if additional protection is required, the surface should remain uncovered for at least 4 days, after which time new and unwrinkled non-staining reinforced waterproof Kraft curing paper may be used. F. Integrally Colored Concrete: Cure using a curing compound specific for integrally colored concrete according to manufacturer’s instructions using manufacturer’s recommended application techniques. Apply curing and sealing compound at consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency. 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Comply with ACI 306R-10 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. B. Materials for concrete shall be heated for concrete, which is mixed, placed or cured when the mean daily temperature is below 40F or is expected to fall below 40F within 72 hours. The concrete, after placement, shall be protected by covering, heat, or both. C. Details of handling and protecting concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to the approval of Engineer. 3.11 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Comply with ACI 305R-10: Guide to Hot Weather Concreting. B. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and reinforcement just prior to placement shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort shall be SECTION 02751 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02751 PAGE 22 of 22 made to minimize delays that will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the job. C. During periods of excessively hot weather (95F, or above), ingredients in the concrete shall be cooled insofar as possible and cold mixing water shall be used to maintain the temperature of the concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305R. Any concrete with a temperature below 95F, when ready for placement, will not be acceptable, and will be rejected. D. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc.) and relative humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after placing in forms. Data should be correlated with the progress of the Work so that conditions surrounding the construction of any part of the structure can be ascertained. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Concrete surface shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened sufficiently. If necessary, ½ inch thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect the exposed surface. 3.13 CLEAN UP A. Remove all debris, residuals, and materials at the conclusion of the work. Dispose of all materials in accordance with applicable waste management regulations. END OF SECTION SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 1 of 11 SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Temporary or permanent painted pavement markings, including but not limited to center lines, lane lines and shoulder lines, stop bars, crosswalks, parking stalls, lane arrows, legends, markings within gore areas, and painting of paved islands or medians. Maintaining access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material specifications and shop drawings for all materials furnished under this Section. B. Submit material certificates signed by the material producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with these Specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817, 2016. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C501 - Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 2 of 11 ASTM D211 - Standard Specification for Chrome Yellow and Chrome Orange Pigments. ASTM D476 - Standard Classification for Dry Pigmentary Titanium Dioxide Products. ASTM D562 - Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer. ASTM D605 - Standard Specification for Magnesium Silicate Pigment (Talc). ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. ASTM D711 - Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint. ASTM D869 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Settling of Paint. ASTM D1475 - Standard Test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products. ASTM D1763 - Standard Specification for Epoxy Resins. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness. ASTM D2486 - Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints. ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. ASTM D4505 - Standard Specification for Preformed Retroreflective Pavement Marking Tape for Extended Service Life. ASTM E303 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester. ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. E. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO M 247 - Standard Specification for Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints. F. American Concrete Institute ACI 503R - Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete. G. United States General Services Administration, Federal Specifications. SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 3 of 11 Federal Specification TT-P-1952D - Paint, Traffic and Air Field Marking, Water Emulsion Base. H. United States General Services Administration, Federal Standards. Federal Standard No. 595 - Colors Used in Government Procurement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Contractor shall furnish one technical expert, who shall be fully knowledgeable about all equipment operations and application techniques, to oversee the work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. General White and yellow fast-drying waterborne pavement marking paint, low VOC, ready- mixed, one component, 100 percent acrylic, Federal Specification TT-P-1952D. Paint shall be capable of being applied with paint striping equipment at ambient temperatures. Weight per gallon shall not be less than 12.5 pounds/gallon when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1475. Colors: ASTM D211 and per Federal Standard No. 595. B. Manufacture Paint shall be formulated and manufactured from first-grade raw materials and shall be free from defects and imperfections that might adversely affect the serviceability of the finished product. The materials shall not exhibit settling or jellying after storage in the sealed containers as received that will affect the performance of the products. The paint shall provide the proper anchorage, refraction and reflection for the finished glass spheres when applied as specified. C. Composition SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 4 of 11 Composition of the paint shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer, provided that the finished product meets the requirements of any applicable Federal, State or Local regulations for products of this type and the requirements as follows: a.Paint shall not contain more than 0.06% lead. b.Total nonvolatile shall not be less than 70% by weight (mass). c.Pigment shall be 45-55% by weight (mass). d.Resin solids shall be composed of 100% acrylic emulsion polymer. e.Volatile organic compounds shall not exceed 150 grams/liter, excluding water. f.Closed-cup flash point shall not be less than 100°F (38°C), and weight per gallon shall not be less than 12.5 pounds/gallon when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1475. D. Viscosity Consistency of the paint shall not be less than 80, nor more than 90 Kreb units when tested in accordance with ASTM D562. The paint shall have good spraying characteristics when the material is heated to application temperature of 130°F to 145°F. E. Flexibility Paint shall not show cracking or flaking when subjected to the TT-P-1952D flexibility test in which the panels used shall be tin plates that are 3 inches x 5 inches in area and 35 - 31 U.S. Gauge in thickness. The tin panels shall be lightly buffed with steel wool and thoroughly cleaned with solvent before being used for tests. F. Dry Opacity Both white and yellow paints shall have a minimum contrast ratio of 0.96. Contract ratio shall be determined by applying a wet film thickness of 0.005 inches (127 microns) to a standard hiding power chart. After drying, the black and white reflectance values shall be determined using a suitable reflectometer and the contrast ratio determined. G. Bleeding Paints shall have a minimum bleeding ratio of 0.97 when tested in accordance with FS TT- P-1952D. H. Abrasion Resistance No less than 210 liters of sand shall be required to remove paint film when tested in accordance with TT-P-1952D. SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 5 of 11 I. Color Yellow: FS 595, No. 13538, latest issue. White: No darker or yellower than FS 595, No. 17778, latest issue, when the material is placed in a type EH weatherometer for a period of 500 hours and weathered according to ASTM G153. Color determination shall be made without beads, after a minimum of 24 hours. If not a visual match, the diffuse day color of the paint shall conform to the CIE Chromaticity coordinate limits as follows: Paint CIE Chromaticity Coordinate Limits x Y x y x y x y Brightness White 0.305 0.295 0.360 0.360 0.388 0.377 0.280 0.310 84.0 Min Yellow 0.485 0.455 0.506 0.452 0.484 0.428 0.477 0.438 50.0 Min Paint shall not discolor in sunlight and shall maintain colorfastness throughout its life, approximately two years. J. Glass Bead Adhesion Paint with glass beads conforming to M.07.30, applied at the rate of 6.0 pounds/gallon of paint, shall require not less than 150 liters of sand to remove paint film and glass beads. K. Scrub Resistance Paint shall pass 300 cycles minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D2486. L. Drying time Reflectorized line shall dry to no pick up in 15 minutes or less as tested by ASTM D711 when applied at the ratio provided for specified glass spheres to paint (the paint at 15+ 1 mil (381 millimeters + 25 millimeters) wet film thickness equivalent to 100-115 square foot/gallon and the glass spheres at the equivalent rate of 6.0 pounds/gallon. 2.2 HOT-APPLIED WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. General SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 6 of 11 White and yellow fast-drying waterborne pavement marking paint, low VOC, ready- mixed, one component, 100 percent acrylic, Federal Specification TT-P-1952D. Paint shall be capable of being applied with paint striping equipment at an application temperature of 130°F to 145°F. Color: ASTM D211 and per Federal Standard No. 595. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. B. Manufacture Paint shall be formulated and manufactured from first-grade raw materials and shall be free from defects and imperfections that might adversely affect the serviceability of the finished product. The materials shall not exhibit settling or jellying after storage in the sealed containers as received that will affect the performance of the products. The paint shall provide the proper anchorage, refraction and reflection for the finished glass spheres when applied as specified. C. Composition Composition of the paint shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer, provided that the finished product meets the requirements of any applicable Federal, State or Local regulations for products of this type and the requirements as follows: a.Paint shall not contain more than 0.06% lead. b.Total nonvolatile shall not be less than 76% by weight (mass). c.Pigment shall be 58-63% by weight (mass). d.Resin solids shall be composed of 100% acrylic emulsion polymer. e.Volatile organic compounds shall not exceed 150 grams/liter, excluding water. f.Closed-cup flash point shall not be less than 100°F, and weight per gallon shall not be less than 12.5 pounds/gallon when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1475. D. Viscosity Consistency of the paint shall not be less than 80, nor more than 90 Kreb units when tested in accordance with ASTM D562. The paint shall have good spraying characteristics when the material is heated to application temperature of 130°F to 145°F. E. Flexibility SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 7 of 11 Paint shall not show cracking or flaking when subjected to the TT-P-1952D flexibility test in which the panels used shall be tin plates that are 3 inches x 5 inches (76 millimeters x 127 millimeters) in area and 35 - 31 U.S. Gauge in thickness. The tin panels shall be lightly buffed with steel wool and thoroughly cleaned with solvent before being used for tests. F. Dry Opacity Both white and yellow paints shall have a minimum contrast ratio of 0.96. Contract ratio shall be determined by applying a wet film thickness of 0.005 inches (127 microns) to a standard hiding power chart. After drying, the black and white reflectance values shall be determined using a suitable reflectometer and the contrast ratio determined. G. Bleeding Paints shall have a minimum bleeding ratio of 0.97 when tested in accordance with FS TT- P- 1952D. H. Abrasion Resistance No less than 210 liters of sand shall be required to remove paint film when tested in accordance with TT-P-1952D. I. Color Yellow: FS 595, No. 13538, latest issue. White: No darker or yellower than FS 595, No. 17778, latest issue, when the material is placed in a type EH weatherometer for a period of 500 hours and weathered according to ASTM G153. If not a visual match, the diffuse day color of the paint shall conform to the CIE Chromaticity coordinate limits as follows: Paint CIE Chromaticity Coordinate Limits x Y x y x y x y Brightness White 0.305 0.295 0.360 0.360 0.388 0.377 0.280 0.310 84.0 Min Yellow 0.485 0.455 0.506 0.452 0.484 0.428 0.477 0.438 50.0 Min SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 8 of 11 Paint shall not discolor in sunlight and shall maintain colorfastness throughout its life, approximately two years. Color determination shall be made without beads, after a minimum of 24 hours. J. Glass Bead Adhesion Paint with glass beads shall require not less than 150 liters of sand to remove paint film and glass beads. K. Scrub Resistance Paint shall pass 300 cycles minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D2486. L. Drying time Reflectorized line shall dry to no pick up in 120 seconds or less when applied at the ratio provided for specified glass spheres to paint (the paint at 15+ 1 mil (381 millimeters + 25 millimeters) wet film thickness equivalent to 100-115 square foot/gallon (2.45-2.82 square meters/liter) and the glass spheres at the equivalent rate of 6.0 pounds/gallon (0.72 kilograms/liter). The paint shall be applied with equipment so as to have the paint at a temperature of 130°F to 145°F (54°C to 63°C) at the spray gun. 2.3 GLASS BEADS A. Beads shall be transparent, clean, colorless glass, smooth and spherically shaped, free of milkiness, pits, or excessive air bubbles. B. Quality Assurance Control Beads shall be segregated into maximum lots of 2,500 pounds (1125 kilograms) and lot numbers shall be stamped onto each lot. Each lot shall be tested for gradation, rounds and embedment coating. C. Gradation - The glass spheres shall meet the following gradation requirements: Glass sphere gradation (ConnDOT Grading “A”) Sieve Size % Passing 20 (850 um) 100 SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 9 of 11 30 (600 um) 80-95 50 (300 um) 9-42 80 (180 um) 0-10 Glass sphere gradation (ConnDOT Grading “B”) Sieve Size % Retained 10 (2.0 mm) 0 12 (1.7 mm) 0-5 14 (1.4 mm) 5-20 16 (1.18 mm) 40-80 18 (1.0 mm) 10-40 20 (850 um) 0-5 Pan 0-2 D. Roundness: Glass beads shall have a minimum of 80% rounds per screen for two highest sieve quantities and no more than 3% angular particles per screen for Grading “B”. The remaining sieve fractions shall typically be no less than 75% rounds. E. Refractive Index: Glass beads shall have a refractive index of 1.50 to 1.52. SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 10 of 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Pavement markings shall be applied in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the control points established by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. B. No paint shall be applied to new bituminous pavement until the top course has cured at least one week minimum. C. Pavement areas to be painted shall be dry and sufficiently cleaned of sand and road debris so as to provide an acceptable bond between the paint and the pavement. D. All painting shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. The lines shall be sharp and clear with no feathered edging or fogging and precautions shall be taken to prevent tracking by tires of the striping equipment. Paint shall be applied as shown on the Drawings with no unsightly deviations. E. Contractor shall protect the buildings, walks, pavement, curbing, trees, shrubs, mulch, etc. from over-spray of paint and damage by his operations. F. Operations shall be conducted only when the road surface temperature is at least 40°F or as allowed by Engineer. They shall be discontinued during periods of rain, and shall not continue until Engineer determines that the pavement surface is dry enough to achieve adhesion. G. After application, paint shall be protected from crossing vehicles using traffic cones or other acceptable method for a time at least equivalent to the drying or curing time of the paint. H. The material shall be applied to the pavement by equipment used specifically for the application of pavement markings and shall be of a standard commercial manufacturer. I. Contractor shall provide survey control for layout of pavement markings by utilizing his own surveyor or hiring a registered land surveyor. The cost of this survey control shall be included in other items of work. 3.2 WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Painted legend, arrows, and markings includes paint installed with a hand striping machine such as: stop bars, crosswalks, parking stalls, lane arrows, legends, markings within gore areas, and painting of paved islands or medians. B. Painted pavement markings and hot applied painted pavement markings include paint installed with a truck-mounted painting machine such as center lines, lane lines and shoulder lines. C. Waterborne Paint, Ambient Temperature SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02765 PAGE 11 of 11 Apply paint at a rate of 100 to 115 square feet per gallon, with glass beads applied at a rate of 6 pounds per gallon of paint for painted pavement markings and painted legend, arrows, and markings D. Waterborne Paint, Hot-Applied Hot-applied paint shall be applied at a temperature of 130°F to 145°F at the spray gun. Apply paint at a rate of 8 pounds per gallon of paint for hot-applied painted pavement markings. END OF SECTION SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 02780 - PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1.Preparation of base course. 2.Installation of sand setting and precast concrete unit pavers. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2.ASTM C70 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 3.ASTM C88 – Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 4.ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 5.ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6.ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7.ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 8.ASTM C 936 - Standard Specifications for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 2 of 9 9.ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. 10.ASTM C1042 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Latex Systems Used With Concrete by Slant Shear. 11.ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh To Hardened Concrete. 12.ASTM C1272 - Standard Specification for Heavy Vehicular Paving Brick. 13.ASTM C1645 - Standard Test Method for Freeze-thaw and De-icing Salt Durability of Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units. 14.ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 15.ASTM D7428 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus. D. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI) 1.ICPI Technical Specification Technical Bulletins 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit specifications and other data for all materials required, including, but not limited to: 1.Aggregates 2.Steel edging 3.Setting Bed Materials 4.Certification that unit pavers comply with specified requirements. Include detailed instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection of all items. B. Samples: Submit two sets of duplicate samples of each paver unit specified under this Section. C. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings showing sizes, dimensions, sections and profiles of all units; arrangement and provisions for jointing, expansion, relationship to adjacent items, and for reception of other work. Indicate the location of each unit on the setting drawings with a unique number designation corresponding to a like number to be marked on the back of each unit. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 3 of 9 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. 1.5 MOCK-UPS A. At location of Project selected by Engineer, place and finish 100 square foot mockup section for examination. B. Fabricate mockup section using materials and construction methods proposed for permanent work, including the full range of color, texture and pattern to be expected. C. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of visual quality of mockup panel before start of work. Retain mockup panel during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not move or destroy panel until work is completed. D. Mock-up may be retained as part of the finished work. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage 1.Transportation carrier shall use appropriate methods to ensure materials are properly supported, stacked, and restrained during transport. 2.Carefully pack, band and load unit pavers for shipment on wood pallets or skids. Pallets and skids shall be stacked in such a manner as to evenly distribute the weight of the paver and to prevent breakage, cracking, and other damage to the paver. Protect pavers during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. No material, which may cause staining, or discoloration may be used for blocking, packing or dunnage. Use polyethylene or other suitable plastic to separate dissimilar materials. 3.Deliver packaged materials to the Project Site in their original, unopened package or container-bearing label clearly identifying manufacturer's name, brand name, material, weight or volume, and other pertinent information. Packaged materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken package or container in a weather tight and dry place until ready for use in the work. 4.Deliver unpackaged aggregates in bulk and store to avoid excessive segregation, contamination with other materials or other size aggregates, or freezing. B. Handling SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 4 of 9 1.Handle unit pavers so as to prevent chipping, breakage, marring, soiling and other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other suitable material. Cracked, badly chipped, or stained units will be rejected and shall not be employed in the work. C. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration due to moisture and/or temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Protect liquid components from freezing. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Examine all work that the work of this section is contingent upon and report any deficiencies to Landscape Architect. Commencement of work will be construed to mean complete acceptance of the preparatory work of others. B. Cold weather protection: 1.Frozen Materials: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2.Frozen Work: Do not build on frozen subgrade. 3.Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not use salt to thaw ice or for any other reason. 4.During all seasons, protect partially completed work against weather when work is not in progress. PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PAVER BASE A. Clean, non-plastic, natural or manufactured from crushed rock, ASTM C33. Material shall be free of deleterious or foreign matter. Do not use limestone screenings or stone dust. Unit Paver Base shall be graded as follows: Gradation of Brick Paver Base Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 mm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 10 SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 5 of 9 2.2 PAVER SETTING BED A. Clean, non-plastic, natural or manufactured from crushed rock, ASTM C33. Material shall be free of deleterious or foreign matter. Do not use limestone screenings or stone dust. B. Organic Impurities: Fine aggregate subjected to the colorimetric test shall not produce a color darker than Gardner Color Standard No. 11, using AASHTO T 21. If the fine aggregate fails to meet this requirement, the provisions of AASHTO M 6, Section 5.2, will govern. C. Paver setting bed shall be uniformly graded as follows: Gradation Sieve Percent Passing 3/8” 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 5-30 No. 100 0-10 No. 200 0-1 D. The above gradation represents the extreme limits which shall determine suitability for use from all sources of supply. The gradation from any one source shall be reasonably uniform and not subject to the extreme percentages of gradation specified above. For the purpose of determining the degree of uniformity, a fineness modulus determination will be made upon representative samples from any source. Fine aggregate from any one source having a variation in fineness modulus greater than 0.20 either way from the fineness modulus of the representative sample will be rejected. 2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete Units: Town Hall as manufactured by Unilock, ASTM C 936. B. Size: 4” x 8” x 2.75” thick. C. Finish: Wet Cast for realistic brick textures. D. Color: Selected from manufacturers standard colors. E. Pattern: Town Hall D with perimeter solider course. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 6 of 9 2.4 STEEL EDGING A. Steel edging, with durable enamel based paint with anchor stake loops stamped on face every 32” o.c. Provide all necessary accessories, splicers, universal corners, and tapered ends for a complete installation. 1.Size: 3/16” thick x 4 inches x standard lengths. 2.Anchor Spikes: Standard steel spike, 3/16” x 15”. 3.Finish: Black enamel paint. 2.5 JOINT STABILIZING SAND A. Polymeric Sand, properties and gradation conforming to ASTM C-136. 1.Sand and water-activated polymer mixture. 2.Color: Grey. 3.Gradation: Gradation of Polymeric Sand Joint Stabilizer Sieve Size Natural Sand Percent Passing Manufactured No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 (600 mm) 40 to 75 40 to 75 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 10 0 to 10 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Do not use paver units with excessive chips, cracks, voids, discoloration or other defects, which might be visible or cause staining in finished work. 1.Cut paver units with motor-driven saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 7 of 9 2.Set paver units in patterns shown on drawings and with uniform joints of widths indicated herein. 3.Surface Tolerances: Maintain the surface plane for finished paving not exceeding a tolerance of +/- 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straight edge. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBBASE/BASE A. All soft and yielding material, and other portions of the subbase which will not compact readily when rolled, vibrated or tamped, shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. Compact subbase to 95% maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D 1557 Method C. Density indicated is minimum required. 1.Protect subgrade from damage. At all times, the subgrade surface shall be kept in such condition that it will drain readily and correctly. B. If additional material is required to bring subgrade to specified elevations, utilize Granular Fill as Specified in Section 31 23 10 – Earthwork. If additional material is added above subgrade, compact additional material to 95% maximum dry density at optimum moisture content. Density indicated is minimum required. 3.3 UNIT PAVER BASE A. After compaction of subbase, install Unit Paver Base in the thickness indicated on the drawings. B. Compact Unit Paver Base to 95% maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D 1557 Method C. Density indicated is minimum required. C. Finish grade of Unit Paver Base shall be within one-half (1/2) inch of required elevation for setting pavers. D. Protect Unit Paver Base from damage. If base becomes rutted or displaced, re-grade as required. 3.4 PAVER SETTING BED A. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, not exceeding 11/2 in. (40 mm) thickness. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed rails, using the rails and/or edge restraints to produce a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, allowing for specified variation in the base surface. B. Do not disturb screeded sand. C. Screeded area shall not substantially exceed that which is covered by pavers in one day. D. Do not use bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 8 of 9 3.5 PAVER INSTALLATION A. Thoroughly clean all paving units of dirt debris or other contaminants. B. Install paving units carefully by hand as shown on the Drawings. 1.Before setting, paver shall be clean and free of dirt and foreign matter on all sides. 2.Each piece shall be carefully bedded in base and tapped home with a rawhide or hardened rubber mallet to a full and solid bearing. Particular care shall be exercised to equalize joint openings. 3.Pavers shall be set true to the required lines and grades. 4.Protect newly laid paving units with panels of plywood or similar material. 5.Do not allow workers on the installed pavers. 6.Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting the alignment of paving units. C. Joint Treatment: Place paving units with hand tight joints. 1.Fill joints with joint stabilizing sand per manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Brush joint stabilizing sand to completely fill joints, and ensure no materials remains on paver surface. 3.Following application of dry product, fog water per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Prevent mortar or joint stabilizing sand from staining the face of pavers and other surfaces to be left exposed. Immediately remove mortar splatter. B. Contractor shall protect all of the work of this section and keep it in first class condition until the completion of the contract. Exercise particular care to prevent damage to the surface of the pavers. C. Remove and replace stone or precast concrete units, which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units, which do not match adjoining stonework or precast concrete units. Provide new matching units, install as specified and point- up joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. D. Clean work not less than six days after completion of work using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers. SECTION 02780 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02780 PAGE 9 of 9 3.7 CLEAN UP A. Remove all containers, surplus and debris and dispose of in accordance with local, state and Federal regulation. B. Clean all unit pavers. C. Leave site in a clean and orderly condition on a daily basis. D. Upon completion of all work, remove all containers, surplus materials, and installation debris. Leave area of work in clean orderly condition END OF SECTION SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 1 of 19 SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Irrigation Control System. 2.Irrigation Distribution System. 3.Sprinkler Heads or Drip Irrigation. B. Work shall also include all associated items and operations necessary and required to complete the installation, including, but not limited to, surface preparation, plumbing, electrical, finishing, and cleanup. C. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. D. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) 1.State of Connecticut Department of Transportation “Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction”, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2.ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. 3.ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 4.ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 2 of 19 5.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 6.ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 7.ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. E. American Water Works Association 1.AWWA C150 (ANSI A21.50) - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 2.AWWA C151 (ANSI A21.51) - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. F. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. G. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services required to install a complete irrigation system as indicated on the Drawings and called-for in these Specifications. Install all system components as specified and/or as required to achieve a complete functioning system in accordance with the performance requirements indicated and all applicable codes. B. Unless otherwise specified, the plans and specifications are intended to include everything obviously requisite and necessary for the proper installation and completion of the work whether each necessary item is mentioned herein or not. C. Contractor’s bid shall include labor, materials, equipment and services required to complete the irrigation work indicated on the Drawings and in the specifications. The complete electrical system, including control wiring for line and low voltage, from the controller to the field sprinklers shall be included. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 3 of 19 D. The plans and specifications are intended to be cooperative, and any item called for in one and not the other shall be as binding as if called for in both. If a discrepancy exists between an item called for in the plans and the specifications, or within the plans or specifications, the most stringent shall apply. E. All work herein specified or called for on the drawings will be executed in accordance with all governing ordinances, laws and regulations that meet all local conditions. Additionally, any changes and/or additions in the work necessary to meet these ordinances, laws, regulations and/or conditions will be made without additional cost to the Owner. F. Water Supply 1.The point of connection for the irrigation water supply system shall be an existing copper irrigation water service pipe fed from the existing building, generally where indicated on the Drawings. 2.The point of connection for the irrigation water supply system shall be a new connection to the public water system, generally where indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate with the utility provider for such connection, including, but not limited to, connection permits, fees, and details of the connection that may not be indicated on the Drawings. 3.Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for all required building and connection point access, determination of available pressure and flow, configuration of system components, temporary shut-offs, and testing. 4.The plumbing installation inside the Building, including the backflow assembly, valves, and piping shall be provided by the plumber, and shall not be included in this Sub-Bid. The Irrigation Installer shall provide a price for a booster pump in the event the pressure is not adequate enough to run this system. The pump shall be furnished by the irrigation installer and installed by the plumber and the electrician. G. Electrical Connection 1.The point of connection for electrical service to the irrigation system shall be existing supply located in the existing building, generally where indicated on the Drawings. 2.Coordinate with the Owner for such connection, including, but not limited to, determination of available electrical circuitry, access, and details of the connection that may not be indicated on the Drawings. 3.The electrical power supply to the irrigation system controller, and other required power connections, shall be completed by a licensed electrician. H. Performance Requirements: 1.Irrigation Coverage: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 4 of 19 3.Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of area indicated. Lay out system components to avoid site improvements and plantings. 1.5 PERMITS, CERTIFICATIONS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for permits, tests and certifications required for the execution of Work under this Section. B. Coordinate all inspections with local authorities as required. C. Obtain and pay for permits, tests and certifications required for the execution of work under this section. D. Furnish copies of Permits, Certifications, and Approval Notices to Engineer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm which has at least five (5) years experience in work of the size and type required by this section and which is acceptable to the Owner's Representative. B. Tests 1.Operational Test: After completion of the system, test the operation of entire system and adjust sprinklers to the approval of Engineer. Demonstrate to Engineer that irrigated areas are being adequately covered. 2.All costs for tests shall be included in Contractor’s cost of the work. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product furnished. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop drawings for all equipment and products furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall indicate the configuration, dimensions, layout, and spacing of major and minor equipment components, and a schedule of such equipment components. Show in large-scale details any unique fabrication, assembly, and/or installation requirements. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed by qualified personnel responsible for their preparation. D. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 5 of 19 G. Field quality-control reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals. I. Copies of all permits and inspection reports. J. Warranties as specified herein. K. Maintenance and operating instructions. L. Record Drawings (“As-Built”) of the final system indicating pipe routing, valve locations, sprinkler type, pop up height and nozzle for each sprinkler installed. Valve box locations shall be referenced by distance in a triangular fashion from a minimum of two permanent locations. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained, experienced, and licensed in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. B. Installer: A firm which has at least five (5) years’ experience in work of the size and type required by this Section and which is acceptable to Owner. C. Licensed Plumber: All work performed within the building and within 5-feet of the building shall be performed by a licensed plumber. D. Licensed Electrician: All work performed within the building and within 5-feet of the building shall be performed by a licensed electrician. E. Codes and Standards: Perform all work under this section in accordance with applicable codes and standards. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle all materials in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from all possible damage. Minimize on-site storage. B. Coordinate a storage/staging area location with Engineer or Owner. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: B. Notify Engineer, Owner, and building occupants no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 6 of 19 C. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without written permission from Owner and building occupants authorized representative. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty, as applicable, for all products furnished under this Section. Warranty shall be registered in Owner’s name. B. Warranty the entire irrigation system, including equipment, parts, and labor for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner. C. Bind warranties in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. D. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. E. Identify binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of Contractor. F. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. Maintenance Period: Ninety (90) calendar days after Substantial Completion. B. Testing: Test all system components for operation to meet the performance requirements specified herein. C. Adjust irrigation schedule at Owner’s direction or for field conditions. D. Adjust all sprinkler heads to achieve full coverage of designated irrigation areas and minimize spray on walks, parking areas, and other non-irrigation areas. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide at least four (4) hours of instruction to designated Owner’s representative or Owner’s staff upon completion of system start-up. B. Upon completion of work and prior to application for acceptance and final payment, prepare a minimum of two (2) three ring binders titled “MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS”. C. Included in each Maintenance and Instructions binder: 1.One (1) copy of the original irrigation plan. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 7 of 19 2.One (1) minimum 24-inch by 32-inch copy of the Record Drawing. 3.A complete set of "Approved" submittals of all irrigation equipment. 4.One (1) copy of the suggested "System Operating Schedule”. 5.One (1) copy of the manufacturer’s controller operation manual. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Sprinklers: 2 extra of each. C. Automatic Control Valves: 1 extra of each. D. Keys to controller cabinet: 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Use only new materials conforming to the standard(s) applicable to each type, as specified and approved by Engineer. Provide listed manufacturers products specified, unless approved equals are specified. Any approved equals must be by complete system only, not components of a system. B. For warranty purposes, irrigation products shall be supplied from authorized distributors of the various products. 2.2 POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) IRRIGATION PIPE A. PVC, ASTM D2241, Pressure Class 200 (SDR 21), pressure rating 200 psi min. B. Fittings: Solvent-weld joints to match pipe. 1.Solvent cement: NSF approved for Type I and Type II PVC pipe and schedule 40 fittings, ASTM D2564 and F493 for potable water, pressure, gas conduit and drain pipes. Application temperature shall be 35 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit. 2.Saddles and male adapters shall not be approved for any type of connection on the irrigation system. 2.3 POLYETHYLENE PIPE A. High density polyethylene made from 100 percent virgin material, ASTM D2239. Minimum working pressure is 150 psi. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 8 of 19 B. Fittings: PVC Type 1, Cell Classification 12454, ASTM D1784, manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609 for use with polyethylene pipe produced to ASTM D2104 and D2239. Fittings shall be certified by NSF for use in potable water service. 1.Clamps for use on insert-type fittings shall be pincer type, 1-ear design made from 300 series stainless steel and specifically designed for underground irrigation systems. A crimping tool shall be used to tighten the clamp. 2.Plastic saddles for use on poly pipe shall be used as a means of attaching the sprinklers from pipe to swing joint. The saddles shall be a clamp-on style with a threaded female hole. A punch tool shall be used to create a hole for water access. 2.4 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube, Irrigation: Soft, Type L, ASTM B 88, (Type B, ASTM B 88M) water tube, annealed temper. B. Copper, Water Supply: Soft, Type “K” Copper, ASTM B88. C. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. E. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Provide pipe sleeves for irrigation pipe under non-soil areas such as sidewalks, and where indicated on the Drawings. 1.Depth of cover 30-inches or greater: PVC sleeve, ASTM D3034, SDR-35, solvent weld joints. 2.Depth of cover less than 30-inches: Centrifugally-cast ductile iron pipe, AWWA C151/A21.51, thickness Class 52, AWWA C150/A21.50. 2.6 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. B. Medium Rotary Sprinklers: 1.Subject to compliance with Performance Requirements, provide one of the following or Engineer-approved equal: a.Hunter Industries Incorporated – PGP-Ultra. b.Rain Bird Corporation - 5004. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 9 of 19 c.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division – TR50. 2.Description: a.Body Material: ABS. b.Nozzle: Plastic. c.Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d.Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. 3.Capacities and Characteristics: a.Flow: 1.12 to 9.8 GPM b.Pop-up Height: 4” aboveground to nozzle. c.Arc: 0 to 360 degrees. d.Radius: 29’ to 46’ e.Inlet: 3/4” IPS 2.7 SPRAY HEADS: A. Subject to compliance with Performance Requirements, provide one of the following or Engineer-approved equal: 1.Hunter Industries Incorporated – Pros-04-MPR40. 2.Rain Bird Corporation – 1800-SAM. 3.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division – 570Z PRX. B. Description: 1.Body Material: ABS. 2.Nozzle: Plastic 3.Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. 4.Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1.Flow: .16 to 4.2 GPM 2.Pop-up Height: 4” and 12” aboveground to nozzle. 3.Arc: 0 to 360 degrees. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 10 of 19 4.Radius: 0’ to 30’ 5.Inlet: 1/2” IPS 2.8 SMALL GEAR DRIVEN ROTARY SPRINKLER A. The small gear driven rotary sprinkler shall be Toro Mini 8. The flow range shall be from .8 - 3 gpm at a recommended operating pressure of 30 - 50 psi Maximum pressure is 60 psi. There are 5 interchangeable nozzles that come with each sprinkler. B. All adjustments can be made from the top of the sprinkler. The top arc indication for adjustments from 45 to 360 degree. The full and part circle arcs come in one sprinkler. Continuous, uni- directional rotation provide uniform coverage when set at 360 degrees. Radius reduction shall be adjustable up to 25% by means of a radius reduction set screw on the top of the nozzle. C. Nozzle height is 3 3/4 inches when in operation. Retraction shall be achieved by a stainless steel spring. The nozzle shall be smooth, plastic with an over-molded riser wiper seal shall prevent the sprinkler from having foreign materials enter the body. Pressure activated seal and robust trip mechanism allows for enhanced reliability. Ratcheting riser allows for easy adjustment. Body inlet shall be 1/2 inch IPS. Sprinkler trajectory is 25 degrees. D. The gear drive shall be planetary design. The head shall have a “Smart Arc” memory that returns the sprinkler to previously set arc if the head is vandalized. A slip clutch assures no damage to the gears if vandalized. E. The sprinkler shall be a Mini 8 series as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA. 2.9 FIXED SPRAY HEAD A. Spray head shall be a 570 PRX series as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA or approved equal. B. Capable of covering up to a 17-foot radius. Depending on the exact type of nozzle, the sprinkler shall use .05 to 4.58 gallons per minute up to 50 psi. Nozzle shall be comprised of one or more orifices at two radius ranges and shall be adjustable from full-on to operation. Retraction shall be achieved by a heavy duty stainless steel riser in a resilient guide with riser wiper shall be included for continuous operation under the presence of foreign material. The body of the spray head shall be constructed on noncorrosive heavy duty Cycolac plastic. A filter screen shall be included in the nozzle piston. Patented in riser pressure regulated. Patented “X-Flow” high flow shut off device. Zero flush seal prevents flushing on pop up. Also has retraction flushing for clearing debris. Available body style: 2", 3", 4" 6", 6" side inlet, 12" side inlet. Available with check valve and pressure compensating devices or MPR nozzles. C. Coverage shall be either full or part circle. The part circle coverage shall be available in arcs of 90, 120, 180, 240, 270, and 360 degrees or adjustable part circle. Also included shall be special patterns including an end strip and center strip nozzle configuration. - Nozzle delivery shall be such as to allow part circle patterns to match full circle patterns in precipitation rates. Also available with effluent cap. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 11 of 19 D. Five-year warranty with replacement at the option of the Manufacturer. 2.10 BRASS MASTER VALVE A. Automatic brass control valves, (1, 1-1/2, or 2 inches in size) brass body, solenoid actuated, diaphragm valve. The valve body shall be manufactured from brass, with a wall thickness capable of withstanding normal operating pressures of 220 psi. The control valve shall have a fabric-reinforced rubber diaphragm for strength and durability. The range of motion of the diaphragm shall be within a diaphragm stem guide, to ensure proper seat alignment. B. Electric solenoid of the valve shall be a 24 VAC type, with an inrush current of .365 Amps, 8.8 V.A., and a holding current of .300 Amps, 7.2 V.A. The solenoid shall also have 22-inch lead wires for the simplification of installation. C. Control shall have a flow control to adjust flow volume or to manually close the valve. The valve shall also have a manual bleed screw, for manual opening of the valve in the event of a loss of automatic operation. A self-flushing filter screen shall be provided in the valve to filter the water supply to the 3-way actuator in the valve. The control valve shall be operated automatically by way of a three-way triac feature. This feature creates a non-continuous bleed actuation within the valve, allowing only the water on top of the valve to be ported into the discharge cavity of the valve. The non-continuous bleed operation is essential in the reliable operation of the valve in dirty water conditions. All parts shall be serviceable without removing the valve from line. The valve may be installed at any angle without affecting operation. Check manufacturer's data for friction loss. D. Automatic control valve shall be a 220 series, as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA. 2.11 PLASTIC CONTROL VALVE A. The plastic valve shall be an EZ Flow, as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA or approved equal. B. The valve shall have a working pressure range from 10 psi minimum to 150 psi maximum and a recommended flow range from 0.25 to 30 gpm. C. The valve shall be a normally closed configuration with 18” solenoid lead wires that attach to a removable 24 VAC encapsulated solenoid with a waterproof coil. The valve shall have a self- cleaning, stainless-steel metering pin to protect bleed ports and to purge contaminants without the use of a filter screen. The valve shall have a forward-flow design and an external manual downstream bleed/flush. The valve shall have an internal manual downstream bleed to prevent flooding of the valve box. The valve shall have a manual flow control with a hand-operated, rising-type flow-control stem with a control wheel/handle. The valve shall have a floating bleed tube that allows thermal expansion without affecting performance. 2.12 MANUAL IRRIGATION VALVES A. Bronze Gate Valves SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 12 of 19 1.Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. 2.Class: 125. 3.CWP Rating: 200 psig. 4.Body Material: ASTM B 62 bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. 5.Ends: Threaded or solder joint. 6.Stem: Bronze, nonrising. 7.Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. 8.Packing: Asbestos free. 9.Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.13 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 1.Subject to compliance with Performance Requirements, provide one of the following or Engineer-approved equal: a.Hunter Industries Incorporated - PGV. b.Rain Bird Corporation – PGA. c.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division – EZ Flo. 2.14 VALVE BOX A. High Density Polyethylene/polyolefin components especially compounded for underground enclosures with integral UV inhibitor. Boxes located in paved areas shall be traffic-rated. B. Valve boxes shall be available in the following configurations: 1.Round: 10 inch round polyolefin box, tapered body, rib reinforcement, flange bottom. Top outer diameter: 9-5/8 inches; Base outer diameter: 12-7/8 inches; Depth: 11-5/8 inches. Overlapping cover, bolt-down (stainless steel). 2.Rectangular: 14-inch x 19 inch polyolefin box tapered body, rib reinforcement, flange bottom. Outside base: 21 inches’ x 16 inches; depth: 12 inches. Overlapping cover, bolt- down (stainless steel). C. Each box shall be firmly bedded in pea gravel. 2.15 CONTROLLERS SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 13 of 19 A. Subject to compliance with Performance Requirements, provide one of the following or Engineer-approved equal: 1.Hunter Industries Incorporated – I Core. 2.Rain Bird Corporation ESP-SMT. 3.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division - Intellisense. B. Description: C. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station. D. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for grounding. 1.Body Material Molded plastic. 2.Mounting: Surface type for wall. E. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse. F. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate two or more times daily. 1.Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset automatic operation. 2.Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing device during power outages. 3.Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power. G. Rain Sensor: Wireless “Solar Sync” Sensor by Hunter Industries Incorporated or Engineer- approved equal. Coordinate with the University for mounting location on the Visitor’s Center building. Provide all required clips, brackets and mounting hardware. H. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF #18 gauge multi sable, with solid-copper conductors; insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1.Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 2.16 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER - INTELLISENSE A. The automatic controller shall be an Intelli-Sense series, as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA. B. Controller shall have four programming modes: Automatic (controller determined) with daily ET Everywhere downloads; User defined with daily ET Everywhere downloads; User defined SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 14 of 19 without ET Everywhere downloads; and Controller Off. Two independent programs with one start time per program (3 independent programs on the TIS-240). C. Weather resistant plastic, locking cabinet with heavy duty internal transformer. Dimensions for indoor models: 7 ½” H x 6 ½” W x 3 ¼” D. UL and CUL listed. Outdoor model: 7 ½” H x 9 ½” W x 5 ¼” D. 24 station: 11 5/8” H x 8 ½” W x 5 ¾” D. Shipping weight approximately 6 lbs. D. Inlet power is 120 Vac. Maximum output per station is 24 VAC, .5 amps. Maximum output to valves is 24 VAC, 1-amp total load. E. Service Plan: A service plan will be established between Owner and automatic controller manufacturer to maintain operational contract. Contractor shall provide all required information for service plan at time of system start up. 2.17 WIRE AND SPLICING KIT A. Valve power wire shall be minimum #14, common wire minimum #12, single strand, solid copper, 600v, UL Listed, polyethylene jacketed, direct burial and shall meet all state and local codes for this service. Individual wires must be used for each zone valve. Common wire shall be white in color. White color shall be used for common wire only. Power wires shall be red in color. Extra power wires for future use shall be blue in color. Increase wire size as necessary to limit voltage drop to 3%. B. Wire splicing kits for single U.F. wire connections shall be direct burial kits consisting of sealant which shall not set-up hard allowing splices to be reworked without cutting wires. Direct burial kits shall have an application temperature range of 32 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit and service 600 VAC maximum. C. D.B.Y. kits shall allow connections of two to five #18 AWG or two #12 AWG solid or stranded copper wires. D.B.R. kits shall allow connections to two to five #16 AWG or three #10 AWG solid or stranded copper wires. 2.18 GATE VALVE A. The bronze isolation gate valves shall be constructed with non-rising stem, solid wedge disc and screwed ends. The Class 125 valve shall have screw-in bonnet with integral seat and renewable seat and disc. The valve shall be rated for 200 PSI non-shock cold water, oil or gas. The valve shall have a wheeled handle. B. Available in the following configurations: flanged, mechanical joint ends, PVC ends, threaded, push-on, push-on x flanged. C. The gate valve shall be a model T-113 as manufactured by NIBCO, Inc, Ekhart, IN, or approved equal. 2.19 SWING JOINT SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 15 of 19 A. The flexible swing joints for 1/2 inch and/or 3/4-inch inlet sprinklers shall consist of two 90- degree F.P.T. els and a piece of 3/8-inch-thick walled polyethylene pipe known as "Funny Pipe" not to be more than 36" in length. B. The 1 inch assemblies for quick coupling valves shall be made of Schedule 80 PVC swing joint, as manufactured by Lasco or approved equal. 2.20 QUICK COUPLING VALVE A. The quick coupler valve shall be Toro model 470 series, one-piece single lug type. B. The valve shall be constructed of brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand a normal working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. The quick coupler valve shall accept a Toro model 460 series quick coupler key with a top connection of female pipe thread and male pipe thread. C. The quick coupler valve shall be manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, California. 2.21 RAIN SENSOR A. The rain sensor shall be as manufactured by The Toro Company, Riverside, CA or approval equal B. Rain sensor shall have a vandal-resistant shield. C. The rain sensor device shall be designed to prevent sprinkler operation during rainfall. The rain gauge shall install easily to roof eaves with a quick clip gutter bracket, screw mount, or pole with adapter. Two wire nuts and wood screws shall be provided. The rain gauge shall be easily wired into any new or existing sprinkler control system. The rain gauge is wireless with a transmitting range of up to 300 ft., in line of sight. 2.22 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Reduced-pressure assembly, Febco 825Y or, approved equal, with drain line per applicable codes and as approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.23 SPARES A. In addition to all materials needed for installation, provide for the following spare parts: B. Sets of tools for repair and maintenance of sprinklers supplied. C. Sets of spare keys for controller cabinet. D. One (1) each of sprinkler and (1) 1-inch valve. E. One (1) each of sprinkler and (1) 1-inch valve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 16 of 19 A. Make field measurements necessary for the work noting the relationship of the irrigation work to other utility systems and site improvements, above grade and below grade. B. At all times, protect existing irrigation, landscaping, paving, structures, walls, footings, etc. from damage. Inadvertent damage to the work of another trade shall be reported at once. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 2310 – Earthwork. B. Make all solvent-weld joints in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, making certain not to apply an excess of primer or solvent, and wiping off excess solvent from each connection. Allow connections to set minimum 24 hours before pulling or pressure is applied to the system. C. Provide for expansion and contraction as recommended. Wire shall be laid in same trench as mainline and at pipe invert. D. Mainline pipe shall have minimum 12 inches of cover (excavate to invert as required by pipe size). E. Lateral pipe shall have minimum 8 inches of cover (excavate to invert as required by pipe size). F. Cut plastic pipe with hand saw or pipe-cutting tool, removing all burrs at cut ends. All pipe cuts are to be square and true. Bevel cut end as required conforming to manufacturer's specifications. G. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the trench. At times, when installation of the piping is not in progress, the open end(s) of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means. All piping which cannot temporarily be joined shall be sealed to make as watertight as possible. Pipe not to be installed that day shall not be laid out. Should water enter the trench during or after installation of the piping, no additional piping may be installed or backfilled until all water is removed from the trench. Pipe shall not be installed when water is in the trench, when precipitation is occurring, or when the ambient temperature is at 35F or below. H. PVC pipe shall be snaked in the trench to accommodate for expansion and contraction due to changes in temperature. I. Route the pipe as necessary to prevent damage to tree roots. Maintain a minimum distance of 18 inches, if possible with all mainline and lateral line piping from trees. Where trenching must occur near trees or within drip lines, discuss the routing with Engineer, and if directed, provide proper root pruning and sealing methods to all roots 1 inch and larger in size. J. Pulling of pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller will be allowed provided soil is suitable and specified depth of bury can be maintained. 3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Sleeves shall be used wherever wire or piping is going under a non-soil area or hardscape. Refer to the Drawings. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 17 of 19 B. Sleeve installations shall be fully coordinated with other construction operations before any installation takes place. C. Sleeves to have a minimum depth of 30 inches of cover. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Valves shall be installed on a level crushed stone base. Grade of bases shall be consistent throughout the project so that finish grades fall within the limits of work. Valves shall be set plumb with adjusting handle and all bolts, screws and wiring accessible through the valve box opening. B. Use a DBY splice kit for the wire attachment. C. Install a line sized gate valve in 10” round valve boxes. D. Install boiler drain for winterization point. Install 1” quick coupler valve on Lasco locking swing joint in 10” round valve box. 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring shall be installed as required. Expansion curls shall be provided within 3 feet of each wire connection to a solenoid and at least every 300 feet in length. Expansion curls are easily formed by wrapping at least 5 turns of wire around a rod or pipe 1 inch or more in diameter, then withdrawing rod. B. Wire shall be laid in trenches and shall be carefully back-filled to avoid any damage to the wire insulation or wire conductors themselves. In areas of unsuitable material, the trench shall have a 2 inches’ layer of sand or stone dust on the bottom before the wires are laid into the trench and back-filled. The wires shall have a minimum of 12 inches of cover. Wire not to be installed that day shall not be laid out. C. Control circuitry, whether electrical or hydraulic, passing through the wall of the building or beneath a sidewalk, road or drive shall be installed in a suitable sleeve; whereas in all other locations they shall be installed in the pipe trench and protected by the pipe whenever possible. D. The joining of all underground wires shall be by the use DBY splice kits for the decoders and DBR-6 (for up to 600 volts) for the decoder cable and splices. Place all splices, surge arrestors in valve boxes. 3.6 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. Mount controllers generally where shown on the Drawings or as directed by Engineer. Coordinate mounting with the project mechanical, electrical, and plumbing consultant. B. Wire valves into controller and set program. Controller shall be grounded as directed by the project mechanical, electrical, and plumbing consultant. 3.7 RAIN GAUGE INSTALLATION SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 18 of 19 A. Coordinate final location of rain sensor with the Owner and Architect. Coordinate with the project mechanical, electrical, and plumbing consultant for the installation of connective conduit from rain sensor to control unit. 3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install heads on Funny pipe, 2 el swing joints with up to 36” of 3/8” high density polyethylene pipe also known as “Funny Pipe”. B. Backfill the head in clean, native material. Install flush with grade. Any turf that is damaged during installation shall be repaired with seed or sod. C. Install sprinklers as per details. Adjust the radius and arc to avoid spraying buildings or into the road. D. Attach to the pipe with fpt tees. 3.9 CHECK/TEST/START-UP/ADJUST A. Flushing: After all, piping, valves and sprinkler bodies are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler internals, flush piping under a full head of water. B. Testing: Leakage test: test all lines for leaks under operating pressure. Repair all leaks and re- test. Coverage test: perform a coverage test in the presence of the Owner's Representative (notify Irrigation Consultant at least seven (7) days in advance of scheduled coverage test). Representative will determine if the water coverage is complete and adequate. Readjust heads and/or head locations as necessary or directed to achieve proper coverage. 3.10 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust sprinkler heads, valve boxes, and quick coupling valves to grade as required, so that they will not be damaged by mowing operations. B. Continue sprinkler coverage adjustment as required by settlement, etc., throughout the guarantee period. C. Each control zone shall be operated for a minimum of 5 minutes and all sprinklers checked for consistency of delivering water. Adjustments shall be made to sprinklers which are not consistent to the point that they match the manufacturer's standards. Sprinklers, valves, timing devices or other mechanical or electrical components, which fail to meet these standards, shall be rejected, replaced and tested until they meet the manufacturer's standards. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE AND OPERATION BY OWNER A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, train the Owner's Representative(s) in the operation of the system. Furnish, in addition to the Record Drawings and operational manuals, copies of all available, specification sheets and catalog sheets to the Owner's personnel responsible for the operation of the irrigation system. Guarantee all parts and labor for a minimum period of one (1) years from date of acceptance. SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02810 PAGE 19 of 19 3.12 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of all installation work, Contractor shall remove all leftover materials and equipment from the site in a safe and legal manner. B. Contractor shall leave the site clean and free of soil, stones and other debris generated from installation of the irrigation system. 3.13 RESTORATION A. Any turf, landscape, or hardscape that is disturbed during the installation of this irrigation system shall be brought back to either the original condition, or to engineer’s satisfaction. This will include, but not be limited to soil, turf seed, sod, and/or related items. 3.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the requirements of local permitting authorities for preparation and submittal of As-Built drawings. The requirements for the preparation of As-Built drawings as defined herein shall be considered the minimum requirements of Engineer, but shall in no way relive Contractor from satisfying the requirements of local permitting authorities. B. As work progresses, record the following on two (2) sets of plans: C. All changes and deviations from the design in location, grade, size, material, or other feature as appropriate. D. Any uncharted locations of utilities or other subsurface feature encountered during installation, including the characteristics of such uncharted utility or subsurface feature such as utility type, size, depth, material of construction, etc. E. The as-built location of all system components, including but not necessarily limited to, piping, control valves, junction boxes, and sprinkler heads. F. Recording of changes shall be clearly and neatly marked in red pen or pencil. All changes shall be noted on the appropriate drawings. G. Make measurements from fixed, permanent points on the Project Site to accurately locate the work completed. Such measurements shall consist of at least three (3) ties showing the distance of each item relative to each of the fixed, permanent points. H. As-Built Drawings shall be complete and shall indicate the true measurement and location, horizontal and vertical, of all new construction. As-Built drawings shall also contain any additional information required by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 1 of 17 SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1.Furnishing and installing woven wire fencing systems of the type and height specified and supported by metal posts erected where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including fence and gates. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2.ASTM A90- Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron or Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy. 3.ASTM A123- Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4.ASTM A153- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5.ASTM A392- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. 6.ASTM A428- Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles. 7.ASTM A491- Standard Specification for Aluminum Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 2 of 17 8.ASTM A780 – Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- Dip Galvanized Coatings. 9.ASTM A817- Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain Link Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire. 10.ASTM A824 - Standard Specification Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use with Chain Link Fence. 11.ASTM B211- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. 12.ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 13.ASTM F552 - Standard Terminology Relating to Chain Link Fencing. 14.ASTM F567- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence. 15.ASTM F626 - Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. 16.ASTM F668 - Specification for Polymer Coated Chain Link Fence Fabric. 17.ASTM F900 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 18.ASTM F934 - Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated Chain Link. 19.ASTM F1043 - Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. 20.ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 21.ASTM F1183 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric. D. Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute 1.Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute Product Manual, latest revision. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Permanent Fence shall meet the following basic parameters: 1.Fence Height: Varies, refer to the Drawings. 2.Mesh Size: 2 inches. 3.Mesh Gage: Wire with a diameter of 9-gauge galvanized core fused. Measured prior to application of coating. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 3 of 17 4.Gates: Height of gates shall match that of fence. Type and size of gates shall be as shown on the Drawings. 5.Anchored post where indicated; top and bottom rails between posts unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing the plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates and a schedule of components. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1.Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2.Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 3.Accessories: Privacy slats. 4.Gates, locking mechanisms and hardware. 5.Gate operators, including operating instructions. 6.Motors (if applicable): Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances. 1.Gate Operator (if applicable): Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions. 2.Wiring Diagrams (if applicable): For power, signal, and control wiring. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1.Polymer-Coated Components: In 6-inch lengths for components and on full-sized units for accessories. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 4 of 17 A. Qualification Data: For qualified factory-authorized service representative. B. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, and gate, from manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1.Polymer finishes. 2.Gate hardware. 3.Gate operator. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Supply material in accordance with Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute Product Manual and this Specification. C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM F567. D. Maintain all facilities installed under this Section in proper and safe condition throughout the progress of the work. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing fence grounding. Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for gates with automatic gate operators serving as a required means of access. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 5 of 17 A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver fence fabric and accessories in packed cartons or firmly tied rolls. B. Packages shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name. C. Store fence fabric and accessories in a secure and dry place. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Faulty operation of gate operators and controls. b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Material furnished shall be in good condition and shall not have been painted. B. All posts and rails shall be straight, true to section and of sufficient length for proper installation. C. Unless otherwise specified, hardware and accessories shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F626 and ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 as applicable for zinc-coating. 2.2 LINE POSTS A. Type I: 2-inch nominal (2.375 O.D.) steel pipe, 3.65 pounds per linear foot (lb/lf), hot dipped galvanized, ASTM F 1083, with average zinc coating of 1.8 ounces per square foot (oz/ft2) interior/exterior conforming to ASTM F1043. B. Type II: 2-inch nominal (2.375 O.D.) steel pipe, 3.12 lb/lf, cold formed and welded per ASTM F1043, Group IC, minimal yield Strength 50,000 pounds per square inch (psi). External zinc coating shall be Type B, zinc with polymer film, 0.90 oz/ft2. Internal coating shall be Type B, zinc 0.90 oz/ft2 minimum, or type D, zinc pigmented, 81% nominal coating with 0.30 mils minimum thickness. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 6 of 17 CORNER, END, AND PULL POSTS C. Type I: 2.5-inch nominal (2.875 O.D.) steel pipe, 5.79 pounds lb/lf, hot dipped galvanized, ASTM F 1083, with average zinc coating of 1.8 oz/ft2 interior/exterior conforming to ASTM F1043. D. Type II: 2.5-inch nominal (2.875 O.D.) steel pipe, 4.64 lb/lf. External zinc coating shall be Type B, zinc with polymer film, 0.90 oz/ft2. Internal coating shall be Type B, zinc 0.90 oz/ft2 minimum, or type D, zinc pigmented, 81% nominal coating with 0.30 mils minim thickness. 2.3 BRACE ASSEMBLY A. Rails 1.Type I: 1.25-inch nominal (1.660 O.D.) steel pipe, 2.27 lb/lf, hot dipped galvanized, ASTM F 1083, with average zinc coating of 1.8 oz/ft2 interior/exterior conforming to ASTM F1043. 2.Type II: 1.25-inch nominal (1.660 O.D.) steel pipe, 1.83 lb/lf. External zinc coating shall be Type B, zinc with polymer film, 0.90 oz/ft2. Internal coating shall be Type B, zinc 0.90 oz/ft2 minimum, or type D, zinc pigmented, 81% nominal coating with 0.30 mils minim thickness. B. Truss rod shall be 3/8-inch zinc-coated steel with adjustable turnbuckles or truss tightener. 2.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below: 1.Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2.Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 9-gauge galvanized core fused. Measured prior to application of coating. a.Mesh Size: 2 inches. Measured prior to application of coating. b.Polymer-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 2b. 1)Color: Black, ASTM F 934. c.Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating. 3.Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 7 of 17 2.5 FENCE FRAMING A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following: 1.Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2.Light Industrial Strength: Material Group IC-L, round steel pipe, electric-resistance- welded pipe. a.Line Post: 4' and under Fencing: 1-7/8" OD Pipe (Sch 40), 6' Fencing: 2-3/8" OD Pipe (Sch 40) and 12' Fencing: 3" OD Pipe (Sch 40). b.End, Corner and Pull Post: 4' and under Fencing: 2-1/2" OD Pipe (Sch 40), 6' Fencing: 2-7/8" OD Pipe (Sch 40), 12' Fencing: 3” OD Pipe (Sch 40). 3.Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate top and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043. a.Top, Bottom and Mid Rail for all fencing systems and all heights: 1 5/8" OD Pipe (Sch 40). 5’ Maximum spacing between center rails. b.Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043. B. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing: 1.Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. (0.61-kg/sq. m) average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. (1.22-kg/sq. m) zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M. 2.Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m)of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film. 3.External, Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film. Internal, Type D, consisting of 81 percent, not less than 0.3-mil- (0.0076- mm-) thick, zinc-pigmented coating. 4.Type C, Zn-5-Al-MM alloy, consisting of not less than 1.8-oz./sq. ft. (0.55-kg/sq. m) coating. 5.Coatings: Any coating above. C. Polymer coating over metallic coating. D. Color: Black, ASTM F 934. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 8 of 17 2.6 STRETCHER BARS A. Bars shall be one piece lengths of zinc-coated steel, not less than 2-inches shorter than the full height of the fencing fabric with a minimum cross section of 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch, ASTM F626. B. Polymer coating over metallic coating. C. Color: Black, ASTM F 934. 2.7 TENSION WIRE A. Polymer-Coated Steel Wire: Marcelled (spiraled or crimped) No. 7 gage, (0.177-inches) diameter, ASTM A824, ASTM F 1664, Class 2b over-coated steel wire. B. Polymer coating over metallic coating. C. Color: Black, ASTM F 934. 2.8 HARDWARE AND TIES A. Miscellaneous hardware, including but not limited to nuts, bolts, washers, clips, bands, rail ends, brackets, and straps shall be provided as required, hot-dip galvanized steel or aluminum alloy, ASTM F626. B. Tension bands shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness after galvanizing of 0.078-inches and a minimum width of 3/4-inch. C. Brace bands shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness after galvanizing of 0.108-inches and a minimum width of 3/4-inch. D. Wire ties shall be minimum 16-gage galvanized steel wire or minimum 9-gage aluminum alloy wire. E. All fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanized, ASTM F2329. F. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A307. G. Washers: Steel, round, ASTM F844. H. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A563 Grade A, hex head. 2.9 FITTINGS A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626. B. Post Caps: Provide for each post. 1.Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 9 of 17 C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post. D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1.Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long. 2.Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line-to-line posts. E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel. F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches (50 mm) shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post. G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment. H. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: ASTM F 626. 1.Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: a.Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric. I. Finish: 1.Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. (366 g /sq. m) zinc. a.Polymer coating over metallic coating. 2.10 GATES A. Gate Construction: ASTM F900. Corners welded or assembled with special malleable or pressed-steel fittings and rivets or bolts to provide rigid connections. B. Pipe and Tubing: 1.Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to match fence framing. C. Posts: Round tubular steel. 1.4 foot Fencing: 2 7/8" OD Pipe (Sch 40) 2.6 foot and 10 foot Fencing: 4” OD Pipe (Sch 40) D. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 10 of 17 1.Framing: a.2 inch OD Pipe (Sch 40) Welded b.Assemble gate frames by welded connections. When width of gate leaf exceeds 10 feet, install mid-distance vertical tubing of the same size and weight as frame members. When either horizontal or vertical bracing is not required, provide truss rods as cross bracing to prevent sag or twist. c.Horizontal bid bracing shall be used on all gates. E. Wire Fencing Fabric: Fabric shall match that of fence, attached securely to frame at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. F. Hardware: 1.Hinges: 360-degree inward and outward swing. 2.Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate. 3.All gates shall be equipped with hot-dipped galvanized steel hinges and latch with provisions for padlocking. 4.Double gates and single gates with leaf width 4 feet and greater shall be equipped with a minimum ½’’ drop bar and gate hold backs. 5.Hinges shall be cast steel hinges capable of 360 degree opening. Set screw shall be installed drilled into the steel post to lock each hinge to the gate post and prevent rotation. No-lift-off type. Box type hinges are not acceptable. 6.Gate Leaves: Configured with intermediate members and diagonal truss rods or tubular members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. 7.Latches, hinges, stops, keepers and other hardware items shall be furnished as required for proper operation. 2.11 PRIVACY SLATS (IF APPLICABLE) A. Material: PVC, UV-light stabilized, flame resistant, four ply, not less than 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick; sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated. B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.12 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall conform to ASTM C94; or pre-packaged concrete mix, ASTM C387. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. No air entrainment. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 11 of 17 2.13 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install fence with properly trained crew as shown on the drawings in accordance with ASTM F567. B. Install all nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric. C. The temporary chain link fence shall be removed at the conclusion of the work. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated. 1.Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 12 of 17 3.5 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1.Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2.Concrete post footings shall have a plan diameter 12-inches greater than the post diameter. Holes shall be clean and free of loose soil and debris. Concrete shall be placed continuously in one operation and tamped or vibrated for consolidation. Tops of the concrete footings shall be crowned to shed water. 3.Gate post/footings shall be installed a minimum of 42-inches below grade. 4.All corner, end posts, and gate posts shall be braced. a.Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts. b.Corner and terminal posts are to be braced horizontally and diagonally. The braces are to extend over one adjacent panel. Changes in line of 30 degrees or more shall be considered as corners. c.Braces and truss rods shall be securely fastened to posts with appropriate hardware. d.Pull posts with two braces shall be provided for all heights where changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of ten (10) degrees or more occur. 5.Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a.Concealed Concrete: Top 3 inches below grade as indicated on Drawings to allow covering with surface material. b.Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post. c.Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 13 of 17 C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly as indicated on the Drawings. Unless indicated otherwise, spacing shall be 8 feet on-center. E. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 1.horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 72 inches or higher, on fences with top rail and at two-third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. F. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches on-center. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1.Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric. Install top tension wire through post cap loops. Install bottom tension wire within 6 inches (152 mm) of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire. G. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer. H. Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings. I. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. J. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on-center. K. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1.Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on-center and to braces at 24 inches on-center. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 14 of 17 L. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. M. Privacy Slats: Install slats in direction indicated, securely locked in place. 1.Diagonally, for privacy factor of 80 to 85. N. Fabric: 1.Do not install fabric until concrete post footings have cured seven (7) days. Provide fabric of the height specified. Install fabric on the public side of the fence, with bottom no greater than 2-inches above the ground surface. Fabric shall be pulled taut to prevent sagging and provide a uniform smooth appearance. Fasten fabric to line posts at intervals not exceeding 15-inches with ties as specified. 2.Install tension wire in one continuous length between pull posts, weaved through fence fabric at top. Tension wire shall be applied to provide a wire without visible sag between posts. Fasten fabric to tension wire at intervals not exceeding 24-inches with ties or hog rings as specified. 3.Where it is not practicable to conform the fence to general contour of the ground, as at ditches, channels, etc., the opening beneath the fence shall be enclosed with chain link fabric and sufficiently braced to preclude access, but not to restrict the flow of water. 3.6 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. B. Provide swing gates at the locations and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Do not install gates until concrete post footings have cured seven (7) days. C. Gates shall be installed plumb, level, and secure, with full opening without interference. Hardware shall be installed and adjusted for smooth operation and lubricated where necessary. D. Provide concrete center drop to footing depth and suitable drop rod sleeve at center of double gate openings. 3.7 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION (IF APPLICABLE) A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true to fence line and grade. B. Excavation for Support Posts Pedestals Equipment Bases/Pads: Hand-excavate holes for bases/pads, in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate-operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 15 of 17 3.8 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1,500 feet except as follows: B. Fences within 100 feet of buildings, structures, walkways, and roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet. 1.Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 2.Bond metal gates to gate posts. 3.Coordinate subparagraph below with Drawings in projects where intentional discontinuities are provided in metal fencing conductivity to localize lightning effects to the vicinity of strikes. See Evaluations. 4.Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade. C. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing. D. Plans and details on Electrical Drawings and requirements in Division 26 Sections may revise or illustrate application of requirement below or may require grounding that exceeds minimum requirements in IEEE C2. Fences enclosing electrical substations are often bonded to a station grounding mat. E. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless otherwise indicated. F. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6-inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location, including the following: 1.Make grounding connections to each barbed wire strand with wire-to-wire connectors designed for this purpose. 2.Make grounding connections to each barbed tape coil with connectors designed for this purpose. G. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame. H. Connections: Make connections to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1.Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 16 of 17 2.Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3.Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4.Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5.Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. I. Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grounding-Resistance Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1.Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81. 2.Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a proposal to accomplish recommended work. 3.Report: Prepare test reports certified by a testing agency of grounding resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates. SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 323113 PAGE 17 of 17 END OF SECTION SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 02823 – SITE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Furnishing and installing steel pipe guard rails and hand-rails at ramps, steps, and other location indicated on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. ASTM International (ASTM). 1.ASTM A36 - Specification for Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3.ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4.ASTM A143 - Recommended Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot- Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. 5.ASTM A153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6.ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 7.ASTM A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile. 8.ASTM A384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 2 of 9 9.ASTM A385 - Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip). 10.ASTM A449 - Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 11.ASTM A563 - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 12.ASTM A780 - Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 13.ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 14.ASTM D1640 - Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film Formation of Organic Coatings at Room Temperature. 15.ASTM D2092 - Practices for Preparation of Zinc-Coated Galvanized Steel Surfaces for Paint. D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 1.“Pipe Railing Manual, Including Round Tube" E. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) 1.Standard J404 200901, Chemical Compositions of SAE Alloy Steels. F. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. G. American Welding Society 1.D1.1/D1.1M:2006, Structural Welding Code - Steel H. Master Painters Institute (MPI) I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1.SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. 2.SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning. 3.SSPC-SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. 4.SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide guardrail and railing systems as indicated on the Drawings as complete systems in accordance with design intent, actual site conditions, and State Building Code. B. Performance Requirements SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 3 of 9 1.Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand all loads as required by State Building Code. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1.Submit shop drawings of metal guardrails, handrails, and railings, showing sizes, details of fabrication and construction, bends and radii, handrail brackets, locations of hardware, anchors, and accessories, and installation details. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to ordering materials. 2.Submit manufacturers' product data of railing system and railing components, handrails, and handrail brackets. Include corrosion-inhibitive shop coat painting system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 3 years of experience on similar type projects / work; knowledge and understanding of standards referenced herein; skill necessary to perform in compliance with this specification. Contractors failing to demonstrate the required experience, knowledge, or skill shall be removed from the project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single manufacturer. Railing materials must be supplied in consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1.Transportation carrier shall use appropriate methods to ensure materials are properly packaged, stacked, and restrained during transport. Utilize protective packaging as required. 2.Protect materials during storage against moisture, soiling, staining, and physical damage. 3.Any railing or associated component showing manufacturing flaws upon receipt at the Project Site shall be referred to Engineer for determination as to whether it shall be repaired, rejected, or used. 4.Protect railing materials during storage to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion, and other construction activities. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 4 of 9 B. Handling 1.Handle railing materials to prevent abrasion, chipping, marring, soiling and other damage. 2.Damaged equipment shall not be installed. Contractor shall bear responsibility for damage to equipment until final acceptance by Owner. Any installed equipment exhibiting damage shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer, and Contractor shall assume all costs related thereto. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls or associated with concrete stem wall installation / pour. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL TUBING HANDRAIL A. Steel Pipe, seamless, ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, “Standard Weight” railing (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. Diameter and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. Special instructions shall be given the pipe manufacturer to provide “Architectural Handrail Grade Pipe”. 2.2 FITTINGS, BRACKETS, AND PLATES A. Fittings, Brackets, Flanges, and Plates: Cast or formed metal of the same type of material and finish as rails unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel: Galvanized malleable iron, manufactured for the purpose, for anchorage to concrete. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 5 of 9 C. Stainless Steel: 304 or 316 stainless steel to match finish. Stainless steel fittings shall be used in all applications where stainless steel railings are called-for. D. Plates: Steel plate shall be standard steel plate, ASTM A36, weldable quality. 2.3 ANCHORS, FASTENERS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide all required anchors, fasteners, miscellaneous components, and accessories as required for complete and finished railing installations. 1.Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers: ASTM A307, A449, and A563, as applicable. 2.Galvanizing: ASTM A153. B. Expansion Bolts: Where anchors are not included in the concrete construction, provide galvanized expansion type anchors with matching galvanized steel bolts or studs with nuts, of sizes as indicated or required. Provide washers under all bolt heads and nuts. Expansion bolts require approval of Engineer before they may be installed in post-tensioned slabs. Expansion bolts will not be permitted for use on concrete curbs or along the edge of concrete or a concrete joint. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Rails 1.Metal handrails and railings shall be fabricated by firms or shops experienced and skilled in the custom fabrication of architectural metal handrails and railings, and shall meet the quality requirements of NAAMM's Pipe Railing Manual. 2.Bends in rails shall be precision-formed to a smooth continuous radius by skilled workers. Work quality and finish shall be true to detail. Butt joints shall have internal pipe sleeve or dowel. Ends shall be closed with similar materials, welded and ground smooth. 3.Steel welded connections shall be made in accordance with applicable requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code. Welding shall be performed in the shop unless otherwise indicated. Welded joints of handrails and railings shall be ground and dressed smooth to match adjacent surfaces and so that the shape and profile of the item welded is maintained. 4.Metal handrails and railings shall be prefabricated and preassembled in the factory or shop as far as practicable. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. D. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 6 of 9 1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3.Remove flux immediately. 4.At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. E. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 GALVANIZING A. Ferrous metal railings and related items on the exterior of the building, or as otherwise indicated, shall be galvanized, after fabrication, by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A385. Weight of zinc coating shall conform with requirements specified under "Weight of Coating" in ASTM A123. B. Safeguarding against steel embrittlement: conform with applicable requirements of ASTM A143. C. Safeguarding against warpage and distortion of steel members: conform with applicable requirements of ASTM A384. D. Shop galvanized metalwork necessitating field welding which in any manner removes original galvanizing shall be restored by galvanizing repair in accordance with ASTM A780. E. Bolts and screws for attachment of galvanized items shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, or of compatible, non-corrodable material. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 7 of 9 acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails and railings. E. Hot Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A 385. Galvanizing at .60 ounces per square foot (oz/sf) minimum zinc coating, ASTM A123 and ASTM A153 as applicable. Verification Testing: ASTM A90. F. Finish Coating: Polyester powder coating, satin black. 1.Polyester powder coating: Electrostatically applied colored polyester powder coating heat cured to chemically bond finish to metal substrate. 2.Minimum hardness measured in accordance with ASTM D3363: 2H. 3.Direct impact resistance tested in accordance with ASTM D2794: Withstand 160 inch- pounds. 4.Salt spray resistance tested in accordance with ASTM B117: No undercutting, rusting, or blistering after 500 hours in 5 percent salt spray at 95 degrees F and 95 percent relative humidity and after 1000 hours less than [3/16 inch] [5 mm] undercutting. 5.Weatherability tested in accordance with ASTM D822: No film failure and 88 percent gloss retention after 1-year exposure in South Florida with test panels tilted at 45 degrees. 2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only. C. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install metal handrails and railings as indicated and in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings, using workers skilled and experienced in the installation of the type of work involved. Conform with installation requirements of NAAMM's Pipe Railing Manual, as applicable. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 8 of 9 B. Install metal handrails and railings with accessories furnished by the railing fabricator as required for complete and finished railing installations. The rail elements shall be erected to produce a smooth, continuous rail. C. Installation of handrails and railings shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, true and horizontal, perpendicular, or at the required angle, as the case may be, level and square, with angles and edges parallel with related lines of the building or structure. Include all fittings and components, sleeves, hardware, backing plates, and accessories as required for complete and finished handrail installations. D. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Mounting 1.Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 2.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 3.Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 4.Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 5.Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. B. Wall Mounting 1.Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2.Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: a.For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. b.For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. c.For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. C. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. SECTION 02823 SITE METAL RAILINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02823 PAGE 9 of 9 3.3 GALVANIZING REPAIR A. Repair galvanized surfaces which have become damaged from welding, handling, or installation immediately after installation in accordance with ASTM A780. 3.4 CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Clean galvanized railings in accordance with ASTM D2092. B. Prior to site surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, finished work, hardware, hardware accessories, and other such items not to be coated. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items. C. All surfaces of metal handrails and railings shall be cleaned and treated to assure maximum paint adherence, prior to application of the shop prime coat, in accordance with SSPC-SP 1, SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 10, SSPC-SP 11 as applicable for the type of substrate, exposure, and application. D. Ferrous metalwork shall be given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer, or other approved rust-inhibitive metal primer standard with the railing manufacturer. E. After installation, exposed painted surfaces, field welds, and other abraded or damaged primed surfaces shall be prepared as required and touched up with an additional coat of the same primers for ferrous and galvanized surfaces as hereinbefore specified for shop painting. F. Lightly sand and feather out such damaged surfaces so that paint touch-up becomes invisible. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION SECTION 02826 ORNAMENTAL FENCE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02826 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 02826 ORNAMENTAL FENCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1.Furnishing and installing decorative metal fencing of the style, and at the locations, indicated on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A90- Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron or Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy. 3.ASTM A123- Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4.ASTM A153- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5.ASTM A385- Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip). 6.ASTM A428- Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles. 7.ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 8.ASTM C94- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9.ASTM D822 - Tests on Paint and Related Coatings Using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon- Arc Exposure Apparatus. SECTION 02826 ORNAMENTAL FENCE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02826 PAGE 2 of 4 10.ASTM D1794 - Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 11.ASTM D3363 - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 12.ASTM F1083- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 13.ASTM F2408- Standard Specification for Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing the plan layout and spacing of brackets, rails, posts and other components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates, and a schedule of such components. Show in large-scale details any unique fabrications and setting requirements. B. Material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications for color, posts, fittings, hardware, and accessories. C. Manufacturer’s warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver fencing and accessories in packed cartons or other protective packaging. B. Store materials to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion, and other construction activities. 1.6 SAMPLE PANELS A. Contractor shall construct and/or fabricate samples for the following item in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s product literature: B. Fence panel Section: minimum five-(5) foot length. All items shall be complete in place. The quality of workmanship must be approved by Landscape Architect before permanent construction is started. If the original sample is not approved, the Contractor shall provide additional samples as required, at no cost to the Owner, until an approved sample is obtained. The approved sample shall become the standard for the entire job. The samples can be constructed at a location that will become part of the work. 1.Obtain Engineer’s written acceptance of samples before proceeding with the final work. 1.7 WARRANTY SECTION 02826 ORNAMENTAL FENCE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02826 PAGE 3 of 4 A. Provide 5 year manufacturer’s warranty for factory finish against cracking, peeling, and blistering under normal use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The fence system shall conform to Majestic Ornamental Steel design, extended picket bottom rail treatment, 3-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Perimeter Security USA Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. 2.2 GENERAL A. Provide ornamental fence as indicated on the Drawings. B. Material of Construction: Steel. 1.Material for pickets shall be 5/8” square x 18 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.25” x 0.92” x 14 Ga. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.334” o.c. 2.Bar Stock: ASTM A36. 3.Steel tubing: ASTM A653, minimum yield strength of 45, 000 psi. 4.Fence posts shall be a minimum of 2 1/2” square x 16 Ga. 5.Gate Posts shall be a minimum of 2 1/2” square x 16 Ga. 6.Fasteners: Stainless steel, color to match fence. C. Hot Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A 385. Galvanizing at .60 ounces per square foot (oz/sf) minimum zinc coating, ASTM A123 and ASTM A153 as applicable. Verification Testing: ASTM A90. D. Finish Coating: Polyester powder coating, satin black. 1.Polyester powder coating: Electrostatically applied colored polyester powder coating heat cured to chemically bond finish to metal substrate. a.Minimum hardness measured in accordance with ASTM D3363: 2H. b.Direct impact resistance tested in accordance with ASTM D2794: Withstand 160 inch-pounds. c.Salt spray resistance tested in accordance with ASTM B117: No undercutting, rusting, or blistering after 500 hours in 5 percent salt spray at 95 degrees F and 95 percent relative humidity and after 1000 hours less than [3/16 inch] [5 mm] undercutting. SECTION 02826 ORNAMENTAL FENCE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02826 PAGE 4 of 4 d.Weatherability tested in accordance with ASTM D822: No film failure and 88 percent gloss retention after 1 year exposure in South Florida with test panels tilted at 45 degrees. 2.3 CONCRETE A. Ready-mix ASTM C-94 with maximum size of 1-inch. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. B. Pre-packaged concrete mix with maximum aggregate size of 1-inch, ASTM C 387. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate and install all fencing as indicated on the Drawings and in conformance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Install fencing with accessories furnished by the manufacturer as required for a complete and finished installation. All elements shall be installed to produce a uniform continuous fence. C. Install gates at the locations indicated. Verify all swing directions prior to installation. Perform function test for each gate to ensure proper operation of all components. END OF SECTION SECTION 02827 BOLLARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02827 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 02827 - BOLLARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Installation of traffic control bollards B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated and Welded and Seamless. 2.ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3.ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 4.ASTM D1640 - Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film Formation of Organic Coatings at Room Temperature. 5.ASTM D5893 - Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. C. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. D. United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. E. United States General Services Administration, Federal Standards. 1.Federal Standard No. 595 - Colors Used in Government Procurement. SECTION 02827 BOLLARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02827 PAGE 2 of 3 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Bollard installs as a single unit with specified dimensions and is secured in the ground. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s literature, material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications. B. Submit testing data for concrete as required by Section 03 3200 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Supply: Bollard units of all types must be supplied by a single manufacturer having the resources to provide consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Materials shall be wrapped for shipment and storage, delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging. C. Store units to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion, and other construction activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL BOLLARDS A. New single bit cast steel tube as shown on the Drawings, free from surface blemishes and defects where exposed to view in the finished installation. B. Steel Tube: ASTM A53/A53M, dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. C. Painting and Cleaning: After fabrication of units, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and exposed faces of all welded joints dressed smooth. Coat with a standard rust- inhibitive primer. D. Primed (Standard): Apply standard rust inhibitive primer per manufacturer standard application instructions. 2.2 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 3200 - Site-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.3 PRIMER A. Waterborne primer, acrylic or modified acrylic, suitable for use on exterior metal surfaces. B. Drying time. The dry-to-touch time shall be a maximum of one hour, and the dry-to-recoat time shall be a maximum of 4 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1640. SECTION 02827 BOLLARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02827 PAGE 3 of 3 2.4 PAINT A. Waterborne paint, acrylic or modified acrylic, suitable for use on exterior metal surfaces B. Color: FS 13591 (yellow). C. Drying time. The dry-to-touch time shall be a maximum of one hour, and the dry-to-recoat time shall be a maximum of 4 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1640. 2.5 JOINT FILLER A. One-part, cold-applied silicone that cures to a durable, flexible, low modulus silicone rubber joint seal, ASTM D5893. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install bollards at the locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Install bollards level and true to the specific depths and exposures as indicated on the Drawings. C. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain desired installation until concrete has cured. D. Protect newly-installed bollards from damage or movement. 3.2 PAINTING A. Primer: If not factory primed, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. Apply primer at temperatures between 50 °F and 100 °F and a relative humidity no higher than 85 percent. B. Paint: Apply paint of the color selected in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. Apply paint at temperatures between 50 °F and 100 °F and a relative humidity no higher than 85 percent. Protect freshly-painted surfaces from damage. END OF SECTION SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02870 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Metal Benches 2.Table and Chairs 3.Bicycle Racks B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. ASTM International (ASTM). 1.ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron or Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy. 2.ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3.ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. 4.ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 5.ASTM D2967 - Standard Test Method for Corner Coverage of Powder Coating. 6.ASTM D3451 - Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings. 7.ASTM D4217 - Standard Test Method for Gel Time of Thermosetting Coating Powder. 8.ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02870 PAGE 2 of 4 9.ASTM A428 - Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings for all equipment furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall indicate the configuration, dimensions, layout, and spacing of major and minor equipment components such as posts, supports, rails, brackets, fasteners, foundations, anchorage, and a schedule of such equipment components. Show in large-scale details any unique fabrication, assembly, and/or installation requirements. B. Material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications for finish type, color, size, style, posts, fittings, hardware, and accessories. C. Copies of manufacturer-provided installation instructions, operation instructions, and maintenance material for all equipment furnished under this Section. D. Manufacturer’s warranties and associated warranty registration data in Owner’s name. Submit two (2) copies of each warranty to Engineer in the manufacture’s/supplier's standard form or if there is no standard form available, in a form specified by Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1.Transportation carrier shall use appropriate methods to ensure materials are properly packaged, stacked, and restrained during transport. Utilize protective packaging as required. 2.Protect materials during storage against moisture, soiling, staining, and physical damage. 3.Any product or associated component showing manufacturing flaws upon receipt at the Project Site shall be referred to Engineer for determination as to whether it shall be repaired, rejected, or used. 4.Protect railing materials during storage to avoid damage from moisture, abrasion, and other construction activities. B. Handling 1.Handle railing materials to prevent abrasion, chipping, marring, soiling and other damage. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02870 PAGE 3 of 4 2.Damaged equipment shall not be installed. Contractor shall bear responsibility for damage to equipment until final acceptance by Owner. Any installed equipment exhibiting damage shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer, and Contractor shall assume all costs related thereto. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty, as applicable, for all products furnished under this Section. Warranty shall be registered in Owner’s name. B. Bind warranties in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11- inch paper. C. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. D. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of Contractor. E. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PARK BENCH A. Backed metal bench with arm rests, 6 foot length, surface mounted, Model: Bench 169 as manufactured by DuMor, Inc. P.O. Box142, Miffletown, PA 17059 (Web: www.dumor.com) or approved equal. B. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. 2.2 TABLE AND CHAIRS A. Table: 28 inch square, freestanding, 5/16” form solid steel top, 17-inch diameter solid steel base plate, Model Parc Centre table as manufactured by Landscape Forms, 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, MI 49048 (Web: www.landscapeforms.com) 1.Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. B. Chairs: Steel strap, 22-inch depth, armless, stackable chairs, Model: Parc Centre as manufactured by Landscape Forms, 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, MI 49048 (Web: www.landscapeforms.com) 1.Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02870 PAGE 4 of 4 2.3 BICYCLE RACKS A. Series 293, square steel tube, surface mounted as manufactured by DuMor, Inc. P.O. Box142, Miffletown, PA 17059 (Web: www.dumor.com) or approved equal. 1.Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. B. Layout: Where multiple bicycle racks are called for, rack shall be located 30 inches face to face apart and minimum 24 inches from vertical surfaces. 2.4 CONCRETE A. Ready-Mix, ASTM C94; or pre-packaged concrete mix, ASTM C 387. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site and street furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C. Install items per manufacturer’s recommendations and at locations approved by Owner. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. After completing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. B. Protect until acceptance of project. Repair any damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component. END OF SECTION SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 02880 - TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Installation of new signs and sign supports. Removal of existing signs. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings of all work of this Section. Do not order material or begin fabrication until the approval of Engineer has been obtained. Show the size and thickness of all members, types of materials, methods of construction and assembly method and type of surface treatment, complete dimensions, hangers, brackets, anchorage, relationship to surrounding work by other trades, shop finishes, sign designs, layouts, and lettering, and other pertinent details of fabrication and installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. State of Connecticut Department of Transportation (ConnDOT) Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges and Incidental Construction, Form 816, 2004 and any supplements. C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction D. ASTM International (ASTM). ASTM A1 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails. SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 2 of 8 ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. ASTM A499 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from T Rails. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM B449 - Standard Specification for chromates on Aluminum. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ASTM F1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. E. American Association of State High and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). Roadside Design Guide, latest edition. Manual for Signing and Pavement Marking of the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways, latest edition. AASHTO M 268 - Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. F. United States Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA). Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), latest edition. Standard Highway Signs Including Pavement Markings and Standard Alphabets, latest edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 3 of 8 for proper performance of the work in this Section. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and quantity to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store work under these Sections in a manner to prevent cracking, chipping or stress of the components, and to prevent mechanical damage or damage by the elements. B. Materials shall be wrapped for shipment and storage, delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All signs furnished under this Section shall comply with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), latest edition. 2.2 SIGN FACE - SHEET ALUMINUM A. Aluminum sign blanks shall be constructed of sheet aluminum, alloy 6061-T6 or alloy 5052- H38, ASTM B 209. B. Blanks shall be degreased and etched in accordance with the recommendations of the sheeting manufacturer or treated with a light, tightly adherent chromate conversion coating, free of any powdery residue, ranging in color from silvery iridescent to a pale yellow, ASTM B 449, Class 2 (10-35 milligrams/square foot) with 25 milligrams/square foot as the optimum coating. Thickness shall be as specified on the Drawings. C. The following thickness and mounting, unless otherwise specified: Thickness of Sign Face Sheet Aluminum Area of Sign (Square Feet) Mounting ConnDOT Thickness (Inches) Municipal Thickness (Inches) Less than 10 Single Post A .080 Between 10 and 20 Two Posts B .080 SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 4 of 8 Between 6 and 25 Single Post (Top Mounted) C .080 D. The fabrication of aluminum sign blanks including cutting to size and shape and the punching of mounting holes shall be completed prior to metal degreasing and the application of reflective sheeting. Aluminum sign blanks shall be free of buckles, warp, dents, cockles, burrs and defects resulting from fabrication. 2.3 REFLECTIVE SHEETING A. Reflective Sheeting shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 268. Reflective sheeting for sign panel faces shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 268 for Type II and/or III as required by the contract documents. Class 1 or 2 adhesive, and color per the FHWA MUTCD and the AASHTO Manual for Signing and Pavement Marking of the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways. B. Reflective sheeting shall be applied in such a manner that the finished sign will be wrinkle and bubble free. No splices of the reflective sheeting will be permitted on any sign face under 30 square feet in area with one dimension of 4 feet or less and no more than one splice will be permitted on any one sign without the approval of Engineer. 2.4 LEGENDS A. Permanently Applied Legends Permanently applied legends shall be reflective or opaque sheeting applied directly to clean, dust-free background in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer. Heat activated adhesive-coated material shall be applied only by mechanical means. Pressure sensitive, adhesive-coated materials shall be applied only by hand means. Finishes shall be as recommended by and in a manner as specified by the sheeting manufacturer. Legends shall be neatly cut. 2.5 SILK SCREEN PROCESSED A. The legends shall be of the series and size specified in AASHTO “Manual for Signing and Pavement Marking of the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways”, and the dimension and details of the letters with respect to each series shall be as specified in FHWA “Standard Highway Signs Including Pavement Markings and Standard Alphabets”, or as shown on the Drawings. SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 5 of 8 2.6 SIGN SUPPORTS A. Flanged U-Channel Post. Carbon steel, ASTM A 499 Grade 60 and chemical requirements of ASTM A1. ConnDOT Type “A” post: 3.00 pounds/lf. ConnDOT Type “B” post: 4.00 pounds/lf. Retainer spacer strap: Galvanized steel, ASTM A123. Formed and dimensioned as shown on the Drawings. Post assembled in ConnDOT “breakaway” configuration, Type 1, as indicated on the Drawings. Breakaway feature shall conform to ConnDOT and AASHTO “Roadside Design Guide” and have adequate strength to carry the sign at 60 mile per hour wind loadings. B. Tubular Post 2.5-inch steel pipe, 3.12 lb/lf, cold formed and welded, ASTM A1011/A1011M, minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. External surface triple coated per ASTM F1043, Type B & Type D with a minimum of 0.9 ounces of zinc per square foot, a minimum of 15 micrograms of chromate per square inch and high performance polymer top coating with a zinc-rich exterior thickness of not less than 0.3 mils. Internal coating shall be Type B, zinc 0.90 ounces per square foot minimum, or type D, zinc-pigmented, 81% nominal coating with 0.3 mils minimum thickness. Cap: Pressed steel dome, galvanized, ASTM F1043 sized to fit post. 2.7 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Sign fabricator shall design a complete system of fastenings and anchorage devices for the various signs, as required for attachment to the various supporting structures. These may include, but are not limited to, nuts, bolts, clip systems, face screws, epoxy adhesives, etc. Wherever reasonably possible, fastenings and anchorage devices shall be fully concealed and shall be vandal proof. Contractor is responsible to provide safe and secure installations in strict conformance to the governing laws and building code. B. Fully describe proposed fastenings and anchorage devices for each sign type on the shop drawings. C. Bolts: Stainless Steel, Hex head, integral flange, ASTM A354. 5/16 Inch -18 UNC x 1.75 inch, Grade BC for 3.00 pounds/lf U-channel posts. SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 6 of 8 5/16 Inch -18 UNC x 2.00 inch, Grade BD for 4.00 pounds/lf U-channel posts. 5/16 Inch -18 UNC x 3.00 inch, Grade BC with vandal-resistant head for tubular posts. D. Nuts: Stainless Steel, hex head, integral flange, ASTM A563. 5/16 Inch -18 UNC, Grade DH. E. Lockwashers: Stainless steel, split helical spring. 3/8 inch, heavy duty external type. F. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit: ASTM D2729, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80. G. Cold Patch: commercially-available polymer-modified asphalt and stone mixture designed for use at ambient temperatures. H. Concrete: Portland cement concrete, ASTM C94 with a maximum 3/4" aggregate and having a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Signs shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the Drawings. 3.2 REMOVAL OF SIGNS A. Remove signs, including sign, supports and associated appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings or as called for in the Specifications. Post shall be removed from the ground, unless the cutting of posts at ground-level is specifically approved by the Engineer in writing. B. All materials resulting from sign removal shall be removed from the Project Site by Contractor for disposal, reuse, salvage or recycling in accordance with applicable regulations. 3.3 PROTECTION AND TEMPORARY COVERS A. Completed sign panels shall be properly protected and maintained in good condition, free from dirt, scratches, hand marks or other blemishes. The panels shall be shipped in such a manner as to insure their arrival on the job site in an undamaged condition. B. Subsequent to erection, if directed by Engineer, exterior signs may be required to be covered until the actual use thereof is desired. Material used to temporarily cover any sign panel shall SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 7 of 8 effectively conceal the message and be non-injurious to the panel, its finish, or its structural integrity. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Erection of all work under this Section shall be performed by experienced sign erectors. Signs shall be installed true, plumb, and level, located as shown on the Drawings. No field cutting of any sing work will be allowed. Exercise extreme care in all handling and stacking of signs to avoid chipping. Exact location of signs will be determined by Engineer in the field. B. All work shall be rigidly anchored to the supporting construction, as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 3.5 ALUMINUM SIGN PANEL A. Sign panels shall show careful workmanship and present a reasonably plane surface with the message and outlines clear and sharp. Finished sign panels shall be shipped in such manner as to ensure arrival on the Project in undamaged condition, where they shall be properly protected from dirt, scratches, hand- marks and other blemishes until erected and accepted. B. Reflective sheeting shall be applied to properly treated base panels with mechanical equipment in a manner specified for the manufacture of traffic control signs by the sheeting manufacturer. Heat activated adhesive coating sheeting shall be pre-perforated. No splices shall be allowed on sign panels. C. When pressure sensitive adhesive coating reflective sheeting is used all sheeting splices and sign edges shall be sealed with materials recommended by and in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer. Dry heat activated adhesive coated reflective sheeting when applied to aluminum shall be edge sealed as specified by the sheeting manufacturer. 3.6 REFLECTIVE SHEETING A. Reflective sheeting shall be applied to properly treated base panels with mechanical equipment in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer. B. Numerals shall be black-die-cut, pre-spaced, conforming to the details on the Contract Drawings and/or Engineer standards. Numerals shall have a pre-coated, pressure-activated adhesive applied as recommended by the manufacturer of the reflective sheeting or be opaque black permanent inks applied on approved high intensity sheeting. C. Treatment of Aluminum Sign Panels Prior to Application of Reflective Sheeting. SECTION 02880 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02880 PAGE 8 of 8 Vapor degreasing: By total immersion of the panel in a saturated vapor or trichloroethylene. Trademark printing shall be removed with lacquer thinner or controlled alkaline cleaning system. Alkaline degreasing: By total immersion of the panel in a tank containing alkaline solutions, controlled and titrated to the solution manufacturer’s specification. Rinsing: After satisfactory degreasing, the panels shall be thoroughly washed with running water. Drying: The panel shall be thoroughly dried by use of a forced hot air dryer. Metal shall not be handled between cleaning and etching operation and the application of reflective sheeting, except with devices or clean canvas gloves. Metal shall not come in contact with greases, oils, or other contaminants prior to the application of reflective sheeting. 3.7 CLEAN-UP A. Surfaces of sign work shall be cleaned as recommended by the sign manufacturer after installation and left in a condition satisfactory to Engineer. B. All defective work, including that exhibiting cracked, chipped, scratched, abraded, or otherwise damaged finishes, shall be removed and replaced with work conforming to the specified requirements. 3.8 ERECTION OF POSTS A. Install posts as indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise required by ConnDOT or Local Traffic Authority. B. Posts shall be driven a minimum of three (3) feet into firm ground or shall be anchored in concrete as indicated on the Drawings. C. Bottom of all signs shall be the minimum height above existing ground as indicated on the Drawings or as required by ConnDOT or Local Traffic Authority. END OF SECTION SECTION 02881 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02881 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 02881 - ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes equipment for: 1.Basketball Hoop 2.Outdoor Basketballs B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.ASTM A123- Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2.ASTM C94- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings for all equipment furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall indicate the configuration, dimensions, layout, and spacing of major and minor equipment components such as posts, supports, rails, brackets, fasteners, foundations, anchorage, and a schedule of such equipment components. Show in large-scale details any unique fabrication, assembly, and/or installation requirements. B. Material certificates or other data indicating compliance with these Specifications for finish type, color, size, style, posts, fittings, hardware, and accessories. C. Copies of manufacturer-provided installation instructions, operation instructions, and maintenance material for all equipment furnished under this Section. D. Manufacturer’s warranties and associated warranty registration data in Owner’s name. Submit two (2) copies of each warranty to Engineer in the manufacture’s/supplier's standard form or if there is no standard form available, in a form specified by Engineer. SECTION 02881 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02881 PAGE 2 of 3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in packed cartons or other protective packaging. B. Deliver, move, store, or otherwise handle equipment to avoid damage. C. Damaged equipment shall not be installed. Contractor shall bear responsibility for damage to equipment until final acceptance by Owner. Any installed equipment exhibiting damage shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer, and Contractor shall assume all costs related thereto. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty, as applicable, for all products furnished under this Section. Warranty shall be registered in Owner’s name. B. Bind warranties in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. C. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. D. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of Contractor. E. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTDOOR BASKETBALL SYSTEM A. Shall be a fixed system with a 4 inch square direct buried, powder coated steel upright and extension arm as supplied by Jaypro Sports LLC, 976 Hartford Turnpike, Waterford, CT, Ph. 860-447-3001 or approved equal. B. Backboard: 36-inch by 48-inch, official size acrylic board. C. Goal: 18 inches in diameter, minimum diameter of 5/8-inch, solid steel support braces at least 1/2-inch diameter. Net hooks shall be welded. SECTION 02881 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02881 PAGE 3 of 3 D. Finish: Black, powder-coated. E. Netting: Two (2) all-weather net to match 18 inch goal. One (1) net to be installed by contractor prior to completion and one (1) to be turned over to school for future replacement. 1.Color: White F. Padding: Pole and backboard edge padding shall be included. 1.Color: selected from manufacturers standard colors. 2.2 OUTDOOR BASKETBALLS A. Shall be suitable for outdoor use. B. Material: Composite leather cover with recessed/ deep channel design. 1.Color: Natural C. Size: Three (3) 27.5 inch youth and three (3) 29.5 inch regulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 3.2 Install all equipment at the location indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings. Verify proper installation and operation of all equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 1 of 22 SECTION 02920 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Preparation of areas to be seeded including removal of existing vegetation. 2.Preparation and placement of lawn soil. 3.Seeding. 4.Hydroseeding. 5.Native Seed Mixes 6.Erosion-control material(s). B. Related Sections: 1.Section 31 2310 – Earthwork 2.Section 32 9000 - Planting C. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. 1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, Methods: 1.ASTM C136-01 - Standard Test Method For Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates (Dry Sieving). 2.ASTM D422-63 - Standard Test Method For Particle-Size Analysis of Soils (Hy- drometer). 3.ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods For Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (Standard Proctor). 4.ASTM D1556-00 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 5.ASTM D2167-94 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 6.ASTM D2922-01 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 2 of 22 7.ASTM D4972-01 - Standard Test Method For pH of Soils using distilled water. 8.ASTM F1647-02a - Standard Test Method For Organic Matter Content of Putting Green and Sports Turf Zone Mixes. B. United States Compost Council 1.Standard Test Methods for the Examination of Compost and Composting (TMECC). C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) D. American Society of Agronomy 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. B. Planting Soils: Planting Soils are composed of a blend of three base components: base loam, organic material and sand. The quality of the blend depends on the quality of the original components. Contractor is responsible for locating and obtaining approval of sources for base loam, organic material and sand that meet the Specification requirements. Contractor is then responsible for mixing the components. Approximate mixing ratios are provided, but may require adjustment, depending on the final materials and with the approval of the Landscape Architect or their representative, in order to meet Specification requirements for each blend. C. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. 1.All use of pesticides shall conform with the Connecticut DEEP requirements. F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. H. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 3 of 22 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. 2.Fertilizers 3.Ground Limestone B. Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1.Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Horticultural Soil Test Reports: Submit reports for each of the planting soil components listed, existing topsoil to remain in place, stripped and stockpiled existing topsoil. Only after approval of initial test reports, submit reports for blended mixes for approval. 1.Testing for base loam, lawn soil, and on-site existing or stripped and stockpiled topsoil. 2.Inform testing agency soil test is for lawn applications. 3.Mechanical and chemical analysis shall be conducted by a public extension service agency or a certified private testing laboratory in accordance with the current “standards” of the American Society of Agronomy. 4.Gradation tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by ignition. 5.Test for agricultural suitability analysis including: a.particle size and characteristics b.soil pH by water pH and buffer (smp) pH tests. c.percentage organic content d.nitrate nitrogen e.ammonium nitrogen f.phosphorus SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 4 of 22 g.potassium h.calcium i.aluminum j.magnesium k.manganese l.Micronutrients m.Toxins including but not limited to lead, cadmium, arsenic and mercury. 6.Test results: test data and recommendations for soil amendments including but not limited to: nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and limestone. State recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. Yd. 7.Testing for Organic Amendment Materials a.Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by ignition. b.Test for agricultural suitability analysis as defined in Part 2 – Organic Amendment Material (Compost). F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1.Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2.Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4.Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a.Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation maintenance specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 5 of 22 b.Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP. c.Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL. 5.Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 1.The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site at least one week prior to turf installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Planting Soils shall not be handled, hauled, or placed when wet, during or immediately after a heavy rainfall, or frozen. Soil should be handled only when the moisture content is less than or equal to the optimum water content as determined for the Standard Proctor test. B. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. C. Bulk Materials: 1.Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2.Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3.Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Contractor responsible for all maintenance until Substantial Completion. 1.Spring Planting: April 1 - June 15. 2.Fall Planting: August 15 - October 1. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 6 of 22 B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1.Seeded Turf: 90 days from date of planting completion. a.When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. B. Initial Conservation Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable growth is established (determined by Landscape Architect and Construction Manager), but for not less than 90 days from date of planting completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE LOAM A. Base Loam shall be imported and shall be free of subsoil, large stones, earth clods, sticks, stumps, clay lumps, roots or other objectionable, extraneous matter or debris. Base Loam shall be from a natural source without admixture of compost, sand or any other extraneous material. Base Loam shall also be free of quack-grass rhizomes, Agropyron Repens, and the nut-like tubers of nutgrass, Cyperus Esculentus, and all other primary noxious weeds. Base Loam shall not be delivered or mixed while in a frozen or muddy condition. Base Loam for mixing shall conform to the following grain size distribution for material passing the #10 sieve: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 ___ 100 No. 18 85 100 No. 35 70 95 No. 60 50 85 SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 7 of 22 No. 140 36 63 No. 270 32 42 .002mm 3 8 B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 20% by weight of the total sample. C. The organic content shall be between 3.0 and 8.0 percent. D. The pH shall be 7.5 or less. E. Base Loam shall consist of fertile, friable, natural loam capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Loam shall be without admixture of subsoil, and refuse, resulting in a homogeneous material free of stones greater than ½" in the longest dimension, be free of lumps, plants, glass, roots, sticks, excessive stone content, debris, and extraneous matter as determined by the Landscape Architect. F. It shall be uncontaminated by salt water, foreign matter and substances harmful to plant growth. The maximum soluble salt index shall be 100. Base Loam shall not have levels of aluminum great than 200 parts per million. G. If limestone is required to amend the screened loam to bring it within a pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 no more than 200 pounds of limestone per 1,000 square feet of loam, incorporated into the soil, or 50 pounds of limestone per 1,000 square feet of loam, surface application, within a single season. H. The Engineer will reject any material delivered to the site that, after post-delivery testing, does not meet these specifications. If the delivered screened loam does not meet the specifications stated in this document the delivered screened loam will be removed by the contractor at the contractors expense and at the time of rejection. I. The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Owner two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. J. Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable base loam or lawn soil, which has been stockpiled on the site, may be used provided it can be made to comply with these Specifications herein for base loam or lawn soil. 2.2 ORGANIC AMENDMENT MATERIAL (COMPOST) SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 8 of 22 A. Organic Material (Compost) for amending planting medium: stable, humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition of organic residues consisting of Leaf or Yard Waste Compost which shall have been composted for a minimum of one year (12 months). Compost shall be free of debris such as plastics, metal, concrete or other debris and stones larger than 1/2", larger branches and roots and wood chips over 1/2" in length or diameter. Compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. 1.The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 12:1 to 25:1. 2.Stability shall be assessed by the Solvita procedure. Protocols are specified by the Solvita manual (version 4.0). The compost must achieve a maturity index of 6 or more as measured by the Solvita scale. 3.Pathogens/Metals/Vector Attraction reduction shall meet all State of Connecticut requirements for applications to soils with human activity. 4.Organic Content: at least 20 percent (dry weight). One hundred percent of the material shall pass a 1/2-inch (or smaller) screen. Debris such as metal, glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. Organic content shall be determined by weight loss on ignition or H2O2 for particles passing a Number 10 sieve. 5.pH: between 6.5 to 7.2. 6.Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to five soil to water ratio extract shall not exceed 2.0 mmhos/cm (dS/m). 7.Compost: screened to 1/2 inch maximum particle size and shall contain no more that 3 percent material finer than 0.002mm as determined by hydrometer test on ashed material. 8.Nutrient content: determined Soil Testing Laboratory and utilized to evaluate soil required amendments for the mixed soils. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Aluminum, Magnesium, Chromium, Iron, Manganese, Lead, Soluble Salts, Cation Exchange Capacity, soil reaction (pH), buffer pH, and micronutrients. 2.3 SAND A. Sand as Amendment for Soil Mediums and for Drainage. 1.Sand shall be uniformly graded medium to coarse sand consisting of clean, inert, rounded grains of quartz or other durable rock and free from loam or clay, surface coatings, mica, other deleterious materials with the following gradation. Calcitic sand is not permitted. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 9 of 22 U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 100 -- No. 18 65 90 No. 35 35 60 No. 60 15 30 No. 140 0 8 No. 270 0 3 .002mm 0 0.5 B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15% by weight of the total sample. C. The ratio of the particle size for 70% passing (D70) to the particle size for 20% passing (D20) shall be 3.0 or less. (D70/D20 <3.0) D. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the sand shall be not less than 30 inches per hour, according to ASTM D5856-95 (2000), when compacted to a minimum of 90% Standard Proctor, ASTM 698. E. The pH shall be 7.5 or less. 2.4 LAWN SOIL A. Base Loam, Sand and Compost, each as specified above, shall be combined in an approximate mix ratio of three parts by volume Sand to two parts by volume Base Loam to one and one half parts by volume Compost (3S:2L:1.5C) to create a uniform blend which meets the following requirements: 1.Gradation for Material Passing the Number 10 Sieve: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 100 -- SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 10 of 22 No. 18 70 95 No. 35 46 74 No. 60 30 56 No. 140 17 26 No. 270 14 18 .002mm 1 2 B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15% by weight of the total sample. C. Ratio of the particle size for 80% passing (D80) to the particle size for 30% passing (D30) shall be 5.0 or less. (D80/D30 <5.0) D. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the mix: not less than 3 inches per hour accord-ing to ASTM D5856-95 (2000) when compacted to a minimum of 86% Standard Proc-tor, ASTM 698. E. Organic content: between 4.0 and 5.0 percent by weight. F. The pH of the mix shall be between 6.5 and 7.2. 2.5 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows: C. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1.Seed Mix. Grass Species Percent Turf Type Tall Fescue 40% Fine Fescue 20% SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 11 of 22 Kentucky Bluegrass 20% Perennial Ryegrass 20% 2.6 CONSERVATION SEED MIX A. Conservation Mix: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure live seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed. 1.Species List: Virginia Wild Rye, Indiangrass, Big Bluestem, Partridge Pea, Deer Tongue, Switch Grass, Ox Eye Sunflowwer, Autumn Bentgrass, New England Aster, Blue Vervain, Upland Bentgrass, Common Milkweed, Flat Topped Aster, Purple Joe Pye Weed, Early Goldenrod, Golden Alexanders, Spotted Joe Pye Weed, New York Ironweed, Boneset, Soft Rush, Blue False Indigo, Great Blue Lobelia B. Seeding Rate: 20 lb per acre, or ½ lb per 1,000 sq. ft. C. A bulking agent (such as kitty litter) may be used to create a mix of 10 lb per 1,000 sq. ft. D. Cover Crop: Provide 30 lb per acre of an annual, winter kill type cover crop and spread over the area designated for conservation mix. 1.Grain Oats; Jan1.-Aug. 1 2.Grain Rye; Aug. 1- Jan. 1 2.7 WILDFLOWER MIX A. Wildflower Mix: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure live seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed. 1.Species List: Tall White Beardtongue, PA Ecotype (Penstemon digitalis), Purple Coneflower (Echinacea purpurea), Partridge Pea (Chamaecrista fasciculate), Lanceleaf Coreopsis (Coreopsis lanceolate), Ohio Spiderwort (Tradescantia ohiensis), Oxeye Sunflower (Heliopsis helianthoides), Marsh Blazing Star (Liatris spicata), Blackeyed Susan (Rudbeckia hirta), Butterfly Milkweed (Asclepias tuberosa), New England Aster (Aster novae-angliae), Smooth Blue Aster (Aster laevis), Browneyed Susan (Rudbeckia triloba), wild Bergomot (Monarda fistulosa), Blue False Indigo (Baptisa australis), Maryland Senna ( Senna marilandica), Early Goldenrod (Solidago juncea), Hoary Mountainmint (Pycnanthemum incanum) B. Seeding Rate: 6-10 pounds per acre. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 12 of 22 C. A bulking agent (such as kitty litter) may be used to create a mix of 10 lb per 1,000 sq. ft. D. Cover Crop: Provide 20 lb per acre of an annual, winter kill type cover crop and spread over the area designated for wildflower mix. 1.Grain Oats; Jan1.-Aug. 1 2.Grain Rye; Aug. 1- Jan. 1 2.8 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1.Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2.Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 3.Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone or calcitic limestone depending on recommendation from soil analysis. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.9 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Amendments, fertilizers, and conditioners shall be recommended in the Horticultural Soil Test Reports. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 13 of 22 B. Organic fertilizers are derived from several sources. Bonemeal in first paragraph below is organic and primarily phosphorous, has an alkaline reaction, and is nonburning. Other organic fertilizers include blood meal, cottonseed meal, seaweed meal, soybean meal, alfalfa meal, and blends of these materials. C. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. D. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. 2.10 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of <2 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1.Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2.Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source- separated or compostable mixed solid waste. C. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant- growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. D. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors. 2.11 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.12 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 14 of 22 A. To be used on all slopes 4:1 or greater. B. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. C. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. D. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, non-biodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 3-inch minimum nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Invisible Structures, Inc.; Slopetame 2. b.Presto Products Company, a business of Alcoa; Geoweb. c.Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb. 2.13 WATER A. Water: furnished by Contractor, unless otherwise specified, and suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Hose and other watering equipment furnished by Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1.Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2.Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3.Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4.Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 15 of 22 C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1.Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2.Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1.Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf in areas called for on the drawings. Do not mix into surface soil. 2.Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to test reports and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3.Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 4.Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 5.Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. 3.3 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOILS A. Correct deficiencies in soil as directed by soil test results. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into planting mixture to ensure even distribution. 3.4 DECOMPACTION OF LAWN AREAS A. All subgrade areas to receive planting soils, shall be loosened to a minimum depth of three inches utilizing the bucket of an excavator or approved equivalent equipment. B. After the soils have been loosened, Lawn Soils may be spread by using a wide-track bulldozer size D-5 or smaller or may be dumped and spread with the bucket of a backhoe from the edge of the loosened area. No rubber-tired equipment or heavy equipment except for a small bulldozer shall pass over the subsoils (subgrade) after they have been loosened. If Contractor plans to utilize such areas for use of heavy equipment, this work should be carried out prior to SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 16 of 22 beginning the process of loosening soils or filling in that area, or it will have to be re-scarified and meet this specification requirement. 3.5 PLACEMENT OF LAWN SOIL A. After approval of subgrade, place and spread lawn soil in lifts not greater than twelve inches and compact with a minimum of three passes of the tracks of a bulldozer to a density between 83 and 86 percent Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. B. Place and spread planting medium to a depth greater than required such that after settlement, finished grade conforming to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings. Ensure proper drainage in an uninterrupted pattern free of hollows and pockets. C. Remove stiff clods, lumps, brush, roots, stumps, litter and other foreign material and stones over one inch in diameter and dispose of legally off site. D. Smoothly round-off all top and toe of slopes. Reinstall erosion control devices and protective fencing as required. E. Determine the bulk density of the topsoil prior to approval of finish grade, using an approximate method outlined in C.A. Black (ed) Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 1, American Society of Agronomy, 1965. Final bulk density of the topsoil shall have a mean value of approximately 1.35 g cm-3 (85 lbs. per cu. ft) taken from 5 samples from each field with no value exceeding 1.40 g cm-3 (88 lbs. per cu. ft.). 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and that no further earthwork is required to bring the subgrade to proper elevations. Subgrade layer elevations shall slope parallel to the finished grade as shown on the Contract Documents. Provide a written report to the Owner's Representative and the Owner’s Representative that the subgrade has been adjusted to the required elevations to provide a uniform thickness of planting media across the area. Perform no work of placing and spreading soil until elevations have been confirmed and written report has been accepted by the Owner's Representative. B. As provided in Part 1.7 – Project Conditions, No Base Materials or Soil Medium and no subgrade materials shall be handled, planted, or seeded in any way if it is in a wet or frozen condition. A moist Soil Medium is desirable for planting. 3.7 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. For spring seeding provide sidurn for pre-emergence crabgrass control. Repeat applications as needed and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 17 of 22 D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect work of this section until Final Acceptance. B. Select equipment and otherwise phase the installation of the Soil Medium to ensure that wheeled equipment does not travel over prepared subsoil, placed fills or already installed soil. Movement of tracked equipment over said soils will be reviewed and considered for approval by the Owner’s Representative. If it is determined by the Owner's Representative that wheeled equipment must travel over already installed soil, provide a written description of sequencing of work that ensures that compacted soil is loosened and un-compacted as the work progresses or place one-inch thick steel plate ballast (or equivalent ballast approved by the Owner’s Representative) over the length and width of any travel way to cover Soil Medium to protect it from compaction. C. Disturbed areas outside the limit of work shall be protected as required, graded smooth and spread with Soil Medium to meet finished grades. D. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. E. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting. F. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. 3.9 LAWN SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1.Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2.Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion-control blankets and 1:6 with erosion-control fiber mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 18 of 22 E. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1.Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. 2.Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft.. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth. 3.10 PREPARATION FOR NATIVE SEED MIXES A. All invasive or undesirable vegetation must be fully controlled prior to planting. Typical control strategies included repeated tilling, smothering with black plastic of herbicides. B. If the site was previously vegetated and an herbicide was applied, allow the appropriate interval for the residues of the herbicides to break down prior to planting. Refer to the specific herbicide manufacturer’s instructions. 1.If using the tillage method, disc the site every two to four weeks for a one to two-month period. 2.Black plastic may be laid across tilled or untilled soil and anchored at the edges by burying in soil. This method is most effective during the growing season with a fall or spring planting the following year. 3.Herbicide treatment should occur when plants are actively growing. Spraying should begin when growth is approximately 6 inches high. One to two weeks later, a followup application may b made to adrees skips or persistent species. 3.11 NATIVE SEED MIX SEEDING A. Seeding shall begin immediately upon completion of finish grading and before invasive weeds emerge. B. Sow seed with broadcast spreader, by hand, drill or hydroseeding. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Limit use of mulch in the hydroseed mix. C. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. D. Sow seed at a total rate use the seed mix being used. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 19 of 22 E. Brush seed into top 1/16 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. F. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather and erosion using straw mulch or straw coconut mats. Mulch should be spares in order to allow sunlight to reach the ground. G. Fall or Dormant Seeding: Increase seeding rate to per suppliers recomendations. Mulch with straw or straw coconut mats to protect seed and soil and retain soil moisture. H. Spring Seeding: Apply seed at the specified rate when soil temperatures are above 55 degrees F. I. Work seed into the top ¼”-1/2” by hand or use of seed drill or cultipacker to ensure good seed to soil contact. J. Apply cover crop of the type and rate in Part 2 of this specification. K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until vegetation is established. 3.12 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1.Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. 2.Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. 3.Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry coat at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch (hydromulching) at a rate of 1000 lb/acre. 3.13 TURF RENOVATION A. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1.Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2.Install new planting soil as required. B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 20 of 22 D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. E. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides. F. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. G. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. H. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. I. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new turf. J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established. 3.14 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1.Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2.In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3.Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. The contractor shall provide all irrigation equipment and water as necessary to irrigate the seeded areas daily with ¼ acre inch of water per day using 3 sets to keep the surface moist and to maintain soil moisture at or near field capacity so that the seedbed does not dry out and adequate rooting takes place. The amount of water per dy and the number of sets may be adjusted at the request of the Owner. The irrigation schedule shall further be adjusted after the seedling plants and sod are rooted. The quantity of water used per day shall be recorded and reported daily to the Construction Manager for the first three week from seeding and weekly thereafter. C. Mow turf at 5 day intervals commencing as soon as the seedlings in the seeded areas reach 2 inches in height. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 21 of 22 mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1.Mow bentgrass to a height of 1/2 inch or less. 2.Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch. 3.Mow carpetgrass perennial ryegrass to a height of 1 to 2 inches. 4.Mow Kentucky bluegrass annual ryegrass chewings red fescue to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches. 5.Mow turf-type tall fescue to a height of 2 to 3 inches. D. Turf Post Fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1.Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area. 3.15 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1.Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds, stones, debris, and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 2 by 2 inches. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.16 NATIVE SEED MIX MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish conservation mix by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish a healthy, viable meadow. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1.Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and meadow damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2.In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3.Apply treatments as required to keep meadow and soil free invasive plant species. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and meadow-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep meadow uniformly moist. SECTION 02920 TURF AND GRASSES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02920 PAGE 22 of 22 1.Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2.Water conservation mix area with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1/2 inch per week for six weeks after planting unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. First Growing Season Maintenance: Whenever overall vegetation reaches a height of 18”-24”, use brush hog mower or string trimmer to trim vegetation to a height of 8”. Do not use a lawn mower. 1.Mowing shall cease by mid-September. 2.Problem weeds should be hand pulled or spot sprayed with an approved herbicide. D. Second & Subsequent Growing Season Maintenance: Prior to new spring growth reaching a height of 2”, cut any standing material from the previous year to approximately 2”. 1.Problem weeds should be hand pulled or spot-sprayed. 2.If heavy infestation of weeds occurs in the second growing season, cut vegetation to a height of 8”. Cutting shall cease by mid-September. 3.17 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.18 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. On a daily basis. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 1 of 27 SECTION 02930 – PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Includes: 1.Preparation and placement of planting soil. 2.Plants. 3.Tree stabilization. B. Related Sections: 1.Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2.Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 3.Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 4.Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials. 5.Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters. 1.1 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, Methods: 1.ASTM C136-01 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates (Dry Sieving). 2.ASTM D422-63 - Standard Test Method For Particle-Size Analysis of Soils (Hy- drometer). 3.ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods For Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (Standard Proctor). SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 2 of 27 4.ASTM D1556-00 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 5.ASTM D2167-94 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 6.ASTM D2922-01 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 7.ASTM D4972-01 - Standard Test Method For pH of Soils using distilled water. 8.ASTM F1647-02a - Standard Test Method For Organic Matter Content of Putting Green and Sports Turf Zone Mixes. B. United States Compost Council 1.Standard Test Methods for the Examination of Compost and Composting (TMECC). C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI Z60.1, American Standards for Nursery Stock, latest edition. D. American Society of Agronomy 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. B. Planting Soils: Planting Soils are composed of a blend of three base components: base loam, organic material and sand. The quality of the blend depends on the quality of the original components. Contractor is responsible for locating and obtaining approval of sources for base loam, organic material and sand that meet the Specification requirements. Contractor is then responsible for mixing the components. Approximate mixing ratios are provided, but may require adjustment, depending on the final materials and with the approval of the Landscape Architect or their representative, in order to meet Specification requirements for each blend. C. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. D. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. E. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 3 of 27 F. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. G. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. H. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. I. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in- ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. J. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. K. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. L. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. M. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. N. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. O. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. P. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. Q. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. R. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 4 of 27 1.Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2.Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. a.Contractor shall follow all Connecticut DEEP regulations for pesticide and herbicide applications. 3.Fertilizers 4.Ground Limestone 5.Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in 3- by 5-inch print format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. A. Horticultural Soil Test Reports: Submit reports for each of the planting soil components listed, existing topsoil to remain in place, stripped and stockpiled existing topsoil. Only after approval of initial test reports, submit reports for blended mixes for approval. 1.Testing for base loam, lawn soil, and on-site existing or stripped and stockpiled topsoil. 2.Inform testing agency soil test is for lawn applications. 3.Mechanical and chemical analysis shall be conducted by a public extension service agency or a certified private testing laboratory in accordance with the current “standards” of the American Society of Agronomy. 4.Gradation tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by ignition. 5.Test for agricultural suitability analysis including: a.particle size and characteristics b.soil pH by water pH and buffer (smp) pH tests. c.percentage organic content d.nitrate nitrogen e.ammonium nitrogen f.phosphorus SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 5 of 27 g.potassium h.calcium i.aluminum j.magnesium k.manganese l.Micronutrients m.Toxins including but not limited to lead, cadmium, arsenic and mercury. 6.Test results: test data and recommendations for soil amendments including but not limited to: nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and limestone. State recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. Yd. 7.Testing for Organic Amendment Materials a.Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by ignition. b.Test for agricultural suitability analysis as defined in Article 2.02 – Organic Amendment Materials (Compost). B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1.Organic Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 2.Mineral Mulch: 2 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material. 3.Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 4.Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 6 of 27 1.Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2.Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1.Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2.Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4.Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a.Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation maintenance specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. b.Certified Landscape Technician - Interior, designated CLT-Interior. c.Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated COLP. 5.Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 1.The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 7 of 27 1.Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. D. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1.Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2.Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. E. Plant Material Observation: Landscape Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1.Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Planting Soils shall not be handled, hauled, or placed when wet, during or immediately after a heavy rainfall, or frozen. Soil should be handled only when the moisture content is less than or equal to the optimum water content as determined for the Standard Proctor test. B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. C. Bulk Materials: 1.Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2.Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3.Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. D. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 8 of 27 E. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. F. Handle planting stock by root ball. G. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting. H. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried-out plants. 2.Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3.Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4.Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility. 2.Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Construction Manager's written permission. C. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1.Spring: a.Deciduous materials: April 1 to June 15 SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 9 of 27 b.Evergreen Materials: April 1 to June 15 2.Fall: a.Deciduous materials: September 1 - October 15 b.Evergreen Materials: September 1 - October 15 D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1.When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b.Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c.Faulty performance of tree stabilization. d.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a.Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b.Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c.Annuals: Three months. 3.Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a.Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 10 of 27 b.Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c.A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d.Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of Landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until substantial completion but for not less than maintenance period below if substantial complete comes earlier. 1.Maintenance Period: Three months from date of planting completion. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until substantial completion but for not less than maintenance period below if substantial completion comes earlier. 1.Maintenance Period: Three months from date of planting completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1.Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. 2.Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 11 of 27 B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper in each planting bed with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. F. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well- established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. 2.2 SPADE HARVESTED AND TRANSPLANTED PLANTS A. Spade Harvested and Transplanted Plants shall meet all the requirements for field grown trees. Root ball diameters shall be of similar size as the ANSI Z60.1 requirement for Balled and Burlapped plants. B. Trees shall be harvested prior to leafing out (bud break) in the spring or during the fall planting period except for plants know to be considered as fall planting hazards. Plants that are fall planting hazards shall only be harvested prior to leafing out in the spring. C. Trees shall be moved and planted within 48 hours of the initial harvesting and shall remain in the spade machine until planted. 2.3 BASE LOAM A. Screen Loam shall be imported and shall be free of subsoil, large stones, earth clods, sticks, stumps, clay lumps, roots or other objectionable, extraneous matter or debris. Base Loam shall be from a natural source without admixture of compost, sand or any other extraneous material. Base Loam shall also be free of quack-grass rhizomes, Agropyron Repens, and the nut-like tubers of nutgrass, Cyperus Esculentus, and all other primary noxious weeds. Base Loam shall not be delivered or mixed while in a frozen or muddy condition. Base Loam for mixing shall conform to the following grain size distribution for material passing the #10 sieve: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 ___ 100 SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 12 of 27 No. 18 85 100 No. 35 70 95 No. 60 50 85 No. 140 36 63 No. 270 32 42 .002mm 3 8 B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 20% by weight of the total sample. C. The organic content shall be between 3.0 and 8.0 percent. D. The pH shall be 7.5 or less. E. Base Loam shall consist of fertile, friable, natural loam capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Loam shall be without admixture of subsoil, and refuse, resulting in a homogeneous material free of stones greater than ½" in the longest dimension, be free of lumps, plants, glass, roots, sticks, excessive stone content, debris, and extraneous matter as determined by the Landscape Architect. F. It shall be uncontaminated by salt water, foreign matter and substances harmful to plant growth. The maximum soluble salt index shall be 100. Base Loam shall not have levels of aluminum great than 200 parts per million. G. If limestone is required to amend the screened loam to bring it within a pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 no more than 200 pounds of limestone per 1,000 square feet of loam, incorporated into the soil, or 50 pounds of limestone per 1,000 square feet of loam, surface application, within a single season. H. The Engineer will reject any material delivered to the site that, after post-delivery testing, does not meet these specifications. If the delivered screened loam does not meet the specifications stated in this document the delivered screened loam will be removed by the contractor at the contractors expense and at the time of rejection. I. The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Owner two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 13 of 27 J. Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable base loam or lawn soil, which has been stockpiled on the site, may be used provided it can be made to comply with these Specifications herein for base loam or lawn soil. 2.4 ORGANIC AMENDMENT MATERIAL (COMPOST) A. Organic Material (Compost) for amending planting medium: stable, humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition of organic residues consisting of Leaf or Yard Waste Compost which shall have been composted for a minimum of one year (12 months). Compost shall be free of debris such as plastics, metal, concrete or other debris and stones larger than 1/2", larger branches and roots and wood chips over 1/2" in length or diameter. Compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. 1.The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 12:1 to 25:1. 2.Stability shall be assessed by the Solvita procedure. Protocols are specified by the Solvita manual (version 4.0). The compost must achieve a maturity index of 6 or more as measured by the Solvita scale. 3.Pathogens/Metals/Vector Attraction reduction shall meet all State of Connecticut requirements for applications to soils with human activity. 4.Organic Content: at least 20 percent (dry weight). One hundred percent of the material shall pass a 1/2-inch (or smaller) screen. Debris such as metal, glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. Organic content shall be determined by weight loss on ignition or H2O2 for particles passing a Number 10 sieve. 5.pH: between 6.5 to 7.2. 6.Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to five soil to water ratio extract shall not exceed 2.0 mmhos/cm (dS/m). 7.Compost: screened to 1/2 inch maximum particle size and shall contain no more that 3 percent material finer than 0.002mm as determined by hydrometer test on ashed material. 8.Nutrient content: determined Soil Testing Laboratory and utilized to evaluate soil required amendments for the mixed soils. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Aluminum, Magnesium, Chromium, Iron, Manganese, Lead, Soluble Salts, Cation Exchange Capacity, soil reaction (pH), buffer pH, and micronutrients. 2.5 SAND A. Sand as Amendment for Soil Mediums and for Drainage. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 14 of 27 1.Sand shall be uniformly graded medium to coarse sand consisting of clean, inert, rounded grains of quartz or other durable rock and free from loam or clay, surface coatings, mica, other deleterious materials with the following gradation. Calcitic sand is not permitted. U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 100 -- No. 18 65 90 No. 35 35 60 No. 60 15 30 No. 140 0 8 No. 270 0 3 .002mm 0 0.5 B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15% by weight of the total sample. C. The ratio of the particle size for 70% passing (D70) to the particle size for 20% passing (D20) shall be 3.0 or less. (D70/D20 <3.0) D. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the sand shall be not less than 30 inches per hour, according to ASTM D5856-95 (2000), when compacted to a minimum of 90% Standard Proctor, ASTM 698. E. The pH shall be 7.5 or less. 2.6 PLANTING SOIL A. Base Loam, Sand and Compost, each as specified above, shall be combined in an approximate mix ratio of one part by volume Sand to one and one half parts by volume Base Loam to one part by volume Compost (1S:1.5L:1C) to create a uniform blend which meets the following requirements. B. Gradation for Material Passing the Number 10 Sieve: SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 15 of 27 U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing Minimum Percent Passing Maximum No. 10 100 -- No. 18 70 95 No. 35 46 74 No. 60 30 56 No. 140 17 26 No. 270 14 18 .002mm 1 2 1.Maximum size shall be one-inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15% by weight of the total sample. 2.Ratio of the particle size for 80% passing (D80) to the particle size for 30% passing (D30) shall be 8 or less. (D80/D30 <8) 3.Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the mix: not less than 2 inches per hour accord-ing to ASTM D5856-95 (2000) when compacted to a minimum of 84% Standard Proc-tor, ASTM 698. 4.Organic content: between 5.0 and 7.0 percent by weight. 5.The pH of the mix shall be between 6.5 and 7.0. 2.7 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1.Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2.Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 3.Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone or calcitic limestone depending on recommendations from soil analysis. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 16 of 27 B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. G. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. H. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.8 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1.Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2.Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1.Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2.Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory. E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 17 of 27 1.Size: 5-gram tablets. 2.Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. F. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial- grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots. 2.9 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1.Type: Aged double-shredded bark. 2.Size Range: 2 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3.Color: Natural. 4.Depth as called for on the drawings. 2.10 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A. Woven polypropylene fabric, needle punched, 4 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. B. Physical properties: Mechanical Properties Test Method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value Weight ASTM D3776 oz/yd2 4 Grab Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 4632 Pounds 95 Grab Tensile Strength, Elongation at Utlimate ASTM D 4632 Percent (%) 12 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 Pounds 35 Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 psi 240 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 Pounds 55 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gal/min/ft2 15 UV Resistance (at 2500 hours) ASTM D 4355 % strength retained 70 Thickness ASTM D 5199 Mils (mm) 24 C. To be installed in all planting beds and in tree rings between soil and mulch. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 18 of 27 2.11 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.12 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Stakes and Guys: 1.Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2.Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment. 3.Flexible Ties: Wide rubber of length required to reach stakes or turnbuckles. 4.Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 5.Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 6.Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts. 7.Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate. B. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 19 of 27 D. Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb of vesicular- arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb of ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33 percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert material. 2.14 WATER A. Water: furnished by Contractor, unless otherwise specified, and suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Hose and other watering equipment furnished by Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1.Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2.Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3.Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4.Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 20 of 27 E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1.If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. A. Unchanged Subgrades: If plants are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1.Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf in areas called for on the drawings. Do not mix into surface soil. 2.Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 18 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to test reports and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3.Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 4.Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 5.Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. 3.1 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOILS A. Correct deficiencies in soil as directed by soil test results. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into planting mixture to ensure even distribution. 3.1 DECOMPACTION OF PLANTING AREAS A. All subgrade areas to receive planting soils, shall be loosened to a minimum depth of eighteen inches utilizing the bucket of an excavator or approved equivalent equipment. B. After the soils have been loosened, Planting Soils may be spread by using a wide-track bulldozer size D-5 or smaller or may be dumped and spread with the bucket of a backhoe from the edge of the loosened area. No rubber-tired equipment or heavy equipment except for a small bulldozer shall pass over the subsoils (subgrade) after they have been loosened. If Contractor plans to utilize such areas for use of heavy equipment, this work should be carried out prior to beginning the process of loosening soils or filling in that area, or it will have to be re-scarified and meet this specification requirement. 3.2 3.1 PLACEMENT OF PLANTING SOIL SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 21 of 27 A. After approval of subgrade, place and spread planting soil in lifts not greater than twelve inches and compact with a minimum of three passes of the tracks of a bulldozer to a density between 83 and 86 percent Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. B. Place and spread planting medium to a depth greater than required such that after settlement, finished grade conforming to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings. Ensure proper drainage in an uninterrupted pattern free of hollows and pockets. C. Remove stiff clods, lumps, brush, roots, stumps, litter and other foreign material and stones over one inch in diameter and dispose of legally off site. D. Smoothly round-off all top and toe of slopes. Reinstall erosion control devices and protective fencing as required. E. Determine the bulk density of the topsoil prior to approval of finish grade, using an approximate method outlined in C.A. Black (ed) Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 1, American Society of Agronomy, 1965. Final bulk density of the topsoil shall have a mean value of approximately 1.35 g cm-3 (85 lbs. per cu. ft) taken from 5 samples from each field with no value exceeding 1.40 g cm-3 (88 lbs. per cu. ft.). 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and that no further earthwork is required to bring the subgrade to proper elevations. Subgrade layer elevations shall slope parallel to the finished grade as shown on the Contract Documents. Provide a written report to the Owner's Representative and the Owner’s Representative that the subgrade has been adjusted to the required elevations to provide a uniform thickness of planting media across the area. Perform no work of placing and spreading soil until elevations have been confirmed and written report has been accepted by the Owner's Representative. B. As provided in Part 1.7 – Project Conditions, No Base Materials or Soil Medium and no subgrade materials shall be handled, planted in any way if it is in a wet or frozen condition. A moist Soil Medium is desirable for planting. 3.2 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 1.Spread planting soil to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. C. Application of Mycorrhizal Fungi: As recommended my manufacturer. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 22 of 27 A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1.Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock. 2.Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3.Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 4.If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 5.Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 6.Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7.Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. 8.If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil. C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1.Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 23 of 27 B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare flush with adjacent finish grades. 1.Use planting soil for backfill. 2.After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3.Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4.Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5.Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare flush with adjacent finish grades. 1.Use planting soil for backfill. 2.Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 3.Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4.Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5.Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. E. Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare flush with adjacent finish grade. 1.Use planting soil for backfill. 2.Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 24 of 27 3.Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. 4.Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. F. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.5 SPADE HARVESTED AND TRANSPLANTED PLANTS A. After installing the tree, loosen the soil along the seam between the root ball and the surrounding soil out to a radius from the root ball edge equal to the diameter of the root ball to a depth of 8 - 10 inches by hand digging to disturb the soil interface. B. Fill any gaps below this level with loose soil. C. After installing the tree, loosen the soil along the seam between the root ball and the surrounding soil out to a radius from the root ball edge equal to the diameter of the root ball to a depth of 8 - 10 inches by hand digging to disturb the soil interface. 3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. 3.7 TREE STABILIZATION A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1.Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension shown on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2.Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 25 of 27 3.Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 4.Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 6 feet in height and more than 2 1/2 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. 1.Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method: a.For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten securely. b.Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. c.Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. d.Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade. e.Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint. 2.Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a.Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least to the dimension shown on Drawings below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. b.Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch into stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. c.Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated. 2.Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Device: Install root-ball stabilization system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 26 of 27 3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.9 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1.Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average thickness, with 24-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 2.Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize SECTION 02930 PLANTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02930 PAGE 27 of 27 the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. 3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground- cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. 3.13 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION SECTION 02950 PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION OF SITE FEATURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02950 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 02950 - PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION OF SITE FEATURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1.Protection of existing improvements. 2.Restoration of existing improvements. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Subcontractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TREE PROTECTION FENCING A. Tree protection shall be as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. Prior to commencing construction activities, Contractor shall identify and delineate those areas or specific improvements that are not to be disturbed. Areas or specific improvements within the Limits of Work/Contract Limits and general work areas which are not to be disturbed shall be clearly marked or fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction operations commence. Contractor’s personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting designated areas, specific improvements, monuments, and markers at the Project Site. B. Prior to commencing construction activities, Contractor shall conduct a “walk-down” of the Project Site with Engineer and/or Owner. The purpose of such “walk-down” is to document pre-construction conditions of items/areas of concern. 1.Contractor shall make note of any damage visible on items/areas of concern, with reference to specific location. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. General 1.All areas or specific improvements, including but not limited to vegetation, utilities, poles, wires, fences, curbings, property-line markers, and other structures, which must be preserved in place without being temporarily or permanently relocated shall be carefully supported and otherwise protected from damage by Contractor. SECTION 02950 PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION OF SITE FEATURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02950 PAGE 2 of 4 2.As excavation approaches underground structures, digging by machinery shall be discontinued and the excavation shall be done by means of hand tools. B. Pavements 1.On paved surfaces to remain, Contractor shall not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other power-operated equipment, or store tools, equipment or materials which may cut or otherwise damage such surfaces. 2.All surfaces, which have been damaged by Contractor's operations, shall be restored to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found immediately prior to the beginning of construction operations. Such restoration shall meet the approval of Engineer. C. Utilities 1.Safeguard and protect from damage any utility to remain in service. Before excavating near any utility, notify the utility owner, coordinate protective work, and comply with the utility owners' requirements. 2.All utility services shall be supported by suitable means so that the services shall not fail when tamping and settling occurs. 3.Where known utilities are encountered, notify Engineer and document location and type of utility before proceeding with work in such area. 4.When uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities are encountered, stop work and notify Engineer. Cooperate with the utility owners in maintaining their utilities in operation prior to resuming work. D. Retaining Structures: Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning or other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utility systems, paving, or other improvements. Contractor assumes responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto. 3.3 REPLACEMENT A. In case of damage, Contractor shall notify the appropriate party so that proper steps may be taken to repair any and all damage done. When the Owner does not wish to make the repairs themselves, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, or, if not promptly done by him, Engineer may have the repairs made at the expense of Contractor. B. Contractor shall patch, repair and/or replace all adjacent materials and surfaces damaged through the prosecution of work at no expense to Owner. All repair and replacement work shall match the existing in-kind. Final acceptance of said work shall be at the sole judgement of Owner. 3.4 RELOCATION A. If certain existing structures are encountered that in the opinion of Engineer require temporary or permanent relocation or removal, Engineer may order in writing that Contractor undertake SECTION 02950 PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION OF SITE FEATURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02950 PAGE 3 of 4 all or part of such work or to assist the Owner in performing such work. For such occurrences, Contractor shall be compensated as applicable, as extra work. 1.In removing existing structures, Contractor shall use care to avoid damage to the material, and Engineer shall include for payment only those new materials, which, in his judgment, are necessary to replace those unavoidably damaged. B. The structures to which the provisions of the preceding two paragraphs shall apply include structures which (1) are not indicated on the drawings or otherwise provided for, (2) encroach upon or are encountered near and substantially parallel to the edge of the excavation, and (3) in the opinion of Engineer will impede progress to such an extent that satisfactory construction cannot proceed until they have been changed in location, removed (to be later restored), or replaced. Contractor shall protect items/areas of concern: 3.5 LAND RESOURCES A. Contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications. Prior to the beginning of any construction, Contractor shall identify any land resources to be preserved within the work area. Except in areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared, Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval. Contractor shall provide effective protection for land and vegetation resources at all times as defined in the following subarticles. B. Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved shall be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other approved techniques. Contractor shall restore any such landscape features damaged or destroyed during construction operations. 1.Trees which are to remain are shown on the Drawings. Unless specifically authorized by Engineer, no construction equipment or materials shall be placed or used within the drip line of trees shown on the drawings to be saved/to remain. No excavation or fill shall be permitted within the drip line of trees to be saved/to remain except as approved by Engineer. 2.No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any tree(s) for anchorage unless specifically authorized by Engineer. Where such special use is permitted, Contractor shall provide effective protection to prevent damage to the tree. 3.6 WIND PROTECTION A. Should high wind warnings be issued by the U.S. Weather Bureau, Contractor shall take every precaution to minimize danger to persons, to the work, and to adjacent properties. 3.7 TREE PROTECTION FENCING A. Install fencing completely around all trees to be protected within the project area as shown on the Drawings or as directed by Engineer. Install fencing before any construction activities commence and maintain in place until final grading and seeding is complete and accepted. SECTION 02950 PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION OF SITE FEATURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 02950 PAGE 4 of 4 B. Contractor shall not place, or stockpile, any construction or excavation materials within the drip line of any trees. Vehicle and construction equipment shall not be parked, nor left running (idling), within the drip line of any tree. C. Any excavation within the drip line of trees to be protected shall be performed by hand, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. D. Where construction equipment must pass within the drip line of trees to remain, Contractor shall install wooden tree protection on the trunk of the tree, as detailed, and as directed by Engineer. E. Where excavation requires the cutting of tree roots, roots shall be cut with sharp cutting tools and reburied as soon as possible. Until roots can be reburied, the exposed roots are to be covered with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. The burlap is to be kept wet until the roots can be reburied. F. Where cutting of tree root system has occurred, Contractor shall water the tree root system to the extent of the tree canopy with at least ½ inch of water within 72 hours of when the damage occurred. G. When less than ½ inch of water has fallen during a 7-day period, Contractor shall water the tree root system to the extent of the tree canopy with at least ½ inch of water. H. Trees damaged by construction activities are to be repaired within 72 hours using current arboricultural standards. Those trees determined by Engineer to be damaged beyond repair shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Con- ditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following Codes, Specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute, ACI, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" ACI 301 latest revision. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, "Manual of Standard Practice" latest edition. B. Concrete Testing Service: Employ at contractor's expense a testing laboratory to perform materials evaluation test and to design concrete mixes. C. Owner: Employ separate testing laboratory to evaluate concrete delivered to and placed at site. D. Certificates: Signed by concrete producer and Contractor, may be submitted in lieu of ma- terial testing when acceptable to Engineer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with installation instructions for proprietary materials including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint materials, hardeners, curing materials and others as requested by Engineer. B. Laboratory Reports: Submit 2 copies of laboratory test or evaluation reports for concrete materials and mix designs. C. Shop Drawings Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and place- ment of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" latest edition, showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, placing plans and wall elevations showing arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Reproduction of the Engineers Contract Drawings are not acceptable for use as shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS: OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Provide form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Welded wire fabric (WWF): ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1 use one brand of cement throughout project. B. Normal weight aggregates: ASTM C33, Provide aggregates from a single source for ex- posed concrete. C. Light-weight aggregates: ASTM C330 D. Water: Potable. E. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. F. Water reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Waterstops: Flat dumbbell or centerbulb type, size to suit joints, of either rubber (CRD C 513) or PVC (CRD C 572). B. Moisture Barrier: Clear 10-mils thick polyethylene. C. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 3.9 "Proportioning on the Basis of Previous Field Experience or Trial Mixtures", Chapter 3 as indicated on drawings. B. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and accepted by Engineer. C. Use air entraining admixture in all concrete, providing not less than 4% nor more than 8% entrained air for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing, and from 2% to 4% for other concrete. D. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride for concrete which is to be placed on metal decking. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 2 of 4 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.6 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready mix concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C94. B. For Job-site mixing use drum type batch machine mixture, mixing not less than 1-1/2 min- utes for one cu. yd. or smaller capacity. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK: A. Construct formwork complying with ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, align- ment, elevation and position. B. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. C. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form release agents or wet forms, as required, re-tighten forms during concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT: A. Comply with CRSI, recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars". B. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. C. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practical, lapping at least one mesh. 3.3 JOINTS: A. Provide construction, isolation, and control joints as indicated or required. Locate con- struction joints so as to not impair strength and appearance of structure. Place isolation and control joints in slabs- on-ground to stabilize differential settlement and random cracking. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. Set and build into work, anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in- place concrete. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions provided by others for locations and setting. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. Comply with ACI 304, placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. Do not begin placement until work of other trades affecting concrete is com- pleted. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 3 of 4 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into forms. C. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placement and curing comply with ACI 318 and other ACI documents referenced therein. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHES: A. Provide a smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces that are to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. Remove fins and projec- tions, patch defective areas with cement grout, and rub smooth. B. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are exposed-to-view or are to be cov- ered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film coating. Consolidate concrete sur- faces by finish troweling, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. 3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. Where possible, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Continue curing by use of moisture-retaining cover or membrane-forming curing compound. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing until forms are removed. Provide protection as required to prevent dam- age to exposed concrete surfaces. 3.8 QUALITY CONTROL: A. Owner's testing laboratory will perform sampling and testing during concrete placement, which may include the following, as directed by Engineer. This testing does not relieve Contractor of responsibility of providing concrete in compliance with specifications. Contractor may perform additional testing as necessary, at no expense to Owner, to en- sure quality of concrete. 1. Sampling: ASTM C 172. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143, one for each set of compressive strength specimens. 3. Air content: ASTM C 173, one for each set of compressive strength specimens. 4. Compressive strength: ASTM C 39, one set for each 50 cu. yds, or fraction thereof of each class of concrete; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and one retained for later testing if required. When the total quantity of given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., strength tests may be waived by Engineer if field experience indicates evidence of satisfactory strength. B. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, Contractor, and concrete producer on same day tests are made. END OF SECTION 03300 OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 4 of 4 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE SECTION 03450 - ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1.Architectural precast concrete window sills. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding required lateral and structural loads. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate each joint and reveals, detail and location of each. Indicate extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners. 1.Comprehensive engineering analysis certified by the qualified professional engineerresponsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precastconcrete. D. Samples: Provide for Architectural review, each type of finish on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches E. Welding certificates. F. Material test reports: For aggregates. G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers: H. Field quality-control test reports. SECTION 03450 PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering and fabricating architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 1.Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plantfor Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units and is designated an APA-certified plant. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." E. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of 2 sample panels, full size of decorative panel and 12” length of watertable for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. E. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117. SECTION 03450 PAGE 2 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by design mix for specific color formulation. 1.For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source to create finish selected by Architect. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1.Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2.Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.3.Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physicalrequirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. 1.Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material thatreacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample. a.Gradation: Uniformly graded. 2.Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect. D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application. B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers. 1.Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an antiseize thread lubricant duringassembly. C. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3. SECTION 03450 PAGE 3 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Reglets: Stainless steel, Type 302 or 304, felt or fiber filled, or with face opening of slots covered. B. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1.Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1.Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117. F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 03450 PAGE 4 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required for anchorage. D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. F. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. 1.Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed ConcreteInstitute Member Plants." I. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement. J. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. K. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product. L. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval. SECTION 03450 PAGE 5 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items. 2.9 FINISHES A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved sample panels and as follows: 1. Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling andrubbing procedures, to match Architect’s sample. B. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by light-broom or manufacturers standard. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1.Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erectionprogresses.2.Unless otherwise indicated, provide for uniform joint widths of 3/8”. C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. D. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. E. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids SECTION 03450 PAGE 6 of 7 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. F. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Remove and Replace, do not repair damaged architectural precast concrete units. No repair of units is allowed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view. B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove markings, dirt, and stains. 1.Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator'srecommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, usingstiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.2.Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposedconcrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 03450 SECTION 03450 PAGE 7 of 7 SECTION 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03541 - Page 1 of 4 SECTION 03541 - GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. SECTION 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03541 - Page 2 of 4 D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. 1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C). 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Basis of Design: Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete. 2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Sound Mat: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: SECTION 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03541 - Page 3 of 4 a. Basis of Design: Maxxon Corporation; Acoustimat II HP. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours. C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. SECTION 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 03541 - Page 4 of 4 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03541 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 1 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Face brick. 2. Building (common) brick. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 2 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 36 inches high by full thickness. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes to match and key with existing. Match existing brick including brick at existing chimney. 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Grade: SW. 2. Type: FBX. 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 5. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m). 6. Size: Match and key into existing. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 3 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar to matcxh historic existing. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. Match existing historic mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. Match existing historic mortar. G. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus 2 side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less. 2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 4 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass- fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 3. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy. 4. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 5 C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 2. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: It is the intent to match historic mixes required to match existing. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch . 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet 3/8 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet ,1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet ,3/8 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch . SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 7 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Pattern for Exposed Masonry: To match and key into existing. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 3.4 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 8 B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength. G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04810 PAGE 9 END OF SECTION 04810 SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 1 of 14 SECTION 04811 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Masonry joint reinforcement. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Embedded flashing. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 7. Masonry-cell insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels. for unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 2 of 14 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 2. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product in this section.. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Joint reinforcement. 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 3 of 14 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 36 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 4 of 14 C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. B. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi 2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated or required.. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 5 of 14 E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. / ASTM C1384. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. I. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 gauge. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 gauge. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units. 7. Product: Series 200 Ladder 2 by Wire-Mold. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 6 of 14 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts. B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch galvanized steel sheet. C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. D. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Lead Coated Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12- oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth). 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 4. Fabricate 5. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass- fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 7 of 14 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing or Copper Sealtite 2000. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: 1. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. C. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use Portland cement-lime, masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For reinforced masonry, use Portland cement-lime, masonry cement or mortar cement mortar. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 8 of 14 D. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. E. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 9 of 14 B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet 3/8 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet 3/8 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond than Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 10 of 14 mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with designated UL Rating. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 11 of 14 D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units. 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches 1. Space reinforcement as indicated on Drawings. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 12 of 14 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide steel lintels at masonry openings as shown on drawings. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 13 of 14 D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material as specified 16 inches o.c. 5. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. SECTION 04811 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES: CMU SECTION 04811 PAGE 14 of 14 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04811 SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 1 of 12 SECTION 04813 – BRICK MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1.Clay brick masonry. 2.Accessories. B. Contractor shall coordinate work between all Contractors, sections, and trades required for the proper completion of the work. C. Contractor is responsible for all health and safety. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference herein to any technical society, organization, group or regulation are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, unless otherwise noted or specified, all work under this Section shall conform to the latest edition as applicable. B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). 1.29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. C. ASTM International (ASTM) 1.ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 3.ASTM A 153/A 153M - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4.ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5.ASTM A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 6.ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). 7.ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 8.ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 9.ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 2 of 12 10.ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 11.ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 12.ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 13.ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 14.ASTM C1324 - Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened Masonry Mortar. 15.ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 16.ASTM E 11 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves. 17.ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. State of Connecticut 1.State Building Code, including all Amendments, Supplements, and Errata. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each product indicated including recommendations for their application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of the following: 1.Not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations in color and texture. 2.Masonry mortar. Include in each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in completed work. 3.Manufacturer's Certificates: Test reports to certify products meet or exceed the requirements specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years' experience. B. Installer Qualifications 1.Masonry Firm: The firm performing the masonry work shall have a minimum of five years' experience on similar projects. The firm shall have completed work similar in material, SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 3 of 12 design, and extent to that indicated for this project and shall demonstrate a record of successful in-service performance. 2.Field Supervision: Retain an experienced full-time supervisor on the project site at all times when masonry restoration is in progress. A single individual shall be responsible for supervising the historic masonry restoration work throughout the duration of the project. 3.Masonry Applicator: Employ craftspeople who are experienced with and specialize in masonry work of the types they will be performing. Only skilled journeyman masons who are familiar and experienced with the materials and methods specified may be used. C. Brick Tests 1.Submit brick tests sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. 2.Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory. 3.Test reports for each type of building and facing brick shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 4.Test reports shall indicate: a.Compressive strength. b.24 hour cold water absorption. c.5-hour boil absorption. d.Saturation coefficient. e.Initial rate of absorption. f. Efflorescence. D. Mock-ups 1.Submit mock-ups of each treatment proposed for use in the work. No masonry or mortar shall be used in the work until the mock-ups and the represented material and workmanship have been approved. Materials shall be submitted and approved prior to the creation of mock-ups. The location for placement, size, and location of mock-ups will be directed by Engineer. 2.Mock-ups shall demonstrate proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and the methods and quality of workmanship to be performed for each type of masonry work called-for. 3.Mock-up or sample panels will be used to review brick and mortar color and serve as the standard of workmanship for the Project. When required, provide a separate panel for each type of brick and mortar specified. Protect panels until the work is completed and accepted by Engineer. SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 4 of 12 4.Prepare mock-ups on existing walls under the same weather conditions expected during the remainder of the work. 5.Mock-up Dimensions: 4 feet long by 3 feet high. 6.Do not proceed with the work until mock-up is approved by Engineer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers. B. Store brick off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause staining or other defects. C. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground water, and from staining or intermixture with earth or other types of materials. D. Protect grout, mortar and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General 1.Masonry, mortar, and epoxy adhesives shall not be placed when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of the finished product. Materials to be used in the work shall be neither produced nor placed during periods of rain or other precipitation. Stop material placements, and protect all in-place material from exposure, during periods of rain or other precipitation. 2.Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Remove immediately grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. B. Cold Weather Protection 1.Preparation a.When ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat not to exceed 120 degrees F until surface is dry to the touch. b.Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2.Products a.When brick suction exceeds 30 grams/min/30 sq. in., sprinkle with heated water: SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 5 of 12 1)When units are above 32 degrees F, heat water above 70 degrees F. 2)When units are below 32 degrees F, heat water above 130 degrees F. b.Do not use wet or frozen brick units. c.Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. d.Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by the use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents. e.Do not add chlorides to mortar. 3.Construction Requirements While Work is Progressing: a.Air temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: 1)Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F. b.Air temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: 1)Heat sand and mixing water to produce temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. 2)Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. c.Air temperatures 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F. 1)Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. 2)Maintain mortar temperatures on boards above freezing. 3)Use approved heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. 4)Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. d.Air temperature 20 degrees F and below: 1)Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. 2)Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. 3)Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F. e.Mean daily air temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 6 of 12 1)Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather- resistive membrane. f.Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: 1)Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs. g.Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: 1)Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. h.Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F and below: 1)Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by utilizing enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other approved methods. C. Hot Weather Protection 1.Phase work during hot weather by completing process on the shady side of the work area or schedule installation of materials during cooler evening hours to prevent premature evaporation of the water from the mortar. 2.When temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with 8 mph wind. a.Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 degrees F and 120 degrees F. 1)Limit spread of mortar bed to 4 feet. Place units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. b.Partially or recently completed walls may be fog sprayed and/or covered with opaque plastic or canvas or both to control moisture evaporation. D. Protection of Work 1.Covering a.Cover partially completed work when work is not in progress. b.Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. c.During erection, cover top of wall with strong non-staining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown. Secure covers in-place. 2.Loading a.Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry columns or wall. SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 7 of 12 b.Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns or walls. 3.Stain Prevention a.Prevent mortar or grout from staining the face of the masonry or other exposed surfaces. Immediately remove all mortar or grout that comes in contact with such surfaces. b.Cover partially completed work when work is not in progress. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. c.Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d.Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. e.Scaffold boards shall be turned on edge when work is not in progress. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLAY BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick 1.Solid Brick: ÅSTM C 216, Grade: SW, Type: FBX 2.Hollow Brick: ÅSTM C 652, Grade: SW, Type: HBX B. Provide to the colors and textures specified. Furnish special units for corners, lintels, bullnosed corners and others as indicated on the Drawings. C. Standard Size: 3-5/8 inch wide x 2-1/4 inch high x 7-5/8 inch long. D. Colors: As selected by Engineer from the range available within the allowance specified. 2.2 MORTAR A. Masonry Mortar: ASTM C270. B. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color to match adjacent existing mortar color. C. For pointing mortar provide sand with rounded edges. D. Colored Mortar Pigment: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. E. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, alkalis and organic matter. SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 8 of 12 2.3 MASONRY ELEMENTS A. Epoxy Anchor Adhesives 1.Use an epoxy-resin grout to bond steel anchors to masonry. The grout shall be a 100 percent solids, moisture insensitive, low creep, structural adhesive. The epoxy shall conform to ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV; Grade and Class selected to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations for the application. B. Unit Ties 1.Corrugated Ties: ASTM A1008, 20 gauge, 1 inch wide x 6-7 inches long, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2. Corrugated ties may not be used for concrete/CMU wall back-up. 2.Two-Piece Anchor: Dovetial or direct-anchor with anchor assembly and triangular 3/16- inch wire tie, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2. 3.Wire Ties, ASTM A951, rectangular, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2. C. Joint Reinforcement 1.ASTM A951, ladder or truss type, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2. D. Flashing 1.Lead: Conforming to GSA HPTP 07656-01 shall be a commercially available product designed for installation in mortar joints. 2.Copper: ASTM B 370, 7 oz. designed for installation in mortar joints. E. Preformed Control and Expansion Joints 1.Premolded Foam: ÅSTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. 2.Neoprene: ÅSTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. 3.Backer Rod: Extruded, Closed Cell Polyethylene. F. Weep Holes 1.Aluminum Weep/Vents. 2.Plastic Weep/Vents. 3.Rope Wicks or Plastic Tubes are not permitted. G. Water Repellents SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 9 of 12 1.Water repellents shall be commercially available products designed to preclude water droplet entry into the masonry walls without affecting the vapor transmission properties of the original material. 2.4 POINT MORTAR MIXES A. General 1.Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel, use known measure. Mix materials in a clean mechanical batch mixer. 2.Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix, which will retain its form when, pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar of desired consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. 3.Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by use of selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Coordinate placement of metal anchors. C. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work as required. Maintain in-place until finished structure provides permanent support. D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 10 of 12 A. Install in accordance with ANSI A41.1 Building Code Requirements for Masonry, ANSI A41.2 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry or equivalent sections of the applicable Code. 1.Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 2.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness. 3.Coursing of Brick Units: Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on Drawings 4.Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 5.Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 6.Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint as indicated on Drawings. 7.Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. B. Tooling and Pointing 1.Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance unless otherwise indicated. 2.Tool exposed joints when "thumb-print" hard. 3.Flush cut all joints not tooled. 4.When pointing, rake mortar joints to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch. Fill solidly with pointing mortar. Tool joints. C. Masonry Flashings 1.Clean surface of masonry from projections that might puncture flashing. 2.Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar. 3.Cover flashing with mortar. 4.Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches. 5.Leave flashing project from face of wall approximately 1/4 inch to form a drip. Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection, if the drip is deemed objectionable by Engineer. D. Weeps SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 11 of 12 1.Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing (id called-for) by placing weeps no more than 24 inches on center horizontally. 2.Keep cavity free from mortar. 3.Install screens. E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide where indicated on the Drawings. 1.Keep clean from all mortar and debris. 2.Install neoprene pre-molded foam pad. 3.Install backer rod. 4.Install sealant. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage. B. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter. C. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar. D. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove excess epoxy and spills from the surface of the masonry. Leave the surface of the masonry in a clean and uncontaminated condition. B. Remove spills on adjacent surfaces and repair surfaces as required. C. Remove all debris, residuals, and materials at the conclusion of the work. D. After mortar has fully hardened thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter using stiff nylon or bristle brushes and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. SECTION 04813 BRICK MASONRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 04813 PAGE 12 of 12 1.Use of metal scrapers or brushes will not be permitted. 2.Use of acid or alkali cleaning agents will not be permitted. 3.7 FINAL INSPECTION A. Following completion of the work, inspect the structure for damage, staining, and other distresses. The patches shall be inspected for cracking, crazing, delamination, unsoundness, staining and other defects. The finish, texture, color and shade, and surface tolerances of the patches shall be inspected to verify that all requirements have been met. Repair surfaces exhibiting defects as directed. B. Defective work shall be repaired or replaced, as directed, using approved procedures. END OF SECTION SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 04920 –MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Repair of existing masonry walls, including Building Walls and Site Retaining Walls. 2. Repairing stone masonry, including replacing whole units. 3. Repointing of existing masonry walls, including Building Walls and Site Retaining Walls. 4. Facebrick units for units requiring replacement. 5. Reinforcement, anchorage and accessories. 6. Masonry cleaning and sealing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide data for: 1. Brick masonry units. 2. Fabricated wire reinforcement. 3. Mortar and grout for masonry restoration. 4. Non-shrink epoxy grout. 5. Masonry cleaning solution material. 6. Masonry sealer. C. Samples for selection and verification: Submit four samples of masonry units to illustrate color, dimensions, texture and extremes of color range for each type. D. Product Data: For each product indicated, product data for products specified in this section. Submit letters from manufacturers certifying that the products supplied to the Project conform to the product data information for the following product: pointing mortar. E. Submit description of: 1. Methods to be used in restoration. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 2 of 9 2. Methods to be used in cleaning. 3. Methods of protecting people and property from harm during cleaning operations. 4. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 5. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi F. Submit exact description of mortar mix and components for each type of mortar. G. Submit cold weather construction procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Restore and clean area or areas designated by Architect to demonstrate techniques and workmanship. Areas shall be no smaller than 4' x 4' and no larger than 10' x 10'. When areas have been approved, they shall become standard(s) of the work. C. Prepare a number of mortar sample panels for Architect’s observation and selection. Architect will describe intended effect before samples are prepared. D. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented successful experience. E. Installer: Company specializing in installing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented successful experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 1.6 ENVIORNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1. Do not restore, repoint or erect masonry when the air temperature is below 45o F. rising or below 55o F. falling, unless work is enclosed and heated. Do not erect masonry when temperature of masonry and masonry units is below freezing. 2. Protect from freezing for at least 48 hours after construction. B. Hot Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 3 of 9 C. Protect work from rain, snow and dirt. Cover top of masonry work when it is not being worked on. D. Removal of old mortar makes the masonry more vulnerable to water entry. Point such joints before the next rain is predicted or before the end of the day, whichever is sooner. If mortar match is difficult, apply new mortar with joints raked for later surface pointing with approved color mortar. 1.7 SEQUENCE OF THE WORK A. In general proceed in the following order: 1. Remove vegetation as specified in this section. 2. Restore masonry as specified in this section and seal joints as specified in Section 07920. 3. Clean masonry as specified in this section. 4. Restore and seal deteriorated areas exposed by cleaning. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades having products interfacing with masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK UNITS A. All brick units to match existing brick in color, shape, and size. B. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. Face brick: Reuse existing brick which is in good condition as judged by Architect. C. Materials specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry and approved as matching existing. D. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 2 2/3 x 3 5/8 x 7 5/8 inches, or as to match existing. E. Special Brick Shape and Size: Shaped to profile indicated; surface texture on sides and ends; match basic brick in size, color, texture, and range. 2.2 STONE MATERIAL A. Stone: Provide natural building stone of variety, physical properties, color, texture, grain, veining, finish, size, and shape to match existing stone. 1. For existing stone that exhibits a range of colors, texture, grain, veining, finishes, sizes, or shapes, provide stone that proportionally matches that range rather than stone that matches an individual color, texture, grain, veining, finish, size, or shape within that range. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 4 of 9 B. Stone Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching stone. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn Restoration Mortars. b. Conproco Corporation; [Mimic] [Matrix]. c. Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45. 2. Use formulation that is vapor- and water permeable (equal to or more than the stone), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than the stone units being repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of stone. 3. Formulate patching compound in colors, textures, and grain to match stone being patched. C. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: 2-part polyester or epoxy-resin stone adhesive with a 15- to 45- minute cure at 70 deg F or 1-part cementitious stone adhesive, as recommended by adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and matching stone color. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Two-Part Polyester or Epoxy-Resin Stone Adhesive: 1) Akemi North America; Akepox 2) Bonstone Materials Corporation; Fast Set 41. 3) Edison Coatings, Inc.; Flexi-Weld 520T. b. One-Part Cementitious Stone Adhesive: 1) Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn Restoration Adhesive. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. For Brick Units: 1. Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 3 after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross ties. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, light color. or gray or both where required for color matching of exposed mortar. Use one brand and type of cement throughout the entire Project. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 5 of 9 B. Pointing mortar: Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification: 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N. 2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N. C. Small joint sealant: PTI “Small Joint Sealant,” clear, available from H.B. Fuller Co, Dayton,Ohio, (Phone: 1-888-423-8553). Use special needle-nose, finger-pump applicators, such as Part No. 30-962, from Plews Division, Stant Corp., Eden Prairie, MN 55344. CT sources: Whitney Supply, South Windsor, CT (860) 291-8177; Kenseal Construction Products, West Haven, CT (203) 932-8177. D. Non-shrink epoxy grout, such as “Mascrete” by Silpro, “Quickrete Vinyl Concrete Patch” by Quickrete. E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. F. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, Standard masonry type. Coarseness, range and color shall match existing exactly. G. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. H. Water: Clean and Potable. I. Bonding Agent: Latex Type. J. Latex Admixture: Waterproof latex admixture equivalent to Laticrete 8510 Mortar Additive or Thoro-Harris “Acryl 60.”. Dilute only according to manufacturer’s instructions. K. Pigments: Non-fading mineral pigments. 2.5 FLASHING A. Copper/Fabric Flashings: 5 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated glass fabric; manufactured by York Manufacturing, Inc. B. Use manufacturer’s recommended line for flashing accessories – adhesives, primers, sealers, and seam tapes, etc. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage Sheet: 1. Enka Barrier, Enka Building Products/Colbond 2. Mortar Net, USA LTD., Mortar Net 3. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat 4. Hydraway 300 by Solutia, Inc SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 6 of 9 B. Weep Tubes: “Drain Only” clear 3/8” acrylic weep tubes with polyester felt air barrier-wicks, outer ends bent downward, by Charger Corp. Hamden, CT. Weep tubes shall be long enough to extend to the inner surface of the outer wythe. C. Neoprene bearing blocks for use under lintels: 3/8” thick, 50 durometer hardness, available from A. H. Harris & Sons, New Britain, CT D. Cleaning products shall be manufactured by Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc., or ProSoCo, Inc., and shall be the products recommended by manufacturer for type of cleaning being done. E. Clear Water Repellant Sealers: Apply to face brick and concrete/stone watertables and caps.: 1. Prosoco, Inc. “Block Guard and Graffiti Control.” 2.7 MIXES A. Mortar: 1. Match existing historic mortar types and color. B. Mortar Mixes: 1. For use below grade and other locations where latex mortar is called for, use ASTM C270, Type M mortar with latex admixture. C. Use pre-mixed sand-lime mortar for all repointing. Use site-mixed sand-lime mortar in other places. For use less than 6” above grade, use ASTM C270, Type M, mortar with latex admixture. Summary of proportions by volume (these are more restrictive than ASTM C270 requirements): 1. Type M mortar: a. 1 part Portland cement. b. No lime. c. Aggregate: 2 ¼ to 3 times volume of cement. d. Color pigment as required to match selected sample. 2. Sand-lime mortar a. No Portland cement. b. 1 part hydrated lime. c. Aggregate: 2 ¼ to 3 times volume of lime. 3. For non-load bearing walls and partitions use ASTM C270, Type N. D. Mortar Mixing 1. Measure materials with a box, not a shovel. Add water or latex as required to make a plastic mix. 2. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 7 of 9 4. Do not use calcium chlorides or anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of the mortar. 5. It water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. E. For pointing mortar, follow manufacturer’s directions. F. Do not use masonry cement unless it is composed of Portland cement and lime. If proposed for use, submit product data for Architect’s approval. Do not use admixtures without Architect’s approval. G. Grout Mixing: 1. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C90. 2. Add color and admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 3. Do not use calcium chlorides or anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of the mortar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR OF MASONRY A. EXAMINATION: 1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work. 2. Verify that items provided by other trades are available for installation. 3. Examine all exterior masonry of building, including recessed areas. Remove vegetation, including residue of old vines, tree roots, and moss. Generally remove extraneous objects from masonry. B. Restore existing masonry to sound, water resistant condition as nearly equal to original condition and appearance as possible by normal methods. C. EXECUTION – Restore masonry as follows: 1. Clean entire building following manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Examine all exterior brick and stone masonry of building. Replace and repoint all areas as needed. If clay masonry units are eroded, cracked badly as judged by Architect, or otherwise unfit for reuse as judged by Architect, remove them, and install new units or reuse units from demolition. 3. If masonry is loose or displaced, remove masonry units and mortar carefully. Reset units in new mortar. Rake joints ½” deep for pointing with pointing mortar. 4. If mortar has eroded to more than 3/16" behind original mortar face, remove surface mortar by saw cutting at least 3/4" deep, and repoint joint tooled concave, or to match existing joint style exactly. Apply pointing mortar in layers no more than 1/4" deep for each layer, and apply successive layers as soon as the former layer is thumbprint hard. 5. Take particular care not to get excess mortar on to the existing brick. Clean it off as work proceeds, do not let it dry on the masonry. 6. If mortar is substantially cracked, soft, or otherwise unsound, remove mortar back to sound material and point as directed in above paragraph. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 8 of 9 D. Repair cracks as follows: 1. If masonry units contain cracks less than 1/8” wide, and if units are essentially sound, seal cracks with small joint sealant, following manufacturer’s instructions. 2. If mortar joints contain cracks less than 1/8” wide, and if units are essentially sound, seal cracks with small joint sealant, following manufacturer’s instructions. 3. If masonry units contain cracks 1/8” wide and wider, and if units are essentially sound, fill cracks with sealant under Section 07920. Architect will confer with Contractor and allow reasonable flexibility in deciding whether to use sealant or small joint sealant. 4. Cover areas adjacent to cracks to be sealed with small joint sealant, using masking tape. Inject sealant into joints. Allow sealant to cure for 24 hours, then tool flush with joints. This material “strings;” do not try to tool it when fresh. If Contractor can inject the sealant neatly without masking tape, tape may be omitted. E. Remove all ferrous objects inserted into masonry that have no present function, and patch holes. Patch holes from previously-removed objects. F. If ornamental masonry is broken, replace missing parts by carefully adding latex mortar to simulate original surface. Architect will confer with Contractor and help to develop methods for repairing broken ornamental masonry. Repaired work shall match existing as seen from the ground. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR CLEANING A. Cover windows, doors, louvers, and other equipment on or near walls to keep cleaning materials from contacting such surfaces. If cleaning materials contact such surfaces, clean them off immediately and repair damage done by cleaning materials. 1. If wind is such that spray bearing cleaning chemicals will blow onto other construction, people, plants, or other objects which may be damaged, do not use spray. If conditions at site are such that work cannot reasonably be accomplished without spraying chemicals on adjacent objects, full enclosure of work area may be required. 2. Note that cleaning materials may be especially harmful to glass. B. Construct barriers and troughs to prevent spray from falling on adjacent surfaces and direct water away from areas where it might cause basement leaking or soak into soil. Do not allow cleaning chemicals or water containing cleaning chemicals to come into contact with plants or soil. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exterior masonry of building. Remove stains, and restore appearance of exterior masonry as nearly as possible to original condition. Avoid streaks, mottling, and differences in appearance. B. Follow manufacturers' instructions for dilution and application. If instructions are not clear, notify Architect. If whitening or streaking of masonry or other damage occurs, immediately cease application of cleaning materials, rinse area thoroughly with water, and notify Architect. SECTION 04920 MASONRY RESTORATION & CLEANING SECTION 04920 PAGE 9 of 9 C. Wash with mild detergent and water, using a vegetable fiber brush to loosen dirt. Rinse with water. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean soiled exposed masonry surfaces with non-acidic cleaning solution. E. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. F. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. G. Remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. H. Finish coat masonry work with clear water repellant sealer. I. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. J. Remove debris daily. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Masonry Cleaning: 100% of exposed masonry. B. Repair and Repointing: Approximately 30% of exposed masonry. See drawings for specific locations. END OF SECTION 04920 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes, details and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC, "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. C. The following related work is specified elsewhere in Division 5. 1. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 2. Metal Decking 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with Provisions of following except as otherwise indicat- ed: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings" Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, including the "Commentary" and Supple- ments thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" Latest Edition, approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Struc- tural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. American Welding Society, AWS, D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". 6. ASTM A 123 "Zinc Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Formed Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips." 7. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association, "Inspection Manual for Hot Dip Galvanized Products". SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 2 of 9 B. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator must have a minimum of 5 years successful experi- ence in the fabrication of structural steel framing components similar, in nature, to those required for this project. In addition, the fabricator shall have a quality control program acceptable to the Engineer. C. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 1. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibil- ity. D. Special Inspection: The Owner will engage the services of a qualified “Special Inspector” for this project. The Special Inspector, as a representative of the Owner, will confirm that the provisions of Section 17 of the Connecticut State Building Code are complied with and will provide and/or supervise inspection and testing requirements, as necessary. E. Steel fabricator shall be subject to Special Inspection requirements of the Building Code for fabrication plants and as defined in Part A and Part B below. Part A Inspection – Verification of Capability and Quality Control: The Special Inspector will confirm that the structural steel fabricating plant has the personnel, organization, knowledge, experience, procedures, equipment, capability, and commitment to produce fabricated structural steel of the required quality of the category of structural steel work involved in the project. The basis of inspection will be the AISC manual “Quality Crite- ria and Inspection Standards”. A structural steel fabricator that is Certified in Category II under the AISC Quality Certi- fication Program may be exempted from Part A. Part B Inspection – Verification of Implementation: The Special Inspector will confirm the implementation of the design by inspecting the fabrication of structural steel load bearing connections, members or assemblies in the shop to ensure conformance with the design plans, approved shop drawings and project specifications. Inspection shall consist of one or more of the following: Observation, interviews, testing, and/or examination of records. F. The Special Inspector will inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connec- tions, perform tests, examine steel for straightness and alignment, fissures, mill scale, and other defects and deformities as described in ASTM A6, examine fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings including member sizes and prepare test reports as required. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test spec- imens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. G. The Contractor shall furnish such facilities and provide such assistance as may be re- quired for carrying out the inspection prescribed herein. He shall notify the inspection agency at least two weeks in advance of the start of any qualification testing or welding. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 3 of 9 H. The Special Inspector will perform his duties, insofar as possible, in such a way that nei- ther fabrication nor erection is unnecessarily delayed or impeded. Field inspection will include examination of erected steel for welding, proper fitting, ten- sioning of bolts, alignment, trueness and plumbness. I. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and labor- atory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Additional tests will be performed at contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of cor- rected work. J. Shop bolted connections will be inspected in accordance with AISC specifications and "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", Latest Edition. K. Shop Welding will be inspected and tested during fabrication of structural steel assem- blies, as follows: 1. Verify welder certification and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and per- formed to correct deficiencies. 2. The inspection agency will test shop welds as follows: All welds: 100% visual All moment connection full penetration welds: 20% (50% if fabricator is not cer- tified by AISC) ultrasonic conforming to ASTM E164. a) Inspection level: If more than 10 percent of the welds are rejected then an additional 20 percent of the welds shall be tested. If 10 percent of these additional welds are found to be rejectable then an additional 20% of all full penetration welds will be tested. If 10 percent of this group is rejected then 100% of the welds will be tested. L. Field bolted connections will be inspected to confirm compliance to Sections 2, 3 and 8 of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Observe calibration procedures for calibration devices used on the project and monitor the installa- tion of bolts to determine that all plies of connected material have been drawn together and that the selected procedure is properly used to tighten all bolts. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections to verify that connection is fully compact- ed. 2. Slip-Critical Connections and Connections Subject to Axial Tension: The installation and tightening of all slip-critical connections and connections subject to axial tension will be observed to assure that the specified procedure was followed to achieve the pretension specified in Table 4, AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". All other slip-critical SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 4 of 9 connections will be tested in conformance to AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". M. Field Welding will be inspected and tested during erection of structural steel as follows: 1. Verify welder certification and conduct inspection and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and per- formed to correct deficiencies. 2. The inspection agency will test field welds as follows: All welds: 100% visual. All moment connection full penetration welds: 100% ultrasonic conforming to ASTM E164. N. For weld tests, reports by the Agency inspector will contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld, a critique of statement regarding the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current A.W.S. Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instruc- tions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show com- pliance with specifications (including specified standards). 1. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fab- rication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Connec- tions shall be designed for E70XX electrodes. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. C. Calculations prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Connecticut, for each connection including those for beams, columns, and braces. D. Certificates of Compliance: Submit Certificates of Compliance for the following prod- ucts to the Special Inspector: 1. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. Submit certificates of conformance for each fastener lot or portion of a lot supplied to the project. The certificate, issued by an acceptable laboratory, must confirm that random SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 5 of 9 samples taken from the lot comply with the standards specified in the Contract Docu- ments. Each certificate will contain, as a minimum; the lot number, a description of test- ing/inspection performed, a brief summary of the results and the date testing/inspection was completed. 2. Anchor bolts. 3. Headed Stud-Type anchors 4. Weld filler material 5. Galvanized materials; including steel sections, bolts, washers, nuts, etc. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel mem- bers off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. C. For galvanized materials comply with ASTM A 123. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use on- ly materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of sur- face finishes. B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992, as indicated on the drawings. C. Cold Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Material for galvanizing shall be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in ASTM A 384 and A 385. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 6 of 9 1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. G. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural "tension control" bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, hardened washers as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020 cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC specifications. I. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. J. Non-Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with ASTM C827, C109 and C191. K. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 13. L. Zinc for Galvanizing: ASTM B6 as specified in ASTM A123. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery se- quence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connection, as indicated. Bolt field connections with "tension control" bolts, except where welded or other connec- tions are indicated. 1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are indicated. C. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength, "tension control", threaded fas- teners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" D. Headed stud anchors for composite construction shall be flux filled and welded in ac- cordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stud anchors shall be located and spaced as indicated on drawings. E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Assemble and weld built up sec- tions by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 7 of 9 F. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as in- dicated to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or en- large holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. G. Web Penetrations: For structural steel beams and girders, web penetrations will be per- mitted for passage of other work, without prior approval of the Engineer, only if the max- imum opening dimension does not exceed the lesser of 6" or .25d (d equals beam depth), if the penetration is located in the middle third of the beam span and if no concentrated load is located nearer than 2'-0" from the edge of the penetration. All other penetrations require prior approval by the Engineer. Penetrations, not circular in nature, shall have a minimum radius of 1" at all corners and all edges of the penetration shall be provided with a reasonably even and smooth surface. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING: A. General: Shop paint structural steel by providing one coat shop applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint Systems Guide No. 7.00. 1. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high strength bolted with friction type connections. 2. Steel which is designated to receive a field-applied contact-type fireproofing shall not be painted and shall be shop cleaned of loose mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease by appropriate means. 2.04 GALVANIZING: A. Steel members, fabrications, and assemblies to be galvanized after fabrication, by hot dip process in accordance with ASTM A 123 or A 386, as applicable. Weight of zinc coating to conform to requirements specified under "Weight of Coating" in ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386, as applicable. B. Safeguard against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A 143. C. Safeguard against warpage or distortion of steel members to conform with ASTM A 384. Notify Architect/Engineer of potential warpage problems which may require modifica- tion in design, before proceeding with steel fabrications. D. Finish and uniformity of zinc coating and adherence of coating to conform with ASTM A 123, A 153, or A 386, as applicable. E. Bolts, nuts, and washers, and iron and steel hardware components to be galvanized in ac- cordance with ASTM A 153. Weight of zinc coating to conform to requirements speci- fied under "Weight of Coating" in ASTM A 153. Nuts to be tapped after galvanizing to minimum diametral amounts specified in ASTM A 563. Coat nuts with waterproof lubri- SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 8 of 9 cant, clean and dry to touch. High strength bolts for structural steel joints to be galva- nized in accordance with ASTM A 325. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be in- stalled, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. 3.02 ERECTION: A. Surveys: Employ a registered land surveyor to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Engineer. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Engineer. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 1. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation require- ments in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. F. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. G. Pack non-shrink grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials and allow to cure. 1. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05120 PAGE 9 of 9 H. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before per- manently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in perma- nent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrep- ancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. Ad- just and weld in final position all structural steel angles which support architectural finish material. Adjustments are to be made to the tolerances of the applied finish materials. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. I. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. J. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in sec- ondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. K. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Engineer. Finish gas cut sections equal to a sheared ap- pearance when permitted. L. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. M. Touch-Up Galvanized Surfaces: Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A 780. Dry film thickness of applied repair materials to be not less than galva- nized coating thickness required by ASTM A 123, A 153, or A 386, as applicable. Touch up prime-painted surfaces with same galvanized primer applied in shop. Clean damaged surfaces first to assure proper paint adhesion. SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING SECTION 05300 - METAL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of metal decking is shown on the drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute, AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. American Welding Society, AWS D1.3 "Specifications for Welding Sheet Steel in Struc- tures". 3. Steel Deck Institute, SDI "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks". B. Qualifications of Filed Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure”. C. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing portions of decking g for testing purposes shall be borne by Owner if welds are founds to be satis- factory. Work found to be defective will be removed and replaced with new acceptable work, at the expense of the Contractor. D. Special Inspection: The Owner will engage the services of a qualified “Special Inspector” for this project. The Special Inspector, as a representative of the Owner, will confirm that the provisions of Section 17 of the Connecticut State Building Code are complied with and will provide and/or supervise inspection and testing requirements, as necessary. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compli- ance with these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05300 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, Grade A (Min Fy = 33 ksi) B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized. D. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, Grade 60. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized sur- faces complying with Military Specifications MIL- P-21035 (Ships). F. Paint: Manufacturer’s baked-on, rust-inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with flush, telescoped or nested 2" laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated. B. Composite Steel Form Deck: Provide galvanized composite floor deck units with deck configu- rations, metal thickness, depth, and section properties as shown with integral embossing or raised pattern to furnish mechanical bond with concrete. Comply with SDI "Specification for Compos- ite Steel Floor Deck." C. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting floor deck units of not less than same thickness as decking. Form to match contour of duck units and approximately 6” wide. D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings between decking and other con- struction, of not less than 0.045” min. (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at top ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed and no- tify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05300 PAGE 2 of 4 SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflec- tion. C. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. D. Do not use floor or roof deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. E. Fastening Deck Units: Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8” diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12” o.c. at all supports. Lock side laps of adjacent units between supports by screwing or button punching at intervals not exceeding laps 36” o.c. Fasten composite floor deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 3/4" diameter fu- sion welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12" o.c. with a minimum of 2 welds per unit at each support. Tack weld or use machine screws at 4’-0” o.c. for fastening and closures. Fasten non-composite floor deck units using welding washers in accordance with Section 4, In- stallation and Site Storage of SDI Specifications for Non-Composite Steel Form Deck. F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appear- ance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. G. Use welding Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. H. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. I. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be used instead of hanger slots. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14” o.c. in both directions, not over 9” from walls at ends, and not more than 12” from walls at sides, unless otherwise shown. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05300 PAGE 3 of 4 SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING Provide manufacturer’s standard hanger attachment devices. J. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units. K. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. L. Touch-up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. M. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufac- turer's instructions. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent sur- faces. END OF SECTION 05300 OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05300 PAGE 4 of 4 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 1 of 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions required by all applicable codes and standards. Provide engineered submittals indicating performance will meet or exceed these requirements. 1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. 2.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification data. SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 2 of 6 B. Welding certificates. C. Product test reports. D. Research/evaluation reports. 2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H) or As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90). 3.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 3 of 6 D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 3.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 4 of 6 PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 4.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 4.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 5 of 6 B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to primary building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system. 4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PAGE 6 of 6 4.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 1 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 05521 - RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. B. Samples: SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 2 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Certification from the painting contractor that the finished coating thickness meets the specification. Measurement shall be taken with an electronic coating thickness gauge. E. Field verification that coating thickness meets the specification. Measurement shall be taken with an electronic coating thickness gauge. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 3 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL A. Posts: 12-gauge steel. B. Rail: 11-gauge steel. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at the Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 4 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 5 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.7 POWDERCOAT FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”. B. Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a zinc-phosphate conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. C. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 2-coat finish consisting of zinc-rich epoxy prime coat and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a minimum total dry film thickness of 4 mils. 1. Comply with surface finish testing requirements in ASTM F 2408. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels, and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. SECTION 05521 RAILINGS SECTION 05521 PAGE 6 of 6 OXOBOXO LOFTS B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to wall as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05521 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of Rough Carpentry work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details; it includes framing, sheathing, blocking, nailers, decking, and other carpentry work not specified as part of other sections. B. The following work is specified elsewhere; Finished Carpentry, Wood Treatment, elsewhere in Division 6. Heavy Timber (solid wood framing 5"x 5" or larger) elsewhere in Division 6. Gyp- sum drywall in Division 9. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Lumber standards: Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and prod- ucts indicated. 2. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PSI (ANSI A 199.1), with applicable APA Performance Standard. 3. National Forest Products Association, NFPA, "National Design Specification and Design Values for Wood Construction". B. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, ex- cept omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. B. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is de- pendent on or attached by the carpentry work. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06100 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed and notify the contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS: A. Dimension Lumber General: Nominal sizes are indicated except as shown by detail dimensions; provide lumber complying with grading rules of Section 10 of PS 20, ASTM D 245, ASTM D 2555. B. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown. C. Provide seasoned dimension lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with PS 20. D. Lumber used for joists, rafters, beams, columns and 2 x 6 or 2 x 8 studs shall be entirely of one species which shall not be less than No. 2 grade and shall have a minimum modulus of elasticity (E) of 1,400,000 PSI and a single member fiber stress in bending (Fb) of 900 PSI. E. All 2 x 4 stud framing in walls and partitions shall be not less than stud of standard grade or bet- ter and shall have a compressive stress parallel to grain (Fc) of not less than 600 PSI. F. Concealed boards (less than 2" thick): Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide any species graded Construction Boards (WWPA). Provide sizes indicated. G. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified. Provide construction grade boards (WCLB) or No. 2 boards (WWPA). 2.2 PLYWOOD MATERIALS: A. Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA, American Plywood Association, trademark. B. Concealed Performance - Rated Plywood: Where plywood panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance - rated panels complying with re- quirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness. 1. Wall Sheathing: APA rated sheathing, NCX fire retardant treated where shown. Expo- sure durability classification: Exterior; span rating: As required to suit stud spacing indi- cated. 2. Roof Sheathing: APA rated sheathing, NCX fire retardant treated where shown . Expo- sure durability classification: Exterior; span rating: As required to suit rafter spacing in- dicated. 3. Subflooring: APA rated plywood, NCX fire retardant treated where shown . Exposure durability classification: Exterior; span rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06100 PAGE 2 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade destination, APA C-D Plugged INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicted, or, if not otherwise indicated not less than 1/2". 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicted and as recom- mended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, sta- ples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing an- chors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommend- ing nails. B. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153). C. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felts, non-perforated, ASTM D 226. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate. Work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and ac- curately cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Se- lect fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. E. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual for Housing Framing" of National Forest Products Association. Do not splice structural members between supports. F. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with Appendix E of Basic Building Code and "Recom- mended Nailing Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of the N.F.P.A. G. Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2" thick, if not blocked by other framing members. Provide blocking at each building story level and at ends of joist spans. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING: OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06100 PAGE 3 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for the line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate lo- cation with others involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 STUD FRAMING: A. General: Provide stud framing where shown. Unless otherwise shown, use 2" x 6" wood studs spaced 16" o.c. Provide single bottom plate and double-top plates 2" thick by width of studs, ex- cept single plates may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to support- ing construction. B. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. D. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at 4'-0" intervals, at joints in sheathing, as shown us- ing 2" thick members of same width as wall partitions. 3.4 JOIST FRAMING: A. General: Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. Install with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 3-1/2" of bearing. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal connectors; frame to wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal connectors. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4'-0". Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist or locate closer than 2" from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band member. B. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders or partitions not less than 4" or se- curely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) over supports. C. Under non-load bearing partitions provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. 3.5 RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING: A. Ceiling Joists: Provide member size and spacing shown, and as previously specified for joist framing. B. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs and similar conditions. 3.06 STAIR FRAMING: OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06100 PAGE 4 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Provide stair framing with 3 stair stringers for each set of stairs, unless otherwise shown. Cut notches to receive exact size of treads and risers shown, with no change in dimensions between landings. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD: A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in form No. E 304 "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial" for types of plywood products indi- cated. 3.8 FASTENING METHODS: A. Wall sheathing: Nail edges and ends to framing. B. Roof Sheathing: Nail along panel edges and at intermediate supports. Provide support at unsup- ported long edges with "Plyclips" or wood blocking. C. Subflooring: Nail at panel ends and at intermediate supports. END OF SECTION 06100 OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06100 PAGE 5 of 5 SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 06110 – MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Non-structural framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Utility shelving 7. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 2. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for engineered lumber, joists, rafters, studs, sheathing and all other structural rough framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. C. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 2 of 7 7. APA – American Plywood Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Building wrap. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 3 of 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber (kiln-dried) with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). c. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). d. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). g. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls 4. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 4 of 7 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 3. Northern species; NLGA. 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber (kiln-dried) with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine No. 2 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 5 of 7 E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 6 of 7 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation of wood framing shall comply with the requirements of this specification unless specifically detailed and required otherwise on the contract documents. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, unless noted on the contract documents, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. 6. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. SECTION 06110 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION O6110 - PAGE 7 of 7 B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 by 2 inch nominal size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. END OF SECTION 06110 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim for field finish. 2. Shelving and clothes rods. 3. Plastic laminate countertop, sidesplash and backsplash. 4. Bath Solid Surface countertops, sidesplash and backsplash. 5. Interior stairs and landings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 8 Section “Interior and Exterior Doors.” 3. Division 9 Section "Painting". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finish carpentry includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 5. SCMA - Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 6. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 7. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 8. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 2 of 10 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, colors. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Consisting of actual materials in small sections for each profile of material indicated. Manufacturer's color charts on actual material not a printed color chart, consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with a minimum of five years experience in this type of Work. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced, minimum five years, in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 3 of 10 B. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. C. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and Contractor- provided temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. C. Hardware Coordination: Coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 4 of 10 B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. D. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. E. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a pre- coated finish. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Water-Repellent Preservative Treatment by Non-pressure Process: AWPA N1. 1. Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos. 2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Do not use chemical formulations that require incising. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Kiln-dry material after treatment to levels required for untreated material. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of the following species and grades: 1. Grade C Select eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA. 2. Moisture Content: 12% max. 3. Casing (window & door trim): Basis of Design: Brosco #8993FJP, 3 ½”, primed pine. 4. Base: Basis of Design: Brosco #8993FJP 3 ½”, primed pine. 5. Window Apron: Basis of Design: Garden State Lumber #LWM412, 11/16” x 3 ½”, solid pine. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 5 of 10 2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving System: Rubbermaid wire ventilated epoxy coated shelving system. Provide adjustable shelving in linen closets. B. Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch diameter, clear, kiln-dried hardwood rods. 1. Rod Flanges: Clear, kiln-dried Douglas fir or southern pine, eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine, red oak, white maple, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, sap gum, white maple, or yellow poplar turnings. 2.5 STAIRS AND RAILINGS A. Treads @ Common Interior Stairs: 1-1/16-inch clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, fir stepping with half-round nosing. B. Risers@ Common Interior Stairs: 13/16-inch clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued poplar stock. C. Interior Wall Railings: Brosco #6040 1 3/4” x 1 5/8” red oak with matching fittings and Brosco 3027 brass wall rail bracket. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS, SIDE AND BACKSPLASHES A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Apartments: Wilsonart “Autumn Carnival”. 2. Laundry Room Folding Counter/Leasing Office/Community Room Kitchen: Wilsonart “Oiled Soapstone” C. Grade: Custom. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Exterior grade plywood or particle board, sealed on all sides. G. Provide and install laminate for back splash and side splash separate and above countertop, along entire countertop wall, sides and back. Seal joint with clear sealant, including joint at wall. 2.7 BATH VANITIES A. Countertops; Apartments: vanity countertop with integral sink. 1. Manufacturer: Bertch SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 6 of 10 Product: Oasis Vanity Top Color: Solid White B. Skirts and support brackets: 1. Minimum thickness 1” 2. Color and finishes to match countertops. C. Accessory Materials: 1. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non- porous joints by chemical bond. 2. Panel Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard neoprene-based panel adhesive complying with ANSI A136.1 – 1967, UL listed. 3. Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, FDA, UL listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions, and coordination requirements with adjacent work. E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including care, repair and cleaning instructions and maintenance video. Provide maintenance literature for selected finishes. Include in Project Closeout Documents. F. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. G. Grade: Custom H. Shop fabricate tops in one piece with integral sink, backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Provide skirt and support brackets at HC Unit of same material. Comply with cultured marble manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 7 of 10 2.9 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim. C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. D. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. E. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. F. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch thick or less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch G. Miter all outside joints unless noted otherwise. H. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. I. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.10 FINISHING A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. B. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 1. Grade: Custom. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 8 of 10 2. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of colors available in finish system specified. 3. Sheen: Gloss, 80-100 gloss units. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. AWI Finish System TR-1: Standard lacquer. 2. Staining: Match sample approved by the Architect. 3. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry and woodwork, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. C. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry and woodwork to fit adjoining work. Refinish seal cuts and repair damaged finish as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. Shim as required with concealed shims. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 9 of 10 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 6 requirements for standing and running trim. B. Grade: Premium C. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end- to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 5. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 6. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth. B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or blocking with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten to framing members, or blocking. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c. D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 1. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, or blocking. Install rods in rod flanges. SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06200 - PAGE 10 of 10 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of previous repair or refinishing. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Protect finished stairs with rosin paper. END OF SECTION 06200 SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 06250 - SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section including, but not limited to the following: 1. Removal of exterior finish systems at areas of wood restoration or repair. Preservation and sealing of seams and joints 2. Removal of decayed and contaminated wood 3. Installation of borate wood preservatives 4. Installation of wood repair compound materials 5. Extent of wood restoration work is as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturer for types of repair required including technical data sheets defining performance properties. B. Certification that materials comply with local VOC limitations. C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, address, names of Architects and Owners, and information specified.Retain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project, other Sections pertaining to historical work have been edited, and Drawings completed. Coordinate terms below with terms used on Drawings and in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Only skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in wood repairs and restoration work at areas as noted, have the skills required for the work of this section, and are completely familiar with the materials and methods specified shall be used for wood restoration work. B. At least one skilled worker shall be present at all times during the execution of the work and shall personally direct the wood repairs and restoration work SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 2 of 7 C. In acceptance or rejection of the wood restoration work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. 1.4 FIELD MOCK-UPS A. Wood Restoration: following the requirements of the Section, perform a mock-up of each type of wood repair system specified to demonstrate materials and methods intended to be used in the finished work. B. Obtain the Architect’s written approval of each mock-up before proceeding with the work of the Section C. Protect the approved mock-ups until the completion of all the work D. Approved mock-up shall represent the minimum acceptable standard for each type and detail of the restoration work. E. Manufacturer: Obtain primary repair materials from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by the manufacturer of the primary materials. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in original unopened containers labeled with the manufacturer’s name, brand name, item name and installation instructions. B. Store materials in compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements for temperature, maximum and minimum, and other conditions. Keep all materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to the weather. C. Discard and remove from the job site any materials damaged in handling or storage and any materials that have been subjected to conditions contrary to the manufacturer’s recommendations or whose maximum shelf life has expired. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Lead: Existing paint may contain lead. Take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all persons engaged in removing lead-based paint and dispose of all residuesgenerated from lead-based paint stripping in a legal manner in accordance with all local, state and federal codes. B. Coordination: Coordinate wood repair with paint stripping so that the effected surfaces are exposed for a minimal time to avoidfurther damage to bare wood. Coordinate with painting so that all restored surfaces are primed as soon as possible after repair. C. Weather: Proceed with the work of this section only when existing and foreseen weather conditions permit the work to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity range, minimum and maximum. SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 3 of 7 D. Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with product applications until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory conditions. Substrate moisture content shall not be in excess of 18°/0 during preparation and application 1. Remove all decayed wood to a clean, sound, unaffected substrate 2. Remove all built up paints, and other debris to a clean sound substrate. 3. Remove all wood sawdust to a clean sound substrate. E. Protection 1. Use all necessary means to protect interior of building from all damage caused by precipitation and other environmental conditions during the work of the Section 2. Protect all adjacent building surfaces from damage, staining or deterioration resulting from wood restoration work. 3. Protect the restoration work in progress to prevent further deterioration exposed wood surfaces. Protect the completed work until the time of final inspection and acceptance by the architect. F. Security: Coordinate work with the owners project manager to ensure that the building is secured at the end of each work period. Review security procedures with the Owner prior to proceeding with the work in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Compatibility: provide products recommended by the manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrate. 2.2 EPOXY REPAIR PRODUCTS 1. Epoxy repair materials shall consist of 2 separate systems, a 2 part low viscosity epoxy primer/coupling agent and a 2 part thixotropic paste meeting the criteria of Table A and B. 2.3 MANUFACTURER OF REPAIR PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide product of the following or approved equal. 1. Advanced Repair Technology, Cherry Valley, NY 2. Window Care Systems, Pembroke, MA SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 4 of 7 3. or approved equal 2.4 REPAIR PRODUCTS 1. This article is an example of procedures for chemical application and cleaning; retain if chemical application is included in Project. 2. Low viscosity epoxy coupling/bonding agent 3. Epoxy repair compound 4. Injectable Borate gel 5. Borate rods 2.5 PAINT STRIPPERS A. General: Chemical Stripping Agent. Methylene chloride based, Thixotropic stripper B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal 1. Retain option in first subparagraph below to suit Project and Owner's ability to fulfill supervisory responsibilities. See Evaluations. 2. 509 Stripper 3. ProSoCo 4. or approved equal C. Low Temperature heat gun or heat plate, no open flame. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect all wood surfaces in conjunction with the Architect to determine the extent of restoration and methods to be used. 1. The Architect’s decision regarding the extent of required repair, and extent of profile replication work shall be final. 2. In wood surfaces where decay is present, determine the methods and treatment of repair. 3. Areas that do not attach existing profiles, determine the level of restoration and replication to be achieved. B. Joints, Joinery and edges: Check wood members at joints, seams and edges for: 1. Any open seams or failed conditions. 2. Wood moisture content. 3. The presence of wood decay, by probing surfaces. C. Sills and Trim SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 5 of 7 1. Inspect wood surfaces for natural defects (knots) cracks and checks. 2. Determine wood moisture content. 3. Probe for the presence for wood decay. 3.2 REMOVAL A. REMOVAL OF FINISHES 1. Remove all peeling and loose paint by scraping. Taking care not to damage sound wood and profiles. 2. Strip all painted wood surface to bare wood, taking care not to damage sound wood and profiles by the application of stripping paste or by the use of a heat gun or plate a) Remove stripper and finishes as directed by manufacturer. b) Dispose of debris in accordance with approved methods. 3. Wash all surfaces with recommended neutralizing agents to remove any foreign particle, dust and chemical residue, allow surface to thoroughly dry. 3.3 PREVENTATIVE SYSTEMS A. Preservation and Sealing of seams and joints. Repair of wood” checking” due to weathering. 1. Open or failed seams and checks shall be dilated to a width of 3/16” and depth of 1/2” 2. Remove all decayed, soft and weathered wood. 3. Check the moisture content and hardness of wood at and around the repair, maximum allowable moisture content 18°/0. 4. Sand bare wood to remove all loose fibers, paint, compounds. Remove all sawdust and dirt. 5. Pre-treat bare and sanded wood thoroughly with low viscosity epoxy coupling/bonding agent 6. Allow coupling agent to penetrate wood surface for a minimum of 10 minutes and maximum of 30 minutes, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid applying in direct sunlight 7. Remove any excess bonding agent with absorbing paper 8. Apply epoxy repair compound over epoxy bonding agent while still tacky. 9. Epoxy compound shall have optimal contact with wood 10. Avoid inclusion of air pockets during application 11. Fill joints full, even and smooth in one application 12. Allow full cure time as specified by manufacturer before application of paint or varnish. SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 6 of 7 13. After curing, sand surface even and smooth. Transitions and irregularities between wood and epoxy shall not be visible after sanding 14. If required, smooth any remaining irregularities with an additional application of epoxy repair compound. Always sand between coats. 3.4 CURATIVE SYSTEMS A. Preservation and Repair of Damaged/Decayed Wood: 1. Remove all paint and other coatings from area to be repaired. 2. Remove all decayed soft and discolored wood, to sound bright unaffected material 3. Check area of removal to determine complete elimination of decayed material. a) Remaining wood should be even color without red-brown and/or gray spots b) No soft wood, existing brittle compound, or other previous repair materials should remain. 4. Check moisture content and hardness of the wood in and around the repair area a) Moisture content of wood to be 18°/0 or less 5. Sand bare wood to remove all loose fibers, paint, compounds. Remove all sawdust and dirt. 6. Drill holes in effected area to receive borate gel and rods. Follow manufacturer’s dose recommendations for dimensional lumber. 7. Inject recommended dose of borate gel. Gel should not come in contact with exposed wood surface. 8. Install borate rod in same hole as gel. Gel should not come in contact with exposed wood surface. 9. Pre-treat bare and sanded wood thoroughly with low viscosity epoxy coupling/bonding agent. a) Allow coupling/bonding agent to penetrate wood surface for a minimum of 10 minutes and maximum of 30 minutes, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid applying in direct sunlight b) Remove any excess bonding agent with absorbing paper. 10. Apply epoxy repair compound over the uncured epoxy coupling agent. a) Epoxy fill shall have optimal contact with wood b) Avoid inclusion of air pockets during application c) Fill joints fill, even and smooth in one application SECTION 06250 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC WOOD REPAIR OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06250 PAGE 7 of 7 d) Allow full cure time as specified by manufacturer before preparing for finishes. 11. After curing, sand surface even and smooth. Transitions and irregularities between wood and epoxy shall not be visible after sanding. 12. If required, smooth any remaining irregularities with an additional application of epoxy repair compound. Always sand between coats. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Repair or replace all defective work at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 06250 SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06401 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior trim and woodwork. 2.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exterior architectural woodwork by one of the following: 3.2 MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment: SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06401 PAGE 2 of 3 1. Water-Repellent Preservative: Formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) complying with AWPA P8 as its active ingredient. 2. Water-Repellent Preservative/Insecticide: Formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient, combined with an insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient, both complying with AWPA P8. B. Nails: Hot-dip galvanize or stainless steel. C. Screws: Hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. 3.3 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Wood Species: Western red cedar. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 3. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 06401 PAGE 3 of 3 E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. F. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. G. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed. H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. I. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06401 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade and inside of Foundation Walls. 2. Exterior Wall Insulation Sheathing. 3. Concealed building insulation. 4. Acoustical insulation. 5. Vapor Retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Sections “Firestopping”, “EPDM” 2. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers as Basis of Design: 1. Under Slab/Inside of Foundation Wall: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Owens Corning. 2. Exterior Wall Insulating Sheathing: Polyisocyanurate (ISO) a. Johns Manville. 3. Exterior Wall Cavities: Unfaced Fiberglass Batt Insulation: a. Owens Corning. 4. Exterior Wall Cavities, Roof Eave and Rim Joist: Closed-Cell polyurethane foam. a. Gaco Western Inc. 5. Attic Floor: Spray Cellulose Insulation: a. GreenFiber 6. Acoustical Insulation: a. Roxul AFB 7. Attic Hatch Insulation: a. Battic Door Company. b. Owens Corning . 8. Air Tight Insulated Electric Box: a. Energy Block b. Lessco 9. Gap and Crack filler: a. Great Stuff Pro by Dow Chemical Company. b. Energy Complete Sealant by Owens Corning. 10. Sill Sealer gasket: a. Basis of Design: Dow “STYROFOAM SILL SEAL FOAM GASKET”. 11. Vapor Retarder: a. Basis of Design: Certainteed MemBrain SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 3 of 6 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Basis of Design; Owens Corning “Foamular 250”; R= 15, Compressive Strength = 25.0 #/sq. in., 2’x8’ panels, 3” thick. C. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Sheathing: Basis of Design: Johns Manville AP Foil Faced; 1” thick; R=7. D. Fiberglass Batt Insulation: Basis of Design: Owens Corning: “Pink Fiberglas Insulation”, ASTM C 665, Unfaced blankets consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool. Thermal resistance shall be R=21 or greater for walls (6”). Stud wall insulation shall conform to Grade I or Grade II. E. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. F. Spray Cellulose Insulation: Basis of Design: GreenFiber 500 Stabilized Attic Insulation Loose fill insulation. R-49, 15” deep, spray installed. G. Acoustical Insulation – Cavity Insulation for Sound Rated Partitions, Walls and Ceilings: Basis of Design: Roxul Acoustic Fire Batt; mineral wool batts, non-combustible, moisture-resistant, noncorrosive, nondeteriorating, mildew proof. H. Air Tight Insulated Electric Box: Install air tight energy blocks at all switches, receptacles, cable TV, telephone boxes, etc that are located in the exterior walls. Tape insulation tight to the blocks. I. Gap and Crack filler: Apply Dow Great Stuff, non-expanding foam sealer at all door and window frame and edge cavities instead of batt insulation. Apply at all penetrations, gaps and cracks through the exterior walls, and joints between the floor joists, along the sill plates, etc. to form and air tight perimeter. J. Gap and Crack filler: Apply Owens Corning “Energy Complete” Sealant to seal GWB to top plates at all walls below unconditioned attic spaces. K. Attic Hatch Insulation: Basis of Design: Owens Corning “Attic Insulator” or Battic Door Company R50 sized to fit opening. L. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. M. Vapor Retarder: Sheet Retarder: Polyimide film vapor retarder for use with unfaced, vapor permeable glass fiber and mineral wool insulation in wall and ceiling cavities. Material has a permeance of 1 perm or less when tested to ASTM E 86, dry cup method and increases to greater than 10 perms using the wet cup method. Material has a Fire Hazard Classification of SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 4 of 6 ASTM E 84, with a maximum Flame Spread Index of 20 and a maximum Smoke Developed Index of 55. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. Latex caulk as recommended by manufacturer for adhering “Energy Block” to studs. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Use fasteners as recommended by insulation manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Follow Energy Star recommendations for installing insulation for a tight seal. C. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. D. Do not expose materials to flame or other ignition sources. E. Each board and roll provided must be labeled with manufacturer’s name, and product brand name. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 5 of 6 F. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. G. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. H. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. Install under slab insulation for entire slab area at all dwelling units that are slab on grade. For non-dwelling unit areas extend insulation under slab a minimum of 24”. Gravel fill must be thoroughly tamped before installing insulation to form a firm even base. Butt insulation boards tightly together, with filter fabric/vapor barrier on earth side. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install insulating sheathing per manufacturer’s requirements. C. Do not let insulation come into contact with recessed ceiling lights. Maintain minimum 3” clearance from lights. D. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. E. Install fiberglass batts in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. All fiberglass batts to comply with Grade I installation requirements. F. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. G. Spray in cellulose insulation: 1. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 PAGE 6 of 6 2. Apply loose-fill cellulose insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make it flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. H. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Material to be placed in the cavity friction fit, snug against the wallboard with no gaps between batts. Butt ends of batts together. Install behind electrical outlets, around structural obstructions, jambs, sills etc. B. Install unfaced sound attenuation fire blanket insulation, over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches on either side of partition 3.7 SILL-SEALER INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Sills: Where indicated on drawings; place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches. 1. Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 SECTION 07275 WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 07275 - PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 07275 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 2. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Air Barriers" for sheet air barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. SECTION 07275 WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 07275 - PAGE 2 of 3 B. Building Paper: Water-vapor-permeable, asphalt-saturated kraft building paper. 1. Water vapor transmission not less than 35 g/sq. m x 24 hr per ASTM D 779. 2. Water resistance not less than 1 hour per ASTM F 1249. C. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. c. Ludlow Coated Products; EnergyWrap Housewrap. d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard Ultra Wrap. e. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier. f. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 150 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg (0.02 L/s x sq. m at 75 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 2178. 4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not more than three months. 5. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils.. D. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self Adhered Flashing. c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL. d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield. e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap. f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 40. i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing. SECTION 07275 WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 07275 - PAGE 3 of 3 j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT-30 Tape. l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal. B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. D. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. 3. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 07275 SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for pitched roofs: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 4. Ridge vents.(where shown) 5. Under Eave Soffit Vents B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 2. Division 7 Section 07620 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vent, and exposed valley lining indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Data: For Installer, including certificate signed by asphalt shingle manufacturer stating that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed to install roofing system indicated. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 2 of 7 E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For asphalt shingles. G. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that is approved, authorized, or licensed by asphalt shingle roofing system manufacturer to install roofing system indicated. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vents, felt underlayment, and self- adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A, ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install felts and self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 3 of 7 1.8 WARRANTY 1. GAF Timberline HD Lifetime Limited Warranty. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type, in unbroken bundles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D7158 and ASTM D 3161, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 1. Manufacturer; GAF Materials Corporation; Product: Timberline HD. 2. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 4. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including all premium options. B. Alternate Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements and matching or exceeding features and performance of product specified: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. TAMKO Building Products. C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. A. Felts: GAF Deck Armor; 10 square roll. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55-mil- thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Manufacturer: GAF Materials Corporation; Product: Weather Watch, Shingle mate. 2. Alternate Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements and matching or exceeding features and performance of product specified: a. W.R. Grace, Ice and Water Shield b. CertainTeed Corporation; WinterGuard. c. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender. d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock G. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 4 of 7 2.3 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene, or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent, for use under ridge shingles. 1. Manufacturer: GAF Materials Corporation; Product: Cobra Rigid Vent II. 2. Alternate Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements and matching or exceeding features, and performance of specified product: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent II. 2.4 UNDER EAVE SOFFIT VENTS A. Under Eave aluminum vent. White, 8-0” sections. 1. GAF Materials Corporation; Product: Master Flow LSV8 Series Soffit Vent. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed or deformed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through plywood sheathing. Nailing guns must be set so as not to punch through shingles. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from the same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter. 2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Metal Flashing: Use one of the following: a. 24 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A, 653M, G90/Z275. b. 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles, and 6 inches up the vertical surface. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 5 of 7 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney or other roof penetration and 6 inches above the roof plane. 4. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below and on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 6 of 7 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches. 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches. 8. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. C. Concealed Closed-Cut Valley Lining: Comply with ARMA and NRCA recommendations. Install a 36-inch- wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Fasten to roof deck with felt underlayment nails. 1. Lap roof deck felt underlayment over valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches 2. Install a 36-inch- wide strip of granular-surfaced valley lining centered in valley, with granular-surface face up. Lap ends of strips at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten to roof deck with roofing nails. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07311 PAGE 7 of 7 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fascia at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four, five, or six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails. 2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips. 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center. 2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. END OF SECTION 07311 SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 07531 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 2. Rigid insulation. 3. Rubber pavers over EPDM deck. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 2 of 9 C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Roof plan showing orientation of membrane roofing, including seams. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 3 of 9 D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, the G.C. shall conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements for deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 4 of 9 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Inc.: SURE-SEAL, 30 year. 2. Thickness: 90 mils nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene non-reinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil- thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents, grease, and oil. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 5 of 9 E. Modified Asphaltic Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard modified asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing. F. Water-Based, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard water-based, cold-applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing. G. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. H. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing. I. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. K. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick prepunched. L. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. M. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 6 of 9 1. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 3, ranging in size from 1 to 2 inches. 2.5 WALKWAYS (On roof to equipment) A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following] a. Carlisle Sure-Seal 2. Size: 30 by 30 inches. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch in length, height, and thickness. 3. Colors and Textures: Match roof EPDM color. 2.6 RUBBER DECK PAVERS A. Rubber Deck Pavers: Heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured rubber pavers 2 inch thick, made from recycled tires and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Verisco Incorprated 2. Size: 24 by 24 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thickness of insulation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 7 of 9 B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install insulation, where indicated in the drawings, under area of roofing. D. Trim surface of insulation so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. F. Mechanically Fastened: Install insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.4 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 8 of 9 E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. F. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. 1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. J. Adhere protection sheet over membrane roofing at locations indicated or required. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products from roof access to and around all equipment. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. SECTION 07531 EPDM ROOFING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07531 - PAGE 9 of 9 3.7 RUBBER DECK PAVERS INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer’s installation requirements. Install locking system and technology; Verify drainage pattern for positive drainage. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, may be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07531 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed wall and roof sheet metal fabrications. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section 07311 “Asphalt Shingles" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing capable of resisting wind forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the projects wind zone. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 2 of 10 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 3 of 10 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 4 of 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. As-Milled Finish: Standard two-side bright finish. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium options. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 5 of 10 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 6 of 10 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF METAL FABRICATIONS A. Eave, Rake Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Lead Coated Copper: 2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 7 of 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches C. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 8 of 10 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 9 of 10 B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system. B. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07620 - PAGE 10 of 10 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07631 - PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 07631 – GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Gutters, down spouts and all accessories required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 7 – “Asphalt Shingles” 2. Section 7-“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product data and color samples for initial selection, and for verification. C. Provide sample sections of gutters, downspouts, and accessories for verification. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. Deliver undamaged. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, or other damage, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07631 - PAGE 2 of 4 C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install gutters, downspouts and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of gutter and downspout system with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design: Englert Gutter Systems. 2.2 MATERIALS A. .019 gauge aluminum downspouts B. .032 gauge aluminum gutters. C. .027 gauge leaf protection. 2.3 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Gutters: Seamless, 5” Ogee –K shape gutter with end caps, miters, (inside and outside corners) elbows, outlets, hangers, fasteners, and all other required components for a complete installation. B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range including premium. C. Accessories: End caps, miters, (inside and outside corners) elbows, outlets, strainer baskets, fascia brackets, fasteners and all other required accessories for a complete installation. D. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by fabricator. E. Down Spouts: 3"x4” rectangular, with elbows and outlets. F. Down Spout Supports: Aluminum brackets. SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07631 - PAGE 3 of 4 G. Leaf Protection: “SureGuard” .027 aluminum. H. Gutters shall be provided with standard neoprene expansion joints spaced not more than 40 feet O.C. Sections of gutters shall be joined together not less than 3 inches; joints shall be thoroughly sealed with component sealant and shall be rivet-set. All ends of gutters shall be provided with a standard closure piece and shall be thoroughly sealed with component sealant and rivet-set. Provide gutters with tail piece extending not less than 3 inches into the downspout; tail pieces shall be properly connected to gutter and shall be thoroughly sealed with compound in a manner standard with manufacturer. I. Valley Shields: Install vertical aluminum shields at outside face of all gutters located at the base of roof valleys; size as required to prevent gutter overflow. J. Downspout Adapters: 3”x4” corrugated lightweight polyethylene plastic. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufacture formed seamless gutter in uniform lengths with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front gutter rim. Furnish with hidden gutter hangers and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from the same metal as gutters, seal watertight. B. Downspouts: Rectangular with mitered elbows. Furnish wall brackets selected, from same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, down spouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to down spouts and accessories. Seal metal joints watertight. SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07631 - PAGE 4 of 4 C. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. Use a minimum of three fasteners per downspout. Connect downspouts to downspout boots system. Seal connection watertight with closed cap boot adapter. E. Leaf Protection: Install per manufacturers requirements. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Perform cleaning operations as the work of each section of the building is completed, or as each building is completed. Clean all work with an approved detergent and water mixed, applied and washed off in strict accordance with the manufacturer of the material involved. Leave all work clean, free of blemishes and all imperfections END OF SECTION 07631 SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 07841 – FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Fireproofing, firestopping, fireblocking, firesafing, smokesafing and draftstopping materials and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”. 2. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry”. 3. Division 7 Section “Building Insulation.” 4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board”. 5. Division 15: Mechanical work requiring firestopping. 6. Division 16: Electrical work requiring firestopping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," is experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. D. FM (Factory Mutual) - Fire Hazard Classifications. E. UL - Fire Hazard Classifications. F. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. I. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings. 1.6 DEFINITION A. Firestopping (Firesafing): A sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between building materials to arrest the movement of smoke, heat, gases, or fire through wall or floor openings. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. C. Firestop entire dwelling unit separation wall between existing studs. D. Install as shown and as required for compliance with CT State Building Code. E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture- resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 3 of 6 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. F. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 4 of 6 B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPOUND AND FIBER STUFFING A. Product: USG "Firecode" Compound and Thermafiber “Firespan 90” Safing Insulation. B. Products by the following manufacturers, equal to those scheduled, are approved. 1. Hilti. 2. Johns Manville 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division 4. Tremco 5. USG Corporation 6. Grace, W. R. & Co. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 5 of 6 2.4 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. 2.5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07841 - PAGE 6 of 6 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 4. Fill all holes, penetrations, or voids whether in fire-rated construction or not D. Install fill materials in all non-fire rated partitions. Examples of penetrations include but not limited to plumbing piping under sinks and at toilets. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials. c. Expansion joints. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows. c. Control joints. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Acoustical sealant in walls and openings. f. Other joints as required. 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile and or stone flooring. c. Other joints as required. B. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 2 of 10 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All joint sealants and adhesives shall be Low VOC emitting to comply with LEED requirements. B. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. C. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's product data and color samples complete color set of actual materials). Data shall indicate conformity to reference specifications. Include requirements for primers, if any. Include manufacturer's application instructions. D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project, with minimum of five years experience in this type of Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: 1. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, per ASTM E 548. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 3 of 10 2. Test joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. F. Mockup: Before starting work, apply sample sealants to typical joints for Architect's color verification. Remove if not approved. 1. Apply sealant systems to 4' lengths of typical joints to demonstrate workmanship. Upon approval by Architect samples shall be standards of the work. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 4 of 10 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within Ten (10) years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium options. E. Elastomeric Joint Sealants 1. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 2. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 3. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Latex Joint Sealants SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 5 of 10 1. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. G. Manufacturer’s with Available Products: 1. Pecora Corporation. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc. 3. Tremco. 4. Dow Corning Corporation. 5. GE Silicones. H. Acoustical Joint Sealants 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: a. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2. Available Products: a. Acoustical Sealant by U.S. Gypsum b. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco Manufacturing. c. Acoustical Sealant AC20 FTR by Pecora. Chemical Corporation I. The following products are available for acoustical fire-rated partitions: a. CP 25 Caulk by 3M Corp. b. Acoustical Sealant by Specified Technologies. c. FS 1900 Series Sealant Intumescent Firestop by International Protective Coatings. J. Sealant Schedule: 1. Sealant for lavatories, water closets, and other plumbing fixtures: a. Fungicidal one part silicone rubber sealant conforming to the requirements of A.S.T.M. C920 and F.S. TT-S-230C and TT-S-001543, Class A or B, especially made for the specified use. 2. Sealant for control joints: a. Polyurethane sealant conforming to the requirements of A.S.T.M. C920 and F.S. TT-S-00227E (two part) or TT-S-230C (one part). Where within the reach of people use two-part formulation equivalent to Tremco "HPL" or Pecora "Dynatrol". 3. Sealant for non-moving exterior joints such as door frames and small window frames: a. One-part acrylic polymeric sealant conforming to the requirements of A.S.T.M. C920 and F.S. TT-S-230. Sealant specified in B. above is an approved substitute. 4. Sealant for interior uses other than described in A. and B. above: a. One-part acrylic latex sealant conforming to the requirements of A.S.T.M. C834, equal to Pecora "AC-20". Sealant specified in B. above is an approved substitute. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 6 of 10 5. Joint backing: Applied Extrusion Technologies, Inc., "Sof Rod". Phone: 1-800-521- 6713. For solid-backed joints, use polyethylene bond breaker tape. 6. Weep tubes: Clear acrylic "drain only" tubes, approximately 3/8" diameter. Source: Chargar Corp., Hamden, CT. 7. Impregnated foam sealant: a. "Emseal", distributed by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Westborough, MA. (508) 836-0280; area representative: Preservation and Protection Systems, Inc., Robert Oelz, (800) 648-5857. b. Impregnated foam sealant shall be compressed and shipped in air tight vacuum bag, tight roll, or compression pack. Uncompressed width shall be 4 x joint width. Depth shall be 2-1/2 x joint width. 8. Fire-tolerant sealant for use adjacent to flues and similar hot surfaces: a. Dow Corning 795 or equivalent low-modulus silicone sealant conforming to the requirements of A.S.T.M. C290. 9. Sealant for very narrow joints which move, such as joints between roof fasciae and backer plates: a. PTI "404 Bed and Seal" butyl sealant PTI: Commercial Plastics and Supply Corporation, 1180 Sherman Avenue, Hamden, CT. (203) 288-1641. b. Tremco non-hardening butyl curtainwall sealant; Tremco: Kenseal Construction Products, West Haven, CT. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 7 of 10 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Apply sealant only to dry surfaces on dry day, at temperature of 40o F. or above C. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 8 of 10 E. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. F. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. G. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. I. Seal the following joints: 1. Openings in exterior walls, including doors, windows, and mechanical openings; expansion joints, control joints; joints between different materials and components; and in front of metal lintels. Seal the ends of metal flashings, if any, over openings. Where both sides are exposed, seal both inside and outside. a. Use polyurethane sealant and backer rod over backup of impregnated foam sealant at joints which move significantly; use acrylic polymeric sealant and backer rod over backup of impregnated foam sealant at joints which are not subject to movement. Use latex sealant at interior joints. 2. Seal joints around plumbing fixtures. Use fungicidal silicone sealant. 3. Seal above reglets and flashings inserted into and attached to masonry and concrete. a. Use acrylic polymeric sealant. 4. Seal around posts embedded in concrete or masonry. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 9 of 10 a. Use acrylic polymeric sealant. 5. Seal other joints as indicated on drawings. 6. Note: If the word "Caulk" appears on drawings, it means "Seal". J. Apply joint backing to joints open in back or over 1/2" deep. Compress backing so as to form a firm stop which will resist sealant pressure. If joint is not open in back, apply bond breaker tape. 1. Sealant joint dimensions shall be as follows unless indicated otherwise: a. For joints up to 1/2" wide, depth = 1/4" deep. b. For joints wider than 1/2", depth = 1/2" or depth = 1/2 width, whichever is smaller. c. For fillet beads at joints with little anticipated movement, width = 1/2" diagonally. d. Use gauge for inserting joint backing to proper depth. <--- Protrusion to push backer rod to proper depth. K. Drive sealant into joints, filling from the bottom up. Tool joints to produce neat, tightly adhering beads. L. Install impregnated foam sealant according to manufacturer's instructions. M. Where necessary for drainage, install weep tubes. Allow to protrude slightly from joint. Seal tightly around tubes, but leave both ends open. N. Clean up spills, using solvent recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL O. Field-Adhesion Testing. Paid by GC and performed by a designated expert consultant: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: 2. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 3. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Methods in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 4. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log. 5. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 07920 - PAGE 10 of 10 a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 6. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 7. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. P. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING Q. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION R. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. S. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 9 Section “Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 2 of 10 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 3 of 10 C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Firedoor Corporation. 6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Jeld-Wen, Inc. 8. Kewanee Corporation (The). 9. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 10. Security Metal Products Corp. 11. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 4 of 10 D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Per manufacturer standard. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. Doors to be 16 gauge (min) for interior doors and 14 GA (min) for exterior doors. 1. Design: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings required. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 14.5 when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 5 of 10 B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), a. Width: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), a. Width: 1-3/4 inches. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames to be 14 gauge. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Interior frames to be 16 gauge. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 6 of 10 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 and ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 7 of 10 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 8 of 10 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Exterior doors and frames: galvanized prior to finish application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 9 of 10 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory prior to setting and anchoring frames. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: (See 3.3.B.8). C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Provide tight fitting 5/8 plywood spreaders on the floor. Cope around stops for tight fit. Remove just prior to flooring installation. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout or mortar. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08110 - PAGE 10 of 10 other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Max. 3/4 inch 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout or mortar and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08212 - PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES” 2. Division 9 Section “PAINTING” 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include details of construction and glazing. 2. Include factory finishing specifications. 3. Include fire rating construction as required. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail doors. Indicate location, size, fire rating and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data including the following: 1. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. C. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each door style. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08212 - PAGE 2 of 4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of stile and rail wood door from single manufacturer. B. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of quality standard referenced in Part 2. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Interior Doors: Five years PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 1. Assemble interior doors, , including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Panel Products: Any of the following: SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08212 - PAGE 3 of 4 1. Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. With fire-rating as required. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2.2 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Interior Stile and Rail Doors: Stock interior doors complying with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Craftmaster Coventry style. 2. Core Construction: Particleboard, mineral or wood stave with cut-out or routed pattern to allow panel configuration to fit inside core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings required. B. Fabricate stile and rail doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. C. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W Series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. E. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. F. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08212 - PAGE 4 of 4 2.3 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Sand all surfaces, including edges, smooth prior to priming. Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer per manufacturer’s standard and as indicated in Division 9 Section. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer. Field paint all 6 sides. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where stile and rail doorswill be installed. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." Coordinate all prep work with hardware supplier. B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, C. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08212 SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08311 - PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. See drawings for type and locations, including Elevator. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08311 - PAGE 2 of 4 2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Access Panel Solutions. 2. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Milcor Inc. 6. Nystrom, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (See Drawings for location, size and design). 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Door Size: See drawings. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime, for field finish painting. 5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Lock. D. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (See Drawings for location, size and design). 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 4. Factory prime for field finish painting. 5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Lock. E. Hardware: 1. Lock: Cylinder. SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08311 - PAGE 3 of 4 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc- coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08311 - PAGE 4 of 4 C. Field paint color per selection of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 1 of 16 SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units and auto open units. 3. Fixed and operable aluminum-framed windows. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 “Hardware”. 2. Division 16 “Electric” For power requirements for automatic door opener. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 2 of 16 c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind, Seismic and Blast Loads: Meet all requirements of the State of Connecticut Building Code. a. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch whichever is smaller, amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch. E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Story Drift: Provide aluminum-framed systems that accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated. 1. Test Performance: Meet criteria for passing, based on building occupancy type, when tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times design displacement. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 3 of 16 G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1 and No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal- surface temperature of 180 deg F . b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503. K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503 or Storefront U-value must be U-0.35 or lower and Entrance doors must be U-0.7 or lower; whichever is lowest. L. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics: 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 26 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 26 OITC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 4 of 16 M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum- framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. N. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, window operation and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 5 of 16 G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. C. Welding certificates. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. F. Source quality-control reports. G. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Include reports. H. Field quality-control reports. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 6 of 16 D. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Develop quality control program specifically for Project. Document quality-control procedures and verify results for aluminum-framed systems. Comply with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant-testing program, procedures for system fabrication and installation, and intervals of reviews and checks. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum-framed systems. 1. Test a minimum five samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials. G. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. H. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. I. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems. J. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer. K. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." L. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 7 of 16 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. M. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 8 of 16 components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. B. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: 1. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of structural-sealant-glazed system Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement to ensure long-term performance and durability of structural-sealant-glazed system as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original system. 2. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 3. CMI Architectural 4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 5. EFCO Corporation. 6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc. 8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 9. TRACO. 10. Tubelite. 11. United States Aluminum. 12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 13. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated with baked enamel finish, selected by Architect form manufacturer’s full range. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 9 of 16 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads and with baked enamel finish, selected by Architect form manufacturer’s full range. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: 1” thick insulating. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation shall be forced entry resistant in accordance with AAMA/NWWDA/CSA 101/IS2-/A440-05 requirements. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 10 of 16 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Welded corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, different size. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. B. Entrance Door Hardware: By door manufacturer, provide all hardware necessary for use and placement indicated on drawings. Include, but not limited to: closers, pulls, panic hardware, hinges, locks, latches, etc. Lock cylinder to match owner’s master keying system. Provide all connection to power actuated openers. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide complete entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color per as selected manufacturer’s standard. Connect to power auto opener at main entrance. 2. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the door in motion and not more than 5 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 11 of 16 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 3. Retain subparagraph below unless "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article is revised to include hanging device quantities. 4. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches provide 3 hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide 4 hinges per leaf. E. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame. F. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. G. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. H. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. I. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. J. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware.” and BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE"to be furnished by Owner. K. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. L. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. M. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. N. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. O. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. P. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. Q. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 12 of 16 R. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. S. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. T. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. D. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. E. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing per manufacturer’s standard. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. F. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. G. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly per manufacturer’s standard. H. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 13 of 16 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. I. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. J. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. K. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities, including premium. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate structural-sealant-glazed systems. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 14 of 16 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. G. Install glazing. H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3. Auto Door Opener: Connect to auto door opener at Main Entrance. I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 15 of 16 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C 1401, Appendix X2, shall be used. 1) A minimum of two areas on each building face shall be tested. 2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing. 2. Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed systems is complete, structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. 3. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static- air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. Insert pressure. 4. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft. and shall not evidence water penetration. 5. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08411 - PAGE 16 of 16 D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08411 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 1 of 9 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Conditions of the Contract, and all Sections of Division 1, are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Section Includes: Factory glazed windows complete with insect screens, reinforcing, shims, anchors, and attachment devices. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” 2. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing.” D. Coordinate work with that of all construction contractors affecting or affected by work of this Contract. Cooperate with such contractors to assure the steady progress of the Work. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: In addition to requirements shown or specified comply with applicable provisions of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 for design, materials, fabrication and installation of component parts. B. Window Replacement Requirements: 1. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of the Replacement Window Contract, and without limiting the generality thereof include: 2. Removal of existing sash, fixed glazing, frames and other accessories as required by the proposed replacement system. 3. Removal of other existing work as required for the proper installation and operation of the new units. 4. Removal from site and legal disposal of all removed materials, debris, packaging, band ing and all other surplus materials and equipment. 5. Provide new factory glazed, thermally broken, aluminum windows, types as specified herein, together with necessary mullions, panning, trim, expanders, operating hardware, installation hardware and all other accessories as required. 6. Insulated panels and frames as required in selected transoms and other locations. 7. Treated wood blocking, fillers and nailers as required for secure installation. Bidders shall survey conditions of existing sills and jambs prior to bidding. Contractor shall be responsible for providing new blocking for portions of same that are deteriorated. 8. Fiberglass insulation between window frames and adjacent construction. SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 2 of 9 9. Sealing of all joints within each window assembly. 10. Sealing of entire exterior perimeter of window units after installation. 11. Field observations and measurements of existing openings and conditions. 12. Furnishing and delivering of extra materials as specified. C. New Construction: 1. Coordinate with the Architect and the general contractor that the opening dimensions will be maintained in accordance with the documents. 2. It is the responsibility of the sub-contractor to allow proper clearance for the type of in stallation in accordance with the manufacturer's standard procedures. D. Design Requirements: 1. Manufacturer/subcontractor is responsible for designing system, including installation instructions and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts. 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of unit, sight lines and profiles of members. 3. Provide assemblies free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structur al movement and wind pressure. 4. Installation instructions are to take into account specified site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracture ing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 5. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. 6. Evacuate water without infiltration to interior from exterior face of wall, water entering joints, and condensation occurring within windows, by drain holes and gutters of ade quate size or other acceptable method. 7. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. E. Performance Requirements: Requirements for aluminum windows, terminology and stand ards of performance, and fabrication and workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 and applicable general recommendations pub lished by AAMA. Conform to more stringent of specified AAMA standards and following: 1. Air Infiltration Test: Not exceed 0.20 cubic feet per minute per foot of crack length when tested at a pressure of 6.24 psf. Adjust sash to operate in either direction with a force not exceeding 45 pounds after the sash is in motion. Perform tests in accordance with ASTM E 283 with the sash in a closed and locked position. 2. Water Resistance Test: Subject window unit to a water resistance test in accordance with ASTM E 331 with no water passing the interior face of the window frame and no leakage as defined in the test method. Mount the glazed unit in its vertical position continuously supported around the perimeter and the sash placed in the fully closed and locked posi tion. When a static pressure of 11 pounds per square foot has been stabilized, apply five gallons of water per square foot of window area to the exterior face of the unit for a period of 15 minutes. 3. Uniform Load Deflection Test: ASTM E 330 at 60 pounds per square foot: No member deflection more than 1/175 of its span. Maintain test load for a period of 10 seconds re sulting in no glass breakage, permanent damage of fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, actuating mechanisms or any other damage causing the window to be inoperable. 4. Uniform Load Structural Test: Apply a minimum exterior and interior uniform load of 90 pounds per square foot to the entire outside surface of the test unit. Maintain this test load for a period of 10 seconds. Results: No glass breakage, permanent damage of fasten SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 3 of 9 ers, hardware parts, support arms, actuating mechanisms, or any other damage causing the window to be inoperable. And no permanent deformation of any frame or vent mem ber in excess of 0.3 percent of its span. 5. Life Cycle Test: Per AAMA 101 and AAMA 910, provide proof that the product meets the criteria including passing air and water tests at the conclusion of the cycle tests. 6. Condensation Resistance Factor: Test in accordance with AAMA 1502 standards and tests of thermal performance resulting in a CRF of no less than 55 using Clear-Clear insu lating glass. 7. "U" Value Tests: (Co-efficient of Heat Transfer): Thermal Transmittance of Conduction with a 15 mph perpendicular dynamic wind: 0.61 BTU/hr/ft2/F (U-value with Low-e glass is 0.42 BTU/hr/ft2/F). 8. Product Certification: Per AAMA Certification Program, window manufacturer must submit certification that their base window system meets the AW criteria and is certified by AAMA. 9. Testing: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and have been tested in accordance with specified AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 tests, provide certification by AAMA certified independent laboratory showing compli ance with such tests. Submit copy of the test report signed by the independent laboratory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and standard details for aluminum window units. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including location floor plans or exterior wall eleva tions showing all window openings, typical unit elevations at 1/4 inch scale, and half size detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators and other components as appropriate if not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details and standards for factory glazed units. C. Samples: 1. Submit one sample of each required aluminum finish, on 3 x 3 inch long sections of ex trusion shapes or aluminum sheets as required for window units. 2. Submit additional samples, if and as directed by Architect, to show fabrication tech niques, workmanship of component parts, and design of hardware and other exposed aux iliary items. D. Certifications: Submit certified test laboratory reports by independent laboratory substantiat ing performance of system. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle windows, mullions, panels, hardware and all pertinent items in strict com pliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect units adequately against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during and after installation. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warrantees: Submit written warrantees from window manufacturer for the following: SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 4 of 9 1. Windows: Windows furnished are certified as fully warranted against any defects in ma terial or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from date of fabrication. 2. Finish: The pigmented organic finishes on exposed surfaces of windows and component parts (such as panning, trim, mullions and the like) are certified as com ply ing fully with re quirements of AAMA 2603 [2604] [2605] for pigmented organic coating and fully warranted against chipping, peeling, cracking or blistering for a period of five (5) years from date of installation. Warrant finishes meeting AAMA 2604 and 2605 against fading beyond AAMA standards. 3. Insulated Glass: Warranted from visual obstruction due to internal moisture for a period of five (5) years. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Furnish and deliver to Owner, at the project location, extra material for mainte nance/replacement as listed. 1. Touch-up Paint: 2. Balances: 5 3. Locks:10 4. Glass Units for Window Types: 2 for all types. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Series 2000 as manufactured by Graham Architectural Products, York, PA. B. Thermal Barrier: Provides a continuous uninterrupted thermal barrier around the entire pe rimeter of the frame and all sash and not be bridged by any metal conductors at any point. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use on similar window units for a period of not less than three years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and has been tested to show adequate strength per AAMA 505. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength, a yield of 16,000 psi. Comply with ASTM B 221. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. 2. Provide non-magnetic stainless steel, tamper-proof screws for exposed fasteners, where required, or special tamper-proof fasteners. 3. Locate fasteners so as not to disturb the thermal barrier construction of windows. SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 5 of 9 C. Anchors, Clips And Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 123. D. Compression Glazing Strips And Weatherstripping: At manufacturer's option, provide neo prene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC415, PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D2287, or expanded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. E. Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide double weatherstripping using silicone coated woven pile with a polypropylene center fin complying with AAMA 701. F. Sealant: 1. Unless otherwise indicated for sealants required within fabricated window units, provide elastomeric type as recommended by window manufacturer for joint size and movement, to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking and non-migrating. Provide product com plying with AAMA Specification 803 and 808. 2. Refer to Division 7 for perimeter sealants between window units and surrounding con struction. G. Insect Screens: (if required): Half 1. Fabric: 18 x 16 aluminum charcoal mesh retained in screen frames with vinyl splines that permit easy replacement. 2. Frames: Extruded aluminum sections or steel frames with corners mitered and crimped with corner gussets. Manufacturer’s standard finish. 2.3 WINDOW TYPES (OPERATION) A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide window units complying with require ments of AAMA Classification "CW" grade windows. Windows for this project will be rated a minimum of CW55 for full size test units per AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 to withstand a design pressure of 55 psf minimum. B. Fixed Aluminum Windows or Panel Frames (F): Except for guardians or special provi sions as indicated for maintenance, cleaning, and removal, no operating hardware or equipment is required. C. Single Hung Aluminum Window (SH): 1. Units: One balanced, vertically sliding sash requiring up to four (4) counterbalancing mechanisms complying with AAMA 902 “Sash Balance Specifications”. Lift han dles on lower rail of lower sash shall have nylon end caps to protect the machined ends of the rail. Saw cut or machined edges will not be acceptable. Provide latches at meeting rails to lock sash in closed position. 2. Provide units which have “lift-out” feature permitting easy removal of both sash from inside without special tools. 3. Tilt-in type sash is not acceptable for this project. 2.4 FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 6 of 9 A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with specifications. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of win dow units and provide complete pre-glazing at the factory. B. Window Material: 1. Windows and Muntin Bars: Aluminum. 2. Secondary Members (friction tabs, shoes, weatherstripping guides, etc.): Aluminum or a material compatible with aluminum. 3. Main Frame and Sash: Nominal thickness of not less than 0.062 inches, except for fin trim either integral or applied. 4. Frame Sill: Nominal thickness of not less than 0.090 inches. 5. Standard wall thickness tolerance: In accordance with the Aluminum Association. C. Master Frame: Not less than 3-1/4 inches in depth. D. Sash: Hollow extruded horizontal sections and not less than 1-3/8 inches in depth. E. Hardware: 1. Material: Aluminum, stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum for hardware having component parts which are exposed. Cadmium or zinc- plated steel where used must be in accordance with ASTM Specification B 766 or B 633. 2. Aluminum automatic sill latches, two at sills over 26 inches, typical. 3. Limited Travel: Installation of an additional sash stop to limit the travel of either the top or bottom sash. b. One lock per sash at bottom. F. Thermal Barrier: Provides a continuous uninterrupted thermal barrier around the entire pe rimeter of the frame and all sash and shall not be bridged by any metal conductors at any point. G. Construction: 1. Assembly: Fabricate butt joints of the main frame and the sash, coped and joined neatly and secured by means of screws anchored in integral ports. Seal main frame from the back with a narrow joint sealant meeting AAMA 803 specification for narrow joint seal ants. 2. Sash: Screwed together construction so that they may be easily repaired. 3. Meeting rails of the top and bottom sash shall interlock in the closed position. 4. Meeting Rail Interlock: Two separate and distinct metal interlocks. Weatherstrip the meeting rail with fin-seal. 5. Fasten the top fixed meeting rail to the frame jamb by a minimum of two screws per jamb. 6. Top Fixed Glass: Inside glazed and of equal site lines to bottom sash. H. Mullions - Other structural members: When mullion units occur, whether they are joined by integral mullions, independent mullions or by a combination of frame members, the resulting members must be capable of withstanding the load outlined under Uniform Load specified load requirements, without deflecting more than 1/175th of its span. When independent or integral mullions are used to join windows, the mullions shall contain a thermal barrier as specified. Evidence of compliance may be by mathematical calculations. SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 7 of 9 I. Balances: Size and capacity required to hold bottom sash stationary in any open position. Easily accessible and replaceable in the field without the use of special tools. Spiral balances will not be accepted. 1. Standard Balances: Block and tackle type. Class II AAMA 902-93, with a MAF ratio of 0.6 Force required to keep a moving sash moving up or down, not to exceed 45 pounds. Maximum sash weight of approximately 65 pounds per sash. 2. High Performance Balances: Meet or exceed Class V performance with a MAF ratio of 0.30 Maximum sash weight not to exceed 120 pounds. High performance balances typi cally operate with 30 pounds of operating force or less. Allowable is 45 pounds. Furnish Class V (Ultra-Lift) balances when sash weight exceeds 65 pounds or windows are typi cally large for the project. J. Sash: 1. Join at the corners with screws in integral screw ports. 2. The sash must be easily removed from the frame for either cleaning or repair. K. Glazing: 1. Pre-glaze all units (except insulated panels as required for installation) at the factory with insulated glass as follows: a. Typical Insulated Glass: Overall thickness of 5/8 inch – 1 inch with two lites of 1/8 inch or 3/16 inch or 1/4 inch as size and loading require. (1) Primary Sealant: Polyisobutylene applied to the edge of the spacer. (2) Secondary Sealant: Silicone. (3) Air Spacer: Continuous metal spacer with formed corners and an in-line connect or, containing desiccant. 2. Glaze units to allow for glass replacement without the use of special tools. L. Weather Protection: 1. Provide means of drainage for water and condensation which may accumulate in members of window units. 2. Weatherstripping: Provide sliding weatherstripping for operating sash. M. Screens: Provide screens on operating vents as indicated on the architectural plans. N. Simulated True Muntin: The simulated muntin is a triple muntin system to simulate a true muntin appearance. Align muntins within the windows system and from window to win dow within an industry acceptable tolerance. 1. Exterior Grids: Hollow extruded aluminum or flat bar, finish to match the window system, or as shown on plans. Attach grids without exposed fasteners. Attach flat bar using a compatible double stick tape. 2. Interior Grid: 0.750” x 0.062” aluminum bar or profile grid as applicable, finish to match window system. 3. Muntin In-between Glass: Aluminum muntin in glass simulates glass perimeter spacer between interior and exterior applied grid. Machine and mechanically fasten the intersec tions of muntin grids. Fasten the grid to the sloped perimeter vent at each contact point. 2.5 CASING COVER SYSTEM: (Panning, Trims, Receptors, Mullions, Sills etc.) A. Exterior Casing Covers (Panning, Receptors, Subsills, Sills): Provide extruded prime alloy aluminum 6063-T5 no less than nominal 0.078 inch wall thickness. Casing covers of less than 2 inches in depth from the window frame may be of 0.062 inch wall thickness. Provide SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 8 of 9 aluminum sections of one piece designed to lock around the entire window frame for a weathertight connection. 1. Secure the casing cover section at the corners with stainless steel screws in integral screw ports with the joints back sealed using a compatible sealant. 2. Exposed screws, fasteners or pop rivets are not acceptable on the exterior of the casing cover system. B. Exterior mullion covers: Extruded aluminum shape to provide rigidity, no less than nominal 0.062 inch wall thickness. Seal against the casing cover sections with continuous bulbous vinyl weatherstrip interlocked within the mullion cover. C. Interior trim: 1. Interior Trim, Closures and Angles: As detailed, of extruded shapes no less than 0.062 inch nominal wall thickness. 2. Snap Trim: Apply in full length without splices and attach with clips spaced no more than 18 inches on center. Clips shall be no less than 3 inches long. No exposed screws will be allowed on interior trim. 2.6 ALUMINUM WINDOW FINISHES A. Finish Options 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard acrylic or polyester, baked-on, electrostatically applied enamel coating of manufacturer’s standard color(s) as selected by the Architect, applied over manufacturer’s standard substrate preparation including cleaning, degreasing, and chromate conversion coating. 2. Finish shall meet or exceed AAMA 2603 (formerly AAMA 603). a. Color: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Existing Construction: 1. Do not remove existing windows until new replacements are available and ready for im mediate installation. Do not leave any openings uncovered at end of working day, during wind-driven precipitation or during excessively cold weather. 2. Remove existing work carefully; avoid damage to existing work to remain. B. Perform operations as necessary to prepare openings for proper installation and operation of new retrofit units or new construction units. C. Verify openings are in accordance with shop drawings and Architects Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators and other components of work. In no case shall attachment to structure or to components of the window system be through or affect the thermal barriers of the window units. SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08520 - PAGE 9 of 9 B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor se curely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. C. Wedge fiberglass insulation between frames of new windows and construction to remain, or between frames and new receptor as applicable. Compress fiberglass to no less than 50 per cent of original thickness. D. Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Seal units following installation and as required to provide weathertight system. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at weatherstrip ping, for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Clean glass promptly after installation of windows. Remove glazing and sealant compound, dirt and other substances. D. Existing windows and other materials removed from site become property of the Contractor who shall promptly remove same and legally dispose of at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Initiate all protection and other precautions required to ensure that window units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. B. Send to Architect, with copy to Owner, written recommendations for maintenance and pro tection of windows following Substantial Completion of Window Contract. END OF SECTION 08520 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 1 of 18 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnishing and installation of all mechanical and electrical finish hardware necessary for all doors, and hardware as specified herein and as enumerated in hardware sets and as indicated and required by actual conditions at the building. The hardware shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates, and all other devices necessary for the proper application of the hardware. B. Related Sections 1. Division 6 Section – “Finish Carpentry” 2. Division 8 Section – “Interior and Exterior Doors” 3. Division 16 Section - Electrical C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets of all kinds, including open wall shelving and locks. 3. Signage, except as noted. 4. Complete toilet accessories including coat hooks, unless note otherwise. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Applicable state and local building codes and standards. B. FIRE/LIFE SAFETY 1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association a. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code b. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 2 of 18 c. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 2. State Fire Safety Code and Amendments to CT Supplement C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware D. Accessibility 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 2. ICC (CABO) / ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware F. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 requirements. Advise architect within the submittal package of incompatibility or issues. B. Catalog Cuts: Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, Include the following information: 1. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. 2. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet; list locking device and function for each opening. 3. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 4. Name and manufacturer of each item. 5. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. 7. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 8. Mounting locations for hardware. 9. Door and frame sizes and materials. 10. Name and phone number for the local manufacturer's representative for each product. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 3 of 18 11. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and/or access control components). Operational description should include how the door will operate on egress, ingress, and/or fire/smoke alarm connection. D. Key Schedule: After a keying meeting between representatives of the Owner, Architect, hardware supplier, and, if requested, the representative for the lock manufacturer, provide a keying schedule, listing the levels of keying, as well as an explanation of the key system's function, the key symbols used, and the door numbers controlled. Utilize ANSI A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as a guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting the optimal keying system. E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to the supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to the Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. F. Templates: After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. G. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of the hardware schedule, submit riser and wiring diagrams as required for the proper installation of complete electrical, electromechanical, and electromagnetic products. H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 and include the following: 1. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. 2. Catalog pages for each product. 3. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. 4. Parts list for each product. 5. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect “As installed.” 6. Copy of final keying schedule. 7. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 8. One (1) complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. 9. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify the project. I. Certificates of Compliance: Upon request of Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions shall be made available. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 4 of 18 A. Substitutions: Products are to be those specified to ensure a uniform basis of acceptable materials. Requests for substitutions must be made in accordance with Division 1 requirements. If proposing a substitute product, submit product data for the proposed item with product data for the specified item and indicate basis for substitution and savings to be made. Provide sample if requested. Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability. 1. Items specified as "no substitute” shall be provided exactly as listed. 2. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers listed have been requested by the Owner or Architect to match existing for continuity and/or future performance and maintenance standards or because there is no known equal product. 3. If no other products are listed in a category, then "no substitute" is implied. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work for consultation. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwrites Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. E. Electronic Security Hardware: When electrified hardware is included in the hardware specification, the hardware supplier must employ an individual knowledgeable in electrified components and systems, who is capable of producing wiring diagrams and consulting as needed. Coordinate installation of the electronic security hardware with the Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related subcontractors. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include installation instructions with each item or package. B. Each article of hardware shall be individually packaged in manufacturer's original packaging. C. Contractor will provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly and with proper material and paid for by whomever did the damage or caused the damage to occur. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 5 of 18 E. Hardware shall be handled in a manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Irregularities that occur to the hardware after it has been delivered to the Project shall be corrected, replaced, or repaired by the Contractor. Hardware shall be protected against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. F. No direct shipments will be allowed unless approved by the Contractor. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warrantees as specified in Division 1 and as follows: 1. Closers: 10 years, except electronic closers, 2 years. 2. Exit Devices: 3 years. 3. Locksets: 3 years, except electrified locksets, 1 year. 4. Other hardware: 1 year. B. No liability is to be assumed where damage or faulty operation is due to improper installation, improper use, or abuse. C. Products judged to be defective during the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with paragraph 1.05.A. B. Note that even though an acceptable substitute manufacturer may be listed, the product must provide all the functions and features of the specified product or it will not be approved. Item Scheduled Manufacturer Acceptable Substitute Hinges Ives (IVE) Hager, McKinney Flush Bolts Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Locksets & Deadlocks Schlage (SCH) Best, Corbin-Russwin, Sargent Exit Devices & Mullions Falcon (FAL) Precision, Sargent Manually Programmable Locks Schlage (SCH) Sargent, Simplex Keypad Locks Schlage (SCH) Sargent, Simplex Door Closers Falcon (FAL) Norton, Sargent Door Trim Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Protection Plates Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson (GLY) Rixson, Sargent SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 6 of 18 Stops & Holders Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Thresholds & Weatherstrip Reese (REE) Pemko, Zero Silencers Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Door Viewer Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Cylinders & Keying Schlage (SCH) Best, Corbin-Russwin, Sargent Key Cabinets Telkee (TEL) HPC, Lund Key Management Software Schlage (SCH) Corbin-Russwin, Medeco, Sargent C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. D. Where the hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to the Architect's approval. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent that no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Hardware shall be installed with the fasteners provided by the hardware manufacturer. B. Hinges 1. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges of type, material, and height as outlined in the following guide for this specification: a. 1-3/4 inch thick doors, up to and including 36 inches wide: Exterior: standard weight, bronze/stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches high Interior: standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches high b. 1-3/4 inch thick doors over 36 inches wide: Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high c. 2 inches or thicker doors: Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 7 of 18 2. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height. 3. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 4. The width of hinges shall be 4-1/2 inches at 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and 5 inches at 2 inches or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and/or wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 5. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives 5BB series, Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series. C. Flush Bolts 1. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in height shall be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. D. Cylindrical Locks - Grade 1 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING. 2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with a 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 3. Provide locksets with a separate anti-rotation throughbolts, and shall have no exposed screws. Levers shall operate independently, and shall have two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Provide electrical options as scheduled. 6. Lever trim shall be solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. Locksets shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment. a. Lever design shall be Schlage Rhodes (for pricing only - Final design TBD) b. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. 7. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage ND series, Best 93K series, Sargent 10-Line. E. Tubular Locks - Grade 2 1. Provide tubular locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 8 of 18 2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/8 inches adjustable to 2-3/4 inches backset with a 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide 2 3/4” backset, unless 2-3/8 inches is required by door or frame detail, or noted otherwise. 3. Provide locksets that fit a standard 2-1/8 inches diameter bore without the use of thru-bolts. Standard rose size shall be 2-1/2 inches in diameter. Locksets shall be adjustable to fit in 1- 3/8 inches or 1-3/4 inches door thickness. 4. Provide standard T-strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Lever trim shall be solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. a. Lever design shall be Schlage Elan. (for pricing only – final design TBD) 6. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage F series, Sargent 3-Line, Yale YH collection. F. Exit Devices 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit and/or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING. 2. Exit devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware. 3. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. Touch-pad finish shall be compatible to exit device finish. Compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls, tension springs also acceptable. 4. Devices to incorporate a deadlatching feature for security and/or for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrical requirements. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes. 6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at a height recommended by the exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by the Architect. 7. Mechanism case shall sit flush on the face of all flush doors, or spacers shall be furnished to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off the face of the door, provide glass bead kits. 8. Removable mullions shall be a 2 inches x 3 inches steel tube. Where scheduled, mullion shall be of a type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed. 9. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to a 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. a. Lever style will match the lever style of the locksets. b. Lever trim on doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. 10. Exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware. 11. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Falcon 24/25 series, Precision Apex series, Sargent 80 series with deadlatching. G. Door Closers SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 9 of 18 1. Provide door closers certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacture code. 2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with an aluminum cylinder. Closer body shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter, and heat-treated pinion journal shall be 11/16 inch diameter. 3. Provide hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to 10 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the requirements of the UL10C “positive pressure” fire test. 4. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 5. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other finish hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 6. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. 7. Door closers meeting this specification: Falcon SC70 series, Norton 7500 series, Sargent 350 series. H. Door Trim 1. Provide push plates 4 inches wide x 16 inches high x 0.050 inch thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust width to fit. 2. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 3. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. I. Protection Plates 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch thick as scheduled. Furnish with machine or wood screws, finished to match plates. Sizes of plates shall be as follows: a. Kick Plates – 10 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. J. Overhead Stops and Overhead Stop/Holders 1. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or overhead stop/holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and/or where conditions do not allow a wall stop or a floor stop presents a tripping hazard. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 10 of 18 2. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without a closer and positive type at doors with a closer. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Glynn-Johnson, Rixson, Sargent. K. Door Stops and Holders 1. Provide door stops for all doors in accordance with the following requirements: a. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. b. Where wall stops cannot be used, provide dome type floor stops of the proper height. c. At any opening where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, a medium duty surface mounted overhead stop shall be used. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. L. Thresholds, Seals, Door Sweeps, Automatic Door Bottoms, and Gasketing 1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items as closely as possible. Size of thresholds shall be as follows: a. Saddle Thresholds – 1/2 inch high x jamb width x door width 2. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: National Guard, Reese, Zero. M. Silencers 1. Provide "Push-in" type silencers for each hollow metal or wood frame. Provide three for each single frame and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified or required by code. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. N. Door Viewers 1. Provide appropriate door viewer for door type and rating with a minimum of 180-degree view area. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. O. Electro-Hydraulic Automatic Operators 1. Provide low energy automatic operator units with hydraulic closer complying with ANSI A156.19 where automatic operators are specified. 2. Provide hydraulic fluid of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the requirements of the UL10C “positive pressure” fire test. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 11 of 18 3. Provide units with conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Provide door closer assembly with adjustable spring size, back- check, and opening and closing speed adjustment valves to control door 4. Provide units with on/off switch for manual operation, motor start up delay, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, and door hold open delay. 5. Provide units with conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Provide door closer assembly with adjustable spring size, back- check valve, sweep valve, latch valve to control door. 6. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details. 7. Provide hard-wired actuator switches for operation as specified. Actuators shall be weather-resistant type at exterior applications. 8. Where automatic operators are scheduled, provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators shall control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators shall be sequenced to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by the Architect. Locate the actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by the Architect. 9. Provide units with vestibule inputs, which allow sequencing operation of two units, and a SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices. 10. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: LCN 4600 series, Norton 6900 series, Besam Power Swing. 2.3 FINISHES A. Finish of all hardware shall be US26D (BHMA 626/652) with the exceptions as follows: 1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: US32D (BHMA 630). 2. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: US32D (BHMA 630). 3. Protection Plates: US32D (BHMA 630). 4. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D (BHMA 630). 5. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match. 6. Wall Stops: US32D (BHMA 630). 7. Weatherstipping: Clear Anodized Aluminum. 8. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum. 9. All hardware at apartment units US15 (BHMA 619) 2.4 KEYING A. Provide a new key system from the same manufacturer as the locks conforming to the following requirements: 1. Provide removable core cylinders at all keyed devices. Provide construction cores with construction master keying for use during construction. The hardware supplier, accompanied by the Owner or Owner’s security agent, shall install permanent keyed cores SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 12 of 18 upon completion of the project. The temporary construction cores are to be returned to the hardware supplier. 2. Provide permanent cores and cylinders keyed by the manufacturer or authorized distributor as directed by the Owner. Provide owner with a copy of the bitting list, return receipt requested. 3. The hardware supplier, accompanied by a qualified factory representative for the manufacturer of the cores and cylinders, shall meet with Owner and Architect to review keying requirements and lock functions prior to ordering finish hardware. Submit a keying schedule to Architect for approval. 4. Provide cores and cylinders, unless noted otherwise, operated by a Grand Master Key System to be established for this project (Do not use the letter "I", “O”, or “X” for any of the grand masters). Allow for twenty-four Master Keys under each Grand Master, and sixty-four changes under each master key. All cylinders shall be keyed in alike or different sets as noted by their respective key set number. Do not use the letter "I" or “O” in any of the master key sets. 5. Provide keys as follows a. Ten grand master keys for each set. b. Ten master keys for each set. c. Three keys per core and/or cylinder. d. Two construction core control keys e. Two permanent core control keys f. Six construction master keys for each type (Contractor is to provide one set of construction keys to Architect) 6. Visual key control: a. Keys shall be stamped with their respective key set number and stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE". b. Grand master and master keys shall be stamped with their respective key set letters. c. Do not stamp any keys with the factory key change number. d. Do not stamp any cores with key set on face (front) of Core. Stamp on back or side of cores so not to be visible when core is in cylinder. 7. Deliver grand master keys, master keys, change keys, and/or key blanks from the factory or authorized distributor directly to the Owner in sealed containers, return receipt requested. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the keying system that was compromised at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Approved products: Schlage Classic, Best, Sargent. 2.5 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the Project. 1. Provide complete cross index system set up by the hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. 2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 3. Approved products: Telkee, HPC, Lund. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 13 of 18 B. Key Management Software 1. Provide one stand-alone key management software package. 2. Software shall provide tracking, issuing, collecting and transferring information regarding keys. 3. Software shall provide customized query, reporting, searching capability, comprehensive location hardware listings, display key holder photos and signature for verification, and provide automatic reminders for maintenance, back-ups and overdue keys. 4. Provide training for Owner’s personnel on the proper operation and application of the key management software. 5. Key management software meeting this specification: Schlage SiteMaster 200, Best Keystone 600N, Sargent KeyWizard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of any hardware, examine all doors, frames, walls and related items for conditions that would prevent proper installation of finish hardware. Correct all defects prior to proceeding with installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordination: 1. Prior to installation of hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of instructing installers on proper installation and adjustment of finish hardware. Representatives of locks, exit devices, closers, automatic operators, and electrified hardware shall conduct training; provide at least 10 days notice to representatives. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. 2. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of coordinating finish hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. A representative of the supplier of finish hardware, and doors and frames, the electrical subcontractor, and the Owner’s security contractor shall meet with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor prior to ordering finish hardware. After meeting a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. B. Hardware will be installed by qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. For technical assistance if necessary, installers may contact the manufacturer’s rep for the item in question, as listed in the hardware schedule. C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute. D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer. E. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 14 of 18 F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. G. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. H. Wire (including low voltage), conduit, junction boxes, and pulling of wire is by Division 16, Electrical. Electrical Contractor shall connect wire to door position switches and run wire to central room or area as directed by the Architect. Wires shall be tested and labeled with the Architects opening number. Connections to/from power supplies to electrified hardware and any connection to fire/smoke alarm system, and/or smoke evacuation system where specified is by Division 26 Electrical. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. D. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of locks, exit devices, closer, and any electrified hardware, shall perform the following work: 1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner’s personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. 5. At completion of project, a qualified factory representative for the manufacturers of locksets, closer, exit devices, and access control products shall arrange and hold a training session to instruct the Owner’s personnel on the proper maintenance, adjustment, and/or operation of their respective products. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 15 of 18 A. Provide for the proper protection of complete items of hardware until the Owner accepts the project as complete. Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or repaired by the responsible party. 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section “Finish Hardware,” hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. B. It is intended that the following schedule includes complete items of finish hardware necessary to complete the work. If a discrepancy is found in the schedule, such as a missing item, improper hardware for a frame, door or fire codes, the preamble will be the deciding document. C. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the Hardware Sets for series, type, and function. Refer to the preamble for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. D. Hardware Style: Schlage; Latitude Lever; Chrome. E. Hardware Sets HW SET: 01 (EXTERIOR PAIR) 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA MULLION KR4023 600 FAL 1 EA PANIC DEVICE 25-R-DT 26D FAL 1 EA PANIC DEVICE 25-R-NL 26D FAL 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 SCH 1 EA ASTRAGAL 964C AL REE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA MOUNTING PLATE SC70-18 689 FAL 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 630 GLY 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 655C AL REE 2 EA SWEEP 354C AL REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A AL REE 1 Electro-Hydraulic Automatic Operators DOOR CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED TOP-JAMB IN THE FLUSH CEILING POSITION (CLOSER WILL REQUIRE DROP PLATE) TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR THE OVERHEAD STOPS. HW SET: 02 (VESTIBULE PAIR) 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA ADA PULL 8103EZ-0 630 IVE 2 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 626 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA MOUNTING PLATE SC70-18 689 FAL SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 16 of 18 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 2 EA DOME STOP FS436 OR FS438 AS REQUIRED 626 IVE 1 SET ADHESIVE SEAL 105 DHS DOOR CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED TOP-JAMB IN THE FLUSH CEILING POSITION (CLOSER WILL REQUIRE DROP PLATE) TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR THE OVERHEAD STOPS. HW SET: 03 (OFFICE) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND50 626 SCH 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 OR FS438 AS REQUIRED 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 04 (CONFERENCE ROOM) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 05 (MEN & WOMEN) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET ND40S 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HD/PA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 06 (STORAGE, LAUNDRY, TRASH) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80 626 SCH 2 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 07 (MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, MAINTENANCE, CLOSET) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80 X TACTILE WARNING 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 17 of 18 HW SET: 08 (EXTERIOR SINGLE:ELECTRICAL) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC DEVICE 25-R-NL 26D FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 655C AL REE 1 EA SWEEP 354C AL REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A AL REE 655C GASKETING MUST BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO DOOR CLOSER. HW SET: 09 (COMMUNITY ROOM) 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA ADA PULL 8103EZ-0 630 IVE 2 EA PANIC DEVICE 25-R-L 26D FAL 2 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL HW SET: 10 (STAIR INTERIOR) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE F-25-R-L-BE 26D FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET ADHESIVE SEAL 105 DHS HW SET: 11 (APARTMENT ENTRY) 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 619 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE W/DEADBOLT L9456T 07A L583-363 619 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA DOOR STOP 61B 619 IVE 1 SET DOOR SEAL DS69C AL REE 1 EA SWEEP 354C AL REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A AL REE 1 EA VIEWER 698B 619 IVE VERIFY WHETHER GASKETING AND THRESHOLD ARE REQUIRED, OR IF THEY ARE SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR/FRAME. SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08710 - PAGE 18 of 18 WHERE DOOR SWING WILL CAUSE IT TO HIT AN ADJACENT DOOR, FURNISH IVES RB471 ROLLER BUMPER IN LIEU OF SPECIFIED BASEBOARD STOP. HW SET: 12 (UNIT INTERIORS - BED, BATH ) 3 EA HINGE 1010 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET F40 619 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 61B 619 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE HW SET: 13 (UNIT INTERIORS – CLOSET SINGLE) 3 EA HINGE 1010 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 619 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 61B 619 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE HW SET: 14 (CLOSET PAIR) 6 EA HINGE 1010 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 2 EA SGL DUMMY TRIM F170 619 SCH 2 EA DOOR STOP 61B 619 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE 1 EA MAGNETIC CATCH 327 673 IVE END OF SECTION 08710 SECTION 08800 GLAZING OXOBOXO FLATS SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 08800 – GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Glass and glazing for sections referencing this section for Products and installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Sections –“Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts”. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated showing properties and testing. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For argon filled Low-E-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer, and that unit is gas filled. D. Manufacturer’s standard Warranty and as specified in this Section. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASTM C669 - Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of Metal Sash. SECTION 08800 GLAZING OXOBOXO FLATS SECTION 08800 PAGE 2 of 5 C. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. H. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Safety Glass. I. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E283 - Test Method For Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. L. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. M. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. N. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. O. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units. P. FGMA - Glazing Manual. Q. FGMA - Sealant Manual. R. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. S. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum 5 years successful experience in work of this type. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout. SECTION 08800 GLAZING OXOBOXO FLATS SECTION 08800 PAGE 3 of 5 B. Provide a ten (10) Year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide manufacturer’s standard glass. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cardinal Glass. 2. Viracon. 3. Guardian Industries Corporation. 4. Libby-Owens-Ford Co. 5. PPG Industries 2.2 MATERIALS: GLASS A. Tempered glass for doors, windows, all sidelights, transoms, other glass within 18" of floor or adjacent walking surface; within 2'-0" horizontally from any doorway, and where indicated and required by code: 1/4" clear tempered float glass, conforming to reference listed above. Glass shall bear visible, permanent labels. 1. Where insulating glass is specified for conditions listed above, it shall be tempered insulated glass conforming to the paragraphs above and below. B. Insulating Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of two (windows three) 1/4" sheets of clear float glass (or other glass indicated or specified) separated by a 1/2" dehydrated interspace, (dry airspace), and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units. Tempered glass and coated glass for insulating glass shall conform to paragraphs above and below. Seal shall consist of inner seal of polyisobutylene sealant and outer seal of silicone glazing sealant. C. All glass in exterior doors shall be insulating argon filled "Low E" coated. D. All glazing to be less than U of .30. 2.3 MATERIALS: GLAZING A. Elastic glazing compound: F.S. TT-G 410E(1) or as recommended by Flat Glass Marketing Association. Architect will select color from manufacturer’s full line of colors. B. Glazing sealant: 1. For topping: Silicone glazing sealant, F.S. TT-S-1543A. SECTION 08800 GLAZING OXOBOXO FLATS SECTION 08800 PAGE 4 of 5 2. For heel bead and metal joints: One part acrylic sealant, F.S. TT-S-00230. 3. Color: As chosen by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of colors. C. Glazing tape: Polyisobutylene-butyl tape, self-shimming. D. Interior tape: Closed cell sponge neoprene. E. Shims: Silicone with durometer hardness of 40-60. F. Setting blocks: Silicone with durometer hardness of 70-90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to recceive glazing. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Manual of Flat Glass Marketing Association are hereby incorporated by reference. These manuals specify thickness and depth of glassing materials, placement of setting blocks and shims, and other glazing details. If manufacturer's requirements or S.I.G.M.A. requirements conflict with Flat Glass Marketing Association requirements, notify Architect and proceed as directed by him/her. SECTION 08800 GLAZING OXOBOXO FLATS SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 of 5 B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 2. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. 3. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 4. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation under provisions of Section 01770. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 08954 FLOOD VENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08954 - PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 08 95 43 - FLOOD VENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flood vents. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04920 – Masonry Restoration and Cleaning. B. Section 06110 – Misc. Rough Carpentry. C. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASCE/SEI 24-98, Flood Resistant Design and Construction. B. ASCE/SEI 24-05, Flood Resistant Design and Construction. C. ASCE/SEI 24-14, Flood Resistant Design and Construction. D. FEMA, 44-CFR, Part 59-60 and 60.3 National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP). E. FEMA/FIA-TB 1-2008, Openings in Foundation Walls and Walls of Enclosures for Buildings Located in Special Flood Hazard Areas. F. NER-624, National Evaluation Report No. NER-624. July 2007. G. International Code Council ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Automatic Foundation Flood Vents (AC-364). October 2007 H. International Code Council ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Mechanically Operated Flood Vents (AC-364). October 2013. I. Federal Emergency Management Association's MEMO W-08086, October 2008 J. UL - Test for Fire Dampers in conjunction with flood vents. SECTION 08954 FLOOD VENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08954 - PAGE 2 of 5 1.5 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. SMART VENT Products Flood Vents are Engineered Openings comply with the following: 2.1 Certifications: a. International Code Council - Evaluation Service Report (ESR-2074) including Florida Building Code Supplement, California Building and Residential Code Supplement. b. Florida Building Product Approval (FL5822) approved for use in High Velocity Hurricane Zones (HVHZ). 2.2 Compliance: a. ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Mechanically Operated Flood Vents (AC364). b. FEMA Technical Bulletin 1: Openings in Foundation Walls and Walls of Enclosures (TB-1). c. NFIP Bulletin W-08086. d. NFIP Flood Insurance Manual. e. American Society of Civil Engineers: Flood Resistant Design and Construction (ASCE 24-14). f. International Residential Codes (IRC) g. International Building Codes (IBC) h. Florida Building Code (FBC) i. California Building and Residential Code (CBC and CRC). 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 2.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2.3 Installation methods. C. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer with experience on projects of a similar size and scope with similar installation conditions. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store products in clean, dry area indoors until ready for installation. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. SECTION 08954 FLOOD VENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08954 - PAGE 3 of 5 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide the manufacturer's limited 15 year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Smart Vent Products, Inc., which is located at: 430 Andbro Dr. Unit 1; Pitman, NJ 08071; Tel: 877-441-8368; Email: request info (info@smartvent.com); Web: www.smartvent.com ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete one of the following two paragraphs; coordinate with requirements of Division 1 section on product options and substitutions. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 FLOOD VENTS A. General: Vents are constructed of Marine Grade 316 Stainless Steel formed and smooth-welded with a rigid construction. Frames are designed for installation in masonry, concrete, or framed walls, stud walls, garage doors and metal panels. Vents have a pivoting door assembly that is fitted with two patented sealed floats that provide vermin protection and immediately and automatically release the door upon contact with rising water to relieve unbalanced lateral forces on foundation walls. All flood vents are required to work bi-directionally, without human intervention. B. Dual Function Flood Vent Series: Provide both flood protection and natural air ventilation. Louvered blades are temperature controlled with a bimetal coil and the screen is vermin resistant: 2.1 SMART VENT Products Model # 1540-510: Ventilated with Louvered Blades and Screen. a. Flood Coverage: 200 sq.ft. b. Air Ventilation: 51 sq.in. c. Size: 16 inches W by 8 inches H. d. Rough Opening: 16-1/4 inches W by 8-1/4 inches H. 2.2 SMART VENT Products Model # 1540-511 Double or Stacking Model: Ventilated with Louvered Blades and Screen. a. Flood Coverage: 400 sq.ft. b. Air Ventilation: 102 sq.in. c. Size: 16 inches W by 16 inches H. d. Rough Opening: 16-1/4 inches W by 16-3/8 inches H. 2.3 SMART VENT Products Model # 1540-150202 (1540-0039) 2 x 2 SECTION 08954 FLOOD VENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08954 - PAGE 4 of 5 Multi-frame: Ventilated with Louvered Blades and Screen. a. Flood Coverage: 800 sq.ft. b. Air Ventilation: 204 sq.in. c. Size: 32-1/2 inches W by 16 inches H. d. Rough Opening: 33 inches W by 16-3/8 inches H. 2.4 SMART VENT Products One Piece Multi-Frame Model: a. Amount of vents wide: ______ (No more than six) b. Amount of vents high: _______(No more than three) c. Flood Coverage: _____ sq.ft. (Amount of vents multiplied by 200) d. Air Ventilation: _______ sq.in. (Amount of vents multiplied by 51) C. Accessories: 2.1 Installation Clips, four for each vent, with the exception for Wood Wall, Overhead Door, and Multi-frame models. 2.2 Hurribond or equivalent adhesive for masonry or concrete surfaces. 2.3 Adjustable wrench for thru-bolted models and screwdriver for stud wall models. 2.4 Trim and Sleeves: Sleeves for use in ' un-filled' masonry and for, Fire Walls where ' air-space' is required on Exterior Walls and to finish off the inside of openings: a. Adjustable Sleeve/Trim #1540-531-12: 8 inches to12 inches. b. Adjustable Sleeve/Trim #1540-531-15: 12 inches to15 inches. c. Wood Wall Model 1540-570 Interior Trim Flange #1540-573, 4 inch. d. Wood Wall Model 1540-570 Interior Trim Flange #1540-573, 9 inch. e. Vinyl Buck(s) #1540-800 Series for new poured concrete walls. D. Powder-Coat Finish with Color as follows: 2.1 Black E. Sealant: Provide joint sealers as specified in Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. Only Fire-Rated sealant shall be used on Fire-Rated walls or openings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify vent locations are ready to receive work, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by manufacturers. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Review and coordinate setting drawings, templates, and related items that are to be embedded in concrete and masonry. C. Verify that no obstructions exist that will interfere with the proper operation of the vents. SECTION 08954 FLOOD VENTS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 08954 - PAGE 5 of 5 D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install vents in at least two different walls spaced evenly around foundation perimeter, and located a maximum of 12 inches higher than the, interior or exterior grade, to the bottom of vent. C. Install vents plumb, level, square, true to line, and rigid. D. Attach vents securely in place using fasteners supplied or approved by manufacturer. E. Separate incompatible materials to prevent galvanic corrosion. F. Install one single height flood vent for every 200 sq. ft. of enclosed space below floodplain. G. Install one double height flood vent for every 400 sq. ft. of enclosed space below floodplain. H. Install one quad assembly flood vent for every 800 sq. ft. of enclosed space below floodplain. I. Install one multi-frame for every _______sq. ft. of enclosed space below the floodplain. J. Adjust flood vents for proper operation. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for wall assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring members. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413. SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 2 of 6 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. C. Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 3 of 6 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed as determined by ASTM E 488. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Capable of sustaining, a load equal to 10 times that imposed as determined by ASTM E 1190. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings or 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. b. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings. SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 4 of 6 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: hat shaped. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide foam gasket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 5 of 6 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING SECTION 09111 - PAGE 6 of 6 a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09111 SECTION 09216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09216 - Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient sound isolation clips for support of gypsum board for noise control in walls and ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists. 2. Division 07 “Building Insulation” for acoustic batt insulation and “Joint Sealants” for acoustic sealing at joints. 3. Division 09 “Gypsum Board” for gypsum wall board for installation on walls and ceilings. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Dead or Shear Load: Maximum design load of 36 pounds per each clip. B. Conform to UL Fire Resistance Directory design assemblies, where required. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s guide specifications product sheet, for each type of product. SECTION 09216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09216 - Page 2 of 4 1.5 SAMPLES A. Submit verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Manufacturer’s specifications, catalog cuts and other items needed to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. The Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section. a. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification. 2. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of approving application method. B. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer- approved installation methods. Comply with workmanship standard. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section. 1. Mock-Up Size: As determined by Acoustical Consultant. 2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. 3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval. C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, and undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufactuere and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer. SECTION 09216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09216 - Page 3 of 4 B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Pliteq, GenieClip ACS 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Model Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required by manufacturer to fasten clips to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 09216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09216 - Page 4 of 4 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install clip in accordance with manufacturer’s approved product installation instructions. B. Spacing and location of sound isolation clips shall be determined by the manufacturer based on wall or ceiling type. Installation drawing details shall be provided by the manufacturer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity of the system. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 09216 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 1 of 7 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6: Rough framing for wood framing. 2. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 4. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 2 of 7 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. B. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, fire resistive type, UL rated, 5/8” thick, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered edges. C. Mold and Moisture Resistive Board: ASTM C36, mold and moisture resistive, fire resistive type, UL rated, 5/8” thick, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered edges. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 3 of 7 D. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: 1. ASTM C36, fire resistive Type X, UL rated, 5/8” thick, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered edges. 2. ASTM C36; "Dens-Glass Gold" fire resistive type, UL rated, 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered edges 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 4 of 7 D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Manufacturer: Roxul. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 5 of 7 C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. (Regular, Moisture Resistive, & Mold Resistive.) 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 6 of 7 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. Apply gypsum sheathing per UL Design requirements. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws and as needed for fire rating UL Design. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations recommended by manufacturer. Advise/Consult with Architect as to location(s). C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated or required. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated or required. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated or required. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 - PAGE 7 of 7 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09265 - PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For shaft wall assemblies from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09265 - PAGE 2 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on drawings B. STC Rating: As indicated on drawings. C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-H track. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. D. Resilient Channel: where indicated in drawings. E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level. F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board. G. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, Type X. H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Shaftliner. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock Fireguard Shaftliner. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel. SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09265 - PAGE 3 of 5 2. Thickness: 1 inch 3. Long Edges: Double bevel. C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 unless otherwise indicated. B. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board” that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09265 - PAGE 4 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing. 1. Reinforcing: Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated), accurately positioned and secured behind at least one layer of face panel. D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09265 - PAGE 5 of 5 E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. G. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings while maintaining fire- resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. H. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09265 SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 1 of 11 SECTION 09310 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic Wall Tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Porcelain Floor Tile 4. Waterproof membrane. 5. Crack isolation membrane. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 2 of 11 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum .6 coefficient of friction. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 12-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each color or finish from one source or producer. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 3 of 11 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Joint sealants. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 4 of 11 B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Floor Tile: 1. Common Areas: a. Daltile: Torreon: “Brino, 12x12: Base at Laundry Room 4”x12”. B. Ceramic Wall Tile. 1. Common Areas: a. Daltile: Modern Dimensions: Architectural Gray, 4 ¼” x 12 ¾”. 2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2. Description: As per schedule. 2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 5 of 11 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 644 Membrane Waterproofing System. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. c. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. d. C-Cure; Pro-Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. e. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. f. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. g. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. i. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane b. C-Cure; CureLastic 949 c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane d. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Fracture-Guard 5000. f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar With Latex Additive (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1 and A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 6 of 11 a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. (Basis of design.) h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color selected by Architect.. B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. Floor Grout a. Common Areas: Laticrete: Natural Gray 2. Wall Grout a. Common Areas; Laticrete Natural Gray 2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 7 of 11 a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. c. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. d. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 8 of 11 C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped ±1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 9 of 11 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile as indicated in drawings. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with joints as recommended by tile manufacturer. G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them, if feasible. Consult with Architect prior to installation. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 10 of 11 K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grouts smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: SECTION 09310 TILE SECTION 09310 - PAGE 11 of 11 1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113. a. Tile Type: Porcelain Tile. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout. d. Crack Isolation Membrane. B. Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F143: Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout; TCA F143. a. Tile Type: Porcelain Tile. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. grout. C. Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring: a. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Standard unsanded cement. END OF SECTION 09310 SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient stair accessories. 3. Resilient molding accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Alternates” 2. Division 6 Section “Finish Carpentry” 3. Division 9 Section "Resilient Flooring” 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: a. Stairs: Johnsonite, 4” cove, Color: Moon Rock. b. Apartments: Johnsonite, 4” cove, Color: Snow White. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 3 of 6 D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length but not 48 inches or less unless full length of wall. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium. 2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Stair Treads: 1. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite: Safr T Rib HT Square Nose, Color: Moon Rock. B. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. C. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Johnsonite: Transition Strip, Color: Fawn. B. Description: Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. C. Material: Vinyl. D. Profile and Dimensions: As required for specific application or indicated on drawings. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 4 of 6 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 5 of 6 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet, resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - PAGE 6 of 6 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 09654 - RESILIENT FLOORING . PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile and plank. 2. Vinyl sheet floor covering, with backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related sections include Division 3 Section “Gypsum Underlayment.” 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include floor tile layouts, seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns, if any. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 2 of 6 1.6 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 3 of 6 B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturer: Mannington, Touchstone VCT “Putty”. Size: 12 by 12 inches 2.3 VINYL PLANK 1. Manufacturer: Base Bid: a. Shaw, Terrain, Color: Pirch; Product Number: 0517V, Color number; 00684. 2. Manufacturer: Alternate: a. Shaw, Quiet Cover, Color: Urban Ash. B. Wearing Surface: Manufacturers standard. C. Plank size: As standard with manufacturer. 2.4 VINYL SHEET FLOORING 1. Manufacturer: a. Apartment Baths (Base Bid): Tarkett, Fiberfloor-Fresh Start, Color: Stanbridge Stone Greige. SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 4 of 6 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit flooring and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Vinyl Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, holes, unevenness, scale, large spaces between plywood edges, raised plywood edges and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Further verify there are no lumps, bumps, ridges, depressions. If these radiate thru the installed material it will be rejected and re-installation will be required. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 5 of 6 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. Damp mop entire area. 3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring. B. Prior to layout, again verify subfloor is free of unevenness, holes, ridges, large space between plywood edges, raised plywood edges, and any foreign debris or matter that will radiate through the tile. C. Lay out flooring from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay square with room axis. 2. Leave space at perimeter to allow for expansion per manufacturers requirements. D. Match flooring for color and pattern by selecting flooring from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed flooring. E. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces at perimeter of room. Extend floor tiles into all room spaces, including closets, built-ins and, cabinetry locations under, appliances, etc. Extend floor tiles to center of door when in closed position, unless otherwise noted, if floor pattern, color, or type of material changes. F. Extend floor tiles to center of cased openings, if floor pattern, color, or type of material changes. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. SECTION 09654 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09654 - PAGE 6 of 6 H. Adhere flooring to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Roll flooring with a 100 pound roller before adhesive sets. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three coat(s) as per manufacturers instructions. E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09651 SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09681 - PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, carpet tile. 2.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 2.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3: a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09681 - PAGE 2 of 4 6. Pile direction. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 2.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. 2.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 2.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Master II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 2.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 2.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 2.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09681 - PAGE 3 of 4 PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: See schedule and drawings. 1. Office: Manufacturer: Shaw Contract a. Carpet Tiles Product : Vapor Carpet Tile b. Size: 18”x36” c. Color: Notion d. Product Number: 5T036 e. Color Number; 37760 2. Elevator Flooring: Manufacturer: Bolon a. Product Name: Graphic Collection b. Color: Herringbone Black c. Product Number: 103 230 3. Vestibule: Manufacturer: Shaw Contract a. Color: Portabella b. Product Number: 5T035 c. Color Number: 34761 3.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09681 - PAGE 4 of 4 D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. F. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. G. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. H. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. I. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. L. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 09681 SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 1 of 16 SECTION 09911 – PAINT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of all exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint all exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting also includes field painting exposed steel and iron supports, and paintable windows and sashes. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Prefinished Architectural woodwork. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 2 of 16 a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Copper and copper alloys. d. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Exposed roof penetrations including pipes, vents, etc. and all wall penetrations, including vents are to be painted in the shop not in the field. Paint color will be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range including premium to match adjacent material. See Mechanical drawings for all material to be used. 6. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. There will be multiple colors throughout the Project, requiring cutting in edges. E. The Painting Contractor shall furnish all material, labor, tools, equipment, scaffolding and /or other structure and supervision, and applicable permits required for the cartage, unloading, storage, surface preparation, application and cleanup of the paint and allied products covered by this Specification. 1. The Painting Contractor is financially responsible for the theft of any of his/her materials, supplies, tools or equipment that has been delivered or stored for the execution of the required work. F. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving". 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies". 3. Division 15 Section “Mechanical”. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products, for interpretation of terms used in this Section. B. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 and Master Painter’s Institute (MPI) apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 5 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #145 (Gloss Level 1). 2. Velvet Flat , high side sheen, refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 10 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (Low Sheen): MPI #44, 138 (Gloss Level 2). SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 3 of 16 3. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 10 and 25 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #145, 139 (Gloss Level 3). 4. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4). 5. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 6. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range between 70 and 85 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6) 7. High gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range above 85 when measured at a 60-degree meter. (from perpendicular). MPI #114 (Gloss Level 7) C. Material: "Paint" as used herein, means all coatings systems materials, which include stains, primers, latex emulsions, enamels, sealers, fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1. The paint shall be used and applied per the label and technical data sheet instructions, and the paint shall not be modified or extended by any method other than that provided for in these instructions. The correct surface preparation and condition of surface shall be rigidly adhered to. Technical Data Sheets may be obtained from your local manufacturer's representative. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. List number of coats. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, applying each coating material, recommended surface preparation, and recommended environmental conditions during application. Include compatibilities among coats in manufacturer’s information. Bring to the attention of the Architect any incompatibilities. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. Submit two fan decks illustrating manufacturer’s complete range of colors and textures for each surface finishing product scheduled. 2. After color selection, Architect will furnish a paint schedule for surfaces to be coated. D. Provide 4’x4’ field mock up for each type of painting system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance for a minimum of 5 years. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 4 of 16 B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Paint shall be prepackaged and tinted to specified colors. D. The Painting Contractor shall be responsible for promptly requesting clarification when instructions are lacking or are unclear, where there are conflicts occurring in the specification and/or paint manufacturer’s literature, where there are conflicts with firs or applicable legal codes, or if any procedure specified is not clearly understood. E. All pertinent safety regulations, both the Owner’s/Builder’s and OSHA shall be adhered to rigidly. In addition all safety precautions noted on the product data sheets and labels shall be observed for both materials and equipment. F. The painting contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work with other trades on the Project. G. The painting contractor shall be responsible for visiting the job site, reviewing Architect’s plans and specifications to familiarize themselves with the job and working conditions prior to submitting a cost proposal for the work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 2. Store in a manner that to minimize danger of fire, and so as to protect building surfaces and equipment from spills. Do not store flammable materials in building. 3. Clean up in an appropriate manner and in a designated area so paint excess is disposed of in a proper manner and location. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 5 of 16 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed, dry, and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. C. Do not apply paint unless temporary lighting is adequate. D. Provide ventilation during painting and drying. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. C. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. D. Colors: a. P-1: 955 Berber White, eggshell. Common area walls. b. P-2: HC-82 Bennington Gray, semi-gloss. Common area trim. c. P-3: Ceiling White, flat. All gypsum board ceilings. d. P-4: HC-21 Huntington Beige, semi-gloss. First floor doors. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 6 of 16 e. P-5: HC-124 Caldwell Green, semi-gloss. Second floor doors. f. P-6: HC-156 Van Deusen Blue, semi,gloss. Third floor doors. g. P-7: I-70 Linen White, eggshell. Unit walls. h. P-8: OC-12 Muslin, Semi-gloss. Unit trim/doors. i. P-9: 1552 River Reflections. All exterior trim and metal doors. j. P-10: 1548 Classic Gray. All porches. E. VOC Content: Less than 150 g/l; no formaldehyde 2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer and mineral reinforced cement panels: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% All Purpose Acrylic Primer N023. 2. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start 100% Acrylic Superior Primer 046 B. Mineral fiber reinforced cement panels: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% All Purpose Acrylic Primer N023. 2. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start 100% Acrylic Superior Primer 046 C. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% All Purpose Acrylic Primer N023 D. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. E. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. 2. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer P06 F. Exterior Cellular PVC and Fiberglass (Azek and Fypon): 1. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic All Purpose Primer N023. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 7 of 16 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic All Purpose Primer N023. B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Latex Vapor Barrier Primer Sealer 260. C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer – Ceilings below attics: 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Latex Vapor Barrier Primer Sealer 260. D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Full gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer N372: E. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. F. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec 100% Acrylic Latex Low Lustre House Paint N185 B. Exterior Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex: Factory-formulated semi-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec House and Trim Paint W170. C. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP, D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss P29. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Ceiling Paint: 1. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat Finish N373 SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 8 of 16 2. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Sweep-Up Latex Flat 153 B. Interior Latex Eggshell: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Finish N374. 2. Benjamin Moore: Natura Interior Eggshell 513. 3. Benjamin Moore: Aura Satin Waterbourne Interior Paint No. 526. C. Interior Semi-gloss Enamel: Factory-formulated full gloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-gloss Finish No. N376. 2. Benjamin Moore: Natura Interior Semi Gloss 514. 3. Benjamin Moore: Aura Semi Gloss Waterbourne Interior Paint No. 528. D. Interior full gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full gloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Latex High Gloss Metal and Wood Enamel 309. 2. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP D.T. M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel P28 3. Benjamin Moore: 2.7 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND FINISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Wood Grain Filler No. 238. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. C. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Finish: Factory-formulated clear satin acrylic-based polyurethane finish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane Satin, No. 423. D. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Finish: Factory-formulated clear gloss acrylic-based polyurethane finish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane High Gloss, No. 422 2. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Finishes Polyurethane Finish High Gloss No. N428. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 9 of 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: All surfaces to be painted shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, dirt, dust and all foreign materials or other contaminants which may adversely adhesion or appearance of the newly applied coating. Broom clean entire area before starting any painting work. B. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 10 of 16 b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with manufacturer’s recommended clear primer. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. All rusted areas must be power-tooled cleaned (SSPC-SP3) or hand-tooled (SSPC-SP2) at a minimum to guarantee adhesion prior to primer application. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Paint shall be prepackaged and tinted to specific colors. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 11 of 16 1. The number of coats shall be a minimum of three: for opaque paint - one primer and two finish coats; for clear finish - three coats sanded in between applications. A tinted primer shall not be considered a substitute for the first finish coat. 2. Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. a. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. b. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. c. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. d. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. e. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime and finish coats. f. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. g. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. h. Finish interior of closets same as adjoining room, including wood casing and baseboard. Paint all surfaces. i. Sand lightly between each succeeding coat. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. j. All coatings shall be applied in a professional manner without brush marks or other defects. k. Paint entire planes and areas. Do not stop in the middle of a wall, ceiling, or floor. When touching up, repaint entire plane, not just a spot. l. Do not get paint on adjacent surfaces. Clean up spills and spatters as soon as possible, no later than the end of the same day. m. No thinning shall be permitted. n. During progress of the Work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. o. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and materials which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.Painted surfaces scheduled to have semi-gloss or high gloss finishes: Surfaces must be sanded between coats. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats of stain killer/sealer and final coat until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 12 of 16 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. a. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. a. All adjacent substrates shall be completely covered to protect all building components and other miscellaneous items such as shrubs, trees, fixtures, automobiles, etc. that may be damages from overspray and windborne overspray. Painting Contractor shall be responsible for any and all expenses to satisfactorily remove, repair, replace any and all substrates or surfaces that exhibit overspray from painting work. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system at least as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than the thicknesses specified in this section, and the number of coats specified in this section. E. Between coats on GWB walls, trowel in place drywall compound to cover defects in the surface and sand smooth to match adjacent surfaces. Reprime those areas. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. G. Mechanical items to be painted include, and are not limited to, the following: 1. Un-insulated metal piping, pipe hangers and supports. 2. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 4. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Electrical items to be painted include, and are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 13 of 16 I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, excessive roller stipple, differences in sheen, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, differences in sheen, or other surface imperfections. L. Force paint into cracks and seams. M. Cut straight, clean, neat edges. Curved edges shall be uniform and neat. N. Avoid painting in direct sunlight and cease painting at least two hours before sunset to avoid the harmful effects of condensation on the coating. The coating must be allowed to cure before nightfall to avoid “frosting.” O. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove non-complying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Cleanup: Clean only in designated areas. Do not dump paint down drains. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 14 of 16 1. Clean adjacent surfaces while painting, no later than the end of the day. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is completed, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Cellular PVC and Fiberglass (Azek and Fypon): a. Primer: Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% All Purpose Acrylic Primer N023. b. First and Second Coats: Benjamin Moore Super Spec House & Trim PaintW170 B. Smooth Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over smooth exterior wood surfaces: a. Primer: Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Interior/Exterior 100% All Purpose Acrylic Primer N023. b. First and Second Coats: Benjamin Moore Super Spec House & Trim PaintW170 C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Full Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P06. b. First and Second Coats: Impervex Enamel High Gloss Metal and Wood Enamel 309. D. Site Railings: 1. High Performance Coating: “Tenemec” 2. Primer/Surface prep: As recommended by coating manufacturer 3. Number of coats: 2 over primer 4. Finish: Gloss 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Ceilings except for bathrooms: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 15 of 16 1. Flat Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Eco Spec WB Interior Primer 231. b. First and Second Coats: Waterborne Ceiling Paint 508. B. Gypsum Board Walls except for bathrooms: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Satin Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Eco Spec WB Interior Primer 231. b. First and Second Coats: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 223. C. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings at Bathrooms: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semi Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Eco Spec WB Interior Primer 231. b. First and Second Coats: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 223. D. Wood – Painted: a. Primer: Eco Spec WB Interior Primer 231. b. First and Second Coats: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish N376. E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Full Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04 b. Finish Coats: Eco Spec WB Interior Semi Gloss N376. 3.8 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Waterborne Stain High gloss- Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear high gloss varnish over a sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler for open-grain wood such as oak. Filler color to match wood. Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. b. Stain Coat: Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. c. 2 Finish Coats: Benwood Finishes Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane High Gloss N428 for railings and wood caps. SECTION 09911 PAINT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 09911 - PAGE 16 of 16 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS PAINT SCHEDULE A. This shall include all items normally painted and not itemized in this schedule. They shall include, and are not limited to, railings, grills, non-finished hardware, stairs, and so forth. All such items shall be painted as per this section. B. Building Finish Color schedule shall be issued by Architect at a later date. END OF SECTION 09911 SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Signage, interior and exterior 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Full size including border. Copy PH 1. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). 3. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit. D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 3 of 6 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. General: Signage scope includes and is not limited to building identification sign, exterior building numbers at each door, buzzer entry system signage, interior unit entry doors, room identification at all non-apartment doors and stairs, miscellaneous door signs. 2.2 MATERIALS A. As selected by Owner and Architect and indicated in the sign schedule. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. A. R. K. Ramos. 4. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 5. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 6. Charleston Industries, Inc. 7. Gemini Incorporated. 8. Grimco, Inc. 9. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 10. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 11. Mills Manufacturing Company. 12. Mohawk Sign Systems. 13. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 14. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 15. Southwell Company (The). B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. C. Molded Plastic Characters: Thermoformed or Injection molded and as follows: 1. Integral Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Cutout Characters: Provide characters with square-cut, smooth edges. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Acrylic: 0.50 inch thick. E. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: As per schedule. SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 4 of 6 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy ,background and frame colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts,are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 5 of 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. E. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. 2. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through face of plaque into wall surface. SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10431 - PAGE 6 of 6 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10431 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10522 - PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets. 2. Division 10 Section "Signs" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and cabinets. 3. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 4. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks, and valves. 5. Division 16 Sections for low-voltage wiring for fire protection cabinet alarms. 6. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for fire extinguisher location lights. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10522 - PAGE 2 of 5 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). D. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh m1 (diamond), 6 mm thick. 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc; < c. Potter Roemer LLC; Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.; B. Cabinet Construction: Rated to match rating of wall in which they are to be installed. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10522 - PAGE 3 of 5 C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for semirecessed cabinet installation. G. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. H. Door Material: Steel sheet. I. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. J. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, door to open 180 degrees. L. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER. 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Horizontal. M. Finishes: SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10522 - PAGE 4 of 5 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils 1. Color and Gloss: Match Phase 1. SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10522 - PAGE 5 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 48 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10523 - PAGE 1 OF 11 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10523 - PAGE 1 OF 11 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated and as required by local Fire Marshal. . 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated black baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 10523 - PAGE 1 OF 11 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS h. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Horizontal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguisher and mounting brackets in locations indicated, and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 48 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. Provide solid blocking to support brackets. END OF SECTION 10523 SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 1 of 7 SECTION 10550 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. USPS-approved ganged interior recessed horizontal mailboxes. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware: for lock cylinders for postal specialties that are keyed to building keying system and for letter slots in doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty. Finish to match Phase 1. B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include identification sequence for compartments. 2. Include layout of identification text. 3. Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and other anchorages installed as part of the work of other Sections. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch square Samples. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 2 of 7 B. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations, signed by product manufacturer. Include written approval by Postmaster General. C. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Key Blanks: 50 for for each type of compartment-door lock installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing postal specialties and whose installations have been given final approval by local postmasters authorizing use by USPS. B. Source Limitations for Each Type of Postal Specialty: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. For USPS-approved products, use only those included on current lists of USPS manufacturers and models. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of postal specialties with wall construction. B. Templates: Obtain templates for installing postal specialties and distribute to parties involved. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 3 of 7 b. Faulty operation of hardware c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, exposed matte finish where exposed. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation, extra smooth where exposed; or electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 879/A 879M, Coating Designation 08Z (24G). D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. E. Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, manufacturer's standard copper alloy. F. Zinc Sheet or Plate: ASTM B 69, manufacturer's standard sheet or plate and zinc alloy. G. Die-Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 85, manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy. H. Die-Cast Brass: ASTM B 176, manufacturer's standard copper alloy. I. Die-Cast Zinc: ASTM B 86, manufacturer's standard zinc alloy. J. Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55, hot-dip galvanized. K. Stainless-Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8M, Type 316. L. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.2 USPS-APPROVED HORIZONTAL MAIL RECEPTACLES (INTERIOR FULLY RECESSED) A. Front-Loading, USPS-Approved Horizontal Mail Receptacles Consisting of multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 4 of 7 compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS-STD-4C. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Eagle Mailboxes. b. American Postal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Postal Products Unlimited, Inc. c. Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. d. Bommer Industries, Inc. e. Jensen Industries. f. Salsbury Industries. g. Security Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Mail Delivery: USPS. 3. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings. a. Type: Two groups of mail receptacles in double-column configuration with double master door, 33 total mail compartments not less than 3 1/4 inches high by 13 1/4 inches wide by 15 inches deep one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master-door lock, and one parcel compartment(s): 15 1/2 inches high by 13 1/4 inches wide by 15 inches deep. 4. Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master-door lock. a. Master-Door Lock: Stainless steel door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster. 5. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each with heavy duty cam lock and tenant identification as required by cited standard. a. Compartment-Door Locks: Comply with USPS-L-1172C, PSIN O910, for locks and keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS; with three keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. 6. Frames: Fabricated from heavy duty extruded aluminum with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment. 7. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. 8. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with manufacturer's standard finish. 9. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: Clear. SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 5 of 7 2.3 ACCESSORIES 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. E. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces. F. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support loads. G. Fabricate rack ladders to support indicated number of units to form a column of units. H. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 6 of 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. 1. Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. 3. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install horizontal mail receptacles with center of tenant-door lock cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions. C. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they have been installed according to USPS regulations. B. Obtain written final approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - Page 7 of 7 C. Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. D. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. E. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10550 SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - Page 1 of 5 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Private-use bathroom accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - Page 2 of 5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. C. Provide solid wood blocking for attachment of all accessories. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. G. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - Page 3 of 5 2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser where indicated on drawings. (All) 1. Olympia 2. Chrome; 7MT032 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. B. Combination Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser, where indicated on drawings.(Public) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-369 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser (Public) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2111 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap.. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 oz. 5. Refill Indicator: Window type. D. Grab Bar (Per drawings) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806.99 x size and configuration indicated on the drawings and Bobrick B-4998 Swing-up grab bar. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 ga (1.2mm thick). a. Finish: Smooth, on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. E. Mirror Unit where indicated on drawings. 1. Frameless a. Corners: Beveled Edge 2. Hangers: Manufacturer standard 3. Size: 18”x36” or as indicated on Drawings a. Cabinet: Steel with corrosion-resistant finish. F. Soap Dish where indicated on drawings. (Private units). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6897 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). G. Medicine Cabinet where indicated on drawings. (Private units) SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - Page 4 of 5 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-398 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Size: 15 1/4”W x 25 1/2”H x 3 5/8”D. 4. Door: Framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet equipped with continuous hinge and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch. 5. Shelves: Four, adjustable. 6. Material and Finish: a. Cabinet: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). H. Robe Hook (Private units). 1. Olympia 2. Chrome; 7MT033 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). I. Toothbrush and Tumbler Holder (Private units). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-7679. 2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). J. Towel Bar (Private units). 1. Olympia 2. Chrome; 7MT031 (18”); 7MT030 (24”0 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. K. Towel Ring 1. Olympia 2. Chrome 7MT034 2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Basis of design). 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. C. Mop and Broom Holder 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-239 SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - Page 5 of 5 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 34 inches. 4. Hooks: Four 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using stainless steel fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 SECTION 10810 TUB/SHOWER UNITS SECTION 10810 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 10810 – ACRYLIC TUB/SHOWER UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. Alleged conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect before proceeding for resolution. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ADA Compliant single piece acrylic tub/shower units and all accessories for a complete installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6: Section “Rough Carpentry”. 2. Division 7: Joint Sealers. 3. Division 9: Gypsum Board Assemblies. 4. Division15: Plumbing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A 117.1 - "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI Z 124.1 – American National Standards Institute Acrylic Bathtubs. C. Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act”. D. Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act”. E. ASTM F. UL G. NEMA H. NFPA 70 Article 100 SECTION 10810 TUB/SHOWER UNITS SECTION 10810 - PAGE 2 OF 4 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s complete product data on selected unit and accessories required for a complete installation. Include component dimensions and requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Dimensions, unit description, diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. E. Manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual. F. Manufacturer’s Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain tub/shower unit through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer must be an authorized representative of the manufacturer’s product, having a minimum of five successful years experience installing units of the type on this Project. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that shower units and fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. Deliver templates and requirements in a timely fashion so as not to delay work of other trades. B. Coordinate with Framing contractor to insure proper and adequate blocking and bracing is in place. C. Coordinate manufacture of unit with fixtures (faucets etc.) selected. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication of shower units and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. All materials shall arrive in the manufacturer’s original unopened and labeled cartons. Inspect for damages immediately. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period of ten years from Date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 10810 TUB/SHOWER UNITS SECTION 10810 - PAGE 3 OF 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Aquarius Bathware, thru Praxis Industries, LLC 2.2 PRODUCT A. Units: Tub/Shower unit, NAHB Listed Acrylic One Piece, Aquarius Model S6032TS, (LESS seat and grab bars), valve location varies depending on handedness of the unit, color white. Size: OD 60” x 33” x 84” 1. Factory Modifications: a. Full Wood Reinforcement b. 1” OD 18 Gauge SS Grommet Style Curtain Rod 2. Field Installed Accessories: a. Heavy Duty 66” x 72” White Vinyl Weighted Curtain 3. Trim: See Section 15400 – Plumbing Systems PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, blocking, supports and other conditions affecting the installation of roll in shower units. Area shall be dry, clean and free of foreign matter. B. Examine roughing-in for plumbing and electrical systems. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install shower unit following manufacturer’s installation instructions. C. Set all units plumb, level and true. D. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01770. SECTION 10810 TUB/SHOWER UNITS SECTION 10810 - PAGE 4 OF 4 B. Provide protective covering for installed units, fixtures and fittings. C. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities. END OF SECTION 10810 SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - Page 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 3. Refrigeration appliances. 4. Dishwashing appliances. 5. Garbage disposal appliances. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, waste disposers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. B. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - Page 2 of 5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintenance repairs. B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period One year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Electric Range: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter for on-site service on surface-burner elements. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Refrigerator/Freezer Sealed System: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter for on-site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Dishwasher: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter for on-site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period for Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Other Components Two years from date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - Page 3 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RANGES A. Electric Range 1. Apartment Kitchens: Smooth Top, General Electric Model # JBS60DKBB, Black 2. HC Kitchen: Coil Top, General Electric Model # JB450DFBB, Black 2.2 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION & MICROWAVE A. Range Hood & Microwave: 1. Apartment Kitchens: Micro/Hood, General Electric Model # JNM3163DJBB, Black. 2. HC Kitchen: Hood only, General Electric Model #JVX3300DJBB, Black. 3. Leasing Office: Countertop Microwave only, General Electric Model # PES7227DLBB, Black. 4. Community Room Kitchen: Microwave Drawer only, Sharp Model# KB-6524PS, Stainless Steel. 2.3 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER A. Refrigerator/Freezer Energy Star Qualified and complying with AHAM HRF-1. 1. Apartment & HC Kitchens: General Electric Model # GTE18ETHBB, Black. 2. Leasing Office: General Electric Undercounter Model # GME04GGHBB, Black. 3. Community Room Kitchen: General Electric Model #GTE181SHSS, Stainless Steel. 2.4 DISHWASHERS A. Dishwasher 1. Apartment Kitchens: General Electric Model # GSD3300KBB, Black 2. HC Kitchen: General Electric Model # GLDT690JBB, Black. 2.5 GARBAGE DISPOSALS A. Garbage Disposal 1. Apartment & HC Kitchens & Community Room: inSinkErator ¾ HP Evolution Compact Disposal 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - Page 4 of 5 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods will be installed. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Utilities: See Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - Page 5 of 5 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. END OF SECTION 11451 SECTION 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - PAGE 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Kitchen cabinets. 2. Vanity cabinets. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for countertops. 2. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances. 3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semi exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers, and bottoms of wall cabinets. C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets, and tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware. B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. SECTION 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - PAGE 2 of 5 C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches for each species. 2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in. for each species. 3. Solid wood trim with transparent finish, 8 inches long, for each species. 4. Exposed hardware, for each type of item. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For casework, from manufacturer. Containing verification that cabinets do not contain formaldehyde. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets from single source from single manufacturer. B. Verify cabinet constructed to be certified by the Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturer’s Association as meeting HUD Severe Use standards. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify actual dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. B. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. SECTION 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - PAGE 3 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINETS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Basis of Design Product: Advanta Cabinets; 2. Product: Newbury 3. Color: Storm 4. Full overlay doors & drawer fronts. 5. Extreme Series Construction Type with upgrade to matching end and side panels. 6. Toe kick finish to match cabinet. B. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1., meeting HUD Severe Use Standards. 1. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi exposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. C. Face Style: 1/4” Reveal Full Overlay; door and drawer styles. D. Cabinet Style: Face frame. E. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick, with 1/4-inch- thick, veneer-faced plywood center panels. F. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints. G. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Match face frame H. Cabinet End Construction: 1/2-inch- thick plywood. I. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 3/4-inch- thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back rail. J. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch solid wood, interlocking with end panels and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue and with mechanical fasteners. K. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. L. Base-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. M. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame. N. Drawers: Fronts same as doors; sides and back a minimum of ¾” thk “C” grade solid lumber with sides dovetailed into fronts; backs dadoed into sides; bottoms ¼” hardwood exterior plywood let into front, sides and back. All drawer parts glued and stapled together with no exposed fasteners. Drawers mounted on pair 75lb capacity side mounted metal guides KV1300- SECTION 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - PAGE 4 of 5 Cabinet member guides attached at rear 3/4” solid lumber hanging rail. All slides to be heavy duty. 1. Retain one "Subfronts, Backs, and Sides" Subparagraph below to suit level of quality required. 2. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 3/4-inch thick solid wood. 3. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2-inch- thick solid wood or 3/8-inch- thick plywood. 4. Bottoms: 1/4-inch- thick plywood. O. Shelves: 3/4-inch- thick plywood front hardwood edge banded. P. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels. Q. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. All nail, screw, or staple holes in exposed surfaces shall be filled and finished to match adjacent surfaces. 2.2 CABINET MATERIALS A. General: 1. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. B. Exposed Materials: 1. Exposed Wood Species: Maple. a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. b. Staining and Finish: As per schedule. 2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- thick, solid-wood edging of same species as face veneer. C. Semi exposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same species as exposed surfaces. 2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces. D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard. SECTION 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - PAGE 5 of 5 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9 and HUD Severe Use Standards of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Pulls: Liberty Hardware; 3-3/4” Square Bow Pull, Chrome, Product# P50413V-CHR-C7. Install Horizontal centered on drawers; Vertical centered on door rails. C. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges for full overlay doors allowing full 180 degree operation. D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings, are aligned, and are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 12 inches o.c. with minimum No. 10 wafer-head screws and chrome washers sized for 1- inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 1. Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12356 SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 12512 - PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 12512 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Horizontal slat louver blinds. 2. Operating hardware. 3. All accessory items and fasteners for a complete and fully operational installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section “Finish Carpentry.” 2. Division 8 Section “Windows.” 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics and operating features. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inches long, illustrating slat materials and finish, color, rod type and color. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 12512 - PAGE 2 of 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal slat louver blinds installed at window openings; manual control of raising and lowering by rod for full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design manufacturer: Hunter Douglas Contract Aluminum Blinds, "Decor Model CD80." 1. Color: Raw Umber B. Alternate products from the following manufacturers which meet these specifications are also acceptable, subject to the Architect's approval: 1. Levelor. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Alloy 6011 Slats: 1 inch wide; .008" thick, heat treated and spring tampered with dust inhibitor treatment. B. Slat Support: 100 % polyester yarn, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail: 1 3/8" x 1 3/8" x .024" steel treated to resist corrosion; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation, color to match slats. D. Control Tilter: Die-cast worm and gear type with clutch. E. Bottom Rail: Steel with double lock seam in closed oval shape with color coordinated thermoplastic end caps. F. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.4 FINISHES A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: Color to be selected by Architect from 37 Hunter Douglas standard selections. B. Control Wand: Clear. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance as recommended by manufacturer. SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 12512 - PAGE 3 of 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners. C. Place intermediate head supports as required. D. Installation Tolerances 1. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Offset from Level: 1/8. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Provide horizontal louver blinds in all windows. END OF SECTION 12512 SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 1 of 11 SECTION 14210 - ELEVATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The General Conditions state that the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Where there is a conflict within the Contract Documents the most expensive option shall prevail. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for the following: a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section. B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment. 2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 2 of 11 3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and control closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including standby power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 3 of 11 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Warranty Period: 5 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 1. KONE Inc., EcoSpace. 2. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 4 of 11 C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements for seismic risk Zone 2 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Provide earthquake equipment and all characteristics required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 2.3 ELEVATORS A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Elevator Description: 1. KONE Inc. EcoSpace Elevator. 2. Rated Load: a. 3500 lb (Bldg B) b. 2500 lb (Bldg F) 3. Rated Speed: a. 200 fpm (Bldg B) b. 150 fpm (Bldg F) 4. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby power operation. b. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in ASME A17.1/CSA B44. c. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. d. Nuisance call cancel. 5. Car Enclosures: a. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. b. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. c. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. 1) Wilsonart: Asian Night #7949. d. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Door Sills: Nickel silver, polished. g. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling h. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round sides and rear of car. i. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring per finish schedule. 6. Hoistways: a. Width: 8’-6” (Bldg B); 7’-4” (Bldg F) b. Depth: 6’-11” (Bldg B); 5’-9” (Bldg F) c. Pit Depth: 5’-0” clear. d. Clear Overhead: 13’-0” (Bldg B); 13’-1” (Bldg F) SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 5 of 11 e. Type: Single-speed side sliding. f. Frames Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Doors Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Sills: Nickel silver. 7. Hall Fixtures Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 8. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish b. Provide hooks for protective pads set(s) of full-height protective pads. 2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters. B. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section. C. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication. D. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted- or welded-steel units. E. Guides: Per manufacturer standard requirements. 2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to provide type of operation indicated. B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at lobby. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease. C. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches. Key is removable SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 6 of 11 2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2. Floor Finish: Specified in a Division 9 Section. 3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch fire-retardant-treated particleboard manufacturer’s standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic- laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer’s full range. 4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 6. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 7. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 8. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 9. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. 10. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 7 of 11 B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to UL 10B. 1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated on drawings for adjacent and surround walls. C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards. 1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life lamps and acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs. B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 13. E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station. F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units at heights and locations indicated in drawings to meet all ADA and building code standards. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 8 of 11 2. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing. H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. I. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated signals that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return level with doors open. J. Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position indicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. K. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. G. Bronze Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal). H. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze). I. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600. J. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 9 of 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system. D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 10 of 11 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Operating Test: Load elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as required. C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. Initial Maintenance Service: SECTION 14210 ELEVATOR SECTION 14210 - PAGE 11 of 11 Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time of two hours or less. END OF SECTION 14210 SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0500 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 21 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler, standpipe and fire hose, and combination sprinkler and standpipe systems. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: Piping identification. C.Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Standpipe design. D.Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2012. B.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications; 2015. C.ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011. D.ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings; 2012. E.ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends; 2012. F.ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). G.ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. H.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014). I.ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013. J.ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2013. K.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a. L.AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1. M.AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. N.AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010. O.AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012. P.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011. Q.FM Approval Guide; current edition. R.NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016. S.NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; 2013. T.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0500 - PAGE 2 OF 5 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified this section. 1.Minimum three years experience. 2.Approved by manufacturer. C.Conform to UL requirements. D.Valves: Bear FM and UL (DIR) product listing label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. E.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B.Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A.Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13. B.Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14. C.Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX. 2.2 BURIED PIPING A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, black, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape. 1.Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded or ASME B16.25, buttweld ends; with double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape. 2.Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D.1M. 2.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black (depending on size). SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0500 - PAGE 3 OF 5 1.Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A47/A47M. 2.Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2.4 PIPE SLEEVES A.Vertical Piping: 1.Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor. 2.Provide sealant for watertight joint. 3.Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. B.Pipe Passing Through Below Grade Exterior Walls: 1.Zinc coated or cast iron pipe. 2.Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and pipe on both pipe ends. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.Modular/Mechanical Seal: 1.Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing opening. 2.Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening. 3.Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A.Material: 1.Metals and Finish: Comply with ASME A112.18. B.Construction: 1.One-piece for mounting on chrome-plated pipe and one-piece or split-pattern type elsewhere. 2.Internal spring tension devices or setscrews to maintain a fixed position against a surface. 2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C.Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. E.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F.Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G.Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.8 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS A.Rigid Mechanical Couplings for Grooved Joints: 1.Dimensions and Testing: Comply with AWWA C606. 2.Minimum Working Pressure: 300 psig. 3.Housing Material: Fabricate of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. 4.Housing Coating: Factory applied orange enamel or __________. SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0500 - PAGE 4 OF 5 5.Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 6.Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc electroplated steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, and partitions and seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 1. Underground Piping: Caulk pipe sleeve watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal components. SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0500 - PAGE 5 OF 5 2. Aboveground Piping: a. Pack solid using mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C592. b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch where penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces. 3. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in accordance with Section 07 8400 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. 4. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components. M. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems: 1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete walls at piping entrances into building. 2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve inner diameter or penetration diameter. 3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration. 4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and piping. 5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal. 6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. N. Escutcheons: 1. Install and firmly attach escutcheons at piping penetrations into finished spaces. 2. Provide escutcheons on both sides of partitions separating finished areas through which piping passes. 3. Use chrome plated escutcheons in occupied spaces and to conceal openings in construction. O. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation. B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0523 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 21 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Two-piece ball valves with indicators. B.Check valves. C.Iron OS&Y gate valves. D.NRS gate valves. E.Indicator posts. F.Trim and drain valves. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe and fittings. B.Section 21 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. C.Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. D.Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes. E.Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A.EPDM: Ethylene-propylene diene monomer. B.NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. C.NRS: Non-rising stem. D.OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. E.PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013. B.ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2010. C.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014. D.FM Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Global; current edition. E.NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016. F.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. G.UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H.UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I.UL 789 - Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J.UL 1091 - Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. SECTION 21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0523 - PAGE 2 OF 5 C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. D.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: 1.Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer. 2.Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1.Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2.Protect threads and flange faces. 3.Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B.Use the following precautions during storage: 1.Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt. a.Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. b.Maintain caps in place until installation. 2.Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. a.Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. b.If outdoor storage is unavoidable, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C.Use the following precautions for handling: 1.Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.UL Listed: Provide valves listed in UL (DIR) under following headings and bearing UL mark: 1.Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment. a.Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve. b.Level 1: HLOT - Valves. c.Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control. d.Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves. e.Level 3: HMER - Check Valves. f.Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves. B.ASME Compliance: 1.ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 2.ASME B1.20.1 for threads on threaded-end valves. 3.ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C.Comply with NFPA 13 for valves. D.Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as required. E.Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. F.Valve Actuator Types: 1.Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except trim and drain valves. SECTION 21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0523 - PAGE 3 OF 5 2.Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves. 3.Hand-lever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves 2 NPS and smaller. 2.2 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS A.UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM standard listing for indicating valves (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112. B.Description: 1.Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 2.Body Design: Two piece. 3.Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. 4.Port Size: Full or standard. 5.Seat: PTFE. 6.Stem: Bronze or stainless steel. 7.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8.Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 2.3 CHECK VALVES A.Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B.Type: Center guided check valve. C.Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron. D.Center guided check with elastomeric seal. E.Hinge Spring: Stainless steel. F.End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded. 2.4 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES A.Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B.Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. C.Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. D.Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. E.Stem: Brass or bronze. F.Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. G.Supervisory Switch: External. H.End Connections: Flanged. 2.5 NRS GATE VALVES A.Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B.Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. C.Wedge: Cast or ductile iron with elastomeric coating. D.Stem: Brass or bronze. E.Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. F.Supervisory Switch: External. G.End Connections: Flanged. 2.6 INDICATOR POSTS A.UL 789 and FM standard listing for indicator posts. SECTION 21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0523 - PAGE 4 OF 5 B.Type: Underground. C.Base Barrel Material: Cast or ductile iron. D.Extension Barrel for Adjustable Length Indicator Posts: Cast or ductile iron. E.Cap: Cast or ductile iron. F.Operation: Wrench. 2.7 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A.Ball Valves: 1.Description: a.Pressure Rating: 175 psig. b.Body Design: Two piece. c.Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. d.Port Size: Full or standard. e.Seat: PTFE. f.Stem: Bronze or stainless steel. g.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. h.Actuator: Hand-lever. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Confirm valve interior to be free of foreign matter and corrosion. B.Remove packing materials. C.Examine guides and seats by operating valves from the fully open position to the fully closed position. D.Examine valve threads and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E.Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. 1.Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. 2.Verify gasket for size, defects, damage, and suitable material composition for service. 3.Replace all defective valves with new valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Comply with specific valve installation requirements and application in the following Sections: 1.Section 21 1200 for application of valves in fire-suppression standpipes. 2.Section 21 1300 for application of valves in wet and dry pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems. B.Install listed fire protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. C.Install check valve in water supply connections and backflow preventer at potable water supply connections. D.Valves with threaded connections to have unions at equipment arranged for easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. E.Valves in horizontal piping installed with stem at or above the pipe center. F.Position valves to allow full stem movement. SECTION 21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0523 - PAGE 5 OF 5 G.Install valve tags. Comply with Section 21 0553 requirements for valve tags, schedules, and signs on surfaces concealing valves; and the appropriate NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are installed. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0548 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 21 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Seismic snubber assemblies. B.Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. B.FEMA E-74 - Reducing the Risks of Nonstructural Earthquake Damage; 2011. C.NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with specified requirements. 2.Include seismic rating documentation for each restraint component accounting for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. 2.Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for housekeeping pads, bases, member sizes, attachments, and supported equipment. 3.Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, concrete weights, equipment static loads, and support points. 4.Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building code. 5.Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations. 6.Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls and the manufacturer's requirements. 7.Include the seal of the Professional Structural Engineer registered in the the State in which the Project is located, on the drawings and calculations which at a minimum include the following: a.Seismic Restraint Details: Detailed drawings of seismic restraints and snubbers including anchorage details that indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration, edge distance, and spacing of anchors. b.Equipment Seismic Qualification Certification: Certification by the manufacturer or responsible party that each piece of equipment provided will withstand seismic force levels as specified in the applicable building code for seismic controls. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes. SECTION 21 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0548 - PAGE 2 OF 4 B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. D.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ____ years of experience. E.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. See Section 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections for additional requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.AFCON; ______: www.afcon.org. B.PHD Manufacturing, Inc; ______: www.PHD-mfg.com. C.TOLCO, a product of Eaton Corporation; ______: www.tolco.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES A.Products to be listed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. B.Directional External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment. 2.Construction: Interlocking steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads. 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions. 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact. 2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A.Products to be listed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. B.Cable Restraints: 1.Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in lateral directions. 2.Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage. 3.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 4.Connections: a.Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool-less wedge insert lock connectors. b.Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. C.Rigid Restraints: SECTION 21 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0548 - PAGE 3 OF 4 1.Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in lateral directions and carry both compressive and tensile loading. 2.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 3.Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 4.Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the system. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. C.On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. D.Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. E.Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance. 1.Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support. 2.5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support. 3.10 inches Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support. 3.2 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC A.Comply with the following: 1.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.ASCE 7. 3.FEMA E-74. 4.NFPA 13. B.Provide end of line restraint. C.Seismic Snubbers: 1.Install on all isolated equipment. D.Piping: 1.Provide seismic bracing. 2.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces. 3.Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an earthquake. 4.Brace every run 5.0 feet or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing locations. 5.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections): SECTION 21 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0548 - PAGE 4 OF 4 6.Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet on center or as required for horizontal runs, whichever is less. 7.Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements: a.Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils. b.Install piping such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components. c.Provide swing restraints as required to control potential impact due to limited space between subject components. 8.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. E.Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members. 3.Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist imposed loads is not permitted. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0553 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 21 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Nameplates. B.Tags. C.Pipe markers. D.Ceiling tacks. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Stencil paint. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007. B.ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C.Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D.Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A.Instrumentation: Tags. B.Major Control Components: Nameplates. C.Piping: Tags. D.Small-sized Equipment: Tags. E.Valves: Nameplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A.Manufacturers: 1.Kolbi Pipe Marker Company.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 2.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company; ______: www.seton.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1.Letter Color: White. 2.Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3.Background Color: Black. 4.Thickness: 1/8 inch. 5.Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. SECTION 21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0553 - PAGE 2 OF 3 2.3 TAGS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Company.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. C.Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Company.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. C.Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D.Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.5 CEILING TACKS A.Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B.Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9123 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B.Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C.Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D.Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F.Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. 1.Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2.Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3.Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. SECTION 21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 0553 - PAGE 3 OF 3 G.Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 1200 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1200 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 21 1200 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Valves. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Fire Protection Piping. B.Section 21 0523 - General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping. C.Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. D.Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; 2013. B.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. B.Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog sheet for equipment indicating rough-in size, finish, and accessories. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate supports, components, accessories, and sizes. 1.Submit shop drawings and product data to Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. 2.Submit proof of approval to Architect. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. E.Operation Data: Include appropriate manufacturer's data. F.Maintenance Data: Include servicing requirements and test schedule. G.Certificates: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 14. Maintain one copy on site. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store products in shipping packaging until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A.Specialty Valves: 1.Hose Station Valve: a.Angle type, brass finish, 1-1/2 NPS with automatic ball drip. 2.Hose Connection Valve: SECTION 21 1200 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1200 - PAGE 2 OF 2 a.Angle type; brass finish; 2-1/2 NPS, thread to match fire department hardware, 300 psi working pressure, with threaded cap and chain of same material and finish. 2.2 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A.Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. B.Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. C.Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. D.Label: "Standpipe - Fire Department Connection". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install in accordance with NFPA 14. C.Locate hose station valve in cabinet at 60 inches above finished floor. D.Connect standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection. E.Flush entire system of foreign matter. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform field inspection and testing (Field Acceptance Test) in accordance with Section 01 4000. B.Test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14. C.Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshal. END OF SECTION SECTION 21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1300 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 21 1300 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Wet-pipe sprinkler system. B.System design, installation, and certification. C.Fire department connections. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm. C.Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves. D.Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. E.Section 21 3000 - Fire Pumps. F.Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2012. B.ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. C.NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016. D.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. 2.Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. D.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. F.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 3.Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type. SECTION 21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1300 - PAGE 2 OF 4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to UL (DIR) requirements. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer. D.Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL (DIR) label or marking. E.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment: 1.Tyco Fire Protection Products, a Tyco Business: www.tyco-fire.com. 2.Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A.Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building. B.Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13. C.Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. D.Provide fire department connections where indicated. E.Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. F.Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1.Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2.Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 3.Other Types: As required. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A.Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1.Response Type: Quick. 2.Coverage Type: Standard. 3.Finish: Chrome plated. 4.Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 5.Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. B.Exposed Area Type: Pendant type with guard. 1.Response Type: Quick. 2.Coverage Type: Standard. 3.Finish: Brass. 4.Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C.Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. SECTION 21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1300 - PAGE 3 OF 4 1.Response Type: Quick. 2.Coverage Type: Extended. 3.Finish: Chrome plated. 4.Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 5.Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D.Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. E.Spray Nozzles: Brass with solid cone discharge, 30 degrees of arc with blow-off dust cap. 1.Finish: Brass. F.Flexible Drop System: Stainless steel, multiple use, open gate type. 1.Application: Use to properly locate sprinkler heads. 2.Include all supports and bracing. 3.Provide braided type tube as required for the application. a.Manufacturers: 1)Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A.Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm, pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim with the following additional capabilities and features: 1.Activate electric alarm. 2.Test and drain valve. 3.Replaceable internal components without removing valve from installed position. B.Backflow Preventer: Reduced pressure principle valve assembly backflow preventer with drain and OS & Y gate valve on each end. C.Test Connections: 1.Inspector's Test Connection for Preaction Systems: a.Provide test connections approximately 6 ft above floor for each or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device, located at the most remote part of each system. b.Route test connection to an open-site drain location, excluding janitor sinks, accepting full flow without negative consequences. c.Supply discharge orifice with same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. d.Limit vertical height of exterior wall penetration to 2 ft above finished grade. 2.Backflow Preventer Test Connection: a.Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly, listed hose valves with 2.5 inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain. b.Furnish one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof. D.Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch. E.Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. F.Fire Department Connections: 1.Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2.Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3.Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4.Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection". SECTION 21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 21 1300 - PAGE 4 OF 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B.Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C.Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. D.Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. E.Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. F.Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. G.Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. H.Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. I.Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. J.Hydrostatically test entire system. K.Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0513 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Single phase electric motors. B.Three phase electric motors. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. B.Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015. B.IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; 2004. C.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. E.Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. F.Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to NFPA 70. B.Provide certificate of compliance from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of high efficiency motors. C.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower. SECTION 22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0513 - PAGE 2 OF 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Lincoln Motors: www.lincolnmotors.com. B.A. O. Smith Electrical Products Company: www.aosmithmotors.com. C.Reliance Electric/Rockwell Automation: www.reliance.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A.Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characteristics. B.Construction: 1.Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3.Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C.Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency. D.Wiring Terminations: 1.Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2.For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.3 APPLICATIONS A.Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. B.Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor start type. 2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A.Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B.Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C.Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D.Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E.Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F.Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. G.Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.5 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A.Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B.Starting Current: Six times full load current. C.Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. SECTION 22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0513 - PAGE 3 OF 3 D.Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E.Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F.Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G.Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H.Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter; refer to Section 26 2913. I.Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. J.Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. K.Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque. L.Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. M.Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112. N.Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C.Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0516 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 0516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Flexible pipe connectors. B.Expansion joints and compensators. C.Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression. B.Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015. B.EJMA (STDS) - EJMA Standards; Tenth Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 2.Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, special procedures, and external controls. D.Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions. E.Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Conform to UL requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING A.Manufacturers: 1.Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com. 2.Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Inner Hose: Carbon Steel. C.Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel. D.Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F. E.Joint: Flanged. F.Size: Use pipe sized units. G.Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. SECTION 22 0516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0516 - PAGE 2 OF 3 2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING A.Manufacturers: 1.Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com. 2.Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Inner Hose: Bronze. C.Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. D.Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F. E.Joint: Flanged. F.Size: Use pipe sized units. G.Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. H.Application: Copper piping. 2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS - STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS TYPE A.Manufacturers: 1.Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com. 2.Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F. C.Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches. D.Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch. E.Joint: Flanged. F.Size: Use pipe sized units. G.Application: Steel piping 3 inches and under. 2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS - EXTERNAL RING CONTROLLED STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS TYPE A.Manufacturers: 1.Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com. 2.Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F. C.Maximum Compression: 15/16 inch. D.Maximum Extension: 5/16 inch. E.Maximum Offset: 1/8 inch. F.Joint: Flanged. G.Size: Use pipe sized units. H.Accessories: Internal flow liner. I.Application: Steel piping over 2 inches. 2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS - TWO-PLY BRONZE BELLOWS TYPE A.Manufacturers: 1.Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com. SECTION 22 0516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0516 - PAGE 3 OF 3 2.Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides. C.Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F. D.Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches. E.Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch. F.Joint: Soldered. G.Size: Use pipe sized units. H.Application: Copper piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) Standards. C.Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment. Provide line size flexible connectors. D.Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. E.Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement is directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus. F.Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. G.Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexible connectors. Grooved piping need not be anchored. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0519 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Positive displacement meters. B.Flow meters. C.Pressure gages and pressure gage taps. D.Thermometers and thermometer wells. E.Static pressure gages. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013. B.ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi; 2007. C.ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2014. D.ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2014. E.AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Metal Alloy Main Case; 2015. F.AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters -- Turbine Type, for Customer Service; 2012. G.AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters; American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C706). H.AWWA M6 - Water Meters -- Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance; 2012. I.UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. C.Samples: Submit two of each type of instrument specified. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID) A.Manufacturers: 1.Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2.FMC Technologies: www.fmctechnologies.com. 3.Venture Measurement, a Danaher Corporation Company: www.venturemeasurement.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and cast iron frost-proof, breakaway bottom cap, hermetically sealed register, remote reading. SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0519 - PAGE 2 OF 3 2.2 LIQUID FLOW METERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2.Venture Measurement, a Danaher Corporation Company: www.venturemeasurement.com. 3.McCrometer, Inc: www.mccrometer.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Calibrated ASME MFC-3M venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for conversion of differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case. C.Annular element flow stations with meter set. 1.Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted through welded threaded couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate, metered fluid, line size, station or location number. 2.3 PRESSURE GAGES A.Manufacturers: 1.Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2.Moeller Instrument Company, Inc: www.moellerinstrument.com. 3.Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1.Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube. 2.Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter. 3.Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent. 4.Scale: Psi and kPa. 2.4 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS A.Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi. B.Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 150 psi. C.Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch connections. D.Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern. 2.5 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2.Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. 3.Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear Lexan. SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0519 - PAGE 3 OF 3 3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77. 4. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.6 TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. 2.7 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. 3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters. C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage. D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from insulation. Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. F. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. G. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. H. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 22 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Equipment support bases. B.Vibration isolators. C.Seismic snubber assemblies. D.Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections: Statement of Special Inspections; additional requirements for code-required special inspections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. B.ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; 2015. C.FEMA 412 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment; 2002. D.FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment; 2004. E.FEMA 414 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe; 2004. F.SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2008. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS. 2.Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. 2.Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases, member sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment. 3.Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete weights, equipment static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolator location and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator. 4.Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. 5.Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations. 6.Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes. SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 2 OF 6 B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. D.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ____ years of experience. E.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Kinetics Noise Control, Inc; ______: www.kineticsnoise.com. B.Mason Industries; ______: www.mason-ind.com. C.Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc; ______: www.veco-nyc.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: 1.All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads. 2.Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading. 3.Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection. 2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES A.Structural Bases: 1.Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting of the isolators. 2.Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped. 3.Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers. 2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.Non-Seismic Type: 1.All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads: a.Configuration: Flat or molded. b.Thickness: 0.25 inch minimum. c.Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface. 2.Elastomeric Mounts: a.Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds. b.Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure. 3.Steel Springs: a.Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing. b.Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame. SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 3 OF 6 4.Spring Hanger: a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element preventing metal to metal contact. b.Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment. B.Seismic Type: 1.Coil Springs Consisting of Single Elements: a.Housing: Manufactured from cast iron material. b.Ductile Material: Designed and rated for seismic applications. c.Spring: Restrained by housing without significant degradation of vibration isolation capabilities during normal equipment operating conditions. d.Resilient Snubbing Grommet System: Incorporated and designed with clearances of no more than 0.25 inch in any direction preventing direct metal-to-metal contact between supported member and fixed restraint housing. e.Resilient Pad: Located in series with spring. f.Coil Springs: Color coded elements to have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness with 50 percent overload capacity. g.Finish: Suitable for the application. 2.All Directional Elastomeric: a.Material: Molded from oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds. b.Operating Parameters: Designed to operate within the isolator strain limits providing maximum performance and service life. c.Attachment Method: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure. d.Rating: Cast iron and aluminum housings rated for seismic restraint applications. e.Minimum Operating Static Deflections: Deflections indicated in project documents are not to exceed published load capacities. 2.5 SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. 2.FEMA 412. 3.FEMA 413. 4.SMACNA (SRM). B.All Directional External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all directions. 2.Construction: Interlocking steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads. 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions. 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact. 2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. 2.FEMA 412. SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 4 OF 6 3.FEMA 413. 4.FEMA 414. 5.SMACNA (SRM). B.Cable Restraints: 1.Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions. 2.Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage. 3.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 4.Connections: a.Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool-less wedge insert lock connectors. b.Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. C.Rigid Restraints: 1.Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both compressive and tensile loading. 2.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 3.Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 4.Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the system. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Bases: 1.Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. 2.Adjust equipment level. C.On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. D.Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. E.Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. F.Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance. 3.2 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. 2.FEMA 412. 3.FEMA 413. SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 5 OF 6 4.FEMA 414. B.Seismic Snubbers: 1.Provide on all isolated equipment, piping and ductwork. 2.Provide minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators. 3.Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch maximum clearance. C.Floor and Base-Mounted Equipment, Vibration Isolated Equipment and associated Vibration and Seismic Controls for Connections: 1.Install equipment anchorage items designed to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install vibration and seismic controls designed to include base and isolator requirements. 3.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 4.Provide isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational and seismic forces. 5.Where equipment is not designed to be point loaded, provide base capable of transferring gravity and seismic demands from equipment to isolator base plate anchorage. D.Suspended Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide supports and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 3.Brace equipment hung from spring mounts using cable or other bracing that will not transmit vibration to the structure. 4.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. E.Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members. 3.Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist imposed loads is not permitted. F.Piping: 1.Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7. 2.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces. 3.Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an earthquake. 4.Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent transmission of vibrations and noise to the structure. 5.Brace every run 5.0 feet or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing locations. 6.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections): a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center. b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 80.0 feet on center. 7.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials (cast iron, no-hub, plastic or non-UL listed grooved coupling pipe): a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet on center. SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0548 - PAGE 6 OF 6 b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center. 8.Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet on center or as required for horizontal runs, whichever is less. 9.Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements: a.Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils. b.Install piping consistent with ASCE 7, such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components. c.Provide swing restraints as required to control potential impact due to limited space between subject components. 10.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. C.Perform testing and inspections of the installation in accordance with Section 01 4533. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0553 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Nameplates. B.Tags. C.Pipe markers. D.Ceiling tacks. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007 (ANSI/ASME A13.1). B.ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C.Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D.Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A.Piping: Pipe markers. B.Pumps: Nameplates. C.Small-sized Equipment: Tags. D.Tanks: Nameplates. E.Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A.Manufacturers: 1.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 2.Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 2.3 TAGS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0553 - PAGE 2 OF 2 C.Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. D.Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Comply with ASME A13.1. C.Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D.Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.5 CEILING TACKS A.Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B.Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9123 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B.Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C.Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D.Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F.Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. 1.Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2.Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. G.Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0719 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Piping insulation. B.Jackets and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. B.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013. C.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015. D.ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2015. E.ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013). F.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. G.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. H.NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. I.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B.Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0719 - PAGE 2 OF 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER A.Manufacturers: 1.Knauf Insulation; ______: www.knaufusa.com. 2.Johns Manville Corporation; Model ______: www.jm.com. 3.Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1.'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2.Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 3.Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C.Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. D.Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. 2.3 JACKETS A.PVC Plastic. 1.Manufacturers: a.Johns Manville Corporation; ______: www.jm.com. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a.Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b.Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d.Thickness: 10 mil. e.Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B.Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) National Insulation Standards. C.Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D.Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 0719 - PAGE 3 OF 3 E.Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1.Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2.Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F.For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G.Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1.Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2.Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H.Inserts and Shields: 1.Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2.Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3.Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4.Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5.Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I.Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8400. J.Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. K.Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 1 OF 8 SECTION 22 1005 - PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1.Sanitary sewer. 2.Domestic water. 3.Storm water. 4.Gas. 5.Flanges, unions, and couplings. 6.Pipe hangers and supports. 7.Valves. 8.Check. 9.Water pressure reducing valves. 10.Relief valves. 11.Strainers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. C.Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D.Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. E.Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. F.Section 33 0110.58 - Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004). B.ANSI Z223.1 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015. C.ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011. D.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012. E.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. F.ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2014. G.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014. H.ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; 2015. I.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications; 2015. J.ASSE 1003 - Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems; 2009. K.ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. L.ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015. M.ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 2 OF 8 N.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). O.ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a. P.ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2011. Q.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014. R.ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013. S.ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2010. T.ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). U.ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2014. V.ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015. W.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012. X.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014. Y.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). Z.ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2015. AA.ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2013a. AB.ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2011. AC.ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2015. AD.AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010. AE.AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012. AF.AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2009. AG.AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; 2013. AH.AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005. AI.CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009. AJ.CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011. AK.ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2012. AL.ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. AM.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2009. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 3 OF 8 AN.MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011. AO.MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013. AP.MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010. AQ.NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. AR.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). AS.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. AT.PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS), Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C.Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings. D.Sustainable Design Documentation: For soldered copper joints, submit installer's certification that the specified installation method and materials were used. E.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B.Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C.Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D.Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. E.Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B.Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 4 OF 8 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A.Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1.Fittings: Cast iron. 2.Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. B.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1.Fittings: PVC. 2.Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1.Fittings: Cast iron. 2.Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665. 1.Fittings: PVC. 2.Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A.Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. 1.Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2.Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods. 2.5 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). 1.Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2.Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. B.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types: C.Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877. 1.Manufacturers: a.Uponor, Inc: www.uponorengineering.com/sle. b.Viega LLC: www.viega.com. c.Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis: a.160 psig at maximum 73 degrees F. b.100 psig at maximum 180 degrees F. 3.Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer (EP)ASTM F1960. 4.Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings. 2.6 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A.Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1.Fittings: Cast iron. 2.Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. 2.7 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1.Fittings: Cast iron. 2.Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B.Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 5 OF 8 1.Fittings: Cast iron. 2.Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1.Fittings: PVC. 2.Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.8 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1.Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2.Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3.Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.9 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1.Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2.Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A.Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1.Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2.Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B.Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1.Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1.If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2.Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. a.Cold and Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Double hangers. 3.Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4.Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. 5.Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment. B.Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. C.Plumbing Piping - Water: 1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2.Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 6 OF 8 4.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll, double hanger. 5.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. D.Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1.Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2.Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 3.Other Types: As required. 2.12 GATE VALVES A.Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1.1, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. B.2 Inches and Larger: 1.1, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.13 BALL VALVES A.Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, ductile iron, or _________ body, 304 stainless steel, chrome plated brass, or ____________ ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder, threaded, grooved, or _________ ends with union. 2.14 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A.Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends. 2.15 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A.Up to 2 Inches: 1.ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. B.Over 2 Inches: 1.ASSE 1003, cast iron body with interior lining complying with AWWA C550, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.16 RELIEF VALVES A.Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1.2 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity 1 certified and labelled. 2.17 STRAINERS A.Size 2 inch and Under: 1.Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B.Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 7 OF 8 1.Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B.Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C.Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D.Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516. G.Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H.Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. I.Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. J.Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. K.Install water piping to ASME B31.9. L.Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. M. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. O. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1005 - PAGE 8 OF 8 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 0110.58. B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer. 1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. 2. Provide 18 gage, 0.0478 inch galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1006 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 22 1006 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Drains. B.Roof and floor drains. C.Cleanouts. D.Hose bibbs. E.Hydrants. F.Washing machine boxes and valves. G.Back water valves. H.Backflow preventers. I.Water hammer arrestors. J.Mixing valves. K.Thermostatic mixing valves. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. B.Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures. C.Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. D.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2001 (R2007). B.ASME A112.6.4 - Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; 2003. C.ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; 2004. D.ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; 2009. E.ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers; 2011. F.ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and Freeze Resistance; 2011. G.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). H.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. I.PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1006 - PAGE 2 OF 5 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.2 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company; ______: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Roof Drains: 1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws. C. Roof Overflow Drains: 1. Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended to _____ inches above flood elevation. D. Floor Drain (FD-1): 1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. E. Planter Drains: 1. ASME A112.6.4; lacquered cast iron body with sump. 2. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with stainless steel screen. 3. Accessories: Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company; _____: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1): 1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4): SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1006 - PAGE 3 OF 5 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. E. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.4 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company; ______: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. C. Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs: 1. Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, integral stops, chrome plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. 2.5 HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrowhead Brass & Plumbing, LLC; _____: www.arrowheadbrass.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; _____: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; _____: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Wall Hydrants: 1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker. 2.6 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite; ______: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Oatey Supply Chain Services, Inc; ______: www.oatey.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Valve Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite; ______: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for 2 inch waste, slip in finishing cover. 2.7 BACK WATER VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Savko Plastic Pipe & Fittings, Inc; ______: www.savko.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1006 - PAGE 4 OF 5 B. Cast Iron Back Water Valves: ASME A112.6.4; lacquered cast iron body and cover, brass valve, extension sleeve, and access cover. C. Plastic Back Water Valves: ABS body and valve, extension sleeve, and access cover. 2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries, Inc; ______: www.apollovalves.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies; ______: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies; ______: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC; ______: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. 2.10 MIXING VALVES A. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Delta Faucet Company; ______: www.deltafaucet.com. b. H.G. Specialties: www.hgspec.com. c. Tacotherm Ltd; ______: www.tacotherm.co.uk. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel cylinder, integral temperature adjustment. 3. Accessories: a. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet. b. Stem thermometer on outlet. c. Strainer stop checks on inlets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 1006 - PAGE 5 OF 5 B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 3000 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 3000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Packaged water heating systems. B.Water heaters. C.Pumps. 1.Circulators. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume I - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2011. B.ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas-Fired Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous; 2014. C.ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2015. D.UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E.UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2.Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 3.Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4.Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data. 2.Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. F.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. G.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 3000 - PAGE 2 OF 3 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label. C.Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.6 CERTIFICATIONS A.Water Heaters: NSF approved. B.Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to 1 or 2, as applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere. C.Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453. D.Pressure Vessels for Heat Exchangers: ASME labeled, to 1. E.Water Tanks: ASME labeled, to 1. F.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED WATER HEATING SYSTEMS A.System: Gas-fired direct heating boiler, circulating pump, controls, piping and valving as indicated, storage tank, all mounted on structural steel skid. B.Boiler: 1.Type: Gas-fired water tube boiler, with copper finned tube heat exchanger, steel jacket with glass fiber insulation. 2.Boiler Trim: Gas burner, thermometer and pressure gauge, immersion thermostats for operating and high limit protection, 100 percent safety shut-off electric gas valve with transformer, electronic safety pilot and pilot burner, gas pressure regulator, manual gas shut-off, low water cut off, ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, coil relief valve, automatic boiler fill and expansion tank, draft inverter. 3.Performance: C.Vertical storage tank: 1.Working Pressure: 150 psi ASME labeled. 2.Lining: 15 mils thick epoxy lining extended through flanges and couplings. 3.Support: Two welded tank saddles not less than 4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick, mounted on 2 inch pipe stand with minimum four cross braced legs; sheet teflon isolation strip between tank and saddle; dielectric unions between tank and piping system. 4.Insulation: 3 inch glass fiber insulation with steel jacket. SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 3000 - PAGE 3 OF 3 D.Pump: 1.Type: All bronze, in-line circulation pump mounted on boiler, controlled by tank mounted immersion thermostat. E.Thermostatic Valve: Three-way, self-contained, full line size, bronze body 1/2 to 2 inches size, iron body 2-1/2 inches and over, set at 140 degrees F. 2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A.Manufacturers: 1.Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com. 2.ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3.SIHI Group: www.sterlingsihi.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly. C.Impeller: Bronze. D.Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E.Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F.Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B.Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system. C.Domestic Water Storage Tanks: 1.Provide steel pipe support, independent of building structural framing members. 2.Clean and flush prior to delivery to site. Seal until pipe connections are made. D.Pumps: 1.Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. 2.Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 3.Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 4.Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. 5.Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 6.Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 4000 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Water closets. B.Lavatories. C.Sinks. D.Service sinks. E.Bathtubs. F.Showers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. B.Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties. C.Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI Z124.1.2 - American National Standard for Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units; 2005. B.ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2012. C.ASME A112.19.1 - Enamelled Cast Iron and Enamelled Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 2013. D.ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2013. E.ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); 2008 (R2013). F.ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 1994 (R2004). G.ASME A112.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks; 2011. H.ASSE 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices; 2004. I.ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2014. J.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. K.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). L.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C.Samples: Submit two lavatory supply fittings. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. E.Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. F.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 4000 - PAGE 2 OF 4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B.Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.2 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS A. Tank Type Water Closet Manufacturers: 1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 16.5 inches high, close-coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps, vandalproof cover locking device. 1. Water Consumption: Maximum 1.6 gallons per flush. C. Seat Manufacturers: 1. Bemis Manufacturing Company: www.bemismfg.com. 2. Church Seat Company: www.churchseats.com. 3. Olsonite: www.olsonite.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, closed front, brass bolts, with cover in apartments. Open cover in common area toilet rooms. 2.3 LAVATORIES A. Lavatory Manufacturers: 1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, ___ by ___ inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. 1. Drilling Centers: 4 inch. C. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with pop-up waste, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 2.2 gallons per minute, indexed handles. SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 4000 - PAGE 3 OF 4 2.4 SINKS A. Sink Manufacturers: 1. Elkay - Basis of Design 2. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com. 3. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 20 by 20 by 7 inch outside dimensions 20 gage, 0.0359 inch thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 1-1/2 inch chromed brass drain. 2. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece. 2.5 BATHTUBS AND SHOWERS A. Bathtub Manufacturers: See Architectural Section 10810 "Tub Shower Units." B. Bath and Shower Trim: ASME A112.18.1; Concealed shower and over rim supply with lever operated pop-up waste and overflow. Symmons" Origin Model # S-9602-PLR-1.5-X. Pressure balanced valve with chrome finish lever handle, integral check stops and 1.5 GPM shower head. 2.6 SHOWERS A. Cabinet: ANSI Z124.1.2 reinforced glass fiber, 32 by 32 by 75 inches with stone texture, integral receptor, soap dish, integral seat, removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece, color as selected. B. Shower Valve: 1. Comply with ASME A112.18.1. 2. Provide two handle in wall diverter valve body with integral thermostatic mixing valve to supply 1.5 gpm. 2.7 SERVICE SINKS A. Bowl: 36 by 24 by 10 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer. B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 22 4000 - PAGE 4 OF 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. E. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0513 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Single phase electric motors. B.Three phase electric motors. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015. B.IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; 2004. C.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. E.Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. F.Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to NFPA 70. B.Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of high efficiency motors. C.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower. SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0513 - PAGE 2 OF 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Lincoln Motors: www.lincolnmotors.com. B.A. O. Smith Electrical Products Company: www.aosmithmotors.com. C.Reliance Electric/Rockwell Automation: www.reliance.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A.Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characteristics. B.Construction: 1.Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3.Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C.Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency. D.Wiring Terminations: 1.Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2.For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.3 APPLICATIONS A.Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. B.Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor start type. C.Motors located in exterior locations, air cooled condensers, and direct drive axial fans: Totally enclosed type. 2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A.Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B.Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C.Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D.Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E.Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F.Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. G.Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.5 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A.Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B.Starting Current: Six times full load current. SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0513 - PAGE 3 OF 3 C.Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D.Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E.Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F.Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G.Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H.Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter; refer to Section 26 2913. I.Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. J.Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. K.Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque. L.Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. M.Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112. N.Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 112. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C.Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Equipment support bases. B.Vibration isolators. C.Seismic snubber assemblies. D.Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment. E.Roof curbs. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. B.ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; 2015. C.FEMA 412 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment; 2002. D.FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment; 2004. E.FEMA 414 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe; 2004. F.SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2008. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS. 2.Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. 2.Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases, member sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment. 3.Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete weights, equipment static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolator location and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator. 4.Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. 5.Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations. 6.Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 2 OF 7 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes. B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. D.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Kinetics Noise Control, Inc; ______: www.kineticsnoise.com. B.Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc; ______: www.veco-nyc.com. C.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: 1.All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads. 2.Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading. 3.Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection. 4.Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection at minimum 75 percent of specified deflection. 2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES A.Structural Bases: 1.Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting of the isolators. 2.Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped. 3.Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers. 2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.Non-Seismic Type: 1.All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads: a.Configuration: Flat or molded. b.Thickness: 0.25 inch minimum. c.Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface. 2.Elastomeric Mounts: a.Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds. b.Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure. 3.Steel Springs: a.Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 3 OF 7 b.Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame. 4.Restrained Steel Springs: a.Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and operating height from changing during temporary weight reduction. b.Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipment and isolator base plate to supporting structure. 5.Spring Hanger: a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element preventing metal to metal contact. b.Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment. B.Seismic Type: 1.Coil Springs Consisting of Single Elements: a.Housing: Manufactured from cast iron material. b.Ductile Material: Designed and rated for seismic applications. c.Spring: Restrained by housing without significant degradation of vibration isolation capabilities during normal equipment operating conditions. d.Resilient Snubbing Grommet System: Incorporated and designed with clearances of no more than 0.25 inch in any direction preventing direct metal-to-metal contact between supported member and fixed restraint housing. e.Resilient Pad: Located in series with spring. f.Coil Springs: Color coded elements to have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness with 50 percent overload capacity. g.Finish: Suitable for the application. 2.All Directional Elastomeric: a.Material: Molded from oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds. b.Operating Parameters: Designed to operate within the isolator strain limits providing maximum performance and service life. c.Attachment Method: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure. d.Rating: Cast iron and aluminum housings rated for seismic restraint applications. e.Minimum Operating Static Deflections: Deflections indicated in project documents are not to exceed published load capacities. 2.5 SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications 2.FEMA 412. 3.FEMA 413. 4.FEMA 414. 5.SMACNA (SRM). B.All Directional External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all directions. 2.Construction: Interlocking steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads. 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 4 OF 7 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact. C.Lateral External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed by other restraints. 2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads. 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions. 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact. D.Horizontal Single Axis External: 1.Application: Minimum four (4) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed by other restraints. 2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads. 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions. 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact. 2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications 2.FEMA 412. 3.FEMA 413. 4.FEMA 414. 5.SMACNA (SRM). B.Cable Restraints: 1.Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions. 2.Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage. 3.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 4.Connections: a.Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool-less wedge insert lock connectors. b.Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. C.Rigid Restraints: 1.Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both compressive and tensile loading. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 5 OF 7 2.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry. 3.Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 4.Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the system. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. 2.7 ROOF CURBS A.Vibration Isolation Curbs: 1.Non-Seismic Curb Rail: a.Location: Between existing roof curb and rooftop equipment. b.Construction: Aluminum. c.Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section. d.Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials. 2.Seismic Curb: a.Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment. b.Construction: Steel. c.Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section. d.Snubbers consist of minimum 0.25 inch thick resilient pads to avoid metal-to-metal contact without compromising vibration isolating capabilities. e.Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials. B.Seismic Type Non-Isolated Curb and Fabricated Equipment Piers: 1.Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment. 2.Construction: Steel. 3.Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Bases: 1.Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. 2.Adjust equipment level. C.On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. D.Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. E.Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. F.Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance. 3.2 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC A.Comply with: 1.ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 6 OF 7 2.FEMA 412. 3.FEMA 413. 4.FEMA 414. 5.SMACNA (SRM). B.Seismic Snubbers: 1.Provide on all isolated equipment, piping and ductwork. 2.Provide minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators. 3.Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch maximum clearance. 4.Snub all other equipment between 0.15 inch and 0.25 inch clearance. C.Floor and Base-Mounted Equipment, Vibration Isolated Equipment and associated Vibration and Seismic Controls for Connections: 1.Install equipment anchorage items designed to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install vibration and seismic controls designed to include base and isolator requirements. 3.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 4.Provide isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational and seismic forces. 5.Where equipment is not designed to be point loaded, provide base capable of transferring gravity and seismic demands from equipment to isolator base plate anchorage. 6.Where concrete floor thickness is less than required for expansion anchor installation, install through bolt in lieu of expansion anchor. 7.Where timber/wood floor or other substrate is inadequate for installation of lag bolts, screws or other mechanical fasteners, install supplemental framing or blocking to transfer loads to structural elements. D.Suspended Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide supports and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 3.Brace equipment hung from spring mounts using cable or other bracing that will not transmit vibration to the structure. 4.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. E.Piping: 1.Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7. 2.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces. 3.Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an earthquake. 4.Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent transmission of vibrations and noise to the structure. 5.Brace every run 5.0 feet or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing locations. 6.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections): a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center. b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 80.0 feet on center. SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0548 - PAGE 7 OF 7 7.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials (cast iron, no-hub, plastic or non-UL listed grooved coupling pipe): a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet on center. b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center. 8.Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet on center or as required for horizontal runs, whichever is less. 9.Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements: a.Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils. b.Install piping consistent with ASCE 7, such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components. c.Provide swing restraints as required to control potential impact due to limited space between subject components. F.Ductwork: 1.Provide seismic bracing for ducts with cross sectional area greater than 6 sq ft (independent of duct contents). 2.Provide seismic bracing for all ducts containing hazardous materials. 3.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces. 4.Install ducts and duct risers designed to accommodate interstory drift. 5.Independently support in-line devices weighing more than 20 pounds. 6.Independently support and brace all in-line devices weighing more than 75 pounds. 7.Provide unbraced piping attached to braced in-line equipment with adequate flexibility to accommodate differential displacements. 8.Positively attach dampers, louvers, diffusers and similar appurtenances to ductwork with mechanical fasteners. 9.Install duct supports designed to resist not less than 150 percent of the duct weight. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0553 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Nameplates. B.Tags. C.Adhesive-backed duct markers. D.Stencils. E.Pipe markers. F.Ceiling tacks. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Identification painting. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007. B.ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C.Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D.Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. F.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A.Air Handling Units: Nameplates. B.Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic. C.Control Panels: Nameplates. D.Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling. E.Ductwork: Stencilled painting. F.Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates. G.Major Control Components: Nameplates. H.Piping: Pipe markers. I.Pumps: Nameplates. J.Small-sized Equipment: Tags. K.Tanks: Nameplates. L.Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling. SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0553 - PAGE 2 OF 3 2.2 NAMEPLATES A.Manufacturers: 1.Advanced Graphic Engraving, LLC; ______: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Letter Color: White. C.Letter Height: 1/4 inch. D.Background Color: Black. E.Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. 2.3 TAGS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. C.Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. D.Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.4 ADHESIVE-BACKED DUCT MARKERS A.Manufacturers: B.Material: High gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film; printed with UV and chemical resistant inks. C.Style: Individual Label. D.Color: Yellow/Black. 2.5 STENCILS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1.3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 2.1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters. 3.2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters. 4.8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2 inch high letters. SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0553 - PAGE 3 OF 3 2.6 PIPE MARKERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com. 2.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3.Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. C.Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. 2.7 CEILING TACKS A.Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. B.Color code as follows: 1.HVAC Equipment: Yellow. 2.Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red. 3.Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B.Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9123 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B.Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C.Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D.Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. 1.Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2.Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3.Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. F.Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. G.Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 1 OF 8 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems. C.Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. D.Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. E.Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Cash Allowance: See Section 01 2100 for additional requirements. B.Allowance includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002. B.ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems; 2008. C.NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems; 2015, Eighth Edition. D.SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. C.TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1.Submit to Architect. 2.Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 3.Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents, the equipment and systems, and the control system with the Architect and other installers to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system. 4.Include at least the following in the plan: a.Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system. b.List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. c.Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. d.Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. e.Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. f.Final test report forms to be used. g.Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including: SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 2 OF 8 1)Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type). 2)Diffuser proportioning. 3)Branch/submain proportioning. 4)Total flow calculations. 5)Rechecking. 6)Diversity issues. h.Expected problems and solutions, etc. i.Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors; analogous explanations for the water side. j.Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this. k.Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. l.Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods. m.Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified. n.Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any. o.Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. p.Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if specified. q.Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency). r.Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. D.Field Logs: Submit at least twice a week to the Commissioning Authority. E.Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1.Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2.Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 3.Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 4.Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 5.Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 6.Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1.AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2.ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3.NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 3 OF 8 4.SMACNA (TAB). 5.Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times. B.Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C.Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D.TAB Agency Qualifications: 1.Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2.Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3.Certified by one of the following: a.AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b.NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. c.TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. E.TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.2 EXAMINATION A.Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1.Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2.Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3.Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4.Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5.Duct systems are clean of debris. 6.Fans are rotating correctly. 7.Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8.Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9.Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10.Air outlets are installed and connected. 11.Duct system leakage is minimized. 12.Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13.Pumps are rotating correctly. 14.Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15.Service and balance valves are open. B.Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. 3.3 PREPARATION A.Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. B.Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. C.Provide additional balancing devices as required. SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 4 OF 8 3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A.Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B.Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C.Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A.Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1.Running log of events and issues. 2.Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3.Contract interpretation requests. 4.Lists of completed tests. B.Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C.Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D.After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. E.Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B.Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C.Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D.Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E.Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F.Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G.Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H.Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I.Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J.Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K.Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries. SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 5 OF 8 L.Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating. M.For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control. 3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B.Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C.Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D.Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E.Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F.Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. 3.8 SCOPE A.Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1.Plumbing Pumps 2.HVAC Pumps 3.Boilers 4.Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 5.Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units 6.Air Coils 7.Air Handling Units 8.Fans 9.Air Inlets and Outlets 3.9 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A.Electric Motors: 1.Manufacturer 2.Model/Frame 3.HP/BHP 4.Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5.RPM 6.Service factor 7.Starter size, rating, heater elements 8.Sheave Make/Size/Bore B.V-Belt Drives: 1.Identification/location 2.Required driven RPM 3.Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4.Belt, size and quantity SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 6 OF 8 5.Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6.Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual C.Pumps: 1.Identification/number 2.Manufacturer 3.Size/model 4.Impeller 5.Service 6.Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 7.Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 8.Discharge pressure 9.Suction pressure 10.Total operating head pressure 11.Shut off, discharge and suction pressures 12.Shut off, total head pressure D.Combustion Equipment: 1.Boiler manufacturer 2.Model number 3.Serial number 4.Firing rate 5.Overfire draft 6.Gas meter timing dial size 7.Gas meter time per revolution 8.Gas pressure at meter outlet 9.Gas flow rate 10.Heat input 11.Burner manifold gas pressure 12.Percent carbon monoxide (CO) 13.Percent carbon dioxide (CO2) 14.Percent oxygen (O2) 15.Percent excess air 16.Flue gas temperature at outlet 17.Ambient temperature 18.Net stack temperature 19.Percent combustion efficiency 20.Heat output E.Air Cooled Condensers: 1.Identification/number 2.Location 3.Manufacturer 4.Model number 5.Serial number 6.Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 7.Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 8.Number of compressors F.Heating Coils: 1.Identification/number SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 7 OF 8 2.Location 3.Service 4.Manufacturer 5.Air flow, design and actual 6.Water flow, design and actual 7.Water pressure drop, design and actual 8.Entering water temperature, design and actual 9.Leaving water temperature, design and actual 10.Entering air temperature, design and actual 11.Leaving air temperature, design and actual 12.Air pressure drop, design and actual G.Air Moving Equipment: 1.Location 2.Manufacturer 3.Model number 4.Serial number 5.Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6.Air flow, specified and actual 7.Return air flow, specified and actual 8.Outside air flow, specified and actual 9.Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10.Inlet pressure 11.Discharge pressure 12.Sheave Make/Size/Bore 13.Number of Belts/Make/Size 14.Fan RPM H.Return Air/Outside Air: 1.Identification/location 2.Design air flow 3.Actual air flow 4.Design return air flow 5.Actual return air flow 6.Design outside air flow 7.Actual outside air flow 8.Return air temperature 9.Outside air temperature 10.Required mixed air temperature 11.Actual mixed air temperature 12.Design outside/return air ratio 13.Actual outside/return air ratio I.Exhaust Fans: 1.Location 2.Manufacturer 3.Model number 4.Serial number 5.Air flow, specified and actual 6.Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0593 - PAGE 8 OF 8 7.Inlet pressure 8.Discharge pressure 9.Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10.Number of Belts/Make/Size 11.Fan RPM J.Duct Traverses: 1.System zone/branch 2.Duct size 3.Area 4.Design velocity 5.Design air flow 6.Test velocity 7.Test air flow 8.Duct static pressure 9.Air temperature 10.Air correction factor K.Duct Leak Tests: 1.Description of ductwork under test 2.Duct design operating pressure 3.Duct design test static pressure 4.Duct capacity, air flow 5.Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 6.Test apparatus a.Blower 7.Test static pressure 8.Test orifice differential pressure 9.Leakage L.Sound Level Reports: 1.Location 2.Octave bands - equipment off 3.Octave bands - equipment on END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0713 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 23 0713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Duct insulation. B.Duct Liner. C.Insulation jackets. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. B.Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass fiber ducts. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2014. B.ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2012. C.ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011. D.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. E.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. F.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. G.NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. H.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005. I.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B.Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum __________ years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B.Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0713 - PAGE 2 OF 4 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B.Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A.Manufacturer: 1.Knauf Insulation; _______: www.knaufinsulation.com. 2.Johns Manville; _______: www.jm.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1.Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. D. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage, 0.0508 inch diameter. 2.3 JACKETS A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 1. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation. 2.4 DUCT LINER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation; _______: www.knaufinsulation.com. 2. Johns Manville; _______: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com. B. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite. 1. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21. 2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. 4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. 5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60. d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0713 - PAGE 3 OF 4 C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. F. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. G. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: B. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air: C. Outside Air Intake Ducts: D. Plenums: E. Ventilation Equipment Casings: SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0713 - PAGE 4 OF 4 F. Supply Ducts: G. Return and Relief Ducts in Mechanical Rooms: H. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors: END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0719 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Piping insulation. B.Jackets and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015. B.ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2015. C.ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013). D.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. E.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. F.NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. G.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B.Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum __________ years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B.Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. SECTION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0719 - PAGE 2 OF 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER A.Manufacturers: 1.Knauf Insulation; ______: www.knaufinsulation.com. 2.Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3.Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com. B.Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1.Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 2.Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C.Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. D.Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. 2.3 JACKETS A.PVC Plastic. 1.Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a.Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b.Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d.Thickness: 10 mil. e.Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B.Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C.Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D.For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. E.For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. F.Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature. 1.Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2.Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. SECTION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0719 - PAGE 3 OF 3 G.Inserts and Shields: 1.Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2.Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3.Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4.Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5.Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. H.Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8400. I.Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 3.3 SCHEDULE A.Heating Systems: 1.Heating Water Supply and Return: END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 1 OF 13 SECTION 23 0923 - DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.System description. B.Operator interface. C.Power supplies and line filtering. D.System software. E.Controller software. F.HVAC control programs. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. B.Section 23 0993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls. C.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASHRAE Std 135 - BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks; 2016. B.CTA-709.1 - Control Network Protocol Specification; Revision D, 2014. C.MIL-STD-810 - Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests; 2014g. D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2.List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3.Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. Provide demonstration digital media containing graphics. 4.Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 5.Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components. E.Designer's Qualification Statement. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 2 OF 13 F.Installer's Qualification Statement. G.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1.Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 2.Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form. H.Operation and Maintenance Data: 1.Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices. 2.Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 3.Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. I.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70. B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design of system using manufacturer's software under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. D.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum three years of documented experience. E.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion. C.Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units. 1.8 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A.Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1.Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2.Limiting copying. 3.Preserving confidentiality. 4.Prohibiting transfer to a third party. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable micro-processor based units. B.Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 3 OF 13 C.Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators. D.Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in Section 23 0913. E.Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified. F.Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system. 2.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE A.PC Based Work Station: B.Workstation, controllers, and control backbone to communicate using BACnet protocol and addressing. C.BACnet protocol to comply with ASHRAE Std 135. D.Hardware: 1.Desktop: a.Computer(s) and display(s) to be provided by DDC controls manufacturer. b.Network Connection: 1)Ethernet interface card. 2.3 CONTROLLERS A.BUILDING CONTROLLERS 1.General: a.Manage global strategies by one or more, independent, standalone, microprocessor based controllers. b.Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and programming requirements. c.Share data between networked controllers. d.Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allowing for central monitoring and alarms. e.Utilize real-time clock for scheduling. f.Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation. g.Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification upon detection of abnormal operation. h.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol. 2.Communication: a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (ETHERNET) Data Link/Physical layer protocol. b.Perform routing when connected to a network of custom application and application specific controllers. c.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol. 3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions: a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions: SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 4 OF 13 1)Mount within waterproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F. b.Conditioned Space: 1)Mount within dustproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F. 4.Provisions for Serviceability: a.Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours. 6.Power and Noise Immunity: a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W. at 3 feet. B.CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS 1.General: a.Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and programming requirements. b.Share data between networked, microprocessor based controllers. c.Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allowing for central monitoring and alarms. d.Utilize real-time clock for scheduling. e.Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation. f.Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification upon detection of abnormal operation. g.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol. 2.Communication: a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. b.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol. 3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions: a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions: 1)Mount within waterproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F. b.Conditioned Space: 1)Mount within dustproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F. 4.Provisions for Serviceability: a.Diagnostic LED's for power, communication, and processor. b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours. 6.Power and Noise Immunity: SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 5 OF 13 a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W. at 3 feet. C.APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS 1.General: a.Not fully user programmable, microprocessor based controllers dedicated to control specific equipment. b.Customized for operation within the confines of equipment served. c.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol. 2.Communication: a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. b.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol. 3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions: a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions: 1)Mount within waterproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F. b.Conditioned Space: 1)Mount within dustproof enclosures. 2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F. 4.Provisions for Serviceability: a.Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours. 6.Power and Noise Immunity: a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet. D.INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE 1.Hardwired inputs and outputs tie into the DDC system through building, custom application, or application specific controllers. 2.All Input/Output Points: a.Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or grounding and from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration. b.Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where input or output is software designated as either binary or analog type with appropriate properties. 3.Binary Inputs: a.Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. b.Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly available control devices and protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. c.Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 6 OF 13 4.Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: Conform to all requirements of binary input objects and accept up to 10 pulses per second. 5.Analog Inputs: a.Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA current, or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). b.Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. 6.Binary Outputs: a.Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. b.Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches. c.Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. 7.Analog Outputs: a.Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for end device control. b.Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch for building and custom application controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override on building and custom application controllers. c.Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year. 8.Tri State Outputs: a.Coordinate two binary outputs to control three point, floating type, electronic actuators without feedback. b.Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and terminal unit control applications: c.Control algorithms run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking. 9.System Object Capacity: a.System size to be expandable to twice the number of input output objects required by providing additional controllers, including associated devices and wiring. b.Hardware additions or software revisions for the installed operator interfaces are not to be required for future, system expansions. 2.4 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING A.Power Supplies: 1.Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service as required by the NEC. 2.Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. 3.Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements. 4.Unit to be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 5.Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response time for 50 percent load changes. 6.Provide over-voltage and over-current protection to withstand a 150 percent current overload for 3 seconds minimum without trip-out or failure. 7.Operational Ambient Conditions: 32 to 120 degrees F. 8.EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL-STD 810 for shock and vibration. 9.Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved. B.Power Line Filtering: SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 7 OF 13 1.Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for all workstations and controllers. 2.Minimum surge protection attributes: a.Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum. b.Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less. c.Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater. d.Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) A.Provide communication between control units over local area network (LAN). B.LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes. C.Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration. D.LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb. E.Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems. F.Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gage twisted, shielded copper cable. G.Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, shall be less than 3 seconds. Provide automatic reconfiguration if any station is added or lost. If transmission cable is cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's operation, without operator intervention. 2.6 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.Operating System: 1.Concurrent, multi-tasking capability. a.Common Software Applications Supported: Microsoft Excel. 2.System Graphics: a.Allow up to 10 graphic screens, simultaneously displayed for comparison and monitoring of system status. b.Animation displayed by shifting image files based on object status. c.Provide method for operator with password to perform the following: 1)Move between, change size, and change location of graphic displays. 2)Modify on-line. 3)Add, delete, or change dynamic objects consisting of: (a)Analog and binary values. (b)Dynamic text. (c)Static text. (d)Animation files. 3.Custom Graphics Generation Package: a.Create, modify, and save graphic files and visio format graphics in PCX formats. b.HTML graphics to support web browser compatible formats. c.Capture or convert graphics from AutoCAD. 4.Standard HVAC Graphics Library: a.HVAC Equipment: 1)Boilers. 2)Cooling Tower. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 8 OF 13 b.Ancillary Equipment: 1)Fans. 2)Pumps. c.File Format Compatible with Graphics Generation Package Program. B.Workstation System Applications: 1.Automatic System Database Save and Restore Functions: a.Current database copy of each Building Controller is automatically stored on hard disk. b.Automatic update occurs upon change in any system panel. c.In the event of database loss in any system panel, the first workstation to detect the loss automatically restores the database for that panel unless disabled by the operator. 2.Manual System Database Save and Restore Functions by Operator with Password Clearance: a.Save database from any system panel. b.Clear a panel database. c.Initiate a download of a specified database to any system panel. 3.Software provided allows system configuration and future changes or additions by operators under proper password protection. 4.On-line Help: a.Context-sensitive system assists operator in operation and editing. b.Available for all applications. c.Relevant screen data provided for particular screen display. d.Additional help available via hypertext. 5.Security: a.Operator log-on requires user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete data. b.System security selectable for each operator. c.System supervisor sets passwords and security levels for all other operators. d.Operator passwords to restrict functions accessible to viewing and/or changing system applications, editor, and object. e.Automatic, operator log-off results from keyboard or mouse inactivity during user-adjustable, time period. f.All system security data stored in encrypted format. 6.System Diagnostics: a.Operations Automatically Monitored: 1)Workstations. 2)Printers. 3)Modems. 4)Network connections. 5)Building management panels. 6)Controllers. b.Device failure is annunciated to the operator. 7.Alarm Processing: a.All system objects are configurable to "alarm in" and "alarm out" of normal state. b.Configurable Objects: 1)Alarm limits. 2)Alarm limit differentials. 3)States. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 9 OF 13 4)Reactions for each object. 8.Alarm Messages: a.Descriptor: English language. b.Recognizable Features: 1)Source. 2)Location. 3)Nature. 9.Configurable Alarm Reactions by Workstation and Time of Day: a.Logging. b.Printing. c.Starting programs. d.Displaying messages. e.Dialing out to remote locations. f.Paging. g.Providing audible annunciation. h.Displaying specific system graphics. 10.Custom Trend Logs: a.Definable for any data object in the system including interval, start time, and stop time. b.Trend Data: 1)Sampled and stored on the building controller panel. 2)Archivable on hard disk. 3)Retrievable for use in reports, spreadsheets and standard database programs. 4)Archival on LAN accessible storage media including hard disk, tape, Raid array drive, and virtual cloud environment. 5)Protected and encrypted format to prevent manipulation, or editing of historical data and event logs. 11.Alarm and Event Log: a.View all system alarms and change of states from any system location. b.Events listed chronologically. c.Operator with proper security acknowledges and clears alarms. d.Alarms not cleared by operator are archived to the workstation hard disk. 12.Object, Property Status and Control: a.Provide a method to view, edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. b.Status Available by the Following Methods: 1)Menu. 2)Graphics. 3)Custom Programs. 13.Reports and Logs: a.Reporting Package: 1)Allows operator to select, modify, or create reports. 2)Definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. 3)Archivable to hard disk. b.Real-time logs available by type or status such as alarm, lockout, normal, etc. c.Stored on hard disk and readily accessible by standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word processing. d.Set to be printed on operator command or specific time(s). SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 10 OF 13 14.Reports: a.Standard: 1)Objects with current values. 2)Current alarms not locked out. 3)Disabled and overridden objects, points and SNVTs. 4)Objects in manual or automatic alarm lockout. 5)Objects in alarm lockout currently in alarm. 6)Logs: (a)Alarm History. (b)System messages. (c)System events. (d)Trends. b.Custom: 1)Daily. 2)Weekly. 3)Monthly. 4)Annual. 5)Time and date stamped. 6)Title. 7)Facility name. c.Tenant Override: 1)Monthly report showing total, requested, after-hours HVAC and lighting services on a daily basis for each tenant. 2)Annual report showing override usage on a monthly basis. d.Electrical, Fuel, and Weather: 1)Electrical Meter(s): (a)Monthly showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter. (b)Annual summary showing monthly electrical consumption and peak demand with time and date stamp for each meter. 2)Fuel Meter(s): (a)Monthly showing daily natural gas consumption for each meter. (b)Annual summary showing monthly consumption for each meter. 3)Weather: (a)Monthly showing minimum, maximum, average outdoor air temperature and heating/cooling degree-days for the month. C.Workstation Applications Editors: 1.Provide editing software for each system application at PC workstation. 2.Downloaded application is executed at controller panel. 3.Full screen editor for each application allows operator to view and change: a.Configuration. b.Name. c.Control parameters. d.Set-points. 4.Scheduling: a.Monthly calendar indicates schedules, holidays, and exceptions. b.Allows several related objects to be scheduled and copied to other objects or dates. c.Start and stop times adjustable from master schedule. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 11 OF 13 5.Custom Application Programming: a.Create, modify, debug, edit, compile, and download custom application programming during operation and without disruption of all other system applications. b.Programming Features: 1)English oriented language, based on BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL syntax allowing for free form programming. 2)Alternative language graphically based using appropriate function blocks suitable for all required functions and amenable to customizing or compounding. 3)Insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code that incorporates word processing features such as cut/paste and find/replace. 4)Allows the development of independently, executing, program modules designed to enable and disable other modules. 5)Debugging/simulation capability that displays intermediate values and/or results including syntax/execution error messages. 6)Support for conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-F) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons. 7)Support for floating-point arithmetic utilizing plus, minus, divide, times, square root operators; including absolute value; minimum/maximum value from a list of values for mathematical functions. 8)Language consisting of resettable, predefined, variables representing time of day, day of the week, month of the year, date; and elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days where the variable values cab be used in IF/THEN comparisons, calculations, programming statement logic, etc. 9)Language having predefined variables representing status and results of the system software enables, disables, and changes the set points of the controller software. 2.7 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE A.All applications reside and operate in the system controllers and editing of all applications occurs at the operator workstation. B.System Security: 1.User access secured via user passwords and user names. 2.Passwords restrict user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3.User Log On/Log Off attempts are recorded. 4.Automatic Log Off occurs following the last keystroke after a user defined delay time. C.Object or Object Group Scheduling: 1.Weekly Schedules Based on Separate, Daily Schedules: a.Include start, stop, optimal stop, and night economizer. b.10 events maximum per schedule. c.Start/stop times adjustable for each group object. D.Provide standard application for equipment coordination and grouping based on function and location to be used for scheduling and other applications. E.Alarms: 1.Binary object is set to alarm based on the operator specified state. 2.Analog object to have high/low alarm limits. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 12 OF 13 3.All alarming is capable of being automatically and manually disabled. 4.Alarm Reporting: a.Operator determines action to be taken for alarm event. b.Alarms to be routed to appropriate workstation. c.Reporting Options: F.Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generates maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time limits. G.Sequencing: Application software based upon specified sequences of operation in Section 23 0993. H.PID Control Characteristics: 1.Direct or reverse action. 2.Anti-windup. 3.Calculated, time-varying, analog value, positions an output or stages a series of outputs. 4.User selectable controlled variable, set-point, and PED gains. I.Staggered Start Application: 1.Prevents all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after power outage. 2.Order of equipment startup is user selectable. J.Energy Calculations: 1.Accumulated instantaneous power or flow rates are converted to energy use data. 2.Algorithm calculates a rolling average and allows window of time to be user specified in minute intervals. 3.Algorithm calculates a fixed window average with a digital input signal from a utility meter defining the start of the window period that in turn synchronizes the fixed-window average with that used by the power company. K.Anti-Short Cycling: 1.All binary output objects protected from short-cycling. 2.Allows minimum on-time and off-time to be selected. L.On-Off Control with Differential: 1.Algorithm allows binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set-point. 2.Algorithm to be direct-acting or reverse-acting incorporating an adjustable differential. M.Run-Time Totalization: 1.Totalize run-times for all binary input objects. 2.Provides operator with capability to assign high run-time alarm. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration. B.Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 0993. C.Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26. SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0923 - PAGE 13 OF 13 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. B.Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and equipment for 3 day period. C.Provide basic operator training for two persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours dedicated instructor time. Provide training on site. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A.Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0993 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 0993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.This section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other sections. B.Sequence of operation for: 1.Water Source Heat Pumps 2.Source Water Tempering and Distribution System 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. B.Section 23 0923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Sequence of Operation Documentation: Submit written sequence of operation for entire HVAC system and each piece of equipment. 1.Preface: 1 or 2 paragraph overview narrative of the system describing its purpose, components and function. 2.State each sequence in small segments and give each segment a unique number for referencing in Functional Test procedures; provide a complete description regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences specified in the contract documents. 3.Include at least the following sequences: a.Start-up. b.Normal operating mode. c.Unoccupied mode. d.Shutdown. e.Capacity control sequences and equipment staging. f.Temperature and pressure control, such as setbacks, setups, resets, etc. g.Detailed sequences for all control strategies, such as economizer control, optimum start/stop, staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc. C.Control System Diagrams: Submit graphic schematic of the control system showing each control component and each component controlled, monitored, or enabled. 1.Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. 2.Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3.Include the system and component layout of all equipment that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls. 4.Include draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. 5.Include all monitoring, control and virtual points specified in elsewhere. 6.Include a key to all abbreviations. D.Points List: Submit list of all control points indicating at least the following for each point. 1.Name of controlled system. 2.Point abbreviation. 3.Point description; such as dry bulb temperature, airflow, etc. SECTION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0993 - PAGE 2 OF 3 4.Display unit. 5.Control point or setpoint (Yes / No); i.e. a point that controls equipment and can have its setpoint changed. 6.Monitoring point (Yes / No); i.e. a point that does not control or contribute to the control of equipment but is used for operation, maintenance, or performance verification. E.Designer's Qualification Statement. F.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and setpoints of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS (WSHP) A.Water source heat pumps shall be controlled by the associated apartment's programmable thermostat. B.Upon a call for heating or cooling in the space (apartment) the WSHPs source water valves shall open and the WSHPs SA fan shall come on and the WSHPs compressor (refrigeration system) shall operate to maintain associated space temperature. The WSHPs reversing valve shall switch from heating to cooling operation depending on the call from the thermostat. C.There shall be a field adjustable dead band between heating and cooling. D.When there is no call for heating and cooling the WSHP's fan and refrigeration system shall shut down and its associated source water valves shall close. 3.2 SOURCE WATER SYSTEM TEMPERING AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A.Source water shall be continuosly available and operating. Main source water pumps P-1 & P-2 shall operate continuously. B.System shall operate to maintain a continous source water temperature of a feild adjustable set-point, initially set at 65 deg. F with a dead band between water heating and water cooling. C.If the source water temperature falls below the set point (and dead band) then the water heating shall initiate. 1.One boiler pump (P-3 or 4) shall sequence on and once flow is confirmed the associated boiler shall sequnce on. 2.Boilers gas burner shall modulate to mainain water temperature. 3.If first initiated boiler cannot keep maintain water temperature then second boiler shall sequence on. 4.Boilers shall be set up as lead lag that changes between boiler to equalize run time. D.If source water rises above set point (and dead band) then diverting valve shall allow source water return (SWR) into the heat exchanger (HX-1) to cool it. 1.Condenser water pumps (P-5 and P-6) shall operate to maintain HX-1 discharge temperature. 2.The cooling tower (CT-1) shall be enabled during the cooling season. CT-1 fan shall ramp up and down to maintain water temperature in sump S-1. SECTION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 0993 - PAGE 3 OF 3 E.Source water pumps P-1 & P-2 shall operate continuously. The pumps variable frequency drive (VFDs) shall ramp the pump up and down to satisfy SWS to SWR pressure differential as sensed by the SWS & SWR piping pressure sensors. F.Dual pumps ofr the same piping feeds (P-1/P-2 and P-5/P-6) shall be lead lag, with the lag pump operating only if the lead pump fails to operate. Lead/lag status shall switch between the pumps periodically to equalize runtime. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Hydronic system requirements. B.Heating water piping, buried. C.Water Source piping, above grade. D.Equipment drains and overflows. E.Pipe hangers and supports. F.Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections. G.Valves: 1.Gate valves. 2.Ball valves. 3.Check valves. H.Flow controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. C.Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D.Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation. E.Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties. F.Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011. B.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012. C.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. D.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014. E.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). F.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014. G.ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013. H.ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015. I.ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2015. J.ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2013. K.ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2006. L.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 2 OF 6 M.ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 2008). N.ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007 (Reapproved 2013). O.AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 2011 and errata. P.AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010. Q.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011. R.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2009. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. 2.Provide manufacturers catalogue information. 3.Indicate valve data and ratings. 4.Show grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties on drawings and product submittals, specifically identified with the manufacturer's style or series designation. C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. E.Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with documented experience. C.Provide all grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, specialties, and grooving tools from a single manufacturer. D.Date stamp all castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc. for quality assurance and traceability. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B.Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 3 OF 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations. B.Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as follows: 1.Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. 2.Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. 3.Grooved mechanical joints may be used in accessible locations only. a.Accessible locations include those exposed on interior of building, in pipe chases, and in mechanical rooms, aboveground outdoors, and as approved by Architect. b.Use rigid joints unless otherwise indicated. 4.Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58 unless indicated otherwise. C.Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or grooved couplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded, soldered, or threaded connections. D.Valves: Provide valves where indicated: 2.2 WATER SOURCE PIPING, BURIED A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape. 2.3 WATER SOURCE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, using one of the following joint types: 1.Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3, malleable iron fittings. 2.Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical couplings. B.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn, using one of the following joint types: 1.Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper fittings. a.Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver. b.Braze: 1 BCuP copper/silver alloy. 2.Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube. 2.4 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A.PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26. 1.Fittings: ASTM D2466 or D2467, PVC. 2.Joints: Solvent welded in accordance with ASTM D2855. 2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1.If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3.Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Greater: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 4 OF 6 B.In grooved installations, use rigid couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads or with wedge shaped grooves in header piping to permit support and hanging in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2.6 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Less: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe 2 Inches and Greater: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on. 2. Copper Piping: Bronze. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene. C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 2. Mechanical Couplings: Comply with ASTM F1476. 3. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel. 4. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools. D. Dielectric Connections: 1. Waterways: a. Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. b. Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600 volt breakdown test. c. Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match connecting piping. d. Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures. 2.7 GATE VALVES A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, lockshield stem, inside screw with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder ends. B. Over 2 Inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends. 2.8 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com. 2. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. C. Over 2 Inches: 1. Ductile iron body, chrome plated stainless steel ball, teflon or Virgin TFE seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear operated, flanged ends, rated to 800 psi. SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 5 OF 6 2.9 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Co.: www.craneco.com. 2. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 3. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com. B. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends. 2.10 FLOW CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 2. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. 3. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain. C. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Prepare pipe for grooved mechanical joints as required by coupling manufacturer. C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. D. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified. E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. F. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 2500 for additional requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. G. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. H. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516. J. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2113 - PAGE 6 OF 6 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. K. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP-58. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 23 0719. M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. 1. 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 1 inch: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. 2-1/2 inch: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. 3 inch: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping. 1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. 1-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. 2 inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. 2-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. 3 inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 2114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2114 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 23 2114 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Compression tanks. B.Air vents. C.Air separators. D.Strainers. E.Combination pump discharge valves. F.Pressure-temperature test plugs. G.Balancing valves. H.Relief valves. I.Pressure reducing valves. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Backflow Preventers. B.Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2015. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions. C.Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures. E.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls. F.Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. SECTION 23 2114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2114 - PAGE 2 OF 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSION TANKS A.Manufacturers: 1.Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com. 2.ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3.Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for installation of accessories. 1. Pressure rating: 100 psi. C. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch red line glass, maximum 24 inches length, long enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top. D. Quick Connect Air Inlet: 1. Compressed Air: 75 inches of 1/4 inch diameter braided reinforced air hose, air chuck, check valve, and shut-off valve on supply from control air compressor. 2. Expansion Tank: Inlet tire check valve, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve. E. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure, double check back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass. Refer to Section 22 1006. 2.2 AIR VENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. C. Float Type: 1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. D. Washer Type: 1. Brass with hygroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and integral spring loaded ball check valve. 2.3 AIR SEPARATORS A. Dip Tube Fitting (Where Not Provided By Boiler Manufacturer): 1. Manufacturers: a. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. b. Boiler manufacturer. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 23 2114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2114 - PAGE 3 OF 4 2. For 125 psi operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from rising into system. 2.4 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business: www.grinnell.com. 3. The Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.5 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com. 2. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. 3. Victaulic Company of America: www.victaulic.com. B. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psi operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation. 2.6 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. Construction: Brass body designed to receive temperature or pressure probe with removable protective cap, and Neoprene rated for minimum 200 degrees F. B. Application: Use extended length plugs to clear insulated piping. 2.7 BALANCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Size 2 inch and Smaller: 1. Provide ball style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and NPT threaded or soldered connections. 2. Metal construction materials consist of bronze or brass. 2.8 RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. 2.9 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: SECTION 23 2114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2114 - PAGE 4 OF 4 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. B. Operation: Automatically feeds make-up water to the hydronic system whenever pressure in the system drops below the pressure setting of the valve. Refer to Section 23 2113. C. Materials of Construction: 1. Valve Body: Constructed of bronze or brass. 2. Internal Components: Construct of stainless steel or brass and engineered plastics or composition material. D. Connections: 1. NPT threaded: 0.50 inch, or 0.75 inch. 2. Soldered: 0.50 inch. E. Provide integral check valve and strainer. F. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psi. G. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 180 degrees F. H. Operating Pressure Range: Between 10 psi and 25 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. C. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. D. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank. E. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. F. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps where indicated. G. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks. H. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. I. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. J. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2123 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.System lubricated circulators. B.In-line circulators. C.Vertical in-line pumps. D.Base-mounted pumps. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B.Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. D.Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. E.Section 23 0716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation. F.Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation. G.Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping. H.Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties. I.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. B.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013. C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D.UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements and recommendations. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps, with minimum three years of documented experience. SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2123 - PAGE 2 OF 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL A.Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing agency acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.2 SYSTEM LUBRICATED CIRCULATORS A.Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected with multiple speed wet rotor motor for in-line mounting, for 140 psi maximum working pressure, 230 degrees F maximum water temperature. B.Casing: Cast iron with flanged pump connections. C.Impeller, Shaft, Rotor: Stainless Steel. D.Bearings: Metal Impregnated carbon (graphite) and ceramic. E.Motor: Impedance protected, multiple speed, with external speed selector. 2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A.Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psi maximum working pressure. B.Casing: Cast iron, with flanged pump connections. C.Impeller: Non-ferrous keyed to shaft. D.Bearings: Oil-lubricated bronze sleeve. E.Shaft: Alloy steel with bronze sleeve, integral thrust collar. F.Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. G.Drive: Flexible coupling. 2.4 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS A.Type: Vertical, single stage, close coupled, radially or horizontally split casing, for in-line mounting, for 175 psi working pressure. B.Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage port, casing wear ring, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. C.Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft or extension. D.Shaft: Carbon steel with stainless steel impeller cap screw or nut and bronze sleeve. E.Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. 2.5 BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS A.Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally split casing, for 125 psi maximum working pressure. B.Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. C.Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. D.Bearings: Oil lubricated roller or ball bearings. E.Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve. SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2123 - PAGE 3 OF 3 F.Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. G.Seal: Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and bronze lantern rings, 250 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. H.Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum space recommended by manufacturer. C.Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close-coupled or base-mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. Refer to Section 22 0548. D.Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve on pump discharge. E.Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. F.Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. G.Check, align, and certify alignment of base-mounted pumps prior to start-up. H.Install close-coupled and base-mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. Refer to Section 03 3000. I.Lubricate pumps before start-up. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Piping. B.Refrigerant. C.Moisture and liquid indicators. D.Valves. E.Strainers. F.Check valves. G.Pressure regulators. H.Pressure relief valves. I.Filter-driers. J.Solenoid valves. K.Expansion valves. L.Flexible connections. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels. B.Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation. C.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; 2007. B.AHRI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants; 2007. C.ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2013. D.ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; 2013. E.ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2015. F.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications; 2015. G.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. H.ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; 2013. I.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014. J.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014. K.ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2013. L.AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1. M.UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 2 OF 7 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B.Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise. C.Liquid Indicators: 1.Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. 2.Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves. D.Valves: 1.Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors. E.Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. F.Strainers: 1.Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2.Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid line strainer. G.Filter-Driers: 1.Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators. H.Solenoid Valves: 1.Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. D.Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and isolation for servicing. F.Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings. G.Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum __________ years of documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 3 OF 7 B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purpose indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. B.Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. C.Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A.Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed. 1.Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2.Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. 2.2 REFRIGERANT A.Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50. B.Refrigerant: R-134a, tetrafluoroethane as defined in ASHRAE Std 34. 2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A.Manufacturers: 1.Henry Technologies; ______: www.henrytech.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi. 2.4 VALVES A.Manufacturers: 1.Hansen Technologies Corporation; ______: www.hantech.com. 2.Henry Technologies; ______: www.henrytech.com. 3.Flomatic Valves; ______: www.flomatic.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1.UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C.Ball Valves: 1.Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F. D.Service Valves: SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 4 OF 7 1.Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi. 2.5 STRAINERS A.Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1.Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.6 CHECK VALVES A.Manufacturers: 1.Hansen Technologies Corporation; ______: www.hantech.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Straight Through Type: 1.Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. 2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS A.Manufacturers: 1.Hansen Technologies Corporation; ______: www.hantech.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psi range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psi. 2.8 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A.Manufacturers: 1.Hansen Technologies Corporation; ______: www.hantech.com. 2.Henry Technologies; ______: www.henrytech.com. 3.Sherwood Valve/Harsco Corporation; ______: www.sherwoodvalve.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB, selected to ASHRAE Std 15, with standard setting of 235 psi. 2.9 FILTER-DRIERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric; ______: www.emersonflowcontrols.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines. C.Construction: UL listed. 1.Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type. SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 5 OF 7 2.10 SOLENOID VALVES A.Manufacturers: 1.Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric; ______: www.emersonflowcontrols.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Valve: AHRI 760, pilot operated, copper, brass or steel body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case of coil failure), integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. C.Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light. 2.11 EXPANSION VALVES A.Manufacturers: 1.Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric; ______: www.emersonflowcontrols.com. 2.Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning; ______: www.parker.com. 3.Sporlan, a Division of Parker Hannifin; ______: www.parker.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well. C.Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. 2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.Manufacturers: 1.Circuit Hydraulics, Ltd; ______: www.circuit-hydraulics.co.uk. 2.Flexicraft Industries; ______: www.flexicraft.com. 3.Penflex; ______: www.penflex.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B.Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C.Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 6 OF 7 C.Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F.Inserts: 1.Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2.Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3.Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. G.Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1.Install in accordance with ASME B31.5. 2.Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3.Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4.Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5.Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6.Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7.Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. H.Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. I.Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. J.Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 3100. K.Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing. L.Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. M.Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section and Section 23 0716. N.Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. O.Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass. P.Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. Q.Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. C.Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage. 3.4 SCHEDULES A.Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 2300 - PAGE 7 OF 7 1.1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2.1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3.1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4.1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5.2-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3100 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 3100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Metal ductwork. B.Casing and plenums. C.Duct cleaning. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. B.Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories. C.Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D.Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013. B.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. C.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. E.NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2015. F.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005. G.SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; 2012, 2nd Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for low pressure class and higher systems. D.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed specified requirements. E.Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK). F.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts. G.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved by manufacturer. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum ___ years of documented experience. SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3100 - PAGE 2 OF 3 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B.Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A.Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. B.Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. C.Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. D.Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. E.Medium and High Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. F.Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. G.Transfer Air and Sound Boots: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, fibrous glass. 2.2 MATERIALS A.Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. B.Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1.Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2.VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed index of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4.For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. 2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A.Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B.Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C.Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D.Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. E.Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F.Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3100 - PAGE 3 OF 3 2.4 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Flat Oval Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct. 1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). 2. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct. 3. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Double Wall Insulated Flat Oval Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct. 1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). 2. Fittings: Manufacture with solid inner wall. 3. Inner wall: Perforated galvanized steel. 2.5 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage, 0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. E. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3300 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Air turning devices/extractors. B.Backdraft dampers - metal. C.Backdraft dampers - fabric. D.Combination fire and smoke dampers. E.Duct access doors. F.Duct test holes. G.Fire dampers. H.Flexible duct connections. I.Smoke dampers. J.Volume control dampers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. D.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. B.NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke Control Systems; 2015. C.NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2014. D.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005. E.UL 33 - Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F.UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G.UL 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers. E.Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3300 - PAGE 2 OF 4 B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A.Manufacturers: 1.Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. 2.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3.Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL A.Manufacturers: 1.Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2.Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. C.Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - FABRIC A.Fabric Backdraft Dampers: Factory-fabricated. 1.Blades: Neoprene coated fabric material. 2.Birdscreen: 1/2 inch nominal mesh of galvanized steel or aluminum. 3.Maximum Velocity: 1000 fpm (5 m/sec) face velocity. 2.4 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A.Manufacturers: 1.Elgen Manufacturing; _____: www.elgenmfg.com. 2.Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. C.Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3300 - PAGE 3 OF 4 2.6 DUCT TEST HOLES A.Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B.Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.7 FIRE DAMPERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2.Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. C.Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage, 0.0299 inch frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. D.Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. E.Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B.Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1.Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a.Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2.Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel. C.Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range. D.Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch. 2.9 SMOKE DAMPERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2.Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. C.Dampers: UL Class 1 airfoil blade type smoke damper, normally open automatically operated by pneumatic actuator. D.Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled. 2.10 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3300 - PAGE 4 OF 4 2.Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3.Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. C.Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 1.Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 2.Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum. D.Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 1.Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum. E.End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92. G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. I. For fans developing static pressures of 5.0 inches and over, cover flexible connections with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps. J. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3700 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 3700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Diffusers. B.Registers/grilles. C.Louvers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012. B.ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. C.Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B.Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A.Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in one way, two way, three way, and four way pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B.Frame: Provide surface mount, snap-in, and inverted T-bar type. C.Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish. D.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.2 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A.Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical face. B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C.Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3700 - PAGE 2 OF 3 2.3 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A.Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, single deflection. B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C.Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.4 DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A.Manufacturers: 1.Lindab. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille with one-way deflection. Grille mounts direclty to ductwork without a boot for the damper C.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D.Color: match ductwork. E.Damper: Integral, gang-operated, scoop type so that grille is mounted directly to ductwork without a boot with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.5 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A.Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face. B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C.Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish. D.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.6 LOUVERS A.Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake. B.Fabrication: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. C.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D.Mounting: Furnish with interior flat flange for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C.Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D.Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 3700 - PAGE 3 OF 3 E.Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 9123. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5216 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 23 5216 - CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Manufactured units. B.Boiler construction. C.Boiler trim. D.Fuel burning system. E.Factory installed controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties. B.Section 23 2123 - Hydronic Pumps. C.Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI); current edition at www.ahrinet.org. B.ANSI Z21.13 - American National Standard for Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers; 2012. C.ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; 2013, Including All Addenda. D.ASHRAE Std 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers; 2007, Including All Amendments. E.ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; 2015. F.NBBI Manufacturer and Repair Directory - The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBI); current edition at www.nationalboard.org. G.NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015. H.NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; 2014. I.SCAQMD 1146.1 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1146.1; current edition. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. B.Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and service connections. B.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start up instructions. C.Manufacturer's Factory Inspection Report: Submit boiler inspection prior to shipment. SECTION 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5216 - PAGE 2 OF 4 D.Manufacturer's Field Reports: Burner manifold gas pressure, percent carbon monoxide (CO), percent oxygen (O), percent excess air, flue gas temperature at outlet, ambient temperature, net stack temperature, percent stack loss, percent combustion efficiency, and heat output. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data. F.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect boilers from damage by leaving factory inspection openings and shipping packaging in place until final installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for heat exchanger. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Factory assembled, factory fire-tested, self-contained, readily transported unit ready for automatic operation except for connection of water, fuel, electrical, and vent services. B.Unit: Metal membrane wall, water or fire tube, condensing boiler on integral structural steel frame base with integral fuel burning system, firing controls, boiler trim, insulation, and removable jacket, suitable for indoor application. 2.2 BOILER CONSTRUCTION A.Conform to the minimum requirements of ASME BPVC-IV and ANSI Z21.13 for construction of boilers. B.Assembly to bear the ASME "H" stamp and comply with the efficiency requirements of the latest edition of ASHRAE Std 90.1. C.Required Directory Listings: 1.AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI); current edition at www.ahrinet.org. 2.NBBI Manufacturer and Repair Directory - The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBI); current edition at www.nationalboard.org. D.Heat Exchanger: Construct with materials that are impervious to corrosion where subject to contact with corrosive condensables. E.Provide adequate tappings, observation ports, removable panels, and access doors for entry, cleaning, and inspection. F.Insulate casing with insulation material, protected and covered by heavy-gage metal jacket. G.Factory apply boiler base and other components, that are subject to corrosion, with durable, powder coated finish. 2.3 BOILER TRIM A.ASME rated pressure relief valve. SECTION 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5216 - PAGE 3 OF 4 B.Flow switch. C.Electronic Low Water Cut-off: Complete with test light and manual reset button to automatically prevent firing operation whenever boiler water falls below safe level. D.Temperature and pressure gage. E.Pressure Switches: 1.High gas pressure. 2.Low gas pressure. 3.Air pressure. F.Manual reset high limit. G.Boiler Pump (where required by boiler design): 1.Primary pump, factory supplied and sized for field installation to ensure minimum, continuous circulation through boiler. 2.Where pump is not provided by boiler manufacturer, provide pump in accordance with boiler manufacturer's recommendations. 3.Pump time delay. 2.4 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM A.Provide forced draft automatic burner or pulse combustion, integral to boiler, designed to burn natural gas, and maintain fuel-air ratios automatically. 1.Blower Design: Statically and dynamically balanced to supply combustion air; direct connected to motor. 2.Forced Draft Design: Mixes combustion air and gas to achieve 90 percent combustion efficiency. 3.Pulse Combustion Design: Self-aspirating, not requiring blower for combustion. 4.Combustion Air Filter: Protects fuel burning system from debris. B.Gas Train: Plug valve, safety gas valve, gas-air ratio control valve, and pressure regulator controls air and gas mixture. C.Emission of Oxides of Nitrogen Requirements: Comply with SCAQMD 1146.1 for natural gas fired system, as applicable. D.Intakes: Combustion air intake capable of accepting free mechanical room air or direct outside air through a sealed intake pipe 2.5 FACTORY INSTALLED CONTROLS A.Option for internal or external (0-10) VDC control. B.Temperature Controls: 1.Automatic reset type to control fuel burning system on-off and firing rate to maintain temperature. 2.Manual reset type to control fuel burning system to prevent boiler water temperature from exceeding safe system water temperature. 3.Low-fire start time delay relay. C.Electronic PI setpoint/modulation control system. D.Microprocessor-based, fuel/air mixing controls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SECTION 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5216 - PAGE 4 OF 4 B.Install boiler and provide connection of natural gas service in accordance with requirements of NFPA 54 and applicable codes. C. Install boiler and provide connection of liquified petroleum gas service in accordance with requirements of NFPA 58 and applicable codes. D. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain. E. Pipe cooled condensate produced by the combustion process from the boiler condensate connection and/or flue stack with suitable piping material to neutralizer prior to discharging into nearest floor drain. F. Install primary boiler pump in accordance with Section 23 2123. G. Provide piping connection and accessories in accordance with Section 23 2114. 3.2 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component. B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 5700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5700 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 5700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Plate type heat exchangers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping. B.Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2015. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide data with dimensions, locations, and size of tappings and performance data. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, locations, and size of tappings and performance data. 1.Design Data: Indicate in sufficient detail to verify that heat exchangers meet or exceed specified requirements. 2.Test Reports: Indicate tube bundle pressure tests. C.Certificates: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation and support requirements. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start up and shut down instructions, assembly drawings, and spare parts lists. F.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Conform to ASME BPVC-VIII-1 for manufacture of tubular heat exchangers and heat exchanger shells. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect internals from entry of foreign material by temporary caps on flanged openings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLATE AND FRAME TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER A.Manufacturer: 1.Alfa Laval: www.alfalaval.com. Basis of Design 2.Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com. 3.ITT Standard: www.ittstandard.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Frames: Carbon steel with baked epoxy enamel paint, stainless steel side bolts and shroud. C.Plates: Stainless steel Type 304. D.Gaskets: Nitrile rubber. E.Nozzles: 125 psi rated lined flange type. SECTION 23 5700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 5700 - PAGE 2 OF 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install to permit removal of plates with minimum disturbance to installed equipment and piping. C.Support heat exchangers on concrete housekeeping pad. D.Pitch shell to completely drain condensate. E.Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain. F.Pipe drain valves to nearest floor drain. 3.2 WATER TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGER TRIM A.Water Inlets and Outlets: Thermometer wells, pressure gage tappings. B.Heated Water Outlet: Thermometer well for temperature regulator sensor, ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve, valved drain; refer to Section 23 2114. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 6513 FORCED-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 6513 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 6513 - FORCED-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Cooling tower. B.Controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. B.Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C.Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D.Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. E.Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping. F.Section 23 2123 - Hydronic Pumps. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015. B.ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings; 1990 (Reapproved 2008). C.ASME PTC 23 - Atmospheric Water Cooling Equipment; 2003, Reaffirmed 2014. D.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. E.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. F.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. G.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide rated capacities, dimensions, weights and point loadings, accessories, required clearances, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams, and location and size of field connections. Submit schematic indicating capacity controls. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate suggested structural steel supports including dimensions, sizes, and locations for mounting bolt holes. C.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that cooling tower performance, based on ASME PTC 23 meets or exceeds specified requirements and submit performance curve plotting leaving water temperature against wet bulb temperature. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's complete installation instructions. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. SECTION 23 6513 FORCED-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 6513 - PAGE 2 OF 3 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Factory assemble entire unit. For shipping, disassemble into as large as practical sub-assemblies so that minimum amount of field work is required for re-assembly. B.Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Provide units for outdoor use, factory assembled, sectional, counterflow, vertical discharge, blow through design, with fan assemblies built into pan and casing. 2.2 COMPONENTS A.Pan and Casing: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch for casing and 8 gage, 0.1644 inch for reinforcing angles and channels with access doors at both ends of tower to air plenum. B.Fans: Multi blade, cast aluminum, axial type, with belt drive, bearings with ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11 L-10 life at 30,000 hours, with extended grease fittings. C. Motor: Single speed (1800/900 rpm) mounted on adjustable steel base. Refer to Section 23 0513. D. Belt Drive: Designed for minimum 150 percent motor nameplate power. E. Fan Guard: Welded steel rod and wire guard, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. F. Safety: Safety railings, and ladder with safety cage from grade to fan deck. G. Distribution Section: Polyvinyl chloride piping header and branches with ABS plastic spray nozzles. H. Fill: 1. Self-supporting fluted polyvinyl chloride plastic with flame spread index of 5 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21. I. Drift Eliminators: Two or three pass hot dipped galvanized steel, drift loss limited to 0.7 percent of total water circulated. J. Float Valves: Brass or bronze balanced piston type make-up valve with plastic or copper float. K. Hardware: Galvanized steel nuts, bolts, washers, and nails; assembled with phenolic epoxy coated, corrosion resistant washer head fasteners. L. Galvanized Steel Sheet Components: Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M, with G210/Z600 coating, and finished with zinc chromatized aluminum paint. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to supervise rigging, hoisting, and installation, allowing for minimum of one eight hour day per tower. C. Install tower on structural steel beams as instructed by manufacturer. SECTION 23 6513 FORCED-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 6513 - PAGE 3 OF 3 D. Connect condenser water piping with flanged connections to tower. Pitch condenser water supply to tower and condenser water suction away from tower. Refer to Section 23 2113. E. Connect make-up water piping with flanged or union connections to tower. Pitch to tower. Refer to Section 22 1005. F. Connect overflow, bleed, and drain, to floor drain. 3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Start-up tower in presence of and instruct Owner's operating personnel. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 7223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 7223 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 23 7223 - PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Energy recovery units. B.Casing. C.Fans. D.Total energy wheel. E.Filters. F.Dampers. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2012. B.AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012. C.AHRI 1060 I-P - Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment; 2011. D.ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012, with 2015 amendments. E.ASHRAE Std 84 - Method of Testing Air to Air Heat/Energy Exchangers; 2013. F.ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings; 2014. G.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. H.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. I.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. J.UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all revisions. K.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Manufacturer's installation instruction, product data, and engineering calculations. B.Shop Drawings: Show design and assembly of energy recovery unit and installation and connection details. C.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. D.Closeout Submittals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: 1.Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing energy recovery units.. 2.Products in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. SECTION 23 7223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 7223 - PAGE 2 OF 5 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store in manufacturer's unopened packaging. B.Store products to be installed indoors in dry, heated area. 1.6 WARRANTY A.Warranty ventilator to be free from defects in material and workmanship and of all parts for period of 1-1/2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Warranty energy recovery wheel to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 3 years under circumstances of normal use. C.Warranty motor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 7 years under circumstances of normal use. D.Warranty dessicant core to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 5 years under circumstances of normal use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A.Energy Recovery Units: Dessicant wheel type; prefabricated packaged system designed by manufacturer. 1.Access: Hinged and/or screwed access panels on front. 2.Lifting holes at the unit base. 3.Framing: Welded extruded aluminum tubular frame capable of supporting components and casings. 4.Permanent name plate listing manufacturer mounted inside door near electrical panel. 2.2 CASING A.Wall, Floor, and Roof Panels: 1.Construction: 1 inch thick, double wall box construction, with formed edges of exterior wall overlapping formed edges of interior wall. 2.Exterior Wall: Galvanized steel sheet. a.0.040 inch thick aluminum. 3.Interior Wall: Galvanized sheet metal. a.22 gage, 0.0299 inch galvanized sheet metal. 4.Insulation: a.1/2 inch insulated fiberglass. b.Panel Cores: Mineral wool board. c.Include antimicrobial protection. d.Mold Resistance: "Pass" when tested according to ASTM C1338. e.Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21. f.Bacteria Resistance: No growth when tested according to UL 181. g.Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. h. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 5. Coating: Polyurethane enamel. B. Access Panels: Provide access to components through a large, tightly sealed and easily removable panel. C. Doors: SECTION 23 7223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 7223 - PAGE 3 OF 5 1. Construct doors of same construction and thickness as wall panels. 2. Height: 80 inches. 2.3 FANS A. Provide separate fans for exhaust and supply blowers. B. Fans: 1. Individually driven with a dedicated motor. 2. Backward inclined. 3. Single width, single inlet. 4. Class 1 aluminum wheels. 5. AMCA-rated. 6. Provide with non-overloading characteristics. C. Bearings: 1. Pillow block. 2. Bearings: Permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. 3. Rated for not less than 200,000 hours of operation with accessible greased fittings. D. Housings: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch aluminized steel with plenums integral to general housing and constructed to Class 1 fan standards. E. Motors: 1. Motors: Open drip proof. 2. Efficiency: High. 3. Speed: Single. 4. Control: Constant Speed. 5. Fan Motor: UL listed and labeled. F. Drives: 1. Fans: Belt driven. 2. Horsepower: 7.5 HP. 3. Service Factor: 1.2. 2.4 TOTAL ENERGY WHEEL A. Wheel: Transfer heat and humidity from one air stream to the other with minimum carryover of the exhaust air into the supply air stream. B. Energy Wheel Media: Cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water or light detergent, without degrading the latent recovery. C. Wheel Effectiveness: Rated in accordance with ASHRAE Std 84 and AHRI 1060 I-P. D. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. E. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. F. Energy Recovery Wheel Media Face: 1. Conform to NFPA 90A. 2. Coating: Acid resistant coating. G. Rotor: 1. Type: Non-segmented hygroscopic aluminum wheel. 2. Mounted on permanently lubricated bearings. 3. Rotor Matrix: Corrosion resistant aluminum alloy composed of alternating corrugated and flat, continuously wound layers of uniform widths. SECTION 23 7223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 7223 - PAGE 4 OF 5 H. Desiccant: 1. Type: 3A. 2. Performance: a. Desiccant: Non-dissolving, permanent, and resistant to damage from compressed air, low temperature steam, hot water or by vacuum cleaning. 3. Ventilation Factor: 1.00. I. Drive: 1. Drive: Tensioned drive with full perimeter link style belt. 2.5 FILTERS A. Efficiency: ____ MERV. B. Exhaust and Fresh Air Streams: MERV 7 filters constructed to meet ASHRAE Std 52.2. C. Mount 1/2 inches thick permanent aluminum washable type filter in the outside air hood and in the return plenum air. 2.6 DAMPERS A. Exhaust Back-Draft Damper: Factory installed, galvanized steel. 1. High performance, backdraft dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 3000 feet per minute. 2. Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters: AMCA 500-D and AMCA 500-L. 3. Damper Capacity: Demonstrate damper capacity to withstand HVAC system operating conditions. 4. Fabrication: a. Frame: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch, 3 inch roll formed galvanized steel channel with rear flange, prepunched mounting holes, and welded corner clips for maximum rigidity. b. Blades: 1) Style: Single-piece, overlap frame. 2) Material: Roll formed 28 gage, 0.0149 inch galvanized steel. 3) Width: Maximum 6 inches. B. Return Air Damper: 1. Factory installed, adjustable volume control, opposed blade damper for regulating airflow, based on external static pressure. 2. Return Air Damper: Structural hat channels, reinforced at corners. 3. Roll-formed Frames: Structurally superior to 13 gage, 0.0897 inch U-channel frames. 4. Blades: Single skin, 16 gage, 0.0598 inch. C. Motorized Dampers: Provide motorized dampers at outside air inlet, exhaust air outlet, and supply air outlet. 1. Type: Motorized two position parallel blade damper with blade seals. 2. Motorized Damper: Roll-formed structural hat channels, reinforced at the corners, 3. Blades: Single skin, 16 gage, 0.0598 inch. D. Motorized Louvers: 1. Type: Motorized two position parallel blade louver with drainable blades, blade seals, and jamb seals 2. Adjustable louver: a. Fabrication: Mullion style. 1) Frame: (a) Material: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. SECTION 23 7223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 7223 - PAGE 5 OF 5 2) Blades: (a) Style: Horizontal, adjustable, drainable. (b) Material: Formed aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structure is ready for installation of unit, that openings in deck for ductwork, if required, are correctly sized and located, and that mechanical and electrical utilities supplying unit are of correct capacities and are accessible. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Provide services of manufacturer's authorized representative to provide start up of unit. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 8119 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8119 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 8119 - WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Packaged terminal heat pump units. B.Controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2008. B.AHRI 270 - Sound Performance Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; 2008. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide drawings indicating dimensions, rough-in connections, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B.Manufacturer's Instructions: Include assembly instructions, support details, connection requirements, and start-up instructions. C.Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include trouble-shooting guide. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect finished cabinets from physical damage by leaving factory packing cases in place before installation and providing temporary covers after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Trane, a brand of Ingersoll Rand: www.trane.com. B.Owner and Engineer approved equivalent. 2.2 HEAT PUMP UNITS A.Description: Packaged, self-contained, water cooled terminal heat pump units, with room cabinet, electric refrigeration system, refrigerant heat pump heating,built-in temperature controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. B.Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50. C.Electrical Characteristics: D.Energy Efficiency: SECTION 23 8119 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8119 - PAGE 2 OF 2 2.3 CABINET A.Cabinet: Floor mounted of 18 gage, 0.0478 inch galvanized steel with epoxy coated finish, removable front panel with concealed latches, color as selected. 2.4 CHASSIS A.Refrigeration System: 1.Direct expansion cooling coil. 2.Hermetically sealed compressor with internal spring isolation, external isolation, permanent split capacitor motor and overload protection. 3.Accumulator. B.Coaxial tube in tube condenser with water regulating valve. 1.Capillary restrictor and constant pressure expansion valve. 2.Reversing valve. C.Air System: Centrifugal forward curved tangential evaporator fans with two speed permanent split capacitor motor, permanent washable filters, positive pressure ventilation damper with concealed manual operator. D.Condensate Drain: Drain pan to direct condensate to condenser coil for re-evaporation. 2.5 CONTROLS A.Control Module: Unit mounted adjustable thermostat with heat anticipator, heat-off-cool switch, high-low fan switch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Coordinate installation of units with architectural, mechanical, and electrical work. C.On water coils, provide shut-off valve on supply line and balancing valve on return line. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 8127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8127 - PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 8127 - SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Air cooled condensing units. B.Indoor air handler (fan & coil) units for duct connection. C.Controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2008. B.AHRI 270 - Sound Performance Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; 2008. C.AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; 2004. D.ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2013. E.ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; 2010. F.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. G.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. H.NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2015. I.UL 207 - Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. D.Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. E.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. F.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. G.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. H.Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section. SECTION 23 8127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8127 - PAGE 2 OF 3 1.6 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide three year manufacturers warranty for solid state ignition modules. C.Provide five year manufacturers warranty for heat exchangers. D.Provide five year manufacturers warranty for electronic air cleaners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. B.Trane Inc: www.trane.com. C.York International Corporation / Johnson Controls: www.york.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN A.Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1.Heating: hydronic coil. 2.Cooling: Outdoor electric condensing unit with evaporator coil in central ducted indoor unit. 3.Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. B.Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements. 2.3 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTED SYSTEMS A.Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating and cooling element(s), controls, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1.Air Flow Configuration: Upflow. 2.Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. B.Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley. 1.Motor: NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm single speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted. 2.Motor Electrical Characteristics: C.Air Filters: 1 inch thick urethane, washable type arranged for easy replacement. D.Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan sloped in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve. 1.Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207. 2.Manufacturers: System manufacturer. 2.4 OUTDOOR UNITS A.Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and condenser. 1.Comply with AHRI 210/240. 2.Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50. SECTION 23 8127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8127 - PAGE 3 OF 3 3.Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. 4.Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE Std 23.1 and UL 207. B.Compressor: Hermetic, two speed 1800 and 3600 rpm, AHRI 520 resiliently mounted integral with condenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier. Provide time delay control to prevent short cycling and rapid speed changes. C.Air Cooled Condenser: Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, AHRI 520 with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. 1.Condenser Fans: Direct-drive propeller type. 2.Condenser Fan Motor: Enclosed, 1-phase type, permanently lubricated. D.Coil: Air-cooled, aluminum fins bonded to copper tubes. E.Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1.Provide thermostatic expansion valves. F.Operating Controls: 1.Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. G.Mounting Pad: Precast concrete parking bumpers, minimum 4 inches square; minimum of two located under cabinet feet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B.Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location. C.Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B.Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C.Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15. END OF SECTION SECTION 23 8216 AIR COILS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8216 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 8216 - AIR COILS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Water heating coils. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation. B.Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties. C.Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Installation of duct coils. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. D.Certificates: Certify that coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures meet or exceed specified requirements. E.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. B.Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs. 1.7 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATING COILS A.Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper or brass arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into fins, silver brazed joints. B.Fins: Aluminum or copper continuous plate type with full fin collars. C.Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized steel with mounting holes on 3 inch centers. Provide tube supports for coils longer than 36 inches. D.Headers: Cast iron with tubes expanded into header. E.Testing: Air test under water to 200 psi for working pressure of 200 psi and 220 degrees F. SECTION 23 8216 AIR COILS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 23 8216 - PAGE 2 OF 2 F.Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent. G.Fin Spacing: 8 fins per inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. B.Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). 1.Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to casings. 2.Provide frames for maximum three coil sections. 3.Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing. 4.Refer to Section 23 3100. C.Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins. D.Install coils level. Install cleanable tube coils with 1:50 pitch. E.Make connections to coils with unions and flanges. F.Hydronic Coils: 1.Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement). 2.Provide shut-off valve on supply line and lockshield balancing valve with memory stop on return line. 3.Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. 4.Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve. 5.Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 1 OF 9 SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Single conductor building wire. B.Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable. C.Armored cable. D.Metal-clad cable. E.Wiring connectors. F.Electrical tape. G.Oxide inhibiting compound. H.Wire pulling lubricant. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. C.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013. B.ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011. C.ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014). D.ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014). E.ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. F.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. G.NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012. H.NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); 2007. I.NEMA WC 70 - Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2009. J.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013. K.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L.UL 4 - Armored Cable; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M.UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 2 OF 9 O.UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P.UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q.UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R.UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S.UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T.UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding. C.Manufactured Wiring System Shop Drawings: Provide plan views indicating proposed system layout with components identified; indicate branch circuit connections. D.Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors. E.Field Quality Control Test Reports. F.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. G.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. H.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 3 OF 9 below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D.Comply with NEMA WC 70. E.Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F.Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G.Conductor Material: 1.Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2.Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. 3.Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. H.Minimum Conductor Size: 1.Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. I.Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. J.Conductor Color Coding: 1.Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2.Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3.Color Code: a.208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1)Phase A: Black. 2)Phase B: Red. 3)Phase C: Blue. 4)Neutral/Grounded: White. b.Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. c.Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe. 2.2 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A.Manufacturers: 1.Copper Building Wire: a.Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. b.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. c.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C.Conductor Stranding: SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 4 OF 9 1.Feeders and Branch Circuits: a.Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b.Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E.Insulation: 1.Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. 2.3 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE A.Manufacturers: 1.Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. 2.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. 3.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 493, Type UF-B. C.Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated. D.Conductor Stranding: 1.Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2.Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. E.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. F.Cable Jacket: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant. 2.4 ARMORED CABLE A.Manufacturers: 1.AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. 3.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C.Conductor Stranding: 1.Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2.Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E.Insulation: Type THHN. F.Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire. 1.Provide additional full-size integral insulated equipment grounding conductor for redundant grounding, suitable for general purpose, non-essential electrical systems in non-hazardous patient care areas of health care facilities. G.Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. 2.5 METAL-CLAD CABLE A.Manufacturers: 1.AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 5 OF 9 3.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C.Conductor Stranding: 1.Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2.Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E.Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. F.Provide oversized neutral conductors where indicated or required. G.Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required. H.Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. 1.Provide additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor where indicated or required. I.Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. J.Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. 2.6 WIRING CONNECTORS A.Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B.Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526. C.Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. 2.Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. D.Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1.Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2.Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3.Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 4.Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 5.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required. E.Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 1.Manufacturers: a.3M: www.3m.com. b.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. c.NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com. SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 6 OF 9 d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F.Push-in Wire Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F. 1.Manufacturers: a.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. b.NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com. c.Wago Corporation: www.wago.us. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G.Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type. 1.Manufacturers: a.Burndy: www.burndy.com. b.Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. H.Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 1.Manufacturers: a.Burndy: www.burndy.com. b.Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.7 WIRING ACCESSORIES A.Electrical Tape: 1.Manufacturers: a.3M: www.3m.com. b.Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 3.Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. B.Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed. 1.Manufacturers: a.Burndy: www.burndy.com. b.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. c.Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C.Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1.Manufacturers: a.3M: www.3m.com. b.American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com. c.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 7 OF 9 d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B.Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C.Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D.Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Circuiting Requirements: 1.Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2.When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3.Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4.Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown. 5.Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6.Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C.Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. D.Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121. E. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120. F. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. G. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. H. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. I. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 8 OF 9 J. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Armored Cable (Type AC): a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. 2. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. K. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. L. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. M. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. Q. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. R. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0519 - PAGE 9 OF 9 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Grounding and bonding requirements. B.Conductors for grounding and bonding. C.Connectors for grounding and bonding. D.Ground bars. E.Ground rod electrodes. F.Ground enhancement material. G.Ground access wells. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012. B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. C.NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007. D.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013. E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F.UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: 1.Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. 3.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B.Sequencing: 1.Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to be bonded and methods of connection. SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 2 OF 6 D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E.Field quality control test reports. F.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D.Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum five years documented experience with high frequency grounding systems. E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A.Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. D.Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E.Grounding System Resistance: 1.Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. 2.Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method. 3.Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point-to-point" methods. F.Grounding Electrode System: 1.Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a.Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b.Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 3 OF 6 2.Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a.Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building. b.Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c.Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. 3.Metal In-Ground Support Structure: a.Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 4.Concrete-Encased Electrode: a.Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 5.Ground Ring: a.Provide a ground ring encircling the building or structure consisting of bare copper conductor not less than 2 AWG in direct contact with earth, installed at a depth of not less than 30 inches. b.Where location is not indicated, locate ground ring conductor at least 24 inches outside building perimeter foundation. c.Provide ground enhancement material around conductor where indicated. d.Provide connection from ground ring conductor to: 6.Ground Rod Electrode(s): a.Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise indicated or required. b.Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode. c.Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area. d.Provide ground enhancement material around electrode where indicated. e.Provide ground access well for each electrode. 7.Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance. 8.Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar. a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as possible to service disconnect enclosure. c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 9. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70. SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 4 OF 6 G. Service-Supplied System Grounding: 1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure. 2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect. H. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits: 1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors. 3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system. 4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground. I. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a.Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b.Metal gas piping. 8.Provide bonding for metal building frame. J.Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding: 1.Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA 70. 2.Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination. a.Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required. b.Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required. c.Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 5 OF 6 2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A.General Requirements: 1.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2.Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B.Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526: 1.Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a.Exceptions: 1)Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2)Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). C.Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1.Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2.Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. 3.Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. 4.Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors: a.Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com. b.Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com. c.Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com. d.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5.Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections: a.Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com. b.Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. c.thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC: www.thermoweld.com/#sle. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D.Ground Bars: 1.Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators. 2.Size: As indicated. 3.Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made. E.Ground Rod Electrodes: 1.Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2.Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel. 3.Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated. F.Ground Enhancement Material: 1.Description: Factory-mixed conductive material designed for permanent and maintenance-free improvement of grounding effectiveness by lowering resistivity. G.Ground Access Wells: 1.Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location. 2.Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified. SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0526 - PAGE 6 OF 6 3.Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches. 4.Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B.Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C.Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates. 1.Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below finished grade. D.Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1.Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2.Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3.Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5.Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. E.Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4. C.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. D.Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. E.Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0529 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal supports. B.Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. C.Section 26 0537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. D.Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. B.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C.ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013. D.MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004. E.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors. C.Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution. D.Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request. E.Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements. F.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with NFPA 70. B.Comply with applicable building code. SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0529 - PAGE 2 OF 4 C.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. D.Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener system manufacturer with current operator's license. E.Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 05 5000. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A.General Requirements: 1.Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3.Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5.Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a.Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. b.Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 5000. C. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0529 - PAGE 3 OF 4 E. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. 2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5B. 3. Channel Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel. c. __________. 4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch. 5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height. F. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. b. Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. c. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter. e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter. G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified. 1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports. 3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing. H. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 4. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 5. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood: Use wood screws. 8. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0529 - PAGE 4 OF 4 C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. I. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. J. Remove temporary supports. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 26 0534 - CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B.Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC). C.PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). D.Flexible metal conduit (FMC). E.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). F.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G.Conduit fittings. H.Accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1.Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. C.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D.Section 26 0537 - Boxes. E.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F.Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service conduits. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B.ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C.ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005. D.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. E.NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013. F.NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; 2004. G.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012. H.NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005. I.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J.UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K.UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L.UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M.UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 2 OF 7 N.UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O.UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs, where permitted. 2.Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing. D.Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A.Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B.Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A.Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 2100. B.Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D.Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A.Manufacturers: 1.Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2.Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com. 3.Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 3 OF 7 B.Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.4 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A. C.Fittings: 1.Manufacturers: a.Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b.O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3.Material: Use aluminum. 4.Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.5 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A.Manufacturers: 1.Thomas & Betts Corporation; ______: www.tnb.com. 2.Robroy Industries; ______: www.robroy.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil. D. PVC-Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 4 OF 7 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil. E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil. 2.6 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.7 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.8 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; ______: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company; ______: www.wheatland.com. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 5 OF 7 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C.Fittings: 1.Manufacturers: a.Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b.O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3.Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4.Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type. a.Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A.Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. B.Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force. C.Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C.Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. D.Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102. E.Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. F.Conduit Routing: 1.Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2.When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3.Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4.Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: a.Electrical rooms. b.Mechanical equipment rooms. c.Within joists in areas with no ceiling. 5.Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 6 OF 7 6.Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 7.Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. 8.Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9.Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. G.Conduit Support: 1.Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2.Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3.Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4.Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a.Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5.Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6.Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7.Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. H.Connections and Terminations: 1.Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2.Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3.Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4.Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5.Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6.Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor. 7.Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 8.Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. I.Penetrations: 1.Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2.Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4.Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5.Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0534 - PAGE 7 OF 7 6.Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 7.Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 8.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. J.Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1.Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2.Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. K.Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1.Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2.Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. L.Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. M.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C.Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.4 CLEANING A.Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0537 BOXES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0537 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 26 0537 - BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B.Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D.Section 26 0534 - Conduit: 1.Conduit bodies and other fittings. 2.Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. E.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F.Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: 1.Wall plates. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. B.NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010. C.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012. D.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013. E.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014. F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I.UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J.UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures. C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. SECTION 26 0537 BOXES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0537 - PAGE 2 OF 4 D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BOXES A.General Requirements: 1.Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used. 4. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 5. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 6. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 7. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 8. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 9. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 11. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 12. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. SECTION 26 0537 BOXES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0537 - PAGE 3 OF 4 13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. 14. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products; ______: www.hubbell-rtb.com. c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products; ______: www.hubbell-rtb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: 5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. H. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 6. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 7. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. SECTION 26 0537 BOXES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0537 - PAGE 4 OF 4 8. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 0534. I. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. J. Install boxes plumb and level. K. Flush-Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. M. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. O. Close unused box openings. P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0553 - PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Electrical identification requirements. B.Identification nameplates and labels. C.Wire and cable markers. D.Voltage markers. E.Warning signs and labels. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. B.Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011. B.ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011. C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D.UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. C.Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats. D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A.Identification for Equipment: 1.Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a.Switchboards: 1)Identify ampere rating. 2)Identify voltage and phase. SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0553 - PAGE 2 OF 4 3)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4)Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. b.Panelboards: 1)Identify ampere rating. 2)Identify voltage and phase. 3)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4)Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate. 5)Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 6)For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. c.Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1)Identify voltage and phase. 2)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 3)Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2.Service Equipment: a.Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b.For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction. c.Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed. B.Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1.Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2.Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A.Identification Nameplates: 1.Manufacturers: a.Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. b.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. c.Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Materials: a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b.Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0553 - PAGE 3 OF 4 3.Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. 4.Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 5.Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 6.Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B.Identification Labels: 1.Manufacturers: a.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com. b.Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com. c.Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. a.Use only for indoor locations. 3.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com. 2.HellermannTyton; ______: www.hellermanntyton.com. 3.Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. C.Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. D.Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. E.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. F.Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. G.Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com. 2.Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 3.Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Minimum Size: C.Legend: SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 0553 - PAGE 4 OF 4 D.Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.Manufacturers: 1.Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 2.Clarion Safety Systems, LLC; ______: www.clarionsafety.com. 3.Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. C.Warning Signs: 1.Materials: 2.Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. D.Warning Labels: 1.Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2.Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3.Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1.Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2.Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3.Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4.Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5.Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6.Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7.Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. C.Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D.Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. E.Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F.Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Power distribution panelboards. B.Lighting and appliance panelboards. C.Load centers. D.Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision E, 2013. B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. C.NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2009. D.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014. E.NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011. F.NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013. G.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013. H.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K.UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L.UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M.UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1.Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 2 OF 6 C.Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1.Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2.Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. 3.Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems. 4.Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request. D.Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. F.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards: 1.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B.Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1.Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2.Ambient Temperature: SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 3 OF 6 a.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C.Short Circuit Current Rating: D.Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F.Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1.Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G.Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H.Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 4 OF 6 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.4 LOAD CENTERS A. Description: Circuit breaker type load centers listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Bus Material: Aluminum or copper. C. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic plug-in type. D. Enclosures: 1. Provide flush-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide circuit directory label on inside of door or individual circuit labels adjacent to circuit breakers. 2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 5 OF 6 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. b. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated. 5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units. a. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings: 1) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial. 2) Long time delay. 3) Short time pickup and delay. 6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel. b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment. c. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699. d. 100 Percent Rated Circuit Breakers: Listed for application within the panelboard where installed at 100 percent of the continuous current rating. e. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed to limit the let-through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current when operating within its current limiting range. 8. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking where indicated. 9. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70. 10. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2416 - PAGE 6 OF 6 C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install panelboards plumb. F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. K. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation. L. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70. M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2717 - PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 26 2717 - EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Electrical connections to equipment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B.Section 26 0534 - Conduit. C.Section 26 0537 - Boxes. D.Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010). B.NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2012. C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1.Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2.Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3.Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B.Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C.Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534. D.Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E.Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537. SECTION 26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2717 - PAGE 2 OF 2 2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A.Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B.Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C.Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D.Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E.Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F.Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G.Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H.Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I.Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2726 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Wall switches. B.Receptacles. C.Wall plates. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0537 - Boxes. B.Section 26 0537 - Boxes. C.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D.Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B.FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. D.NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010). E.NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2012. F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H.UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I.UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J.UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection rating (VPR) for each protection mode, and diagnostics information. C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D.Operation and Maintenance Data: 1.GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators. E.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2726 - PAGE 2 OF 5 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A.Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. C.Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E.Source Limitations: Where possible, provide products for each type of wiring device produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. F.Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. 2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A.Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B.For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C.Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D.Provide tamper resistant receptacles for receptacles installed in dwelling units. E.Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. F.Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. G.Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. 2.3 WALL SWITCHES A.Manufacturers: 1.Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3.Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2726 - PAGE 3 OF 5 B.Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1.Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. C.Standard Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 RECEPTACLES A.Manufacturers: 1.Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3.Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. 3. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green dot hospital grade mark on device face. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 3.Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D.GFCI Receptacles: 1.GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. a.Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2.Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3.Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 4.Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type. 2.5 WALL PLATES A.Manufacturers: SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2726 - PAGE 4 OF 5 1.Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3.Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5.Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. B.Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1.Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2.Size: Standard. 3.Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C.Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws. D.Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. E.Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C.Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D.Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. C.Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D.Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E.Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 2726 - PAGE 5 OF 5 F.Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G.Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H.Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices. I.Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles. J.Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. K.Install wall switches with OFF position down. L.Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. M.Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. N.Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. C.Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. D.Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation. E.Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. F.Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. G.Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.5 ADJUSTING A.Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B.Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect. 3.6 CLEANING A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 5100 - PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Interior luminaires. B.Emergency lighting units. C.Exit signs. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 0537 - Boxes. B.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C.Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008). B.IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2008. C.IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2015. D.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. E.NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006. F.NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006. G.NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012. H.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015. J.UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K.UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L.UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 2.Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. C.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1.LED Luminaires: SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 5100 - PAGE 2 OF 5 a.Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. b.Include IES LM-79 test report upon request. 2.Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IESNA LM-63 standard format upon request. 3.Ballasts: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations. 4.Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output. 5.Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Unit: Include list of compatible lamp configurations and associated lumen output. 6.Air Handling Luminaires: Include air handling performance data. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E.Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A.Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. B.Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. C.Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts. D.Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. E.Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 5100 - PAGE 3 OF 5 B.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G.Recessed Luminaires: 1.Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2.Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. H.LED Luminaires: 1.Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2.Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3.LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A.Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B.Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C.Battery: 1.Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D.Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E.Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS A.Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1.Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2.Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 5100 - PAGE 4 OF 5 C.Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B.Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C.Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D.Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E.Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1.Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2.Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3.Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 4.See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. F.Recessed Luminaires: 1.Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. G.Suspended Luminaires: 1.Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. H.Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I.Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J.Emergency Lighting Units: 1.Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. K.Exit Signs: 1.Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. L.Install lamps in each luminaire. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Inspect each product for damage and defects. SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 26 5100 - PAGE 5 OF 5 C.Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D.Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. E.Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTING A.Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B.Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C.Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. 3.6 CLEANING A.Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES END OF SECTION SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 28 3100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. B.Transmitters for communication with supervising station. C.Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit. D.Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated. E.Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A.The fire alarm system will serve a several building comple. It will be on integratged system with fire alarm annuncitor panels (FAAP) at the entrance to each of the buildings in the complex. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed by this installer. B.Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devices installed in sprinkler system. C.Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by fire alarm system. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C.IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012). D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E.NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; 2016. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Proposal Documents: Submit the following with cost/time proposal: 1.NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 2.Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each control unit, initiating device, and notification appliance. 3.Certification by Contractor that the system design will comply with the contract documents. 4.Proposed maintenance contract. C.Drawings must be prepared as DXF-format CAD drawings. D.Evidence of designer qualifications. SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 2 OF 6 E.Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: 1.Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 2.NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 3.Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 4.System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. 5.Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit programming. 6.Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 7.List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated. 8.Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and circuit length limitations. 9.Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating adequate battery power. 10.Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 11.Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract documents. 12.Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents. F.Evidence of installer qualifications. G.Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer. H.Inspection and Test Reports: 1.Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2.Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3.Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out. I.Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1.Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2.Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same manuals. 3.Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. 4.List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. 5.Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. 6.Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7.Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8.Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling. J.Project Record Documents: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; have one set available during closeout demonstration: SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 3 OF 6 1.Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones. 2."As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. 3."As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart, and voice messages by event. K.Closeout Documents: 1.Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2.NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Copies of Design Criteria Documents: Maintain at the project site for the duration of the project, bound together, an original copy of NFPA 72, the relevant portions of applicable codes, and instructions and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction; deliver to Owner upon completion. B.Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. C.Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1.Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2.Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3.Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. D.Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified qualifications. E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 WARRANTY A.Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. B.Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A.Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1.Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2.Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 4 OF 6 3.Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a.ADA Standards. b.Applicable local codes. c.The contract documents (drawings and specifications). d.NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 4.Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones; allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. 5.Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital. 6.General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated, with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor, on the floor above, and the floor below. 7.Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by Owner. 8.Fire Command Center: Location indicated on drawings. 9.Master Control Unit (Panel): New, located at fire command center. B.Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1.Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. 2.On-Premises Supervising Station: Existing proprietary station operated by Owner, located at ______. 3.Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. C.Circuits: 1.Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A. 2.Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Within Single Building: Class B, Style 0.5. 3.Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D.Power Sources: 1.Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2.Secondary: Storage batteries. 3.Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. 4.Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 2.2 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A.Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1.Sprinkler water control valves. B.Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1.Sprinkler water flow. 2.Duct smoke detectors. C.Elevators: 1.Elevator lobby, hoistway, and machine room smoke detectors: Elevator recall for fire fighters' service. 2.Elevator Machine Room Heat Detector: Shut down elevator power prior to hoistway sprinkler activation. SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 5 OF 6 3.Sprinkler pressure or waterflow: Shut down elevator power prior to hoistway sprinkler activation. D.HVAC: 1.Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers indicated; shut down air handlers indicated. 2.3 COMPONENTS A.General: 1.Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. 2.Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B.Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C.Master Control Unit: As specified for Basis of Design above, or equivalent. D.Initiating Devices: 1.Manual Pull Stations: _______. 2.Smoke Detectors: _______. 3.Duct Smoke Detectors: _______. E.Notification Appliances: 1.Speakers: _______. 2.Strobes: _______. F.Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label. G.Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line-to-neutral, and 350 V(ac), line-to-line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to protect applicable equipment; for 24 V(dc) maximum dc clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line-to-ground, and 72 V(dc), line-to-line. H. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and cabinet; provide 5 keys of each type I. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. 1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. 2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. 3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. 4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM OXOBOXO LOFTS SECTION 28 3100 - PAGE 6 OF 6 D. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. H. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. 3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties. 4. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form." 3.3 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. END OF SECTION